Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 47-1 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights January 2010 Contents Description Page Toggle Switches -- E10 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toggle Switches -- E10E Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pushbutton Control Stations -- Assembled -- All Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight -- E22 and EM22 Series . . . . . . 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight -- E30 Series. . . . . . . 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight -- 10250T Series . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight -- E34 Series . . . . . . . . 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight -- HT800 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations -- 10250T/E34 Series . . Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 HT800 Series CA08102001E 47-2 47-7 47-13 47-28 47-99 47-115 47-166 47-195 47-215 47-243 For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47-2 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Toggle Switches January 2010 E10 Series Contents Description Page Product Description . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications Toggle Switches. . . . . . . . . . Hesitation Switches . . . . . . . Pushbutton Actuators . . . . . Product Selection Toggle Switches. . . . . . . . . . Hesitation Switches . . . . . . . Pushbutton Actuators . . . . . Circuit Arrangements. . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-2 47-2 47-2 47-2 47-2 Toggle Switch Pushbutton Actuator Hesitation Switch Lever Lengths: 0.563 inch (14.3 mm) or 0.688 inch (17.5 mm), bright nickel plated Terminals: Screw, 0.250 inch (6.4 mm) spade and solder lug Hesitation Switches 47-3 47-4 47-4 47-4 47-5 47-6 47-6 Product Description Cutler-Hammer(R) E10 switches from Eaton's electrical business are intended for general purpose light industrial use. Designed for retrofit and OEM applications, the one-hole mounted units feature a bright nickel plated lever and a 0.468"-32 diameter threaded bushing with a 0.068 x 0.035 inch (1.7 x 0.9 mm) deep keyway for anti-rotation. Mounting hardware, consisting of one hexagonal locknut, one knurled or hexagonal face nut, and #632 x 3/16" (where applicable) binding head terminal screw. All are furnished unassembled in individually sealed poly bags, packed 10 per carton. Standards and Certifications 47 Mounting: One hole with threaded 0.468"-32 bushing and 0.068 x 0.035 inch (1.7 x 0.9 mm) deep keyway that serves as anti-rotational feature UL Recognized -- File No. 2702 CSA -- File No. LR40068 Operation: Slow make/slow break mechanism with butt action for AC and low voltage DC applications; maintained contacts; ideal for reversing motor applications; patented interlock mechanism prevents operation of lever through center position until manual pressure is momentarily relieved. AC Ratings: 15A, 125V AC 10A, 250V AC Max. 3/4 hp at 250V AC DC Ratings: 15A, 28V DC Poles/Throws: 2, 3 and 4, double throw only Mounting: One pole with threaded 0.468"-32 bushing and 0.068 x 0.049 inch (1.7 x 1.2 mm) deep keyway Technical Data and Specifications Toggle Switches AC Ratings: 6 - 20A, 125V AC 3 - 10A, 250V AC Max. 3/4 hp @ 250V AC DC Ratings: 6 - 20A, 28V DC Electrical Life: 6,000 cycles make/ break at switch ampere rating Operation: Slow make/slow break mechanism with butt action for AC and low voltage DC applications Maintained and momentary contacts Poles/Throws: 1 through 4, single and double throw For more information visit: www.eaton.com Lever Length: 0.687 inch (17.4 mm), stainless steel Terminals: Screw Pushbutton Actuators AC Ratings: 6 - 15A, 125V AC (NO) 3 - 10A, 250V AC (NO) Max. 1/3 hp @ 125/250V AC Operation: Slow make/slow break mechanism Normally open contacts Poles/Throws: Single, single and double throw Mounting: One hole with 0.468"-32 threaded bushing and 0.068 x 0.035 inch (1.7 x 0.9 mm) deep keyway Two bushing heights: 11/16 inch (17.5 mm) and 11/32 inch (8.7 mm) Button Extensions: 17/32 inch (13.5 mm) and 1/4 inch (6.4 mm), bright nickel plated Terminals: Screw CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Toggle Switches 47-3 January 2010 E10 Series, Toggle Switches Product Selection Toggle Switches Table 47-1. Toggle Switches -- AC Rated -- Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces Nominal AC Ratings Amperes hp 125V 250V 250V 6 15 20 3 10 10 6 15 20 Poles and Throw Function -- Circuit with Lever In Screw Terminal Price U.S. $ 0.250 Inch (6.4 mm) Spade Terminal Solder Lug Catalog Number Catalog Number UP Position CENTER DOWN Catalog Position Position -- Number Keyway Price U.S. $ -- 3/4 3/4 1 P.S.T. ON None OFF E10T106AS E10T115AS E10E120AS E10T106AP E10T115AP E10E120AP E10T106AL E10T115AL E10E120AL 3 10 10 -- 3/4 3/4 1 P.D.T. ON OFF ON E10T106DS E10T115DS E10E120DS E10T106DP E10T115DP -- -- E10T115DL -- 6 15 20 3 10 10 -- 3/4 3/4 1 P.D.T. ON None ON E10T106ES E10T115ES E10E120ES -- E10T115EP -- -- E10T115EL -- -- 10 1/2 1 P.S.T. 1 P.D.T. 1 P.D.T. 1 P.D.T. OFF ON ON (ON) None OFF None OFF (ON) (ON) (ON) (ON) E10T115BS E10T115FS E10T115HS E10T115GS E10T115BP E10T115FP E10T115HP E10T115GP -- -- -- -- 6 15 20 3 10 10 -- 3/4 3/4 2 P.S.T. ON None OFF E10T206AS E10T215AS E10E220AS E10T206AP E10T215AP E10E220AP -- E10T215AL E10E220AL 6 15 20 3 10 10 -- 3/4 3/4 2. P.D.T. ON OFF ON E10T206DS E10T215DS E10E220DS E10T206DP E10T215DP E10E220DP -- E10T215DL -- 6 15 20 3 10 10 -- 3/4 3/4 2 P.D.T. ON None ON E10T206ES E10T215ES E10E220ES -- E10T215EP -- -- E10T215EL -- 15 10 1/2 2 P.S.T. 2 P.D.T. 2 P.D.T. OFF ON (ON) None None OFF (ON) (ON) (ON) E10T215BS E10T215HS E10T215GS -- E10T215HP E10T215GP -- -- -- 10 3/4 3 P.S.T. 3 P.D.T. 3 P.D.T. ON ON ON None OFF None OFF ON ON E10E315AS E10E315DS E10E315ES E10E315AP E10E315DP E10E315EP -- E10E315DL E10E315EL 10 3/4 4 P.S.T. 4 P.D.T. 4 P.D.T. ON ON ON None OFF None OFF ON ON E10E415AS E10E415DS E10E415ES -- -- -- E10E415AL E10E415DL E10E415EL Price U.S. $ 1-Pole 1-Pole 2-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 3-Pole 15 4-Pole 15 4-Pole See Figure 47-1 Circuit Arrangements on Page 47-4. ( ) = Momentary contacts, spring return action. Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Toggle Switches 47-4 January 2010 E10 Series, Hesitation Switches and Actuators Hesitation Switches Table 47-2. Hesitation Switches -- Special Purpose -- Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Nominal Ratings Amperes Operation hp 28V 125V 250V 250V DC AC AC AC 15 0.69 (17.5) 0.47-32 Thread 15 10 3/4 Maintained Function -- Circuit with Lever In... UP Position CENTER Position DOWN Position -- Keyway ON OFF ON 0.47 (11.9) 0.07 (1.8) x 0.05 (1.3) Keyway Poles and Throw Screw Terminal Catalog Number 2 P.D.T. 3 P.D.T. 4 P.D.T. E10E215SS E10E315SS E10E415SS Price U.S. $ 1.25 (31.8) 1.47 (37.3) 1.34 (34) See Figure 47-1 Circuit Arrangements below. Note: Interlock mechanism prevents operation of lever through the center position until pressure is momentarily relieved. Designed for control and protection of reversing motors. Pushbutton Actuators Table 47-3. Pushbutton Actuators -- Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces Nominal Ratings Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Amperes AC 125V hp 125 - NO NC NO NC 250V 0.04 (1) x 0.07 (1.8) Keyway 250V Poles Contacts Bushing Length and Inches (mm) Throw Dim. "A" Button Extension Inches (mm) Dim. "B" Typical Screw Terminal Maximum Operating Catalog Price Force Number U.S. $ Spade Terminal 0.250 Inch (6.4 mm) Catalog Number Price U.S. $ 6 -- 3 -- -- 1 P.S.T. NO 0.69 (17.5) 0.34 (8.6) 0.53 (13.5) 0.25 (6.4) 0.9 lbs. E10P106RS E10P106JS E10P106RP -- 15 -- 10 -- 1/3 1 P.S.T. NO 0.69 (17.5) 0.34 (8.6) 0.53 (13.5) 0.25 (6.4) 0.9 lbs. E10P115RS E10P115JS E10P115RP -- 15 10 10 5 1/4 1 P.D.T. NO, NC 0.69 (17.5) 0.53 (13.5) 1.0 lbs. E10P115LS -- 0.47-32 Thread B A 0.63 (16) 47 1.13 (28.7) 1.13 (28.7) See Figure 47-1 Circuit Arrangements below. Rated 1/4 hp at 125V, 1/2 hp at 250V. Circuit Arrangements SPST 3PDT SPDT DPST 4PST DPDT 4PDT 3PST Figure 47-1. Circuit Arrangements Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Toggle Switches 47-5 January 2010 E10 Series, Accessories Accessories Table 47-4. Accessories -- Minimum Order Quantity 100 Pieces Description Material/Notes Catalog Number Hexagon Locknut Zinc-Chromate Treated Steel E10TA101 Price U.S. $ Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 0.08 (2) 0.63 (16) Knurled Face Nut Zinc-Chromate Treated Steel E10TA102 0.07 (1.8) 0.63 (16) Internal Tooth Lockwasher Cadmium Plated Steel E10TA103 Terminal Screws #6-32 x 3/16" Binding Head E10TA201 Spade Terminal Adapter -- 0.250 inch (6.4 mm) Assembles to Screw Terminals E10TA202 ON-OFF Indicating Plate -- Vertical Orientation Burnished Nickel Finish Steel E10TA301 ON 1.0 (25.4) 0.06 (1.5) OFF 0.03 (.8) 0.63 (16) OFF-ON Indicating Plate -- Horizontal Orientation Burnished Nickel Finish Steel E10TA302 O F F Flip-Up Guard for Toggle Switches E10TA104 Fixed Shroud for Toggle Switches E10TA105 47 O N Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Toggle Switches 47-6 January 2010 E10 Series -- Catalog Number Structure Dimensions Table 47-5. Toggle Switch -- Approximate Dimensions No. of Poles Operation 1 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Bushing Lever Screw Terminals Length Length C D E A B Spade Terminals Solder Lug C D E C D E Momentary & Maintained 0.47 (11.9) 0.56 (14.2) 1.00 (25.4) 1.17 (29.7) 0.63 (16.0) 1.13 (28.7) 1.13 (28.7) 0.63 (16.0) 1.00 (25.4) 1.13 (28.7) 0.63 (16.0) Maintained 0.47 (11.9) 0.56 (14.2) 1.06 (26.9) 1.31 (33.3) 0.75 (19.1) 1.19 (30.2) 1.31 (33.3) 0.75 (19.1) 1.06 (26.9) 1.31 (33.3) 0.75 (19.1) Momentary 0.47 (11.9) 0.56 (14.2) 1.25 (31.8) 3 Maintained 0.47 (11.9) 0.69 (17.5) 1.27 (32.3) 1.34 (34.0) 1.44 (36.6) 1.37 (34.8) 1.34 (34.0) 1.44 (36.6) 1.23 (31.2) 1.34 (34.0) 1.44 (36.6) 4 Maintained 0.47 (11.9) 0.69 (17.5) 1.20 (30.5) 1.30 (33.0) 1.40 (35.6) 1.30 (33.0) 1.34 (34.0) 1.40 (35.6) 1.23 (31.2) 1.34 (34.0) 1.44 (36.6) B A D C E 1.31 (33.3) 1.25 (31.8) Note: Spade terminal adapters are used on 6 ampere, 20 ampere and momentary screw terminal switches, adding 0.42 (10.7) to dimension C. Catalog Number Structure Table 47-6. E10 Catalog Numbering System -- Not to be used for ordering purposes E10 T 1 06 A S = E10T106AS Series Complete Cat. No. Termination Lever Length S = Screw L = Solder Lug P = Spade T = 0.563 inch (14.3 mm) Lever E = 0.688 inch (17.5 mm) Lever Poles 1= 2= 3= 4= 47 0.563 inch (14.3 mm) 1-Pole 6 Amperes ON - None - OFF Screw Terminal Function 1 Pole 2 Pole 3 Pole 4 Pole Ratings -- 125V A= B= D= E= F= G= H= ON - None - OFF OFF - None - (ON) ON - OFF - ON ON - None - ON ON - OFF - (ON) (ON) - OFF - (ON) ON - None - (ON) 06 = 6 Amperes 15 = 15 Amperes 20 = 20 Amperes ( ) = Momentary contacts, spring return action. For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches 47-7 January 2010 Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series Features Contents Description Page Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series . . . . . . . . . . . 47-7 Econoswitch E10E Series . 47-9 Switch Guard . . . . . . . . . . . 47-12 Standards and Certifications UL -- File number E15346; Guide card number is WOYR2 CSA -- LR40068, class number 6241 Technical Data and Specifications Options Note: Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative for more information. One-Pole and Two-Pole Molded-In Screw Terminal Completely sealed against dust, moisture and other contaminants One-hole mounted bushing for easy installation Multi-circuits offered 2- and 3-position with maintained and momentary action Molded-in terminal inserts and terminals numbers 1- and 2-pole circuitry Special circuits Panel seal, part number 32-341 Spade terminal adapters available Non-UL Recognized devices Alternate toggle levers Locking toggle levers Rocker buttons Special mounting hardware Mounting hardware furnished assembled Terminal screws furnished assembled Watertight seal per MIL-STD-108E and designed to meet IP68 Thermoset molding materials meet flame retardant requirements Temperature Range: -50 to 150F (-46 to 66C) Life: 20,000 operations at rated load; 40,000 operations mechanical life; 6,000 operations at hp ratings per UL and CSA requirements Bushings: 15/32" - 32 thread Product Selection Table 47-7. Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series Toggle Switch Product Selection Nominal AC Ratings Amperes 125V Circuit with Lever Position 1-Phase hp 3-Phase hp Up Center Down (Keyway) Catalog Number Price U.S. $ 47 250V 125V 250V 125/250V 9 1/4 1/2 -- ON ON ON OFF NONE NONE ON OFF ON E10E118DM E10E118AM E10E118EM 9 1/2 1 -- ON ON ON OFF NONE NONE ON OFF ON E10E218DM E10E218AM E10E218EM One-Pole 18 Two-Pole 18 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47-8 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches January 2010 Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series Dimensions 0.432 (10.97) 0.432 (10.97) 0.076 (1.93) 0.076 (1.93) Keyway Keyway 33 16.5 33 0.240 (6.10) Dia. 16.5 0.690 (17.53) 0.240 (6.10) Dia. 0.690 (17.53) 0.470 (11.94) 15/32-32 UN-2A Thread to Within 0.060 (1.52) of Shoulder 1.18 (29.9) Max. 0.250 (6.35) 0.470 (11.94) 15/32-32 UN-2A Thread to Within 0.060 (1.52) of Shoulder 1.100 0.130 (27.94) 1.370 (3.30) Max. (34.80) Max. 0.250 (6.35) #6-32 Terminal Screw with Internal Tooth Lockwasher (SEMS) #6-32 Terminal Screw with Internal Tooth Lockwasher (SEMS) 0.130 (3.30) 47 1 4 0.635 (16.13) Max. 2 3 0.380 0.910 (9.65) (23.11) Max. 0.380 (9.65) Typ. 1.270 (32.26) Max. 1 2 3 0.380 (9.65) Typ. 1.340 (34.04) Max. Figure 47-2. One-Pole Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series Toggle Switches -- Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Figure 47-4. Two-Pole Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series -- Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 15/32 Dia. Bushing 0.480 (12.19) Dia. Hole 0.375 (9.52) 0.130 (3.30) Locking Ring 0.445 (11.30) 5 6 0.480 (12.19) Dia. Hole 0.062 (1.57) Keyway Figure 47-3. Toggle Switch Panel Cutout Dimensions in Inches (mm) For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches 47-9 January 2010 Econoswitch E10E Series Standards and Certifications UL -- File number E15346; Guide card number is WOYR2 CSA -- LR40068, class number 6241 Table 47-9. UL and CSA Nominal Ratings One-Pole and Two-Pole Econoswitch E10E Series Toggle Switches Catalog Number Amperes 125V AC 250V AC 1-Phase hp 125V AC 250V AC 125/250V AC E10E118xx E10E218xx 18 18 9 9 1/4 1/2 1/2 1 -- -- Features Technical Data and Specifications Environmentally sealed 1- and 2-pole circuitry One-hole mounting for easy installation Multi-circuits 2- and 3-position with maintained and momentary action Three types of termination offered as standard Watertight seal per MIL-STD-108E and designed to meet IP68 Three standard types of terminals: Screws -- 6-32 UNC-22A Solder lug -- 0.125 (3.17) dia. hole Spade -- 0.250 (6.35) x 0.032 (0.81) thick 3-Phase hp Life: 50,000 operations at rated load; 100,000 operations mechanical life Temperature Range: -50 to 150F (-46 to 66C) Product Selection Table 47-8. Econoswitch E10E Series Toggle Switch Product Selection Type of Operation Current Ratings -- Amperes 28V DC Circuit with Lever Position 115V AC, 60 or 400 Hz Lamp Resistive Inductive Lamp Resistive Inductive Load Load Load Load Load Load Up Screw Terminals Down Catalog Center (Keyway) Number Solder Lug Terminals Price Catalog U.S. $ Number Spade Terminals Price Catalog U.S. $ Number Price U.S. $ 47 One-Pole Maintained Maintained Maintained Momentary Momentary 5 5 5 4 4 20 20 20 15 15 15 15 15 10 10 3 3 3 2 2 15 15 15 15 15 10 10 10 7 7 OFF ON ON NONE ON NONE ON OFF OFF NONE ON OFF ON ON ON E10E118DS E10E118AS E10E118ES E10E118GS E10E118BS E10E118DL E10E118AL E10E118EL E10E118GL E10E118BL E10E118DP E10E118AP E10E118EP E10E118GP E10E118BP 7 7 7 5 5 20 20 20 18 18 15 15 15 10 10 4 4 4 2 2 15 15 15 11 11 15 15 15 8 8 OFF ON ON NONE ON NONE ON OFF OFF NONE ON OFF ON ON ON E10E218DS E10E218AS E10E218ES E10E218GS E10E218BS E10E218DL E10E218AL E10E218EL E10E218GL E10E218BL E10E218DP E10E218AP E10E218EP E10E218GP E10E218BP Two-Pole Maintained Maintained Maintained Momentary Momentary Momentary contact. Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47-10 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches January 2010 Econoswitch E10E Series Dimensions 15/32 Dia. Bushing 0.480 (12.19) Dia. Hole 0.375 (9.52) 0.480 (12.19) Dia. Hole 0.445 (11.30) 0.130 (3.30) 0.062 (1.57) Keyway Locking Ring Figure 47-5. Toggle Switch Panel Cutout Dimensions in Inches (mm) 0.432 (10.97) Keyway 0.076 (1.93) 0.240 (6.10) Dia. 33 16.5 0.690 (17.53) 0.470 (11.94) 15/32-32 UN-2A Thread to Within 0.060 (1.52) of Shoulder 47 #6-32 UNC-2A Terminal Screw, SEMS 1.51 (38.4) Max. 1.28 (32.5) Max. 1.30 (33.0) Max. 0.250 x 0.032 (6.35) x (0.81) Thick 0.125 (3.17) Dia. Hole 1.25 (31.75) 0.594 (15.09) 1 2 3 Screw Terminal 1 2 3 Solder Lug 1 2 3 Spade Terminal Figure 47-6. One-Pole Econoswitch E10E Series Toggle Switches -- Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches 47-11 January 2010 Econoswitch E10E Series 0.432 (10.97) Keyway 0.076 (1.93) 0.240 (6.10) Dia. 33 16.5 0.690 (17.53) 0.468 (11.89) 15/32-32 UN-2A Thread to Within 0.060 (1.52) of Shoulder 1.34 (34.1) Max. #6-32 UNC-2A Terminal Screw, SEMS 1.55 (39.4) Max. 1.32 (33.5) Max. 0.250 x 0.032 (6.35) x (0.81) Thick 0.125 (3.17) Dia. Hole 1.32 (33.5) 0.89 (22.6) Screw Terminal Solder Lug Spade Terminal Figure 47-7. Two-Pole Econoswitch E10E Series Toggle Switches -- Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 47 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches 47-12 January 2010 Switch Guard Dimensions 33 0.240 (6.10) Dia. Switch Guard 0.688 (17.48) Features For use with 2-position switch Cover closure transfers switch toggle lever to OFF position One-hole mounted mounting style Cover is molded out of red thermoset molding material Guard cover is spring-loaded to either close or lock in open position Prevents accidental operation at switches Switch Guard 0.475 (12.07) Dia. Rivet 0.031 0.062 (0.79) (1.57) 0.750 (19.05) Max. 0.688 (17.48) Max. 1.062 (26.97) 1.635 (41.53) Max. 1.830 (46.48) Max. Table 47-10. Switch Guard Product Selection Price U.S. $ 0.468 (11.89) 15/32-32 UN-2A Thread to Within 0.060 (1.52) of Shoulder Product Selection Catalog Number 0.840 (21.34) 1.547 (39.29) Rad. Open E10TA104 Closed Red-Molded Plastic 1.093 (27.76) Max. 47 Switch (Ref.) Steel 0.032 (0.81) Figure 47-8. Switch Guard-- Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations -- Assembled 47-13 January 2010 Product Family Overview Features Contents Description Assembled Control Stations Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E22 Control Stations . . . . . General Purpose Control Stations. . . . . . . . Special Purpose Control Stations. . . . . . . . Heavy-Duty Control Stations. . . . . . . . 10250T Control Stations . . 10250T Class I Division 2 Control Stations. . . . . . . . E34 Class I Division 2 Corrosion Resistant Control Stations. . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Assembled Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renewal Parts. . . . . . . . . . . Page Heavy-Duty Control Stations E22 Control Stations 47-13 47-14 47-16 47-18 47-19 47-20 47-21 Cat. No. E22AS204 47-22 47-23 47-24 47-26 22.5 mm operators Industrial grade Impact resistant polycarbonate enclosures Compact wall mount Optional yellow covers Popular with OEMs UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13 Cat. No. 10250H1913 Industrial grade Extra heavy-duty Polyester enclosure Booted buttons Outdoor installation UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13 10250T Control Stations General Purpose Control Stations Cat. No. 10250T3525 Cat. No. 10250H5200 Construction grade General purpose wall mount Popular with contractors UL (NEMA) Type 1 Special Purpose Control Stations 30.5 mm operators Industrial grade Zinc die cast enclosure Popular with industrial end users UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13 Class I Division 2 Control Stations Cat. No. 10250H364 Cat. No. E34EX7023P Standard grade Polyester enclosure UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 13 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Available with 10250T or E34 30.5 mm operators Zinc die cast, polyester or stainless steel enclosures Factory-sealed contact blocks Popular with industrial end users UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13 NEC Class I Division 2 Groups B, C and D 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations -- Assembled 47-14 January 2010 E22 Series, 22.5 mm Pushbutton Stations Assembled E-Stop Stations Product Description Safety-yellow cover and light gray base enclosures Polycarbonate enclosures Single 21 mm diameter hole for cable entry Emergency Stop Station Table 47-11. Product Selection -- Emergency Stop Stations -- UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Contact Symbol Button Type/Color Legend Marking Catalog Number 40 mm Latching Trigger Action/Red EMERGENCY STOP Round Yellow Nameplate E22AT111 40 mm Latching Trigger Action/Red EMERGENCY STOP Safety Yellow Guard E22AT112 40 mm Latching Trigger Action/Red EMO Safety Yellow Cover E22AT113 40 mm Latching Trigger Action/Red EMO Safety Yellow Guard E22AT114 40 mm Latching Trigger Action/Red EMERGENCY STOP Round Yellow Nameplate E22AT111C 40 mm Latching Trigger Action/Red EMERGENCY STOP Safety Yellow Guard E22AT112C 1NO 40 mm Latching Trigger Action/Red EMO Safety Yellow Cover E22AT113C 1NC 40 mm Latching Trigger Action/Red EMO Safety Yellow Guard E22AT114C 40 mm Latching Trigger Action/Red EMERGENCY STOP Round Yellow Nameplate E22AT111E 40 mm Latching Trigger Action/Red EMERGENCY STOP Safety Yellow Guard E22AT112E 1NO 40 mm Latching Trigger Action/Red EMO Safety Yellow Cover E22AT113E 1NO 40 mm Latching Trigger Action/Red EMO Safety Yellow Guard E22AT114E 40 mm Mushroom, Momentary Action/Red EMERGENCY STOP Yellow Cover E22ASB105 40 mm Latch in Twist-to-Release/Red EMERGENCY STOP Yellow Cover E22ASB106 1NC Cat. No. E22AT111 Cat. No. E22AT111C 47 Cat. No. E22AT111E 1NC Price U.S. $ Cat. No. E22ASB106 Compliant with EN418 Safety of Machinery Standard. Non-compliant with EN418 requirements. Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-23 Custom Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-24 - 47-25 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations -- Assembled 47-15 January 2010 E22 Series, 22.5 mm Pushbutton Stations Assembled E22 Pushbutton Stations Product Description E22 Series black bezel pushbuttons Light gray polycarbonate enclosures Single 21 mm diameter hole for cable entry E-Stop Control Station Note: For Custom Stations, see Pages 47-24 - 47-25. Table 47-12. Product Selection -- Assembled Control Stations -- UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator One Pushbutton Cat. No. E22ASB109 Contact Symbol Button Type/Color Legend Marking Catalog Number Chrome Bezels Catalog Number Black Bezels Extended/Red STOP E22AS109 E22ASB109 Flush/Green START E22AS108 E22ASB108 Flush/Green Extended/Red START STOP E22AS204 E22ASB204 1NO Flush/Green Mushroom/Red START STOP E22AS205 E22ASB205 1NC Flush/Green Latch-In Twist-to-Release/Red START STOP E22AS206 E22ASB206 Flush/Black Extended/Red Flush/Black FOR STOP REV E22AS304 E22ASB304 Flush/Black Extended/Red Flush/Black CLOSE STOP OPEN E22AS305 E22ASB305 1NC Flush/Black Extended/Red Flush/Black UP STOP DOWN E22AS306 E22ASB306 1NO 1NC 1NO Two Pushbuttons Cat. No. E22AS204 Three Pushbuttons 1NO Cat. No. E22AS304 Price U.S. $ 47 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-23 Custom Stations . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-24 - 47-25 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations -- Assembled 47-16 January 2010 10250H Series, General Purpose Stations General Purpose Type N Control Stations Table 47-13. Product Selection -- Type N Control Stations - UL (NEMA) Type 1 Enclosure Type Contact Symbol Button Type/Color Legends Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Flush/Green START 10250H5100 Flush/Red STOP 10250H5101 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) One Element Single Button with Padlock Attachment Accessory 4.00 (101.6) 3.25 (82.6) Selector Switch Extended/Red STOP 10250H5104 Palm Operated/Black None 10250H89 3-Position Selector Switch/Black Knob RUN/OFF/AUTO 10250H289 Flush/Red START/STOP 10250H5200 Flush/Green Extended/Red START/STOP 10250H5207 Flush/Black (All) RAISE/LOWER FOR/REV OPEN/CLOSE UP/DOWN HIGH/LOW FAST/SLOW 10250H5201 10250H5202 10250H5203 10250H5204 10250H5205 10250H5208 FOR/REV/STOP UP/DOWN/STOP RAISE/LOWER/STOP OPEN/CLOSE/STOP FAST/SLOW/STOP 10250H5300 10250H5301 10250H5302 10250H5303 10250H5304 2.25 (57.2) 1.50 (38.1) 2.25 (57.2) Two Element Two Button Station 4.00 (101.6) 3.25 (82.6) 2.25 (57.2) 1.50 (38.1) 2.25 (57.2) Three Element 47 Three Button Stations Three Button with Indicating Light Flush/Black (All) 110/220V Neon Indicating Light START/STOP Clear -- Flush/Green; Flush/Red Red -- Flush/Green; Flush/Red Amber -- Flush/Green; Flush/Red 10250H5310 10250ED853 10250ED853-2 6.00 (152.4) 5.00 (127.0) 1.50 (38.1) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) Round button. 2.38 (60.5) for neon indicating light. Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-26 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-17 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations -- Assembled 47-17 January 2010 10250H Series, General Purpose Stations General Purpose Type N Open Type Assemblies Table 47-14. Product Selection -- Type N -- Open Type Construction (No Cover) Enclosure Type Contact Symbol Button Type/Color Legends Catalog Number 3-Position Selector Switch/Black Knob RUN/OFF/AUTO 10250H2538 Two Button Station Flush/Green START/STOP 10250H2747 Mechanically Interlocked Pushbuttons Flush/Black (All) Mech. Interlocked None 10250H2544 Price U.S. $ One Element Selector Switch Two Element No legend on buttons. Specify any standard legend. Table 47-15. Accessories for Type N Control Stations Description Catalog Number Padlock Attachment -- For field assembly on square button type (except extended button types) 10250H5110 Price U.S. $ 47 Table 47-16. Maximum Ampere Ratings for Type N Control Stations Voltage Make and Emergency Interrupt Capacity AC DC 110V 220V 30 15 Normal Load Break 3 Continuous Current 10 1.5 10 440V 550V 120V 240V 600V 7.5 6 1.0 0.5 0.1 0.75 0.6 1.0 0.5 0.1 10 10 10 10 10 Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-26 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47-18 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations -- Assembled January 2010 10250H Series, Special Purpose Stations Special Purpose Control Stations Table 47-17. Product Selection -- Special Purpose Control Stations -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 13 Type One Element Pushbutton Station Feature One Flush Element Pushbutton With Lock Hasp Symbol Legends Catalog Number START 10250H2738 STOP 10250H658 STOP 10250H665 Price U.S. $ Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 5.50 (139.7) Two Element Pushbutton Station Two Flush Element Pushbutton 6.25 (158.8) START/STOP 10250H364 With Lock Hasp START/STOP 10250H671 Buttons Interlocked FAST/SLOW FOR/REV UP/DOWN OPN/CLOSE 2.25 (57.2) 3.13 (79.5) 0.75 (19.1) Pipe Tap 3.38 (85.9) Ship Wt. 2.5 Lb (1.1 kg) 10250ED664 10250H2740 10250H2741 10250H2742 Cat. No. 10250H364 47 Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-26 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations -- Assembled 47-19 January 2010 10250H Series, Heavy-Duty Stations Heavy-Duty Type H Control Stations Product Description 10250T Series operators Dark brown polyester enclosure Protective rubber gaskets provide NEMA 3S rating on pushbuttons Top and bottom 3/4-inch NPT conduit entrances Includes alternate legend plates and spare mounting screws Table 47-18. Product Selection -- Type H Control Stations -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Type of Element Feature Circuit Assembled Legend Plate Unassembled Alternate Legend Plates Catalog Number Pushbuttons Without Padlock Hasp 1NO-1NC JOG START STOP RUN 10250H1881 With Padlock Hasp 1NC STOP -- 10250H4239 Knob Selector Switch 2-Position 3-Position 1NO-1NC 1NO-1NC OFF/ON MAN/OFF/AUTO -- -- 10250H4526 10250H4527 Pushbuttons Standard Price U.S. $ One Element Two Element 1NO-2NC START/STOP -- 10250H1884 2NO-2NC RAISE/LOWER FORWARD REVERSE OPEN CLOSE 10250H1885 Standard and Standard w/ Padlock Hasp 1NO-2NC START/STOP -- 10250H4240 Standard 2NO-3NC FOR/REV/STOP 2 Standard and Standard w/ Padlock Hasp 2NO-3NC FOR/REV/STOP START JOG RAISE LOWER Light-Red Lens and 2 Plain 1NO-2NC MOTOR RUNNING START/STOP Three Element Pushbuttons Indicating Light and Pushbuttons 120V -- OPEN CLOSE FAST SLOW 10250H1890 10250H4241 10250H1913 Cat. No. 10250H1913 Table 47-19. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) NEMA Type No. of Elements Dimensions Wide High Deep 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 13 1 and 2 3 4.50 (114.3) 4.50 (114.3) 8.25 (209.6) 10.75 (273.1) 4.50 (114.3) 4.25 (108.0) Table 47-20. Maximum Ampere Ratings Description Make and Emerg. Inter. Capacity Normal Load Break Continuous Amperes Voltamperes -- Make and Emerg. Inter. Cap. Normal Load Break Volts AC 50/60 Hz Volts DC 120 240 480 600 125 250 60 6 10 30 3 10 15 1.5 10 12 1.2 10 1.1 1.1 10 0.55 0.55 10 7200 720 7200 720 7200 720 7200 720 138 138 138 138 Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-27 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations -- Assembled 47-20 January 2010 10250T Series, 30.5 mm Pushbutton Stations 10250T Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations Product Description 10250T Series operators ASA 61 gray die-cast zinc enclosures Surface or flush mounting Single 3/4-inch NPT conduit entrance on one and two element stations Single 1-inch NPT conduit entrance on three element stations Table 47-21. Product Selection -- Complete Assembled Stations -- UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13 Number of Elements Type of Elements Features Contact Block(s) Legend Surface Mounting Catalog Price Number U.S. $ Flush Mounting Catalog Price Number U.S. $ Break Glass Station Break Glass Station Gray Enclosure Red Enclosure NC (Logic Level) EMERG. OFF EMERG. OFF 10250TGS 10250TGR -- -- One Element Pushbutton Standard NO-NC NC NO-NC NO-NC NC START STOP None START STOP 10250T3516 10250T3518 10250T3540 10250T3517 10250T3519 10250T3573 10250T3575 10250T3597 10250T3574 10250T3576 NC NO-NC STOP OFF/ON 10250T3520 10250T3523 10250T3577 10250T3580 2NO MAN/OFF/AUTO 10250T3524 10250T3581 2NC START/STOP 10250T3545 10250T3602 1NO-2NC 2NO-2NC 2NO-2NC 1NO-2NC START/STOP RAISE/LOWER None START/STOP 10250T3525 10250T3672 10250T3541 10250T3542 10250T3582 10250T3673 10250T3598 10250T3599 1NO-2NC START/STOP 10250T3526 10250T3583 NO-NC Plus NC START/STOP 10250T3528 10250T3585 2NO-3NC 2NO-3NC 2NO-3NC 2NO-3NC 2NO-3NC FOR, REV, STOP UP, DOWN, STOP OPEN, CLOSE, STOP None, None, STOP None, None, STOP 10250T3532 10250T3615 10250T3614 10250T3543 10250T3544 10250T3589 -- -- 10250T3600 10250T3601 1NO-2NC MOTOR RUN, START/STOP 10250T3536 10250T3537 10250T3538 10250T3539 10250T3593 10250T3594 10250T3595 10250T3596 Mushroom Head With Lock Hasp Selector Switch Two Element Push-Pull 3-Position Pushbuttons 2-Position Black Knob 3-Position Black Knob Momentary Red Button Standard Pushbuttons With Lock Hasp Standard and Mushroom Head Standard with Maintained Contact Standard 47 Three Element Indicating Light (Transformer Type) and Pushbuttons 2 Standard and with Lock Hasp Red Lens -- 120V Red Lens -- 240V Red Lens -- 480V Red Lens -- 600V Breaking glass closes contact. Stop buttons are red -- all others are black. Uses deep cover instead of shallow cover. Switch component is 10250TA67. NEMA 4 - 13, if properly mounted on a flat surface. Consists of front plate, legend, operator and contact blocks. Lock is 10250TA2. Break Glass Operator Shown Assembled to Contact Block (Contact Block Supplied Separately) Table 47-22. Break Glass Kit Description Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Operator with Hammer and 5 Glass Discs Glass Discs Only (5) 10250TBG 10250TGL Custom Stations. . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-24 - 47-25 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-157 - 47-158 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations -- Assembled 47-21 January 2010 10250T Series, Class I Division 2 Stations Class I Division 2 10250T Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations Product Description 10250T Series operators Factory sealed contact blocks Die-cast, polyester or stainless steel enclosures Approved for NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D or Class I Zone 2 Group IIB plus Hydrogen type hazardous locations Die Cast Enclosure with One Pushbutton -- Aluminum Jumbo Mushroom Red-Engraved EMER. STOP Catalog Number 10250T7007 Polyester Enclosure with Two Pushbuttons -- Flush Green and Extended Red Catalog Number 10250T7023P Stainless Steel Enclosure with One Red Pilot and Two Pushbuttons -- Flush Green and Extended Red Catalog Number 10250T7033S Table 47-23. Product Selection -- Complete 10250T Assembled Stations -- UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13; NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D Operator Contact Symbol Button Type/Color Legend Marking Die Cast Enclosure Catalog Number One Pushbutton 1NO 1NC Two Pushbuttons 1NO 1NC Each Button One Pilot Light Two Pushbuttons 1NO 1NC Each Button 3-Position Selector Switch 2NO 2NC One Pushbutton Maintained Price U.S. $ Polyester Molded Enclosure Stainless Steel Enclosure Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Flush/Green START 10250T7003 10250T7003P 10250T7003S Extended/Red STOP 10250T7005 10250T7005P 10250T7005S Alum. Jumbo Mushroom/Red EMER. STOP (Engraved Button) 10250T7007 10250T7007P 10250T7007S Flush/Black No Legend 10250T7009 10250T7009P 10250T7009S Flush/Green Extended/Red START STOP 10250T7023 10250T7023P 10250T7023S Flush/Black Flush/Black No Legend No Legend 10250T7025 10250T7025P 10250T7025S 120V AC Red Flush/Green Extended/Red No Legend START STOP 10250T7033 10250T7033P 10250T7033S 120V AC Red Flush/Black Flush/Black No Legend 10250T7035 10250T7035P 10250T7035S Maintained Knob/Black HAND/OFF/AUTO 10250T7011 10250T7011P 10250T7011S Maintained Knob/Black No Legend 10250T7013 10250T7013P 10250T7013S Push-Pull w/Jumbo Mushroom/Red EMER. STOP (Engraved Button) 10250T7019 10250T7019P 10250T7019S Price U.S. $ Pull Push O X 1NO X O 1NC Custom Stations . . . . . . . . . Enclosure Dimensions . . . . Operator Dimensions . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-24 - 47-25 Page 47-23 Pages 47-160 - 47-162 1CD1C 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations -- Assembled 47-22 January 2010 E34 Series, Class I Division 2 Corrosion Resistant Stations Class I Division 2 E34 Corrosion Resistant 30.5 mm Control Stations Product Description E34 Series operators Factory sealed contact blocks Die-cast, polyester or stainless steel enclosures Approved for NEC Class I Division 2 Groups B, C and D or Class I Zone 2 Group IIB plus Hydrogen type hazardous locations Polyester Enclosure with Two Pushbuttons -- Flush Green and Extended Red, Catalog Number E34EX7023P Table 47-24. Product Selection -- Complete E34 Assembled Stations Operator Contact Symbol Button Type/Color -- UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13; NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D Legend Marking Die Cast Enclosure Catalog Number One Pushbutton 1NO 1NC Two Pushbuttons 1NO 1NC Each Button 3-Position Selector Switch 2NO 2NC 47 One Pushbutton Maintained Price U.S. $ Polyester Molded Enclosure Stainless Steel Enclosure Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Price U.S. $ Flush/Green START E34EX7003 E34EX7003P E34EX7003S Extended/Red STOP E34EX7005 E34EX7005P E34EX7005S Alum. Jumbo Mushroom/Red EMER. STOP (Engraved Button) E34EX7007 E34EX7007P E34EX7007S Flush/Black No Legend E34EX7009 E34EX7009P E34EX7009S Flush/Green Extended/Red START STOP E34EX7023 E34EX7023P E34EX7023S Flush/Black Flush/Black No Legend No Legend E34EX7025 E34EX7025P E34EX7025S Maintained Knob/Black HAND/OFF/AUTO E34EX7011 E34EX7011P E34EX7011S Maintained Knob/Black No Legend E34EX7013 E34EX7013P E34EX7013S Push-Pull w/Jumbo Mushroom/Red EMER. STOP (Engraved Button) E34EX7019 E34EX7019P E34EX7019S Pull Push O X 1NO X O 1NC Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Page 47-21. Custom Pushbutton Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-24 - 47-25 Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . Page 47-23 Operator Dimensions . . . . . . . Page 47-191 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations -- Assembled 47-23 January 2010 E22/10250T/E34 Series, Dimensions Dimensions Table 47-25. E22 One-Element, Two-Element and Three-Element Approximate Dimensions E22 1.81 (46) 2.36 (60) 2.75 (70) 4-0.17 (4.2) Mtg. Holes 2.99 (76) 2.24 (57) Top View A Side View Catalog Number Dimension A in Inches (mm) Catalog Number Dimension A in Inches (mm) E22ASB105 E22ASB106 E22ASB108 E22ASB109 E22ASB204 E22ASB205 E22ASB206 0.87 (22.0) 0.87 (22.0) 0.57 (14.4) 0.65 (16.4) 0.65 (16.4) 0.87 (22.0) 0.87 (22.0) E22ASB304 E22ASB305 E22ASB306 E22AT111 E22AT112 E22AT113 0.65 (16.4) 0.65 (16.4) 0.65 (16.4) 1.32 (33.5) 1.32 (33.5) 1.32 (33.5) 10250T and E34 Table 47-26. Approximate Enclosure Dimensions Number of Elements 0.87 (22) 0.83 (21) Cable Entry Bottom View Surface Mounting Conduit Entrance Dimensions in Inches (mm) Wide A High B Deep C Mounting D E 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 4.0 (101.6) 5.88 (149.4) 7.75 (196.9) 9.63 (244.6) 3.0 (76.3) 3.0 (76.3) 3.0 (76.3) 3.0 (76.3) 2.69 (68.3) 2.69 (68.3) 2.69 (68.3) 2.69 (68.3) 3.25 (82.6) 5.13 (130.3) 7.0 (177.8) 8.88 (225.6) 3.81 (96.8) 3.81 (96.8) 3.81 (96.8) 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 6.63 (168.4) 8.88 (225.6) 11.13 (282.7) 3.38 (85.9) 3.38 (85.9) 3.38 (85.9) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 2.94 (74.7) 2.94 (74.7) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0) 4.88 (124.0) 7.13 (181.1) 9.38 (238.3) 3.50 (88.9) 6.75 (171.5) 9.00 (228.6) 11.25 (285.8) 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 4.25 (108.0) 7.50 (190.5) 9.00 (228.6) 12.00 (304.8) Cast Figure 47-9. One-Element -- Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 2 4.25 (108) 3.15 (80) 2.36 (60) 3 4-0.17 (4.2) Mtg. Holes 4 1 2 3 1.97 (50) Top View A Side View 0.87 (22) 1 1 4 Stainless Steel 1 0.83 (21) Cable Entry 2 Bottom View Figure 47-10. Two-Element -- Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 4 2.36 (60) 3.15 (80) 3.00 (76.2) 3.50 (88.9) 3.50 (88.9) 3.50 (88.9) No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required. 4-0.17 (4.2) Mtg. Holes 4 Mtg. Holes -- 10-32 Screw Size for 1 - 4 Element Die Cast/ Stainless Steel Enclosure 7/32 Screw Size for Polyester 6.3 (160) E B 1.97 (50) Top View A Side View 0.87 (22) D A 0.83 (21) Cable Entry C Surface Bottom View Figure 47-12. Approximate Enclosure Dimensions Figure 47-11. Three-Element -- Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) CA08102001E 3/4 Polyester 4.72 (120) 5.82 (148) 3/4 For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 47-24 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations -- Assembled January 2010 E22/10250T/E34 Series, Custom Assembled Stations -- Specification Form Custom Assembled Stations Specification Form Ordering Instructions Step 1) Copy this ordering guide from catalog. Step 2) Specify 10250T, E22 or E34 pushbutton lines in the corresponding box on the following page. Step 6) For non-standard legends, specify legend desired, letter size and location on the layout sketches on the following page. For limitations see Page 47-84 and Page 47-152. For pricing, use the blank legend Catalog Number and "STAMP" Suffix (Ex.: 10250TS36STAMP) and reference the most recent PAD or VISTA-line. 10250T Pages 47-115 - 47-165 Example: 10250TS36 E22 Pages 47-28 - 47-98 Special Legend for Position #_______ E34 Pages 47-166 - 47-189 10250T Pages 47-215 - 47-242 & E34 Class I Div. 2 For each contact block, specify if it is to be mounted in the left or right position. For example: If an E22B1 contact block is selected, specify if it is to be mounted on the left or right side of the mounting adapter as viewed from back of operator. LETTER SIZE 3/32" Step 3) Check back of panel dimensions -- specify single or double depth enclosure in the corresponding box on the following page. 47 E22 1/8" 3/16" Step 4) Specify enclosure Catalog Number and price in the corresponding box on the following page. Enclosures can be found on Pages 47-87 - 47-88 and Pages 47-153 - 47-154. For pricing, reference the most recent PAD or VISTA-line. Step 7) Fax Sheet 2 of this form to Eaton's TRC, Technical Resource Center, at 828-651-0549 to the attention of -- Custom Stations Order or email to TRC@eaton.com. Step 5) Specify Catalog Numbers for desired operator, legend plate, light unit, accessory and contact block(s) for each location in the enclosure in the corresponding box on the following page. (See position locations below.) Step 8) Place your order over the VISTA System. Within a few days you will receive a confirmation fax with the custom station part number and price. For Selector and Roto-Push Operators 10250T or E34 Position 1 Position 1 Position 2 For single contact blocks or 1NO-1NC contact blocks, the mounting position of contacts must be specified. For example: If a 1NO-1NC contact block is required, specify if NO is to be mounted in Top A position or Bottom B position. Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Position 4 Figure 47-13. Position Locations For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations -- Assembled 47-25 January 2010 E22/10250T/E34 Series, Custom Assembled Stations -- Specification Form To -- Eaton's TRC, Custom Station Order (828) 651-0549 FAX, or email to TRC@eaton.com FACTORY USE ONLY Part Number Product Code From -- Customer Name __________________________________________ Suffix Customer Contact _________________________________________ Date Phone Number ____________________________________________ Engineer Fax Number ______________________________________________ Email Address ____________________________________________ Step 3) Step 2) 10250T STD Class I Division 2 E22 STD E34 STD Class I Division 2 Step 4) Single Depth Enclosure Enclosure Catalog Number Price Double Depth Enclosure Step 5) Position Operator Price U.S. $ Light Unit Price U.S. $ Contact Block Price U.S. $ Lens or Caps Price U.S. $ A/L B/R Contact Block Price U.S. $ A/L B/R Total Price 1 2 3 4 Position Legend Plate Price U.S. $ Accessory Price U.S. $ Total Price 1 2 3 47 4 Total: 10% Adder for Assembled Stations Step 6) Non-standard Legends Special Legend for Position #_______ LETTER SIZE Special Legend for Position #_______ LETTER SIZE Special Legend for Position #_______ LETTER SIZE 3/32 inch (2.4 mm) 3/32 inch (2.4 mm) 3/32 inch (2.4 mm) 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations -- Assembled 47-26 January 2010 10250H Series, Renewal Parts Renewal Parts Figure 47-14. Type N Renewal Parts Table 47-27. Assembled Stations -- Type N Renewal Parts Item Description No. No. Part Req. Number Type N -- Square Buttons 1 47 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Cover 2 Element Single Element -- Top Button Single Element -- Bottom Button Cover Screw Pushbutton Support Bracket Pushbutton Support Bracket Screw Pushbutton Spring Disc (when used -- 2 element assembly) Pushbutton -- Top Position START/Green RAISE/Black FORWARD/Black OPEN/Black UP/Black Blank/Green Pushbutton -- Bottom Position STOP/Red Extended STOP/Red REVERSE/Black CLOSE/Black DOWN/Black LOWER/Black Blank/Red Pushbutton Element 1NO-1NC 2NO 1NO 1NC Cover Pushbutton Support Bracket Pushbutton -- Top Position FORWARD/Black UP/Black RAISE/Black OPEN/Black FAST/Black Price U.S. $ Item No. Description No. Part Req. Number Price U.S. $ Type N -- Square Buttons (Continued) 1 2 1 1 2 2 13 49-3524 49-3524-2 49-3524-3 11-2168 79-6649 11-2090 69-2571 16-1960 1 53-1169-3 53-1169-66 53-1169-7 53-1169-9 53-1169-11 53-1169 1 53-1202-2 53-1202-5 53-1169-8 53-1169-10 53-1169-12 53-1169-6 53-1202 1 1 1 1 86-2588 86-2588-2 86-2588-3 86-2588-4 49-3464 79-6650 53-1170-7 53-1170-4 53-1170-5 53-1170-9 53-1170-6 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Pushbutton Middle Position REVERSE/Black DOWN/Black LOWER/Black CLOSE/Black SLOW/Black Pushbutton -- Bottom Position STOP/Red Pushbutton Element 2NO-3NC Cover Lens Clear Red Amber Shield Shield Screws Lamp (Neon NE48) Lamp Receptacle Lamp Receptacle Screw Pilot Light Terminal Base Lens Clear Red Amber Pushbutton Support Bracket Pushbutton Element 1NO-1NC 1 53-1169-15 53-1169-18 53-1169-16 53-1169-17 53-1169-13 1 53-1201-2 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 86-2593 49-3524-4 28-494 28-887-2 28-887-3 73-1337 11-2012 28-494 28-902 911-330F1 86-2586 1 1 28-887 28-887-2 28-887-3 79-6650-2 86-2594 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10250H2538 86-353 86-353-8 86-353-8 86-353 86-353-3 86-356 86-356 86-356 Type N -- Round Buttons Similar to 27 Pushbutton Assembly and Element for: 10250H289 10250H364 10250H685 10250H665 10250H671 10250H2738 10250H2740 10250H2741 10250H2742 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations -- Assembled 47-27 January 2010 10250H Series, Renewal Parts 7 7 7 8 6 9 10 12 10 5 5 4 4 5 4 3 3 1 Pushbutton 11 2 1 2 Indicating Light 2 1 Selector Switch Figure 47-15. Type H Renewal Parts Table 47-28. Assembled Stations -- Type H Renewal Parts Item No. Description No. Req. Part Number Type H -- Assembled Stations Price U.S. $ Item No. Description No. Req. Part Number Price U.S. $ Type H -- Assembled Stations (Continued) 1 Screw 2 11-4654 7 Screw 4 11-953 2 Screw 2 11-5719 8 Diaphragm 1 32-253-2 3 Base 1 17-16560 9 Mounting Plate 1 17-19522 4 Contact Blocks See Page 47-116 Gasket 1 32-254 5 10250T Operator See Pages 47-119 - 47-147 11 Base 1 17-16561 6 Mounting Plate 1 12 Mounting Plate 1 17-19523 17-19524 10 47 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47-28 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series Contents Description Product Description . . . . . . . . . Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact Block Operation . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . Illuminated Pushbuttons . . . Push-Push Units . . . . . . . . . Push-Push . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintained Emergency Stop Pushbutton Units . . . Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . Twist-to-Release. . . . . . . . . . Indicating Light Units . . . . . Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . Page 47-29 47-29 47-29 47-29 47-29 47-29 47-31 47-33 47-34 47-36 47-37 47-39 47-41 47-42 47-43 47-44 47-47 Description Product Selection (Continued) Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . Push-Pulls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switch Units . . . . Selector Switches . . . . . . . Illuminated Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switch Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotary Cam Selector Switch Units. . . . . . . . . . . Specialty Operators . . . . . . Double Headed Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . Joystick Units . . . . . . . . . . . Joysticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Light Units and Lamps . . . Replacement LEDs and Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-Way Mounting Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Parts . . . . . . . Options Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Printed Legends . . . . . . . . . Selector Switch Legends . . Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering Complete Devices Ordering Complete Devices Using Single Composite Cat. Number . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering Rotary Cam Selector Switches . . . . . . Catalog Number Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-48 47-49 47-51 47-55 47-58 47-60 47-62 47-64 47-65 47-67 47-68 47-69 47-70 47-72 Page 47-74 47-77 47-78 47-79 47-85 47-86 47-87 47-89 47-94 47-95 47-95 47-97 47-98 47 Legend Plates, Three Styles Available Panel Optional Anti-Rotation Ring #E22LRP 3-Way Mounting Adapter #E22BA1 Terminal Clamps Are Shipped Open, Ready to Wire Bezel, Choice of Chrome or Matte Black Octagonal Mounting Nut Which Eliminates Spacer Washers and Set Screws #15-1438. Tightening Torque: 15 lb-in (1.7 Nm) T3-1/4 Bayonet Base Lamps Used Throughout Light Units and Contact Blocks Secured to Mounting Adapter Without Tools Variety of Operators Snap-On Fingerproof Shroud Provides IP2X Fingerproof Protection Against Electrical Contact Sealing Washer E22 Series For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-29 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Technical Data and Specifications Product Description Eaton's Cutler-Hammer(R) 22.5 mm Industrial Heavy-Duty Pushbutton line offers a wide array of functional, smartly styled illuminated and nonilluminated pushbuttons, selector switches, push-pulls, alternate action and twist-to-release operators. The complete line also includes transformer, full voltage, resistor, LED or neon light units. E22 operators are available with either a traditional chrome or matte black frontof-panel appearance. The space-saving design and modular construction of the E22 line makes on-the-job assembly fast and simplifies the stocking of both components and complete devices. Eaton's Cutler-Hammer EM22 Metal Series is a rugged line of metal construction 22.5 mm pushbutton devices. They are an extension of the industrially proven E22 Heavy-Duty Double Insulated 22.5 mm pushbutton family. EM22 operators are heavy-duty zinc die-cast construction plated with a corrosion resistant chromate finish. Operators are complete with a very durable chrome plated metal bezel. Indicating light units in the EM22 Series feature smartly styled round lenses that enhance their appearance and brightness. All EM22 operators are compatible with existing E22 contact blocks, light units, accessories and enclosures. EM22 metal operators and indicating lights are grounded when mounted to metal panels through the toothed mounting nut. They are not grounded when mounted to plastic panels. Features E22 Operators: Heavy-duty oiltight construction Chrome metal or black nylon bezels Snap-lock contact block mounting EM22 Operators: Heavy-duty zinc die-cast construction Metal mounting nut doubles as grounding and anti-rotation device Chrome-plated metal bezel (matte black not available) Benefits Plastic Devices Modular construction makes assembly fast and simplifies stocking of components and complete devices Reliability nibs provide positive contact through light, medium or heavy loads Chrome finish and plastic construction are corrosion resistant Metal Devices EM22 is backwards compatible with E22 operators Metal mounting nut cuts through painted surfaces to provide proper grounding Hands-free front of panel mounting reduces installation cost Mounting flexibility reduces installation cost, time and inventory Stands up well in corrosive environments E22 and EM22 compatibility lowers parts count and inventory requirements UL Listed E-Stop Device -- File No. E217948 Machinery Safety Directive -- EN418 Semiconductor Manufacturing Equipment -- SEMI S2-0200 DEMKO Third Party Certification -- Certificate Nos. 129648-01 and 129648-02 Technical Data and Specifications Ingress Protection UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 IEC IP65 Note: Ratings apply when mounted in enclosures with the same ratings. Mechanical Endurance Ratings Frequency of operation Pushbuttons - 6,000 operations/hr Push-Pulls - 3,000 operations/hr. Push-Push - 1,800 cycles/hr. Selector Switches - 3,000 operations/hr. Trigger-Action E-Stop - 360 cycles/hr. Twist-to-Release - 1,200 cycles/hr Mechanical Life Contact Blocks - 3 million operations Pushbuttons - 5 million operations Push-Pulls - 300,000 operations Push-Push - 300,000 operations Selector Switches - 500,000 operations Trigger-Action E-Stop - 100,000 operations Twist-to-Release - 300,000 operations Joysticks -- 500,000 operations Vibration (IEC 68-2 [BS 2011]) Vibration - 5g/0.7 mm peak to peak, 10 sweeps, 10 - 500 Hz Shock - 30g, 18 ms Bump - 25g, 6 ms for 1,000 cycle Contact Block Operation Linear make and break. All normally closed (NC) contacts are Direct Opening Action, i.e., NC contacts are physically forced open by direct linkage with the pushbutton operator in the unlikely event of contact weld. The contact block contacts are provided with "Reliability Nibs." The precisely shaped point of the nib, coined on the silver contact alloy, penetrates dust, film oxide layers and other contaminants. This improves contact reliability even under dry circuit and fine dust conditions. Logic level contact blocks are available for low power switching -- minimum 1 mA @ 5V DC. Standards and Certifications CE EN 60947-5-1 UL 508 -- File No. E131568 CSA -- File No. LR68551 Common E22 & EM22 Features: Reliability nibs on contact blocks Plain or notched hole mounting Direct opening action normally closed contacts Fingerproof terminals CA08102001E Additional Certifications for Trigger Action E-Stop Devices For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-30 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Technical Data and Specifications Environmental Conditions Electrical Ratings Table 47-31. Contact Block Operating temperature: -4 to +140F (-20 to +60C) Storage temperature: -40 to +176F (-40 to +80C) Altitude: Up to 6562 feet (2000m) Pollution degree (IEC 947-1): 3 Humidity: Maximum 95% RH @ 60C Meet or Exceed NEMA Contact Rating Designations A600 and Q600 Description Make and emergency interrupting capacity (Amp) A600 (AC) Volts Q600 (DC) Volts 120 240 480 600 125 250 440 60 30 15 12 0.55 0.27 0.1 600 0.1 Terminal Markings Normal load break (Amp) All rear of panel devices are marked with the circuit configuration per CENELEC 50013 standards. Thermal current (Amp) Ratings do not apply to rotary cam switches, see Ratings Page 47-95. Table 47-29. Contact Blocks A600, Q600 per UL 508 AC15, DC13 per IEC 60947-5-1 Circuit Configuration 2 1 4 3 6 3 10 10 1.5 10 1.2 0.55 0.27 0.1 10 2.5 2.5 2.5 0.1 2.5 Description Plunger Color 1NC Red Logic level contact blocks are UL A600, Q600 and IEC AC15, DC13 rated and also have a minimum rating of 1 mA @ 5V DC. 1NO Green 1NO-1NC White Impulse withstand voltage (Uimp): 4 kV Short Circuit Coordination to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 2 1 4 3 4A 3A 4 3 4 3 2 1 2NO 47 Green Rated conditional short circuit current: 1 kA Fuse type: GE Power Controls TIA 10, Red Spot Type gG, 10A, 660V AC, 460V DC, BS88-2, IEC 60269-2-1 Electrical Life 1NO Early Make Black 1NC Late Break Gray AC15 durability 120V, 6A - 1 x 106 operations DC13 durability 24V, 4A - 0.15 x 106 operations 660V, 0.1A - 0.5 x 106 operations Material Table 47-30. Lights Units Circuit Configuration Description X1 X2 X1 X2 Full Voltage Resistor Transformer X2 Housing, bezel, mounting rings: Glass filled nylon Metal bezels: Chrome plated brass Internal seal: Nitrile rubber Panel gasket: Nitrile rubber Illuminated lenses: Polycarbonate Buttons: Polyester or polycarbonate Contacts: Silver Terminals: Brass X1 E22CB1, E22CB11, E22CB1E, E22B1 and E22B11 contact blocks are marked with Direct Opening Action (DOA) Symbol " " per IEC 60947-5-1, Annex K and NEMA ICS 5, Part 6. For Mechanical Operating Parameters, see Page 47-69. E22CB1, E22CB11 and E22CB1E contact blocks will be marked as Suitable for Isolation per IEC 60947-5-1. Contact Block Terminal Clamps Clamp type: Self-lifting Screw type: Plus/minus, captive Wire range: 18 to 12 AWG (0.75 to 4.0 mm2) Fingerproof protection: IP2X Tightening torque: 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm) For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-31 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices -- Pushbutton Units Product Selection Pushbutton Units Non-illuminated Plastic or Metal Operators Black or Chrome Bezel Flush, Extended or Mushroom Head Operators Description Listed below are commonly ordered complete pushbutton devices including operator and contact block(s). These devices are shipped as unassembled components overpacked in a single bag. For instructions on how to order devices not listed below using a single composite Catalog Number, refer to Page 47-95. Table 47-32. Pushbutton Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Button Color Contact Block Circuit NO NC Catalog Catalog Number Number Price NO-NC U.S. $ Catalog Number 2NO Catalog Number 2NC Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Plastic Operators -- Black Bezel Flush -- Momentary Black E22PB1A Red E22PB2A Green E22PB3A Extended -- Momentary Black E22EB1A Red E22EB2A Green E22EB3A 40 mm Mushroom -- Momentary Black E22LB1A Red E22LB2A Green E22LB3A E22PB1B E22PB2B E22PB3B E22PB1C E22PB2C E22PB3C E22PB1D E22PB2D E22PB3D E22PB1E E22PB2E E22PB3E E22EB1B E22EB2B E22EB3B E22EB1C E22EB2C E22EB3C E22EB1D E22EB2D E22EB3D E22EB1E E22EB2E E22EB3E E22LB1B E22LB2B E22LB3B E22LB1C E22LB2C E22LB3C E22LB1D E22LB2D E22LB3D E22LB1E E22LB2E E22LB3E E22LLB1C E22LLB2C E22LLB3C E22LLB1D E22LLB2D E22LLB3D E22LLB1E E22LLB2E E22LLB3E E22JPB1C E22JPB2C E22JPB3C E22JPB1D E22JPB2D E22JPB3D E22JPB1E E22JPB2E E22JPB3E E22JLB2N8C E22JLB2N8D E22JLB2N8E 40 mm Twist-to-Release Mushroom -- Latching Black E22LLB1A E22LLB1B Red E22LLB2A E22LLB2B Green E22LLB3A E22LLB3B 50 mm Jumbo Mushroom -- Momentary Black E22JPB1A E22JPB1B Red E22JPB2A E22JPB2B Green E22JPB3A E22JPB3B 50 mm Jumbo Mushroom -- Maintained Red E22JLB2N8A E22JLB2N8B EMERGENCY STOP (Metal) 47 Plastic Operators -- Chrome Bezel Flush -- Momentary Black E22P1A E22P1B Red E22P2A E22P2B Green E22P3A E22P3B Extended -- Momentary Black E22E1A E22E1B Red E22E2A E22E2B Green E22E3A E22E3B 40 mm Mushroom -- Momentary Black E22L1A E22L1B Red E22L2A E22L2B Green E22L3A E22L3B 40 mm Twist-to-Release Mushroom -- Latching Black E22LL1A E22LL1B Red E22LL2A E22LL2B Green E22LL3A E22LL3B 50 mm Jumbo Mushroom -- Momentary Black E22JP1A E22JP1B Red E22JP2A E22JP2B Green E22JP3A E22JP3B 50 mm Jumbo Mushroom -- Maintained Red E22JL2N8A E22JL2N8B EMERGENCY STOP (Metal) E22P1C E22P2C E22P3C E22P1D E22P2D E22P3D E22P1E E22P2E E22P3E E22E1C E22E2C E22E3C E22E1D E22E2D E22E3D E22E1E E22E2E E22E3E E22L1C E22L2C E22L3C E22L1D E22L2D E22L3D E22L1E E22L2E E22L3E E22LL1C E22LL2C E22LL3C E22LL1D E22LL2D E22LL3D E22LL1E E22LL2E E22LL3E E22JP1C E22JP2C E22JP3C E22JP1D E22JP2D E22JP3D E22JP1E E22JP2E E22JP3E E22JL2N8C E22JL2N8D E22JL2N8E Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-89 Pages 47-74 - 47-78 Pages 47-87 - 47-88 Pages 47-79 - 47-85 1CD1 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-32 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices -- Pushbutton Units Table 47-32. Pushbutton Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 (Continued) Button Color Contact Block Circuit NO NC Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ NO-NC 2NO 2NC Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number EM22P1D EM22P1C EM22P2C EM22P3C EM22P3D EM22E2B EM22E2C EM22E2E EM22L2B EM22L2C EM22L2E EM22LL2C EM22LL2E EM22JP2C EM22JP2D EM22JP2E EM22JL2N8C EM22JL2N8D EM22JL2N8E Price U.S. $ Metal Operators -- Chrome Bezel Flush -- Momentary Black Red Green EM22P1A EM22P2A EM22P3A EM22P2B EM22P2E Extended -- Momentary Red EM22E2A 40 mm Mushroom -- Momentary Red EM22L2A 40 mm Twist-to-Release Mushroom -- Latching Red EM22LL2A EM22LL2B 50 mm Jumbo Mushroom -- Momentary Red EM22JP2A EM22JP2B 50 mm Jumbo Mushroom -- Maintained Red EMERGENCY STOP (Metal) EM22JL2N8A EM22JL2N8B See Page 47-95 for ordering other complete devices not shown. 47 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-89 Pages 47-74 - 47-78 Pages 47-87 - 47-88 Pages 47-79 - 47-86 1CD1 CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-33 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Pushbutton Components Pushbutton Components Table 47-33. Momentary Contact Pushbuttons, Non-illuminated -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Will Accept Maximum of 3 Contact Blocks (6 Circuits) When Used with Supplied 3-Way Adapter and Optional Operator Plug. Color E22 Series -- Plastic Operators Black Bezel Catalog Number E22 Black E22 Chrome EM22 Chrome EM22 Series -- Metal Operators Chrome Bezel Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Chrome Bezel Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ 25 mm Diameter Flush Button E22PB1 E22PB2 E22PB3 E22PB4 E22PB5 E22PB6 E22PB7 E22PB8 Black Red Green Yellow White Blue Gray Orange E22P1 E22P2 E22P3 E22P4 E22P5 E22P6 E22P7 E22P8 EM22P1 EM22P2 EM22P3 EM22P4 EM22P5 EM22P6 EM22P7 EM22P8 E22E1 E22E2 E22E3 E22E4 E22E5 E22E6 E22E7 E22E8 EM22E1 EM22E2 EM22E3 EM22E4 EM22E5 EM22E6 EM22E7 EM22E8 E22PF1 E22PF2 E22PF3 E22PF4 E22PF5 E22PF6 E22PF7 E22PF8 EM22PF1 EM22PF2 EM22PF3 EM22PF4 EM22PF5 EM22PF6 EM22PF7 EM22PF8 E22M1 E22M2 E22M3 E22M4 E22M6 EM22M1 EM22M2 EM22M3 EM22M4 EM22M6 25 mm Diameter Extended Button E22EB1 E22EB2 E22EB3 E22EB4 E22EB5 E22EB6 E22EB7 E22EB8 Black Red Green Yellow White Blue Gray Orange 25 mm Diameter with Full Shroud -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Black Red Green Yellow White Blue Gray Orange 28 mm Dia. Mushroom Head Button E22MB1 E22MB2 E22MB3 E22MB4 E22MB6 Black Red Green Yellow Blue 47 40 mm Dia. Mushroom Head Button E22LB1 E22LB2 E22LB3 E22LB4 E22LB6 Black Red Green Yellow Blue E22L1 E22L2 E22L3 E22L4 E22L6 EM22L1 EM22L2 EM22L3 EM22L4 EM22L6 50 mm Dia. Mushroom Head Button -- Plastic Black Red Green Yellow Blue Red (Metal) E22JPB1 E22JPB2 E22JPB3 E22JPB4 E22JPB6 E22JB2 E22JP1 E22JP2 E22JP3 E22JP4 E22JP6 E22J2 EM22JP1 EM22JP2 EM22JP3 EM22JP4 EM22JP6 EM22J2 Red (Metal) Engraved EMERGENCY STOP E22JB2N8 E22J2N8 EM22J2N8 Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94. Ordering Example -- A complete Pushbutton Unit consists of the following: Operator See Above Operator Plug E22BA2 Required if 3rd Contact Block Is Used. See Page 47-75 Legend Plate or Print Option See Pages 47-79 - 47-85 Mounting Adapter E22BA1 (Supplied with Operator). For 5-Way Adapter, See Page 47-77 Contact Blocks See Page 47-69 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89 Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-34 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices -- Illuminated Pushbutton Units Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units Plastic or Metal Operators Black or Chrome Bezel Extended Pushbuttons Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer Light Units Plastic Lenses Metal Operators available with LED Table 47-34. Plastic Illuminated Extended Pushbutton Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Description Button Color NO NC Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ NO-NC 2NO 2NC Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number E22TB2X4B E22TB3X4B E22TB5X4B E22TB6X4B E22TB9X4B E22TB0X4B E22TB2X4C E22TB3X4C E22TB5X4C E22TB6X4C E22TB9X4C E22TB0X4C E22TB2X4D E22TB3X4D E22TB5X4D E22TB6X4D E22TB9X4D E22TB0X4D E22TB2X4E E22TB3X4E E22TB5X4E E22TB6X4E E22TB9X4E E22TB0X4E E22TB2X10B E22TB3X10B E22TB5X10B E22TB6X10B E22TB9X10B E22TB0X10B E22TB2X10C E22TB3X10C E22TB5X10C E22TB6X10C E22TB9X10C E22TB0X10C E22TB2X10D E22TB3X10D E22TB5X10D E22TB6X10D E22TB9X10D E22TB0X10D E22TB2X10E E22TB3X10E E22TB5X10E E22TB6X10E E22TB9X10E E22TB0X10E E22TB2X11B E22TB3X11B E22TB5X11B E22TB6X11B E22TB9X11B E22TB0X11B E22TB2X11C E22TB3X11C E22TB5X11C E22TB6X11C E22TB9X11C E22TB0X11C E22TB2X11D E22TB3X11D E22TB5X11D E22TB6X11D E22TB9X11D E22TB0X11D E22TB2X11E E22TB3X11E E22TB5X11E E22TB6X11E E22TB9X11E E22TB0X11E E22T2X4B E22T3X4B E22T5X4B E22T6X4B E22T9X4B E22T0X4B E22T2X4C E22T3X4C E22T5X4C E22T6X4C E22T9X4C E22T0X4C E22T2X4D E22T3X4D E22T5X4D E22T6X4D E22T9X4D E22T0X4D E22T2X4E E22T3X4E E22T5X4E E22T6X4E E22T9X4E E22T0X4E E22T2X10B E22T3X10B E22T5X10B E22T6X10B E22T9X10B E22T0X10B E22T2X10C E22T3X10C E22T5X10C E22T6X10C E22T9X10C E22T0X10C E22T2X10D E22T3X10D E22T5X10D E22T6X10D E22T9X10D E22T0X10D E22T2X10E E22T3X10E E22T5X10E E22T6X10E E22T9X10E E22T0X10E E22T2X11C E22T3X11C E22T5X11C E22T6X11C E22T9X11C E22T0X11C E22T2X11D E22T3X11D E22T5X11D E22T6X11D E22T9X11D E22T0X11D E22T2X11E E22T3X11E E22T5X11E E22T6X11E E22T9X11E E22T0X11E Price U.S. $ Plastic Operators -- Black Bezel 24V AC/DC Full Voltage Red Green White Blue Amber Clear E22TB2X4A E22TB3X4A E22TB5X4A E22TB6X4A E22TB9X4A E22TB0X4A 120V AC/DC Resistor Unit Red Green White Blue Amber Clear E22TB2X10A E22TB3X10A E22TB5X10A E22TB6X10A E22TB9X10A E22TB0X10A 120V Transformer AC -- 50/60 Hz Red Green White Blue Amber Clear E22TB2X11A E22TB3X11A E22TB5X11A E22TB6X11A E22TB9X11A E22TB0X11A Plastic Operators -- Chrome Bezel 24V AC/DC Full Voltage 47 Red Green White Blue Amber Clear E22T2X4A E22T3X4A E22T5X4A E22T6X4A E22T9X4A E22T0X4A 120V AC/DC Resistor Unit Red Green White Blue Amber Clear E22T2X10A E22T3X10A E22T5X10A E22T6X10A E22T9X10A E22T0X10A 120V Transformer AC -- 50/60 Hz Red Green White Blue Amber Clear E22T2X11A E22T3X11A E22T5X11A E22T6X11A E22T9X11A E22T0X11A E22T2X11B E22T3X11B E22T5X11B E22T6X11B E22T9X11B E22T0X11B Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 - 47-78 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 - 47-88 Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 - 47-85 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-35 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices -- Illuminated Pushbutton Units Table 47-35. Metal Illuminated Pushbutton Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Button Color NO Contact Block NC Contact Block Incandescent Catalog Number LED Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Incandescent Price U.S. $ Catalog Number LED Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Metal Operators -- Chrome Bezel 24V AC/DC Full Voltage Red Green White Blue Amber Clear EM22T2X4A EM22T3X4A EM22T5X4A EM22T6X4A EM22T9X4A EM22T0X4A EM22T2X40A EM22T3X41A EM22T5X90A EM22T6X52A EM22T9X95A EM22T0X90A EM22T2X4B EM22T3X4B EM22T5X4B EM22T6X4B EM22T9X4B EM22T0X4B EM22T2X40B EM22T3X41B EM22T5X90B EM22T6X52B EM22T9X95B EM22T0X90B EM22T2X43A EM22T3X44A EM22T5X92A EM22T6X61A EM22T9X96A EM22T0X92A -- -- -- -- -- -- EM22T2X43B EM22T3X44B EM22T5X92B EM22T6X61B EM22T9X96B EM22T0X92B -- -- -- -- -- -- EM22T2X10B EM22T3X10B EM22T5X10B EM22T6X10B EM22T9X10B EM22T0X10B -- -- -- -- -- -- EM22T2X433A EM22T3X444A EM22T5X922A EM22T6X611A EM22T9X966A EM22T0X922A EM22T2X11B EM22T3X11B EM22T5X11B EM22T6X11B EM22T9X11B EM22T0X11B EM22T2X433B EM22T3X444B EM22T5X922B EM22T6X611B EM22T9X966B EM22T0X922B 120V AC Full Voltage Red Green White Blue Amber Clear -- -- -- -- -- -- 120V AC/DC Resistor Unit Red Green White Blue Amber Clear EM22T2X10A EM22T3X10A EM22T5X10A EM22T6X10A EM22T9X10A EM22T0X10A 120V AC Transformer -- 50/60 Hz Red Green White Blue Amber Clear EM22T2X11A EM22T3X11A EM22T5X11A EM22T6X11A EM22T9X11A EM22T0X11A 47 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-89 Pages 47-74 - 47-78 Pages 47-87 - 47-88 Pages 47-79 - 47-86 1CD1 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-36 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Pushbutton Components Illuminated Pushbutton Components Table 47-36. Illuminated Pushbutton and PresTest Indicating Light Operators -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Will Accept Maximum of 2 Contact Blocks (4 Circuits) When Used with Supplied 3-Way Adapter Color E22 Series -- Plastic Operators Black Bezel Catalog Number E22 Black E22 Chrome EM22 Chrome EM22 Series -- Metal Operators Chrome Bezel Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Chrome Bezel Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ 25 mm Diameter Flush Lens Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber Clear E22NB2 E22NB3 E22NB4 E22NB5 E22NB6 E22NB9 E22NB0 E22N2 E22N3 E22N4 E22N5 E22N6 E22N9 E22N0 EM22N2 EM22N3 EM22N4 EM22N5 EM22N6 EM22N9 EM22N0 E22T2 E22T3 E22T4 E22T5 E22T6 E22T9 E22T0 EM22T2 EM22T3 EM22T4 EM22T5 EM22T6 EM22T9 EM22T0 25 mm Diameter Extended Lens Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber Clear E22TB2 E22TB3 E22TB4 E22TB5 E22TB6 E22TB9 E22TB0 25 mm Dia. Extended Lens with Shroud Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber Clear -- -- -- -- -- -- -- E22TX2 E22TX3 E22TX4 E22TX5 E22TX6 E22TX9 E22TX0 EM22TX2 EM22TX3 EM22TX4 EM22TX5 EM22TX6 EM22TX9 EM22TX0 If a Flush Lens type is required instead of Extended, substitute N for T in listed Catalog Number. Example: E22NX2 -- Red flush illuminated pushbutton with full shroud. Chrome version only. Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94. 47 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 - 47-78 Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-69 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 - 47-88 Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 - 47-85 Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-70 - 47-71 Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-37 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices -- Push-Push Units Alternate-Action (Push-Push) Pushbutton Units Non-illuminated or Illuminated Plastic or Metal Operators Black or Chrome Bezel Flush or Extended Operators Description Listed below are commonly ordered complete pushbutton devices including operator and contact block(s). These devices are shipped as unassembled components overpacked in a single bag. For instructions on how to order devices not listed below using a single composite Catalog Number, refer to Page 47-95. Table 47-37. E22 and EM22 Series Non-illuminated Flush and Extended Alternate-Action Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Button Color Contact Block Circuit NO NC Catalog Number Catalog Number E22PPB1A E22PPB5A E22PPB7A E22PPB1B E22PPB5B E22PPB7B E22EPB1A E22EPB5A E22EPB7A Price NO-NC U.S. $ Catalog Number 2NO 2NC Catalog Number Catalog Number E22PPB1C E22PPB5C E22PPB7C E22PPB1D E22PPB5D E22PPB7D E22PPB1E E22PPB5E E22PPB7E E22EPB1B E22EPB5B E22EPB7B E22EPB1C E22EPB5C E22EPB7C E22EPB1D E22EPB5D E22EPB7D E22EPB1E E22EPB5E E22EPB7E E22PP1A E22PP5A E22PP7A E22PP1B E22PP5B E22PP7B E22PP1C E22PP5C E22PP7C E22PP1D E22PP5D E22PP7D E22PP1E E22PP5E E22PP7E E22EP1A E22EP5A E22EP7A E22EP1B E22EP5B E22EP7B E22EP1C E22EP5C E22EP7C E22EP1D E22EP5D E22EP7D E22EP1E E22EP5E E22EP7E EM22PP1A EM22PP5A EM22PP7A EM22PP1B EM22PP5B EM22PP7B EM22PP1C EM22PP5C EM22PP7C EM22PP1D EM22PP5D EM22PP7D EM22PP1E EM22PP5E EM22PP7E EM22EP1A EM22EP5A EM22EP7A EM22EP1B EM22EP5B EM22EP7B EM22EP1C EM22EP5C EM22EP7C EM22EP1D EM22EP5D EM22EP7D EM22EP1E EM22EP5E EM22EP7E Price U.S. $ E22 Series -- Plastic Operators - Black Bezel Flush Black White Gray Extended Black White Gray E22 Series -- Plastic Operators - Chrome Bezel Flush Black White Gray Extended Black White Gray EM22 Series -- Metal Operators - Chrome Bezel Flush Black White Gray Extended Black White Gray Note: In order to comply with NFPA 79 and IEC 60204-1 requirements: The colors black, white or gray shall be used for Push-Push operators which act alternately as START/ON and STOP/OFF pushbuttons. Push-Push operators shall only be used for functions which can not result in a hazardous condition. IEC 60204-1 recommends that Push-Push operators acting alternately as START/ON and STOP/OFF pushbuttons be marked with the printed legend N124. Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 - 47-78 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 - 47-88 Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 - 47-85 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 47-38 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices -- Push-Push Units Table 47-38. Illuminated Bezel Flush Assembled Push-Push Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Button Color Contact Block Circuit NO NC Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ NO-NC 2NO 2NC Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ E22TP2X4C E22TP3X4C E22TP5X4C E22TP6X4C E22TP9X4C E22TP0X4C E22TP2X4D E22TP3X4D E22TP5X4D E22TP6X4D E22TP9X4D E22TP0X4D E22TP2X4E E22TP3X4E E22TP5X4E E22TP6X4E E22TP9X4E E22TP0X4E E22TP2X10C E22TP3X10C E22TP5X10C E22TP6X10C E22TP9X10C E22TP0X10C E22TP2X10D E22TP3X10D E22TP5X10D E22TP6X10D E22TP9X10D E22TP0X10D E22TP2X10E E22TP3X10E E22TP5X10E E22TP6X10E E22TP9X10E E22TP0X10E E22TP2X11C E22TP3X11C E22TP5X11C E22TP6X11C E22TP9X11C E22TP0X11C E22TP2X11D E22TP3X11D E22TP5X11D E22TP6X11D E22TP9X11D E22TP0X11D E22TP2X11E E22TP3X11E E22TP5X11E E22TP6X11E E22TP9X11E E22TP0X11E EM22TP2X4C EM22TP3X4C EM22TP5X4C EM22TP6X4C EM22TP9X4C EM22TP0X4C EM22TP2X4D EM22TP3X4D EM22TP5X4D EM22TP6X4D EM22TP9X4D EM22TP0X4D EM22TP2X4E EM22TP3X4E EM22TP5X4E EM22TP6X4E EM22TP9X4E EM22TP0X4E EM22TP2X10C EM22TP3X10C EM22TP5X10C EM22TP6X10C EM22TP9X10C EM22TP0X10C EM22TP2X10D EM22TP3X10D EM22TP5X10D EM22TP6X10D EM22TP9X10D EM22TP0X10D EM22TP2X10E EM22TP3X10E EM22TP5X10E EM22TP6X10E EM22TP9X10E EM22TP0X10E EM22TP2X11C EM22TP3X11C EM22TP5X11C EM22TP6X11C EM22TP9X11C EM22TP0X11C EM22TP2X11D EM22TP3X11D EM22TP5X11D EM22TP6X11D EM22TP9X11D EM22TP0X11D EM22TP2X11E EM22TP3X11E EM22TP5X11E EM22TP6X11E EM22TP9X11E EM22TP0X11E Plastic Operators -- Chrome Bezel 24V AC/DC Full Voltage, Flush, Illuminated Bezel Red Green White Blue Amber Clear E22TP2X4A E22TP3X4A E22TP5X4A E22TP6X4A E22TP9X4A E22TP0X4A E22TP2X4B E22TP3X4B E22TP5X4B E22TP6X4B E22TP9X4B E22TP0X4B 120V AC/DC Resistor, Flush, Illuminated Bezel Red Green White Blue Amber Clear E22TP2X10A E22TP3X10A E22TP5X10A E22TP6X10A E22TP9X10A E22TP0X10A E22TP2X10B E22TP3X10B E22TP5X10B E22TP6X10B E22TP9X10B E22TP0X10B 120V AC Transformer -- 50/60 Hz, Flush, Illuminated Bezel Red Green White Blue Amber Clear E22TP2X11A E22TP3X11A E22TP5X11A E22TP6X11A E22TP9X11A E22TP0X11A E22TP2X11B E22TP3X11B E22TP5X11B E22TP6X11B E22TP9X11B E22TP0X11B Metal Operators -- Chrome Bezel 24V AC/DC Full Voltage Unit, Flush, Illuminated Bezel Red Green White Blue Amber Clear EM22TP2X4A EM22TP3X4A EM22TP5X4A EM22TP6X4A EM22TP9X4A EM22TP0X4A EM22TP2X4B EM22TP3X4B EM22TP5X4B EM22TP6X4B EM22TP9X4B EM22TP0X4B 120V AC/DC Resistor Unit, Flush, Illuminated Bezel 47 Red Green White Blue Amber Clear EM22TP2X10A EM22TP3X10A EM22TP5X10A EM22TP6X10A EM22TP9X10A EM22TP0X10A EM22TP2X10B EM22TP3X10B EM22TP5X10B EM22TP6X10B EM22TP9X10B EM22TP0X10B 120V AC Transformer Unit, Flush, Illuminated Bezel Red Green White Blue Amber Clear EM22TP2X11A EM22TP3X11A EM22TP5X11A EM22TP6X11A EM22TP9X11A EM22TP0X11A EM22TP2X11B EM22TP3X11B EM22TP5X11B EM22TP6X11B EM22TP9X11B EM22TP0X11B Note: In order to comply with NFPA 79 and IEC 60204-1 requirements: The colors black, white or gray shall be used for Push-Push operators which act alternately as START/ON and STOP/OFF pushbuttons. White shall be used for illuminated Push-Push operators. Push-Push operators shall only be used for functions which can not result in a hazardous condition. IEC 60204-1 recommends that Push-Push operators acting alternately as START/ON and STOP/OFF pushbuttons be marked with the printed legend N124. Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-89 Pages 47-74 - 47-78 Pages 47-87 - 47-88 Pages 47-79 - 47-85 1CD1 CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-39 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Push-Push Components Alternate Action (Push-Push) Components Non-illuminated and Illuminated Push-Push Operators Note: Will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks when used with supplied 3-way adapter, 5-way mounting adapters are not to be used. Table 47-39. Push-Push Operators -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 E22 Series -- Plastic Operators Black Bezel Chrome Bezel EM22 Series -- Metal Operators Chrome Bezel Catalog Number E22PPB1 E22PPB5 E22PPB7 Price U.S. $ Catalog Number E22PP1 E22PP5 E22PP7 Price U.S. $ Catalog Number EM22PP1 EM22PP5 EM22PP7 Price U.S. $ Catalog Number E22EPB1 E22EPB5 E22EPB7 Price U.S. $ Catalog Number E22EP1 E22EP5 E22EP7 Price U.S. $ Catalog Number EM22EP1 EM22EP5 EM22EP7 Price U.S. $ Catalog Number E22NPB5 E22NPB0 E22NPB2 E22NPB3 E22NPB6 E22NPB9 Price U.S. $ Catalog Number E22NP5 E22NP0 E22NP2 E22NP3 E22NP6 E22NP9 Price U.S. $ Catalog Number EM22NP5 EM22NP0 EM22NP2 EM22NP3 EM22NP6 EM22NP9 Price U.S. $ Catalog Number E22TP5 E22TP0 E22TP2 E22TP3 E22TP6 E22TP9 Price U.S. $ Catalog Number EM22TP5 EM22TP0 EM22TP2 EM22TP3 EM22TP6 EM22TP9 Price U.S. $ Flush, Non-illuminated Color Black White Gray Extended, Non-illuminated Color Black White Gray Flush, Illuminated Color White Clear Red Green Blue Amber 47 Flush, Illuminated with Lens Guard Color White Clear Red Green Blue Amber Catalog Number -- -- -- -- -- -- Price U.S. $ Note: In order to comply with NFPA 79 and IEC 60204-1 requirements: The colors black, white or gray shall be used for Push-Push operators which act alternately as START/ON and STOP/OFF pushbuttons. White shall be used for illuminated Push-Push operators. Push-Push operators shall only be used for functions which cannot result in a hazardous condition. IEC 60204-1 recommends that Push-Push operators acting alternately as START/ON and STOP/OFF pushbuttons be marked with the IEC symbol for Push-Push pushbuttons. To order with legend, add Suffix N124 to operator Catalog Number. Example: E22PPB1N124 Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94. Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-89 Pages 47-74 - 47-78 Pages 47-87 - 47-88 Pages 47-79 - 47-85 Pages 47-70 - 47-71 Page 47-98 1CD1 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-40 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Push-Push Components Alternate Action (Push-Push) Components (Continued) Contact Block Selection/Application Non-illuminated Push-Push operators will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (singles or duals). 5-way mounting adapters are not suitable with Push-Push operators. Illuminated Push-Push operators will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (singles or duals) and one light unit. Table 47-40. Push-Push Operators Contact Block Required Circuit Catalog Number B E22B1 1NC O X A E22B2 1NO X O W E22B11 1NO-1NC X O O X V E22B20 2NO X X O O Price U.S. $ Circuit Operation Suffix Code Push-ON Push-OFF X = Closed Circuit O = Open Circuit Note: Add Contact Block Suffix Code from tables above to operator Catalog Number to order as a complete device. Example: E22EP1B = chrome bezel, Black button Push-Push with 1NC contact block. 47 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-74 - 47-78 Pages 47-87 - 47-88 Pages 47-79 - 47-85 Pages 47-70 - 47-71 Page 47-98 1CD1 CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-41 January 2010 E22 Series, Complete Devices -- Maintained Emergency Stop Pushbutton Units Trigger Action Emergency Stop Pushbutton Units -- EN 418 Compliant tact blocks are fully compliant with this safety directive. The European Machinery Safety Directive EN 418 requires all emergency OFF devices to be self-latching types and to have positive (direct) opening operation. Devices have to be manually reset. Actuators shall be mushroom head type and colored RED. The background immediately around the device actuator should be colored YELLOW. See Page 47-42 for yellow guard. Features The new E22 trigger action operators in conjunction with yellow nameplates and DOA (Direct Opening Action) con- Safety interlock against inadvertent operation Stop command and latching occur simultaneously Contacts cannot be "teased" open Direct Opening Action (DOA) contact blocks Resetable by rotation of actuator Periodic Inspection Industrial control equipment should be periodically inspected. Eaton recommends inspection of Emergency Stop devices for proper mechanical operation after every 500 hours of elapsed time. See National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standard No. ICS 1.3, Preventive Maintenance of Industrial Control and Systems Equipment, for guidelines in setting up a maintenance program. Table 47-41. Trigger Action Emergency OFF Switch Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Action Color Legend/ Engraving Contact Block Circuit 1NC Catalog Number Price U.S. $ 2NC 1NC-1NO Catalog Number Catalog Number 2NC-1NO E22LTA2QE E22LTA2QW E22LTA2QWB E22LTA2N123QE E22LTA2N123QW E22LTA2N123QWB Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ 40 mm Trigger Action Twist-to-Release Red (Red) E22LTA2QB 40 mm Trigger Action Twist-to-Release EMO (Emergency Machine OFF) Red (White) E22LTA2N123QB Third party certified by DEMKO. For specification drawing, request A70-8530 from the Cutler-Hammer TRC -- call 1-800-809-2772. Third party certified by DEMKO and GS3 to SEMI S2-0200 specifications. For specification drawing, request A70-8508 from the Cutler-Hammer TRC -- call 1-800-809-2772. EMO (Emergency Machine OFF) marking per SEMI S2 requirement. Table 47-42. Two-Position Push-Pull Emergency Stop Pushbutton Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Action Color Contact Block Circuit Legend/ Engraving 1NC 2NC 1NC-1NO Catalog Number Catalog Number E22LPB2B E22LPB2E E22LPB2C E22LPB2N125B E22LPB2N125E E22LPB2N125C Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Price U.S. $ 40 mm Mushroom Red None Red IEC Symbol for Emergency Stop. Direct Opening Action (DOA) for IEC 60947-5-1 (Annex K) and NEMA ICS 5 (Part 6) Compliance Table 47-43. Mechanical Operating Parameters of Operators with E22CB1 and E22CB11 (NC Contacts Only) DOA Operating Parameters Latching Trigger Action E-Stop 2-Position Push-Pull E-Stop + E22CB1 E-Stop + E22CB11 2-Pos. Push-Pull + E22CB1 Min. Travel to Open Contact -- Inches (mm) 0.24 (6.1) 0.24 (6.1) 0.08 (2.1) 0.08 (2.1) Min. Force to Open Contact -- lb (N) 5.00 (22.24) 5.00 (22.24) 0 0 Total Travel -- Inches (mm) 0.29 (7.4) 0.29 (7.4) 0.23 (5.8) 0.23 (5.8) 2-Pos. Push-Pull + E22CB11 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-42 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Emergency Stop Components Emergency Stop Components Table 47-44. Standard Emergency Stop and Emergency OFF Operators -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 All Shown with Action Chrome Bezel Color Button Diameter/ Material Legend/ Engraving Plastic -- Black Bezel Plastic -- Chrome Bezel Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Price U.S. $ Maximum of 2 Contact Blocks (4 Circuits) When Used with Supplied 3-Way Adapter (Unless Otherwise Noted) Maintained Trigger Action Twist-to-Release Red 40 mm/Plastic Maintained Trigger Action Twist-to-Release Red 40 mm/Plastic Momentary Red EMO Maintained -- 2-Position Push-Pull Red Maintained -- 2-Position Push-Pull Red Red E22L2 E22JPB2 E22JP2 E22JB2 E22J2 E22JB2N8 E22J2N8 40 mm/Plastic E22LPB2 E22LP2 50 mm/Plastic E22JPLB2 E22JPL2 50 mm/Alum. E22JLB2 E22JL2 E22JLB2N8 E22JL2N8 E22EDB2 E22ED2 EMERG. STOP E22EDB2N8 E22ED2N8 EMERG. STOP E22EDB2N796 E22ED2N796 E22GDB2 E22GD2 40 mm/Plastic 40 mm/Plastic Illuminated EMERG. STOP EMERG. STOP Maintained -- Twist-to-Release Red -- E22LB2 EMERG. STOP Maintained -- 2-Position Push-Pull E22LTA2N123 40 mm/Plastic EMERG. STOP Red -- 50 mm/Plastic 50 mm/Alum. Maintained -- 2-Position Push-Pull E22LTA2 40 mm/Plastic E22GDB2N8 E22GDB2N796 E22GD2N8 E22GD2N796 E22LLB2 E22LL2 E22LLB2N886 E22LL2N886 E22GB2 E22G2 (White) 47 (White) Maintained -- Key Release Red 40 mm/Plastic Compliant with EN418 Machinery Safety Directive. Yellow field -- red letters. Maximum of 3 contact blocks allowable (6 circuits) when optional operator plug is used. Table 47-45. EN418 Compliant Safety Yellow Guard Description Color Mushroom Guard for 40 mm Trigger Safety Action Switch -- To be used with E22LTA2 Yellow and E22LTA2N123 operators. Catalog Number Price U.S. $ E22MGTA Periodic Inspection Industrial control equipment should be periodically inspected. Eaton recommends inspection of Emergency Stop devices for proper mechanical operation after every 500 hours of elapsed time. See National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standard No. ICS 1.3, Preventive Maintenance of Industrial Control and Systems Equipment, for guidelines in setting up a maintenance program. For more information visit: www.eaton.com Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-Way Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . Page 47-69 Pages 47-87 - 47-88 Page 47-77 Pages 47-79 - 47-85 Page 47-98 1CD1 CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-43 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Twist-to-Release, Push-Pull and Key Release Components Twist-to-Release, Push-Pull and Key Release Components Table 47-46. Maintained Contact Mushroom Head Operators, Non-illuminated -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Will Accept Maximum of 2 Contact Blocks (4 Circuits) When Used with Supplied 3-Way Adapter. E22 Series -- Plastic Operators Color Black Bezel Catalog Number E22 Black E22 Chrome EM22 Chrome EM22 Series -- Metal Operators Chrome Bezel Price Catalog U.S. $ Number Color Price U.S. $ Chrome Bezel Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Twist-to-Release -- 28 mm Diameter Button (Push to Latch -- Twist to Release) Black Red Green Yellow Blue E22MLB1 E22MLB2 E22MLB3 E22MLB4 E22MLB6 E22ML1 E22ML2 E22ML3 E22ML4 E22ML6 Black Red Green Yellow Blue EM22ML1 EM22ML2 EM22ML3 EM22ML4 EM22ML6 Black Red Green Yellow Blue EM22LL1 EM22LL2 EM22LL3 EM22LL4 EM22LL6 Twist-to-Release -- 40 mm Diameter Button (Push to Latch -- Twist to Release) Black Red Green Yellow Blue E22LLB1 E22LLB2 E22LLB3 E22LLB4 E22LLB6 E22LL1 E22LL2 E22LL3 E22LL4 E22LL6 Push-Pull -- 40 mm Diameter Button (Push to Latch -- Pull to Release) Black Red Green Yellow Blue E22LPB1 E22LPB2 E22LPB3 E22LPB4 E22LPB6 E22LP1 E22LP2 E22LP3 E22LP4 E22LP6 Black Red Green Yellow Blue EM22LP1 EM22LP2 EM22LP3 EM22LP4 EM22LP6 Push-Pull -- 50 mm Diameter Button (Push to Latch -- Pull to Release) Black Red Green Yellow Blue Red (Metal) E22JPLB1 E22JPLB2 E22JPLB3 E22JPLB4 E22JPLB6 E22JLB2 E22JPL1 E22JPL2 E22JPL3 E22JPL4 E22JPL6 E22JL2 Black Red Green Yellow Blue Red (Metal) EM22JPL1 EM22JPL2 EM22JPL3 EM22JPL4 EM22JPL6 EM22JL2 Red (Metal) EMERGENCY STOP E22JLB2N8 E22JL2N8 EM22JL2N8 Key Release -- 40 mm Diameter Button (Push to Latch -- Turn Key to Release) Black Red Green E22GB1 E22GB2 E22GB3 E22G1 E22G2 E22G3 Black Red Green EM22G1 EM22G2 EM22G3 For legend plates, use oversize plates, Catalog Numbers E22VA1, VA2 or VA8 listed on Page 47-74. To order a different key and lock assembly, add suffix B1, C1, D1, E1 or F1 to the end of the Catalog Number. Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94. Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89 Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-44 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices -- Indicating Light Units, Modular Indicating Light Units -- Modular Standard and PresTest Types Plastic or Metal Operators Full Voltage LED Light Units or Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer Incandescent Light Units Plastic Lenses PresTest -- This device incorporates a press-to-test feature whereby depressing the lens disconnects the light from the source being monitored and connects the lamp to a continuously energized circuit for immediate test for a faulty lamp. Table 47-47. Indicating and PresTest Light Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Color Indicating Light LED Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Incandescent Catalog Number Price U.S. $ PresTest Incandescent Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Plastic Operators 24V AC/DC Full Voltage Red E22H2X40 Green E22H3X41 White E22H5X90 Blue E22H6X52 Amber E22H9X95 Clear E22H0X90 E22H2X4 E22H3X4 E22H5X4 E22H6X4 E22H9X4 E22H0X4 120V AC Full Voltage Red E22H2X43 Green E22H3X44 White E22H5X92 Blue E22H6X61 Amber E22H9X96 Clear E22H0X92 E22H2X10 E22H3X10 E22H5X10 E22H6X10 E22H9X10 E22H0X10 E22T2X26 E22T3X26 E22T5X26 E22T6X26 E22T9X26 E22T0X26 120V AC Transformer Red -- Green -- White -- Blue -- Amber -- Clear -- E22H2X11 E22H3X11 E22H5X11 E22H6X11 E22H9X11 E22H0X11 E22T2X27 E22T3X27 E22T5X27 E22T6X27 E22T9X27 E22T0X27 24V AC/DC Full Voltage Red EM22H2X40 Green EM22H3X41 White EM22H5X90 Blue EM22H6X52 Amber EM22H9X95 Clear EM22H0X90 EM22H2X4 EM22H3X4 EM22H5X4 EM22H6X4 EM22H9X4 EM22H0X4 EM22T2X20 EM22T3X20 EM22T5X20 EM22T6X20 EM22T9X20 EM22T0X20 120V AC/DC Resistor Unit EM22H2X8 EM22H3X8 EM22H5X8 EM22H6X8 EM22H9X8 EM22H0X8 EM22T2X26 EM22T3X26 EM22T5X26 EM22T6X26 EM22T9X26 EM22T0X26 EM22H2X11 EM22H3X11 EM22H5X11 EM22H6X11 EM22H9X11 EM22H0X11 EM22T2X27 EM22T3X27 EM22T5X27 EM22T6X27 EM22T9X27 EM22T0X27 E22T2X20 E22T3X20 E22T5X20 E22T6X20 E22T9X20 E22T0X20 120V AC/DC Resistor Metal Operators 47 120V AC Full Voltage Red Green White Blue Amber Clear EM22H2X43 EM22H3X44 EM22H5X92 EM22H6X61 EM22H9X96 EM22H0X92 120V AC Transformer -- 50/60 Hz Red EM22H2X433 Green EM22H3X444 White EM22H5X922 Blue EM22H6X611 Amber EM22H9X966 Clear EM22H0X922 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 - 47-78 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 - 47-88 Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 - 47-85 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-45 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices -- Indicating Light Units, One-Piece LED Indicating Light Units -- One-Piece LED One-Piece Body Style Plastic Operators Full Voltage LEDs Cluster-Style Integrated LED (non-removable) or Standard Bayonet Base LED Plastic Lenses Table 47-48. Cluster LED Type Indicating Lights -- Non-removable LEDs -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Product Description Includes permanently attached lens and board mounted, cluster style LEDs Supply Voltage LED Color Lamp Life Catalog Number 24V AC/DC Red Green Amber 100,000 E22HL2X4 E22HL3X4 E22HL9X4 48V AC/DC Red Green Amber 100,000 E22HL2X6 E22HL3X6 E22HL9X6 110/120V AC/DC Red Green Amber 100,000 E22HL2X8 E22HL3X8 E22HL9X8 Non-removable LED Price U.S. $ Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1.88 (47.7) 0.58 (14.8) O1.16 (29.5) Published theoretical lamp lives are based on ideal laboratory conditions and should be used for comparison only. Actual life may be shorter due to application conditions. Table 47-49. Standard LED Type Indicating Lights -- Replaceable bayonet base LEDs -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Product Description Color Lamp Life Catalog Number 12V AC/DC Clear Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber 100,000 E22HV0X89 E22HV2X37 E22HV3X38 E22HV4X39 E22HV5X89 E22HV6X51 E22HV9X94 24V AC/DC Clear Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber E22HV0X90 E22HV2X40 E22HV3X41 E22HV4X42 E22HV5X90 E22HV6X52 E22HV9X95 Clear Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber E22HV0X91 E22HV2X53 E22HV3X54 E22HV4X55 E22HV5X91 E22HV6X56 E22HV9X87 Clear Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber E22HV0X97 E22HV2X57 E22HV3X58 E22HV4X59 E22HV5X97 E22HV6X60 E22HV9X98 Clear Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber E22HV0X92 E22HV2X43 E22HV3X44 E22HV4X45 E22HV5X92 E22HV6X61 E22HV9X96 Supply Voltage Includes lens and T 3-1/4 bayonet base LED 48V AC/DC 60V AC/DC 120V AC Price U.S. $ Dimensions in Inches (mm) 47 1.88 (47.7) 0.58 (14.8) O1.16 (29.5) Published theoretical lamp lives are based on ideal laboratory conditions and should be used for comparison only. Actual life may be shorter due to application conditions. Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-46 January 2010 E22 Series, Complete Devices -- Indicating Light Units, One-Piece Incandescent Indicating Light Units -- One-Piece Incandescent One-Piece Body Style Plastic Operators Full Voltage and Resistor Type Bayonet Base Incandescent Lamp Standard or Insert (with Printed Legends) Plastic Lenses Table 47-50. Incandescent Standard Lens Type Indicating Lights -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Product Description Supply Voltage Color Includes lens and 12V AC/DC Clear T 3-1/4 bayonet #756 Lamp Red base lamp Green Yellow White Blue Amber 47 Lamp Life Catalog Number 15,000 E22HV0X3 E22HV2X3 E22HV3X3 E22HV4X3 E22HV5X3 E22HV6X3 E22HV9X3 E22HV0X4 E22HV2X4 E22HV3X4 E22HV4X4 E22HV5X4 E22HV6X4 E22HV9X4 24V AC/DC #1819 Lamp Clear Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber 2,500 110/120V AC/DC W1121 Lamp Clear Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber 1,000 220/240V AC Resistor W1121 Lamp Clear Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber 1,000 Price U.S. $ Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1.88 (47.7) 0.58 (14.8) E22HV0X8 E22HV2X8 E22HV3X8 E22HV4X8 E22HV5X8 E22HV6X8 E22HV9X8 O1.16 (29.5) E22HR0X8 E22HR2X8 E22HR3X8 E22HR4X8 E22HR5X8 E22HR6X8 E22HR9X8 Published theoretical lamp lives are based on ideal laboratory conditions and should be used for comparison only. Actual life may be shorter due to application conditions. Incandescent -- Insert Lens with Printed Legends Insert version indicating lights allow printed legends to be placed directly on the inside of the lens. To specify lens insert with printed legends, add Suffix Code from table on Page 47-85 to the end of the catalog number. Table 47-51. Incandescent Insert Lens Type Indicating Lights -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Product Description Supply Voltage Lamp Life Catalog Number 15,000 E22HVA0X3 E22HVA2X3 E22HVA3X3 E22HVA4X3 E22HVA5X3 E22HVA6X3 E22HVA9X3 Clear Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber 2,500 E22HVA0X4 E22HVA2X4 E22HVA3X4 E22HVA4X4 E22HVA5X4 E22HVA6X4 E22HVA9X4 Clear Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber 1,000 Color Includes lens and 12V AC/DC Clear T 3-1/4 bayonet #756 Lamp Red base lamp Green Yellow White Blue Amber 24V AC/DC #1819 Lamp Lens Insert with Printed Legend See Page 47-85. 110/120V AC/DC W1121 Lamp Price U.S. $ Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1.88 (47.7) 0.58 (14.8) O1.16 (29.5) E22HVA0X8 E22HVA2X8 E22HVA3X8 E22HVA4X8 E22HVA5X8 E22HVA6X8 E22HVA9X8 Published theoretical lamp lives are based on ideal laboratory conditions and should be used for comparison only. Actual life may be shorter due to application conditions. Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-47 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Indicating Light Components Indicating Light Components Table 47-52. Indicating Lights -- Without Light Unit -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Color E22 EM22 E22 Series -- Plastic Operators EM22 Series -- Metal Operators Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Price U.S. $ 25 mm Dia. Standard Lens Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber Clear E22H2 E22H3 E22H4 E22H5 E22H6 E22H9 E22H0 EM22H2 EM22H3 EM22H4 EM22H5 EM22H6 EM22H9 EM22H0 25 mm Dia. Lens -- Insert Version (To Order with Printed Legend Insert, see Page 47-85.) Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber Clear Chrome Bezel E22A2 E22A3 E22A4 E22A5 E22A6 E22A9 E22A0 EM22A2 EM22A3 EM22A4 EM22A5 EM22A6 EM22A9 EM22A0 25 mm Dia. Glass Lens -- Rated 4 - 13 Only Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber Clear E22F2 E22F3 E22F4 E22F5 E22F6 E22F9 E22F0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Table 47-53. E22 Monoblock -- Full Voltage Indicating Lights without Lamps -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Description Color Catalog Number Optically Enhanced Style Clear Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber E22HV0 E22HV2 E22HV3 E22HV4 E22HV5 E22HV6 E22HV9 Price U.S. $ Description Color Catalog Number Diffuser Style (Catalog Numbers are without legends) Clear Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber E22HVA0 E22HVA2 E22HVA3 E22HVA4 E22HVA5 E22HVA6 E22HVA9 Price U.S. $ Lens Insert with Printed Legend For LED/incandescent lamps, see Page 47-70 - 47-71. For standard legends for diffuser, see Page 47-85. Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94. Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 - 47-78 Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-69 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 - 47-88 Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 - 47-85 Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-48 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices -- Push-Pull Units Push-Pull Units Plastic or Metal Operators Black or Chrome Bezel Two- and Three-Position Illuminated and Non-illuminated Incandescent Bayonet Base Lamps Transformer or Resistor Light Units Table 47-54. Two-Position Push-Pull Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position Non-illuminated Pull Button Color Catalog Number Black Red Green Red (Alum) -- EMERG. STOP Push Illuminated - Tall Incandescent Bulb Price U.S. $ Lens Color 120V AC Transformer 120V AC/DC Resistor Catalog Number Catalog Number E22EDB1B E22EDB2B E22EDB3B E22EDB2N8B Red Green Amber Red (Alum) -- EMERG. STOP E22GDB2X11B E22GDB3X11B E22GDB9X11B E22GDB2N8X11B E22GDB2X10B E22GDB3X10B E22GDB9X10B E22GDB2N8X10B Black Red Green Red (Alum) -- EMERG. STOP E22ED1B E22ED2B E22ED3B E22ED2N8B Red Green Amber Red (Alum) -- EMERG. STOP E22GD2X11B E22GD3X11B E22GD9X11B E22GD2N8X11B E22GD2X10B E22GD3X10B E22GD9X10B E22GD2N8X10B Red Red - EMERG. STOP EM22ED2B EM22ED2N8B Red Red - EMERG. STOP EM22GD2X11B EM22GD2N8X11B EM22GD2X10B EM22GD2N8X10B Price U.S. $ Price U.S. $ Plastic Operators -- Black Bezel X O Plastic Operators -- Chrome Bezel X O Metal Operators -- Chrome Bezel X O X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. Table 47-55. Three-Position Push-Pull Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position Pull Intermediate Non-illuminated Push Button Color Catalog Number Illuminated - Tall Incandescent Bulb Price U.S. $ Lens Color 120V AC Transformer Catalog Number 120V AC/DC Resistor Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Plastic Operators -- Black Bezel Momentary Push, Momentary Pull with 1NC and 1LONC Contact Blocks 47 X X X O O O Black Red Green E22FDB1S E22FDB2S E22FDB3S Red Green Amber E22HDB2X11S E22HDB3X11S E22HDB9X11S E22HDB2X10S E22HDB3X10S E22HDB9X10S Red Green Amber E22HDB2X11T E22HDB3X11T E22HDB9X11T E22HDB2X10T E22HDB3X10T E22HDB9X10T Red Green Amber E22HD2X11S E22HD3X11S E22HD9X11S E22HD2X10S E22HD3X10S E22HD9X10S Red Green Amber E22HD2X11T E22HD3X11T E22HD9X11T E22HD2X10T E22HD3X10T E22HD9X10T Red EM22HD2X11T EM22HD2X10T Red EM22HD2X11S EM22HD2X10S Momentary Push, Momentary Pull with 1NC and 1ECNO Contact Blocks X O O O O X Black Red Green E22FDB1T E22FDB2T E22FDB3T Plastic Operators -- Chrome Bezel Momentary Push, Momentary Pull with 1NC and 1LONC Contact Blocks X X X O O O Black Red Green E22FD1S E22FD2S E22FD3S Momentary Push, Momentary Pull with 1NC and 1ECNO Contact Blocks X O O O O X Black Red Green E22FD1T E22FD2T E22FD3T Metal Operators -- Chrome Bezel 3-Position Momentary Push and Pull -- 1NC and 1LONO Contact Block X O O O O X Red EM22FD2T 3-Position Momentary Push and Pull -- 1NC and IECNC Contact Block X X X O O O Red EM22FD2S X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89 Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 - 47-85 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 - 47-78 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-49 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Push-Pull Components Push-Pull Components -- Non-illuminated Operators Table 47-56. Non-illuminated Push-Pull Operators -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 E22 Series -- Plastic Operators Color Black Bezel Catalog Price Number U.S. $ E22 Black E22 Chrome EM22 Chrome Chrome Bezel Catalog Price Number U.S. $ EM22 Series -- Metal Operators Color Chrome Bezel Catalog Price Number U.S. $ 2-Position -- 40 mm Dia. Button (Maintained) Red EM22ED2 E22ED1 E22EDB1 Black E22ED2 E22EDB2 Red Green EM22ED3 E22ED3 E22EDB3 Green E22ED4 E22EDB4 Yellow E22ED5 E22EDB5 White E22ED6 E22EDB6 Blue E22ED7 E22EDB7 Gray E22ED8 Orange E22EDB8 3-Position -- 40 mm Dia. Button (Spring Return to Center) Red EM22FD2 E22FD1 E22FDB1 Black E22FD2 E22FDB2 Red Green EM22FD3 E22FD3 E22FDB3 Green E22FD4 E22FDB4 Yellow E22FD5 E22FDB5 White E22FD6 E22FDB6 Blue E22FD7 E22FDB7 Gray E22FD8 Orange E22FDB8 3-Position -- 40 mm Dia. Push-Pull Pushbutton (Spring Return to Center from Pulled Position) Red EM22FDM2 E22FDM1 E22FDMB1 Black E22FDM2 E22FDMB2 Red Green EM22FDM3 E22FDM3 E22FDMB3 Green E22FDM4 E22FDMB4 Yellow E22FDM5 E22FDMB5 White E22FDM6 E22FDMB6 Blue E22FDM7 E22FDMB7 Gray E22FDM8 Orange E22FDMB8 These operators can be supplied with EMERGENCY STOP marking (decal) on face ring. To order, add Suffix N8 to operator Catalog Number. Example: E22ED2N8. With Yellow field, Red letters, add N796. Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94. Contact Block Selection/Application Push-Pull operators will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (4 circuits, 2-position/2 circuits, 3-position). 5-way mounting adapters can only be used on 2-position Push-Pulls and are not suitable with 3-position Push-Pulls. See Page 47-77. Table 47-57. 2-Position Push-Pull Contact Block Required Suffix Catalog Code Number Circuit Price U.S. $ Maintained Circuit Operation Pulled E22B1 1NC X O A E22B2 1NO O X W E22B11 1NO-1NC X O O X V E22B20 2NO O O X X X = Closed Circuit Contact Block Required Suffix Catalog Code Number Circuit Price U.S. $ Maintained Circuit Operation Pulled Center E22B1 and E22B4 1NC 1NC X X O X O O T E22B1 and E22B5 1NC 1NO X O O O O X X = Closed Circuit O = Open Circuit Note: Add Contact Block Suffix Code from tables above to operator Catalog Number to order as a complete device. Example: E22ED1B = 2-position chrome bezel, Black button Push-Pull with 1NC contact block. O = Open Circuit Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . CA08102001E Pushed S Pushed B Table 47-58. 3-Position Push-Pull -- E22B2, E22B11 and E22B20 Cannot Be Used For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-89 Pages 47-74 - 47-78 Pages 47-87 - 47-88 Pages 47-79 - 47-85 Pages 47-70 - 47-73 Page 47-98 1CD1 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-50 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Push-Pull Components Push-Pull Components -- Illuminated Operators Note: Will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks when used with supplied 3-way adapter. 5-way mounting adapters are not to be used with 3-position operators, see Page 47-77. Table 47-59. Illuminated Push-Pull Operators -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 E22 Series -- Plastic Operators Color Black Bezel Catalog Number E22 Black E22 Chrome EM22 Series -- Metal Operators Chrome Bezel Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Color Price U.S. $ Chrome Bezel Catalog Number Price U.S. $ EM22 Chrome 2-Position -- 40 mm Diameter Lens (Maintained) Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber Clear E22GDB2 E22GDB3 E22GDB4 E22GDB5 E22GDB6 E22GDB9 E22GBD0 E22GD2 E22GD3 E22GD4 E22GD5 E22GD6 E22GD9 E22GD0 Red Green Amber EM22GD2 EM22GD3 EM22GD9 3-Position -- 40 mm Diameter Lens (Spring Return to Center) Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber Clear E22HDB2 E22HDB3 E22HDB4 E22HDB5 E22HDB6 E22HDB9 E22HDB0 E22HD2 E22HD3 E22HD4 E22HD5 E22HD6 E22HD9 E22HD0 Red Green Amber EM22HD2 EM22HD3 EM22HD9 3-Position -- 40 mm Dia. Push-Pull Pushbutton (Spring Return to Center from Pulled Position) Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber Clear 47 E22HDMB2 E22HDMB3 E22HDMB4 E22HDMB5 E22HDMB6 E22HDMB9 E22HDMB0 E22HDM2 E22HDM3 E22HDM4 E22HDM5 E22HDM6 E22HDM9 E22HDM0 Red Green Amber EM22HDM2 EM22HDM3 EM22HDM9 These operators can be supplied with EMERGENCY STOP marking (decal) on face ring. To order, add Suffix N8 to operator Catalog Number. Example: E22ED2N8. With Yellow field, Red letters, add N796. All illuminated Push-Pull operators require tall incandescent bulbs or tall LEDs from Table 47-103 or Table 47-104 (Page 47-73). 29.5 mm Diameter Button -- For Both Non-illuminated and Illuminated Push-Pull Operators For Push-Pull operator with 29.5 mm diameter button, replace 5th digit (D) of the listed Catalog Number with letter H. Example: E22EH1, black, nonilluminated 2-position push-pull operator with 29.5 mm diameter button. 29.5 mm Diameter Button Operator Note: Add Suffix Codes from the tables on Page 47-69 (Contact Blocks) and Pages 4770 - 47-71 (Light Units) to operator Catalog Number to order as a complete device. Example: E22GD2X4B = 2-position chrome bezel, Red button lens, 24V light unit PushPull with 1NC contact block. Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94. Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-89 Pages 47-74 - 47-78 Pages 47-87 - 47-88 Pages 47-79 - 47-85 Pages 47-70 - 47-73 Page 47-98 1CD1 CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-51 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices -- Selector Switches Selector Switch Units 45 45 Plastic Operators Black or Chrome Bezel Two-Position 45 Throw Knob or Lever Non-illuminated Table 47-60. Two-Position Selector Switch Units -- 45 Throw -- Cam 2 -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Action Operator Type Operator Position Cam -- 2 Price U.S. $ Catalog Number OX XO OX XO XO OX OX Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Plastic Operator -- Black Bezel M M M M M S M S Knob Lever E22XBF1A E22VBF1A E22XBF1C E22VBF1C E22XBF1WW E22VBF1WW Knob Lever E22XB51A E22VB51A E22XB51C E22VB51C E22XB51WW E22VB51WW Knob Lever E22XBE1A E22VBE1A E22XBE1C E22VBE1C E22XBE1WW E22VBE1WW Knob Lever E22XB61A E22VB61A E22XB61C E22VB61C E22XB61WW E22VB61WW Knob Lever E22XF1A E22VF1A E22XF1C E22VF1C E22XF1WW E22VF1WW Knob Lever E22X51A E22V51A E22X51C E22V51C E22X51WW E22V51WW Knob Lever E22XE1A E22VE1A E22XE1C E22XE1C E22XE1WW E22VE1WW Knob Lever E22X61A E22V61A E22X61C E22X61C E22X61WW E22V61WW Plastic Operator -- Chrome Bezel M M M M M S M S 47 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). To order with an alternate color, replace underlined digit (1) of listed Catalog Number with Code Number from table below. Example: 2-position operator with Red knob, E22XBF2A Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Black 1 Red 2 Green 3 Yellow 4 White 5 Blue 6 Gray 7 Orange 8 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Code Page 47-89 Page 47-86 Pages 47-74 - 47-78 1CD1 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-52 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices -- Selector Switches Selector Switch Units (Continued) 60 Plastic or Metal Operators Black or Chrome Bezel Two-Position 60 Throw Knob or Lever Non-illuminated 60 Table 47-61. Two-Position Selector Switch Units -- 60 Throw -- Cam 2 -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Operator Position Type Operator Action Cam -- 2 XO OX OX Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Catalog Number OX XO OX XO OX OX Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price Catalog U.S. $ Number Price U.S. $ Plastic Operator -- Black Bezel Knob Lever E22XBF61A E22VBF61A E22XBF61C E22VBF61C -- -- E22XBF61WW E22VBF61WW Knob Lever E22XB561A E22VB561A E22XB561C E22VB561C -- -- E22XB561WW E22VB561WW Knob Lever E22XBE61A E22VBE61A E22XBE61C E22VBE61C -- -- E22XBE61WW E22VBE61WW Knob Lever E22XB661A E22VB661A E22XB661C E22VB661C -- -- E22XB661WW E22VB661WW Knob Lever E22XF61A E22VF61A E22XF61C E22VF61C -- -- E22XF61WW E22VF61WW Knob Lever E22X561A E22V561A E22X561C E22V561C -- -- E22X561WW E22V561WW Knob Lever E22XE61A E22VE61A E22XE61C E22VE61C -- -- E22XE61WW E22VE61WW Knob Lever E22X661A E22V661A E22X661C E22V661C -- -- E22X661WW E22V661WW M M Knob Lever EM22X561A EM22V561A EM22X561C EM22V561C EM22X561D EM22V561D EM22X561WW EM22V561WW M S Knob Lever EM22X661A EM22V661A EM22X661C EM22V661C EM22X661D EM22V661D EM22X661WW EM22V661WW M Knob Lever EM22XF61A EM22VF61A EM22XF61C EM22VF61C EM22XF61D EM22VF61D EM22XF61WW EM22VF61WW Knob Lever EM22XE61A EM22VE61A EM22XE61C EM22VE61C EM22XE61D EM22VE61D EM22XE61WW EM22VE61WW M M M M M S M S Plastic Operator -- Chrome Bezel M M 47 M M M S M S Metal Operator -- Chrome Bezel M M S X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). To order with an alternate color, replace underlined digit (1) of listed Catalog Number with Code Number from table below. Example: 2-position operator with Red knob, E22XBF62A Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Black 1 Red 2 Green 3 Yellow 4 White 5 Blue 6 Gray 7 Orange 8 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89 Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-86 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 - 47-78 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-53 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices -- Selector Switches Selector Switch Units (Continued) Plastic Operators Black or Chrome Bezel Three-Position 45 Throw Knob or Lever Non-illuminated 45 45 Table 47-62. Three-Position Selector Switch Units -- 45 Throw -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Action Operator Type Operator Position -- Circuit Cam 1 Cam 2 Cam 3 XOO OOX Catalog Number XOO OXO OOX XOX OOX Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Plastic Operator -- Black Bezel M M Knob Lever E22XBG1D E22VBG1D E22XBH1D E22VBH1D E22XBG1RR E22VBG1RR Knob Lever E22XBN1D E22VBN1D E22XBP1D E22VBP1D E22XBN1RR E22VBN1RR Knob Lever E22XBL1D E22VBL1D E22XBM1D E22VBM1D E22XBL1RR E22VBL1RR Knob Lever E22XBJ1D E22VBJ1D E22XBK1D E22VBK1D E22XBJ1RR E22VBJ1RR Knob Lever E22XG1D E22VG1D E22XH1D E22VH1D E22XG1RR E22VG1RR Knob Lever E22XN1D E22VN1D E22XP1D E22VP1D E22XN1RR E22VN1RR Knob Lever E22XL1D E22VL1D E22XM1D E22VM1D E22XL1RR E22VL1RR Knob Lever E22XJ1D E22VJ1D E22XK1D E22VK1D E22XJ1RR E22VJ1RR M M M S M S S M S M Plastic Operator -- Chrome Bezel M M M M M S M S S M S 47 M X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). To order with an alternate color, replace underlined digit (1) of listed Catalog Number with Code Number from table below. Example: 3-position operator with Red knob, E22XBG2D Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Black 1 Red 2 Green 3 Yellow 4 White 5 Blue 6 Gray 7 Orange 8 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Code Page 47-89 Page 47-86 Pages 47-74 - 47-78 1CD1 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-54 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices -- Selector Switches Selector Switch Units (Continued) Plastic or Metal Operators Black or Chrome Bezel Three-Position 60 Throw Knob or Lever Non-illuminated 60 60 Table 47-63. Three-Position Selector Switch Units -- 60 Throw -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Action Operator Position Operator Type Cam 1 Cam 2 Cam 3 XOO OOX Catalog Number XOO OXO OOX XOX OOX Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Plastic Operator -- Black Bezel M M M M M S M S S M S M Knob Lever E22XBG61D E22VBG61D E22XBH61D E22VBH61D E22XBG61RR E22VBG61RR Knob Lever E22XBN61D E22VBN61D E22XBP61D E22VBP61D E22XBN61RR E22VBN61RR Knob Lever E22XBL61D E22VBL61D E22XBM61D E22VBM61D E22XBL61RR E22VBL61RR Knob Lever E22XBJ61D E22VBJ61D E22XBK61D E22VBK61D E22XBJ61RR E22VBJ61RR Knob Lever E22XG61D E22VG61D E22XH61D E22VH61D E22XG61RR E22VG61RR Knob Lever E22XN61D E22VN61D E22XP61D E22VP61D E22XN61RR E22VN61RR Knob Lever E22XL61D E22VL61D E22XM61D E22VM61D E22XL61RR E22VL61RR Knob Lever E22XJ61D E22VJ61D E22XK61D E22VK61D E22XJ61RR E22VJ61RR Knob Lever EM22XG61D EM22VG61D EM22XH61D EM22VH61D EM22XG61RR EM22VG61RR Knob Lever EM22XN61D EM22VN61D EM22XP61D EM22VP61D EM22XN61RR EM22VN61RR Knob Lever EM22XL61D EM22VL61D EM22XM61D EM22VM61D EM22XL61RR EM22VL61RR Knob Lever EM22XJ61D EM22VJ61D EM22XK61D EM22VK61D EM22XJ61RR EM22VJ61RR Plastic Operator -- Chrome Bezel M M M M M 47 S M S S M S M Metal Operator -- Chrome Bezel M M M M M S M S S M S M X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). To order with an alternate color, replace underlined digit (1) of listed Catalog Number with Code Number from table below. Example: 3-position operator with Red knob, E22XBG62D Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Black 1 Red 2 Green 3 Yellow 4 White 5 Blue 6 Gray 7 Orange 8 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89 Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-86 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 - 47-78 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-55 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Selector Switch Components Selector Switches 45 Throw Non-illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches -- Plastic Note: Will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (4 circuits) with supplied 3-way mounting adapter. Optional 5-way adapter will accept a maximum of 5 contact blocks (10 circuits). See Page 47-77. Table 47-64. 45 Throw Non-illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operating Mode M = Maintained S = Momentary Left Black Bezel, Lever Chrome Bezel, Lever Center Cam Code Right Plastic -- Black Bezel Plastic -- Chrome Bezel Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Price U.S. $ 2-Position -- 45 Throw -- Black Lever -- M M -- M M 2 2 E22VBF1 E22VB51 E22VF1 E22V51 -- M M -- S S 2 2 E22VBE1 E22VB61 E22VE1 E22V61 3-Position -- 45 Throw -- Black Lever Black Bezel, Lever Chrome Bezel, Lever M M M M M M 1 2 E22VBG1 E22VBH1 E22VG1 E22VH1 S S M M M M 1 2 E22VBJ1 E22VBK1 E22VJ1 E22VK1 S S M M S S 1 2 E22VBL1 E22VBM1 E22VL1 E22VM1 M M M M S S 1 2 E22VBN1 E22VBP1 E22VN1 E22VP1 2-Position -- 45 Throw -- Black Knob -- M M -- M M 2 2 E22XBF1 E22XB51 E22XF1 E22X51 -- M M -- S S 2 2 E22XBE1 E22XB61 E22XE1 E22X61 3-Position -- 45 Throw -- Black Knob 47 M M M M M M 1 2 E22XBG1 E22XBH1 E22XG1 E22XH1 S S M M M M 1 2 E22XBJ1 E22XBK1 E22XJ1 E22XK1 S S M M S S 1 2 E22XBL1 E22XBM1 E22XL1 E22XM1 M M M M S S 1 2 E22XBN1 E22XBP1 E22XN1 E22XP1 Listed selector switches are supplied as standard with Black levers or knobs. To select an alternate color, change the last digit (underlined) in the listed Catalog Number using Code Number from following table. Example: E22VE2 -- Two-Position Selector Switch with Red Lever. Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Black 1 Red 2 Green 3 Yellow 4 White 5 Blue 6 Gray 7 Orange 8 Code Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94. Ordering Example -- A complete Non-illuminated Selector Switch consists of the following: Operator See Above Legend Plate See Page 47-86 Mounting Adapter (Supplied with Operator). For 5-Way Adapter, See Page 47-77 Contact Blocks See Page 47-69 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 - 47-78 Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-56 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Selector Switch Components Selector Switches (Continued) 60 Throw Non-illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches Note: Will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (4 circuits) with supplied 3-way mounting adapter. Optional 5-way adapter will accept a maximum of 5 contact blocks (10 circuits). See Page 47-77. Table 47-65. 60 Throw Non-illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operating Mode M = Maintained S = Momentary Left E22 Black Bezel, Lever E22 Chrome Bezel, Lever EM22 Black Lever Center Cam Code E22 Series -- Plastic Operators Black Bezel Right Catalog Number Price U.S. $ EM22 Series -- Metal Operators Chrome Bezel Chrome Bezel Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Price U.S. $ 2-Position -- 60 Throw -- Black Lever -- M M -- M M 2 2 E22VBF61 E22VB561 E22VF61 E22V561 EM22VF61 EM22V561 -- M M -- S S 2 2 E22VBE61 E22VB661 E22VE61 E22V661 EM22VE61 EM22V661 3-Position -- 60 Throw -- Black Lever E22 Black Bezel, Knob E22 Chrome Bezel, Knob EM22 Black Knob 47 M M M M M M 1 2 E22VBG61 E22VBH61 E22VG61 E22VH61 EM22VG61 EM22VH61 S S M M M M 1 2 E22VBJ61 E22VBK61 E22VJ61 E22VK61 EM22VJ61 EM22VK61 S S M M S S 1 2 E22VBL61 E22VBM61 E22VL61 E22VM61 EM22VL61 EM22VM61 M M M M S S 1 2 E22VBN61 E22VBP61 E22VN61 E22VP61 EM22VN61 EM22VP61 2-Position -- 60 Throw -- Black Knob -- M M -- M M 2 2 E22XBF61 E22XB561 E22XF61 E22X561 EM22XF61 EM22X561 -- M M -- S S 2 2 E22XBE61 E22XB661 E22XE61 E22X661 EM22XE61 EM22X661 3-Position -- 60 Throw -- Black Knob M M M M M M 1 2 E22XBG61 E22XBH61 E22XG61 E22XH61 EM22XG61 EM22XH61 S S M M M M 1 2 E22XBJ61 E22XBK61 E22XJ61 E22XK61 EM22XJ61 EM22XK61 S S M M S S 1 2 E22XBL61 E22XBM61 E22XL61 E22XM61 EM22XL61 EM22XM61 M M M M S S 1 2 E22XBN61 E22XBP61 E22XN61 E22XP61 EM22XN61 EM22XP61 Listed selector switches are supplied as standard with Black levers or knobs. To select an alternate color, change the last digit (underlined) in the listed Catalog Number using Code Number from following table. Example: E22VE62 -- Two-Position Selector Switch with Red Lever. Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Black 1 Red 2 Green 3 Yellow 4 White 5 Blue 6 Gray 7 Orange 8 Code Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94. Ordering Example -- A complete Non-illuminated Selector Switch consists of the following: Operator See Above Legend Plate See Page 47-86 Mounting Adapter (Supplied with Operator). For 5-Way Adapter, See Page 47-77 Contact Blocks See Page 47-69 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 - 47-78 Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-57 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Key Operated Selector Switch Components Selector Switches (Continued) Key Operated Selector Switches Note: Key removal from maintained positions only -- will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (4 circuits) with supplied 3-way mounting adapter. Optional 5-way adapter will accept a maximum of 5 contact blocks (10 circuits). Table 47-66. Key Operated Selector Switches -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operating Mode M = Maintained S = Momentary Left Center Cam Code E22 Series -- Plastic Operators Black Bezel Right 45 Catalog Number EM22 Series -- Metal Operators Chrome Bezel Price U.S. $ 45 Catalog Number Chrome Bezel Price U.S. $ 60 Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Allowable Key Removal Positions 2-Position Plastic Black Bezel M M -- -- M S 2 2 E22KB53 E22KB62 E22K53 E22K62 -- -- 1, 2 -- -- -- M M M S 2 2 E22KBF5 E22KBE4 E22KF5 E22KE4 EM22KF65 EM22KE64 1, 4 -- 3-Position Plastic Chrome Bezel Metal Chrome Bezel M M M M M M 1 2 E22KBG7 E22KBH7 E22KG7 E22KH7 EM22KG67 EM22KH67 1-6 1-6 S S M M M M 1 2 E22KBJ5 E22KBK5 E22KJ5 E22KK5 EM22KJ65 EM22KK65 1, 4 1, 4 S S M M S S 1 2 E22KBL4 E22KBM4 E22KL4 E22KM4 EM22KL64 EM22KM64 -- -- M M M M S S 1 2 E22KBN6 E22KBP6 E22KN6 E22KP6 EM22KN66 EM22KP66 2, 4 2, 4 To order operator with other than standard key removal position(s), select allowable option from table below and change last (underlined) digit of listed Catalog Number using Suffix Code shown. Example: E22KG66 -- Three-Position Selector Switch with key removable from Left and Center positions. To order a different key and lock assembly, add suffix B1, C1, D1, E1 or F1 to the end of the Catalog Number. Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94. Table 47-67. Key Removal Options Key Removal Position Code Key Removal Suffix Position Right Only 1 Left Only 2 Right and Left 3 Table 47-68. Spare Keys Code Key Removal Suffix Position Center Only 4 Right and Center 5 Left and Center 6 Right, Left and Center Code Suffix Description Reference Number Stamped on Key Catalog Number 7 Standard Lock 92239 E22KS2 Master Key For 95000 Series Locks E22KM95 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Price U.S. $ 47 Page 47-89 Page 47-69 Page 47-98 1CD1 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-58 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Selector Switch Components Illuminated Selector Switches 45 Throw Illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches -- Plastic Note: Will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (4 circuits) with supplied 3-way mounting adapter. Optional 5-way adapter will accept a maximum of 4 contact blocks (8 circuits). Table 47-69. 45 Throw Illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operating Mode M = Maintained S = Momentary Left Black Bezel Chrome Bezel Center Cam Code Right E22 Series -- Plastic Operators Black Bezel Catalog Number Chrome Bezel Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ 2-Position -- 45 Throw -- Red Lever -- M M -- M M 2 2 E22WBF2 E22WB52 E22WF2 E22W52 -- M M -- S S 2 2 E22WBE2 E22WB62 E22WE2 E22W62 3-Position -- 45 Throw -- Red Lever Black Bezel Chrome Bezel M M M M M M 1 2 E22WBG2 E22WBH2 E22WG2 E22WH2 S S M M M M 1 2 E22WBJ2 E22WBK2 E22WJ2 E22WK2 S S M M S S 1 2 E22WBL2 E22WBM2 E22WL2 E22WM2 M M M M S S 1 2 E22WBN2 E22WBP2 E22WN2 E22WP2 2-Position -- 45 Throw -- Red Knob 47 -- M M -- M M 2 2 E22SBF2 E22SB52 E22SF2 E22S52 -- M M -- S S 2 2 E22SBE2 E22SB62 E22SE2 E22S62 3-Position -- 45 Throw -- Red Knob M M M M M M 1 2 E22SBG2 E22SBH2 E22SG2 E22SH2 S S M M M M 1 2 E22SBJ2 E22SBK2 E22SJ2 E22SK2 S S M M S S 1 2 E22SBL2 E22SBM2 E22SL2 E22SM2 M M M M S S 1 2 E22SBN2 E22SBP2 E22SN2 E22SP2 Listed selector switches are supplied as standard with Red levers or knobs. To select an alternate color, change the last digit (underlined) in the listed Catalog Number using Code Number from following table. Example: E22WF3 -- Two-Position Selector Switch with Green Lever. Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Red 2 Green 3 Yellow 4 White 5 Blue 6 Amber 9 Clear 0 Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94. Ordering Example -- A complete Illuminated Selector Switch consists of the following: Operator See Above Legend Plate See Page 47-86 Mounting Adapter (Supplied with Operator). For 5-Way Adapter, See Page 47-77 Light Unit with Tall Incandescent Bulb/LED See Pages 47-70 - 47-71 Contact Blocks See Page 47-69 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 - 47-78 Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-59 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Selector Switch Components Illuminated Selector Switches (Continued) 60 Throw Illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches Note: Will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (4 circuits) with standard mounting adapter supplied. Optional 5-way adapter will accept a maximum of 4 contact blocks (8 circuits). Table 47-70. 60 Throw Illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operating Mode M = Maintained S = Momentary Left E22 Black Bezel E22 Chrome Bezel Center Cam Code E22 Series -- Plastic Operators E2M2 Series -- Metal Operators Black Bezel Right Catalog Number Chrome Bezel Price U.S. $ EM22 Chrome 2-Position -- 60 Throw -- Red Lever Bezel -- M M 2 E22WBF62 M -- M 2 E22WB562 -- M M -- S S 2 2 E22WBE62 E22WB662 Catalog Number Chrome Bezel Price U.S. $ Catalog Number E22WF62 E22W562 EM22WF62 EM22W562 E22WE62 E22W662 EM22WE62 EM22W662 Price U.S. $ 3-Position -- 60 Throw -- Red Lever M M M M M M 1 2 E22WBG62 E22WBH62 E22WG62 E22WH62 EM22WG62 EM22WH62 S S M M M M 1 2 E22WBJ62 E22WBK62 E22WJ62 E22WK62 EM22WJ62 EM22WK62 S S M M S S 1 2 E22WBL62 E22WBM62 E22WL62 E22WM62 EM22WL62 EM22WM62 M M M M S S 1 2 E22WBN62 E22WBP62 E22WN62 E22WP62 EM22WN62 EM22WP62 2-Position -- 60 Throw -- Red Knob -- M M -- M M 2 2 E22SBF62 E22SB562 E22SF62 E22S562 EM22SF62 EM22S562 -- M M -- S S 2 2 E22SBE62 E22SB662 E22SE62 E22S662 EM22SE62 EM22S662 47 3-Position -- 60 Throw -- Red Knob M M M M M M 1 2 E22SBG62 E22SBH62 E22SG62 E22SH62 EM22SG62 EM22SH62 S S M M M M 1 2 E22SBJ62 E22SBK62 E22SJ62 E22SK62 EM22SJ62 EM22SK62 S S M M S S 1 2 E22SBL62 E22SBM62 E22SL62 E22SM62 EM22SL62 EM22SM62 M M M M S S 1 2 E22SBN62 E22SBP62 E22SN62 E22SP62 EM22SN62 EM22SP62 Listed selector switches are supplied as standard with Red levers or knobs. To select an alternate color, change the last digit (underlined) in the listed Catalog Number using Code Number from following table. Example: E22WF63 -- Two-Position Selector Switch with Green Lever. Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Red 2 Green 3 Yellow 4 White 5 Blue 6 Amber 9 Clear 0 Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94. Ordering Example -- A complete Illuminated Selector Switch consists of the following: Operator See Above Legend Plate See Page 47-86 Mounting Adapter (Supplied with Operator). For 5-Way Adapter, See Page 47-77 Light Unit with Tall Incandescent Bulb/LED See Pages 47-70 - 47-71 Contact Blocks See Page 47-69 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 - 47-78 Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47-60 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Selector Switch Selection Selector Switch Selection Cam and Contact Block Selection Cam and Contact Block Selection -- For 2- and 3-Position Selector Switches Table 47-71. 2-Position Switches 1. Develop a line circuit diagram required for each application. Then, by using the symbols "X" for contact closed and "O" for contact open, determine the contact state required in each selector switch position. 2. Visually locate the closure sequence in one of the 2- or 3Position Selector Switch Combination tables on Pages 47-60 - 47-61. 3. Find the contact block(s), their Suffix Code letter(s) and their mounting location(s) required for that circuit configuration, by referring to the table next to the "X O" closure sequence that was selected. Example: HAND-OFF-AUTO function, two circuits are required -- Circuit #1 -- X O O This can be achieved using Cam 1 with an E22B2 contact block mounted in the left (1-) position. Circuit #2 -- O O X This can be achieved using Cam 1 with an E22B2 block mounted in the right (2-) position. Order a 3-Position Selector Switch with Cam #1 -- Example: E22VG1, along with 2 E22B2 Contact Blocks. Note: Contact Blocks must be mounted in position indicated. Selector switches will not accept a contact block in position 3 of the mounting adapter. If more circuits and/or different circuit arrangements are required, see Rotary Cam Selector Switches listed on Pages 47-62 - 47-63 and 47-95 - 47-96. 3 2 1 1- 3- 5 25- 1- 4 2 3 1 3- 2- 4- 47 1- 2- 3- Contact Block Mounting Position Numbers Molded in 3-Way Mounting Adapter Circuit Cam Catalog Number of Contact Block(s)/ Mounting Position O X 2 E22B2 or E22B2 A X O 2 E22B1 or E22B1 B O X X O 2 E22B11 -- W O X X O 2 E22B2 E22B1 C O O X X 2 E22B20 -- V O O X X 2 E22B2 E22B2 D X X O O 2 E22B1 E22B1 E O O O X X X 2 E22B20 E22B2 VA X O X O X O 2 E22B1 E22B11 WB X O O O X X 2 E22B1 E22B20 VB O X O X O X 2 E22B11 E22B2 WA O O O O X X X X 2 E22B20 E22B20 VV O O O X X X X O 2 E22B20 E22B11 VW O X O X X O X O 2 E22B11 E22B11 WW 1&5 Code Suffix 2&4 5- 1- 3- 2- 4- Contact Block Mounting Position Numbers Molded in 5-Way Mounting Adapter, See Accessories for 5-Way Adapter -- Page 47-72 Figure 47-16. Contact Block Mounting For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-61 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Selector Switch Selection Cam and Contact Block Selection (Continued) Table 47-72. 3-Position Switches Circuit Table 47-72. 3-Position Switches (Continued) Cam Catalog Number Code of Contact Block(s) Suffix Mounting Position 1&5 Cam Catalog Number Code of Contact Block(s) Suffix Mounting Position 2&4 X O O 1 E22B2 -- A O O X 1 -- E22B2 A O X X 1 E22B1 -- B X X O 1 -- E22B1 B X O X 2 E22B2 -- A O X O 2 E22B1 -- B O O X 2 -- E22B2 A X X O 2 -- E22B1 B X O O O O X 1 E22B2 E22B2 D X X O X O O 1 E22B2 E22B1 C O O X O X X 1 E22B1 E22B2 C O X X X X O 1 E22B1 E22B1 E X O O X O X 1 E22B11 -- W X X O O O O 1 E22B20 -- V O X O X X O 1 -- E22B11 W O O O O X X 1 -- E22B20 V X O O X O O 1 E22B11 E22B1 PP X O O O X X 2 E22B2 E22B2 D X X O X X O 2 E22B2 E22B1 C O O X O O X 2 E22B1 E22B2 C O X X X O O 2 E22B1 E22B1 E X O O X X O 2 E22B11 -- W X X O O X X 2 E22B20 -- V O X O X X O 2 E22B11 -- W O O O O X X 2 -- E22B20 V CA08102001E Circuit 1&5 2&4 Table 47-72. 3-Position Switches (Continued) Circuit Cam Catalog Number Code of Contact Block(s) Suffix Mounting Position 1&5 2&4 X O X O O X O X O 1 E22B2 E22B11 WA X O X O X X X O O 2 E22B11 E22B1 WB X O O O O O O X X 1 E22B2 E22B20 VA X X X O O X X X O 2 E22B20 E22B1 VB O O X X O X X X O 1 E22B1 E22B11 WB E22B11 WW X X X 1 E22B1 E22B20 VB O X X O E22B11 X O O O X O X 1 O O O X O O X E22B20 VW O X X 1 E22B11 E22B2 WA O X X X E22B11 O X O O X O O 1 X O O X O O O VW 1 E22B20 E22B2 VA O O X O E22B11 O O X O O O X E22B20 O O O X X O X 1 X X O X O X O X X O X O 1 E22B11 E22B1 WB E22B20 VV O O O 1 E22B20 E22B1 VB O O X X E22B20 O O X O O O O 1 X X X X X O O E22B11 WW O O X 1 E22B11 E22B11 RR X O X O E22B11 O X O O X O X 2 X O O X O O X VW 2 E22B2 E22B11 WA X O X X E22B20 X X O O X O O E22B11 O O X X O O O 2 X O X X O O O O O X X X 2 E22B2 E22B20 VA X X O X O O O X X X X O 2 E22B20 E22B11 VW O O X X O X O X O 2 E22B1 E22B11 WB X O O O X X 2 E22B1 E22B20 VB O O O O X X X X 2 O O O X X O O X O O O X O X O X 2 E22B11 E22B2 WA X X O O O O X X X 2 E22B20 E22B2 VA For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 E22B20 E22B20 VV Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-62 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices -- Rotary Cam Selector Switch Units Rotary Cam Selector Switch Units Plastic Operator Black or Chrome Bezel Four- to Six-Position Knob, Lever or Key Version Non-illuminated Table 47-73. Four- to Six-Position Selector Switch Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Contact block rating, see Page Terminal Contact Sequence 47-95. Includes contact blocks. Numbers O = Circuit Open; Components overpacked in a X = Circuit Closed single carton. Switch Position Operator (45 Throw Type Between Each Position -- Except as Noted) Black Bezel Catalog Number Chrome Bezel Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Four-Position Maintained 0 Terminal Locations Top View 1 2 3 4 1-2 5-6 7-8 3-4 X O O O O X O O O O X O O O O X 1-2 5-6 3-4 7-8 X O O O O X O O O O X O O O O X X O O O X O O O X O O O 1-2 5-6 3-4 (60 Throw) 2 1 1 0 Lever Knob E22JDBN1 E22LDBN1 E22JDN1 E22LDN1 4 Lever Knob Key E22JDB4W1 E22LDB4W1 E22KDB4W8 E22JD4W1 E22LD4W1 E22KD4W8 3 Lever Knob Key E22JDB4Y1 E22LDB4Y1 E22KDB4Y8 E22JD4Y1 E22LD4Y1 E22KD4Y8 4 Lever Knob Key E22JDB5W1 E22LDB5W1 E22KDB5W8 E22JD5W1 E22LD5W1 E22KD5W8 4 Lever Knob Key E22JDB5Y1 E22LDB5Y1 E22KDB5Y8 E22JD5Y1 E22LD5Y1 E22KD5Y8 5 Lever Knob Key E22JDB6W1 E22LDB6W1 E22KDB6W8 E22JD6W1 E22LD6W1 E22KD6W8 4 Lever Knob Key E22JDB6Y1 E22LDB6Y1 E22KDB6Y8 E22JD6Y1 E22LD6Y1 E22KD6Y8 3 2 1 4 3 2 Five-Position Maintained 0 2 6 10 1-2 5-6 9 - 10 7-8 3-4 1 5 9 O O O O 1-2 5-6 3-4 7-8 Bottom View 1 2 3 4 5 X O O O O O X O O O O O X O O O O O X O O O O O X X O O O O X O O O O X O O O O X 2 1 1 0 3 5 2 3 Six-Position Maintained 47 0 3 7 11 4 8 12 1-2 5-6 9 - 10 11 - 12 3-4 7-8 O O O O O 1-2 5-6 7-8 9 - 10 3-4 1 2 3 4 5 6 X O O O O O O X O O O O O O X O O O O O O X O O O O O O X O O O O O O X X O O O O O X O O O O O X O O O O O X O O O O O X 2 1 3 4 6 1 0 2 3 5 Listed selector switches are supplied as standard with Black levers or knobs. To select an alternate color, change the last digit in the listed Catalog Number using Code Number from following table. Example: E22LDN2 -- four-position selector switch with Red knob. Key removable in all maintained positions (no alternates). Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Black 1 Red 2 Green 3 Yellow 4 White 5 Blue 6 Gray 7 Orange 8 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact Block Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates and Dimensions . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Code Page 47-89 Page 47-95 Page 47-96 Page 47-86 1CD1 CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-63 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices -- Rotary Cam Selector Switch Units Rotary Cam Selector Switch Units (Continued) Plastic Operators Black or Chrome Bezel Seven- and Eight-Position Knob, Lever or Key Version Non-illuminated Table 47-74. Seven- and Eight-Position Selector Switch Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Contact block ratings, Terminal Contact Sequence see Page 47-95. Includes Numbers O = Circuit Open; contact blocks. X = Circuit Closed Components overpacked in a single carton. Switch Position Operator (45 Lever Throw Type Between Each Position) Black Bezel Catalog Number Chrome Bezel Price Catalog U.S. $ Number Price U.S. $ Seven-Position Maintained 0 1-2 5-6 9 - 10 13 - 14 3-4 7-8 11 - 12 O O O O O O 1-2 5-6 9 - 10 11 - 12 3-4 7-8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O X X O O O O O O X O O O O O O X O O O O O O X O O O O O O X O O O O O O X 2 1 3 5 7 1 0 4 2 E22JDB7W1 E22LDB7W1 E22KDB7W8 E22JD7W1 E22LD7W1 E22KD7W8 Lever Knob Key E22JDB7Y1 E22LDB7Y1 E22KDB7Y8 E22JD7Y1 E22LD7Y1 E22KD7Y8 Lever Knob Key E22JDB8W1 E22LDB8W1 E22KDB8W8 E22JD8W1 E22LD8W1 E22KD8W8 6 3 4 6 Lever Knob Key 5 Eight-Position Maintained 0 1-2 5-6 9 - 10 13 - 14 3-4 7-8 11 - 12 15 - 16 1-2 5-6 9 - 10 13 - 14 3-4 7-8 11 - 12 O O O O O O O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O X X O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O X 2 1 8 3 4 5 7 6 47 1 0 7 2 3 4 6 E22JD8Y1 E22LD8Y1 E22KD8Y8 E22JDB8Y1 E22LDB8Y1 E22KDB8Y8 Lever Knob Key 5 Listed selector switches are supplied as standard with Black levers or knobs. To select an alternate color, change the last digit in the listed Catalog Number using Code Number from following table. Example: E22LDN2 -- four-position selector switch with Red knob. Key removable in all maintained positions (no alternates). Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Black 1 Red 2 Green 3 Yellow 4 White 5 Blue 6 Gray 7 Orange 8 Contact Block Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-95 Custom Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-96 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-64 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Specialty Operators Specialty Operators Table 47-75. Potentiometers with Knob Operator -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Ohms 0.5 Watt Max./120V Max. E22 Plastic -- Black Bezel Catalog Number Order Legend Plate from Below 2 Watt Max./120V Max. E22 Plastic -- Chrome Bezel Price Catalog U.S. $ Number EM22 Metal -- Chrome Bezel Price Catalog U.S. $ Number E22 Plastic -- Black Bezel Price Catalog U.S. $ Number E22 Plastic -- Chrome Bezel Price Catalog U.S. $ Number EM22 Metal -- Chrome Bezel Price Catalog U.S. $ Number Price U.S. $ 1,000 2,500 5,000 E22PXB1C1 E22PXB1C2 E22PXB1C5 E22PX1C1 E22PX1C2 E22PX1C5 EM22PX1C1 EM22PX1C2 EM22PX1C5 E22PXB1F1 E22PXB1F2 E22PXB1F5 E22PX1F1 E22PX1F2 E22PX1F5 EM22PX1F1 EM22PX1F2 EM22PX1F5 10,000 25,000 50,000 E22PXB1C10 E22PXB1C25 E22PXB1C50 E22PX1C10 E22PX1C25 E22PX1C50 EM22PX1C10 EM22PX1C25 EM22PX1C50 E22PXB1F10 E22PXB1F25 E22PXB1F50 E22PX1F10 E22PX1F25 E22PX1F50 EM22PX1F10 EM22PX1F25 EM22PX1F50 E22PX1C0 EM22PX1C0 E22PXB1F0 E22PX1F0 EM22PX1F0 Operator E22PXB1C0 Only Potentiometers are not IP1X or IP2X rated. Table 47-76. Potentiometer Legend Plate 4 5 6 3 7 1 9 2 Description Catalog Number Potentiometer Legend Plate E22NJP99 Price U.S. $ 8 0 10 Table 47-77. Flush Pushbutton Operators with Mechanical Push Rod -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Description Color Plastic -- Black Bezel Catalog Number 25 mm Diameter Flush Pushbutton Operators supplied with Mechanical Push Rod -- Suitable for external mechanical reset of overload relays. Push rod must be cut to desired length. 47 Gray Blue Red Blue (RESET) Plastic -- Chrome Bezel Price U.S. $ E22PB7L E22PB6L E22PB2L E22PB6N29L Catalog Number Price U.S. $ E22P7L E22P6L E22P2L E22P6N29L Table 47-78. Wobble Stick Operator -- UL (NEMA) 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Description Catalog Number E22 Series E22 Series -- Plastic Wobble Stick -- Allows activation of controls by pushing stick in any direction. E22WS EM22 Series EM22 Series -- Metal Wobble Stick -- Allows activation of controls by pushing stick in any direction. EM22WS Price U.S. $ Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94. Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-89 Page 47-69 Pages 47-87 - 47-88 Pages 47-79 - 47-85 Page 47-98 1CD1 CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-65 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Double Headed Pushbutton Components Double Headed Pushbuttons Table 47-79. Illuminated and Non-illuminated Double Headed Pushbuttons -- UL (NEMA) Type 1; IP40 Description Operator Colors Marking Plastic -- Black Bezel Catalog Price Number U.S. $ Non-illuminated Double Headed Pushbutton Non-illuminated Double Headed Pushbutton with 1NO and 1NC Contact Block Illuminated Double Headed Pushbutton with Clear Lens Green -- Red Green -- Red Unmarked I E22DB1A11 E22DB1A21 Green -- Red Green -- Red Unmarked I E22DB1A11C E22DB1A21C Green -- Red Unmarked E22DB1A10 Green -- Red Green -- Red Green -- Red I Unmarked I E22DB1A20 E22DB1A10X11 E22DB1A20X11 Green -- Red Green -- Red Unmarked I E22DB1A10X11C E22DB1A20X11C Illuminated Double Headed Pushbutton with Clear Lens, and 120V Transformer Light Unit Illuminated Double Headed Pushbutton with Clear Lens, 120V Transformer Light Unit and 1NO and 1NC Contact Block Dimensions C A B Clear Boot For lens colors other than clear, replace the 0 above with the appropriate Color Code from Table 47-83 on Page 47-66. For light units other than 120V transformer, replace the X11 code above with the appropriate Suffix from Table 47-81 on Page 47-66. Table 47-80. Illuminated and Non-illuminated Double Headed Pushbuttons -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13; IP65 Description Operator Colors Marking Plastic -- Black Bezel Catalog Price Number U.S. $ Non-illuminated Double Headed Pushbutton Non-illuminated Double Headed Pushbutton with 1NO and 1NC Contact Block Illuminated Double Headed Pushbutton with Clear Lens Green -- Red Green -- Red Unmarked O E22DB1B11 E22DB1B21 Green -- Red Green -- Red Unmarked O E22DB1B11C E22DB1B21C Green -- Red Green -- Red Green -- Red Green -- Red Unmarked O Unmarked O E22DB1B10 E22DB1B20 E22DB1B10X11 E22DB1B20X11 Green -- Red Green -- Red Unmarked O E22DB1B10X11C E22DB1B20X11C Illuminated Double Headed Pushbutton with Clear Lens, and 120V Transformer Light Unit Illuminated Double Headed Pushbutton with Clear Lens, 120V Transformer Light Unit and 1NO and 1NC Contact Block Dimensions C 47 A B Clear Boot For lens colors other than clear, replace the 0 above with the appropriate Color Code from Table 47-83 on Page 47-66. For light units other than 120V transformer, replace the X11 code above with the appropriate Suffix from Table 47-81 on Page 47-66. IP65 or UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 versions include protective silicon boot E22DBB. Note: Add Contact Block Suffix from table on Page 47-98 to operator Catalog Number to order as a complete device. Example: E22DB1A11B = non-illuminated double headed pushbutton, unmarked, IP40 with 1NC contact block. Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-69 Pages 47-87 - 47-88 Page 47-98 1CD1 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-66 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Double Headed Pushbutton Components Double Headed Pushbuttons (Continued) Table 47-81. Light Unit Description Direct Voltage Unit AC/DC Without Lamp Without Lamp With 6V Lamp With 12V Lamp With 24V Lamp With 48V Lamp With 60V Lamp Resistor Type Unit AC/DC 120V/60 Hz Transformer Unit AC Only 120V/60 Hz 240V/60 Hz 480V/60 Hz Silicon Boot for IP65 Ingress Protection Suffix Code Catalog Number X1 X1 X2 X3 X4 X6 X7 E22D E22DE E22D6 E22D12 E22D24 E22D50 E22D60 X10 E22R2 X11 X12 X14 -- E22TL1 E22TL2 E22TL4 E22DBB Price U.S. $ Additional light units -- See Pages 47-70 - 47-71. Table 47-82. Light Unit Specifications Catalog Number Function Bulb Type Max. Voltage E22D Indicating Light Illuminated Operator Illuminated Operator Incandescent, LED or Neon Incandescent LED or Neon 250V 60V 120V E22DE Table 47-83. Lens Color Table 47-84. Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm) Lens Color Color Code Clear Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber 0 2 3 4 5 6 9 Dimension A Dimension B Dimension C With Boot Without Boot 1.19 (30.2) 2.28 (57.9) 0.68 (17.3) 1.11 (28.2) 2.20 (55.9) 0.48 (12.2) 47 Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-69 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 - 47-88 Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-67 January 2010 EM22 Series, Complete Devices -- Joystick Units Joystick Complete Devices Momentary and Maintained Joystick Switches Table 47-85. Joystick Switches -- UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Position Description Catalog Number 2-Position Momentary Joystick Switch Momentary Joystick Switch with Center Lock EM22JS2Y2X EM22JS2Y4X Maintained Joystick Switch Maintained Joystick Switch with Center Lock EM22JS2Y3X EM22JS2Y5X Momentary Joystick Switch Momentary Joystick Switch with Center Lock EM22JS4Y2X EM22JS4Y4X Maintained Joystick Switch Maintained Joystick Switch with Center Lock EM22JS4Y3X EM22JS4Y5X 4-Position Price U.S. $ Note: Dimensions are listed on Page 47-89. Table 47-86. Visual Aid Plates Description Catalog Number 70 mm Diameter Oval -- Black (Blank) 70 mm Diameter Oval -- Black with 2 Arrows E22VA20 70 mm Diameter Round -- Black (Blank) E22VA30 70 mm Diameter Round -- Black with 2 Arrows E22VA31 70 mm Diameter Round -- Black with 4 Arrows E22VA32 Price U.S. $ E22VA21 Table 47-87. Contact Sequence for Two-Position Joystick Contact Blocks Circuit 14 24 13 23 Joystick Operator Position (X = Closed, O = Open) Location Term No. Up Center Down NO Top 14 - 13 O O X NO Bottom 24 - 23 X O O Table 47-88. Contact Sequence for Four-Position Joystick Contact Blocks 14 24 13 23 34 44 33 43 Joystick Operator Position (X = Closed, O = Open) Left Center Down 47 Circuit Position Location Term No. Up NO Front Top 14 - 13 O O O X Right NO Front Bottom 24 - 23 O O O O X NO Back Top 34 - 33 X O O O O NO Back Bottom 44 - 43 O X O O O O Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-68 January 2010 EM22 Series -- Joystick Components EM22 Series, Joystick Components Momentary and Maintained Joystick Operators Table 47-89. Joystick Operators -- UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Position Description Catalog Number 2-Position Momentary Joystick Operator Momentary Joystick Operator with Center Lock EM22JS2Y2 EM22JS2Y4 Maintained Joystick Operator Maintained Joystick Operator with Center Lock EM22JS2Y3 EM22JS2Y5 Momentary Joystick Operator Momentary Joystick Operator with Center Lock EM22JS4Y2 EM22JS4Y4 Maintained Joystick Operator Maintained Joystick Operator with Center Lock EM22JS4Y3 EM22JS4Y5 Price U.S. $ Standard 4-Position with Center Lock Note: Dimensions are listed on Page 47-89. For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94. Contact Block Selection/Application Table 47-90. Joystick Operators Position Description Circuit Catalog Number 2-Position Joystick Contact Block Assembly 2NO EM22JS2Y1 4-Position Joystick Contact Block Assembly 4NO EM22JS4Y1 Price U.S. $ Table 47-91. Contact Sequence for Two-Position Joystick Contact Blocks 47 14 24 13 23 Joystick Operator Position (X = Closed, O = Open) Circuit Location Term No. Up Center Down NO Top 14 - 13 O O X NO Bottom 24 - 23 X O O Table 47-92. Contact Sequence for Four-Position Joystick Contact Blocks 14 24 13 23 34 44 33 43 Joystick Operator Position (X = Closed, O = Open) Circuit Position Location Term No. Up Left Center Down Right NO Front Top 14 - 13 O O O X NO Front Bottom 24 - 23 O O O O X NO Back Top 34 - 33 X O O O O NO Back Bottom 44 - 43 O X O O O O Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-69 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Contact Blocks Contact Blocks Table 47-93. Contact Blocks Description Suffix Code Catalog Number 1NC 1NO 1NO Early Make 1NC Late Break 1NC (Logic) 1NO (Logic) 1NC Added Spring Pressure B A -- -- -- -- -- E22B1 E22B2 E22B3 E22B4 E22B1E E22B2E E22BR1 1NO-1NC 2NO W V E22B11 E22B20 Price U.S. $ Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1.42 (36) 1.26 (32) 0.39 (10) 1.57 (40) 1.89 (48) 1 Self Monitoring 1NC -- Dual Circuit 0.39 (10) E22CB1M 1.57 (40) 1.89 (48) Single Circuit 0.39 (10) Add Suffix to operator Catalog Number to order as a complete device. Example E22PB1B = Flush Black pushbutton with 1NC contact block. E22B4 contact block not available for use with 5-way mounting adapter. For low voltage applications. Marked with Direct Opening Action (DOA) Symbol per IEC 60947-5-1 (Annex K) and NEMA ICS 5 (Part 6). For use with Trigger Action Emergency Stop (E22LTA2) Operators. Direct Opening Action (DOA) for IEC 60947-5-1 (Annex K) and NEMA ICS 5 (Part 6) Compliance Table 47-94. Mechanical Operating Parameters of Operators with E22B1 and E22B11 (NC Contacts Only) DOA Operating Parameters Latching Trigger Pushbuttons Action E-Stop 2-Position Push-Pull 3-Position Push-Pull Key, Lever and Knob Selector Switches E-Stop E-Stop 25 mm 25 mm Mush- Mush+ + + + room room E22B1 E22B11 E22B1 E22B11 + + E22B1 E22B11 2-Pos. PushPull + E22B1 2-Pos. Push Push Pull Pull Push+ + + + Pull + E22B1 E22B11 E22B1 E22B11 E22B11 Spring Return + E22B1 Spring Return + E22B11 Maintained + E22B1 Maintained + E22B11 0.08 (2.1) 0.08 (2.1) 0.08 (2.1) 0.08 (2.1) Min. Travel 0.24 to Open (6.1) Contact -- Inches (mm) 0.24 (6.1) 0.08 (2.1) 0.08 (2.1) 0.08 (2.1) 0.08 (2.1) 0.08 (2.1) 0.08 (2.1) 0.08 (2.1) 0.08 (2.1) 0.08 (2.1) Min. Force to Open Contact -- lb (N) 5.00 (22.24) 0.74 (3.27) 0.90 (4.00) 0.84 (3.74) 1.00 (4.45) 0 0 0 0 2.09 (9.31) 2.25 (10.02) 3.01 3.17 (13.37) (14.08) 0.29 (1.29) 0.45 (2.00) 0.30 (1.34) 0.46 (2.05) 0.29 (7.4) 0.23 (5.8) 0.23 (5.8) 0.23 (5.8) 0.23 (5.8) 0.23 (5.8) 0.23 (5.8) 0.23 (5.8) 0.23 (5.8) 0.23 (5.8) 0.23 (5.8) 0.23 (5.8) 0.23 (5.8) 0.23 (5.8) 5.00 (22.24) Total 0.29 Travel -- (7.4) Inches (mm) 0.08 (2.1) 0.23 (5.8) Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-70 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Components Light Units and Lamps E22 light units consist of two versions -- standard size LED lamps and tall LED lamps. Select the standard LED light units for all indicating lights, illuminated pushbuttons, push-push (alternate action) or double-headed pushbutton operators. Select the tall LED light units for all illuminated selector switches and push-pull operators. LED Light Units Table 47-95. LED Light Units -- Includes a T3-1/4 (BA9) Bayonet Base LED Type Supply Voltage LED Color Suffix Code Standard LED Catalog Number Tall LED Catalog Number Full Voltage Unit without Lamp 6V - 12V AC/DC -- Red Green Yellow Blue White Orange Red Green Yellow Blue White Orange Red Green Yellow Blue White Orange Red Green Yellow Blue White Orange Red Green Yellow Blue White Orange Red Green Yellow Blue White Orange Red Green Yellow Blue White Orange Red Green Yellow Blue White Orange X1 X37 X38 X39 X51 X89 X94 X40 X41 X42 X52 X90 X95 X53 X54 X55 X56 X91 X87 X57 X58 X59 X60 X97 X98 X43 X44 X45 X61 X92 X96 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- E22DE E22DL612R E22DL612G E22DL612Y E22DL612B E22DL612W E22DL612O E22DL24R E22DL24G E22DL24Y E22DL24B E22DL24W E22DL24O E22DL48R E22DL48G E22DL48Y E22DL48B E22DL48W E22DL48O E22DL60R E22DL60G E22DL60Y E22DL60B E22DL60W E22DL60O E22DL120R E22DL120G E22DL120Y E22DL120B E22DL120W E22DL120O E22TL1LR E22TL1LG E22TL1LY E22TL1LB E22TL1LW E22TL1LO E22TL2LR E22TL2LG E22TL2LY E22TL2LB E22TL2LW E22TL2LO E22TL4LR E22TL4LG E22TL4LY E22TL4LB E22TL4LW E22TL4LO E22DE E22DLT612R E22DLT612G E22DLT612Y E22DLT612B E22DLT612W E22DLT612O E22DLT24R E22DLT24G E22DLT24Y E22DLT24B E22DLT24W E22DLT24O E22DLT48R E22DLT48G E22DLT48Y E22DLT48B E22DLT48W E22DLT48O E22DLT60R E22DLT60G E22DLT60Y E22DLT60B E22DLT60W E22DLT60O E22DLT120R E22DLT120G E22DLT120Y E22DLT120B E22DLT120W E22DLT120O E22TL1TLR E22TL1TLG E22TL1TLY E22TL1TLB E22TL1TLW E22TL1TLO E22TL2TLR E22TL2TLG E22TL2TLY E22TL2TLB E22TL2TLW E22TL2TLO E22TL4TLR E22TL4TLG E22TL4TLY E22TL4TLB E22TL4TLW E22TL4TLO 24V AC/DC Tall LED Light Unit 48V AC/DC 60V AC/DC 120V AC/DC Standard LED Light Unit 47 Transformer AC Only 120V 240V Transformer Light Unit with Tall LED 480V Price US $ Select standard or tall LED based on Table 47-96. Table 47-96. LED and Bulb Type Selection Chart Illuminated Operator Type Standard LED or Bulb Tall LED or Bulb Double-Headed Pushbuttons -- Indicating Lights -- Pushbuttons -- Push-Pull Operators -- Push-Push Pushbuttons -- Selector Switches -- Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-69 Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-71 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Components Light Units and Lamps (Continued) double-headed pushbutton operators. Select the tall bulb light units for all illuminated selector switches and pushpull operators. E22 light units consist of two versions -- with standard bulb or with tall bulbs. Select the standard bulb light units for all indicating lights, illuminated pushbuttons, push-push (alternate action) or Caution: Please note that 120V full voltage light units (E22D120) are only suitable for indicating light operators and will overheat in other operators. Incandescent Light Units Table 47-97. Incandescent Light Units -- Includes a T3-1/4 (BA9) Bayonet Base Lamp (except when noted) Type Supply Voltage 50/60 Hz Lamp Voltage Suffix Code Standard Bulb Catalog Number Tall Bulb Catalog Number Full Voltage AC/DC Unit without Lamp 6 12 24 48 60 120 120 -- 6 12 24 48 60 120 60 X1 X2 X3 X4 X6 X7 X8 X10 E22D E22D6 E22D12 E22D24 E22D50 E22D60 E22D120 E22R2 E22D E22DT6 E22DT12 E22DT24 E22DT50 E22DT60 -- E22RT2 6 6 6 6 X11 X12 X13 X14 E22TL1 E22TL2 E22TL3 E22TL4 E22TL1T E22TL2T E22TL3T E22TL4T Resistor AC/DC Transformer AC Only 120 240 380/415 480 Select standard or tall bulb based on Table 47-98. E22D120 light units are suitable for indicating light operators only. Price U.S. $ Table 47-98. LED and Bulb Type Selection Chart Illuminated Operator Type Standard LED or Bulb Tall LED or Bulb Double-Headed Pushbuttons -- Indicating Lights -- Pushbuttons -- Push-Pull Operators -- Push-Push Pushbuttons -- Selector Switches -- 47 Table 47-99. PresTest Units -- Includes Pre-wired 1NO-1NC Contact Blocks Type Supply Voltage 50/60 Hz Full Voltage AC/DC Resistor AC/DC Transformer AC Only Unit without Lamp 24 120 120 240 380/415 480 Select standard or tall bulb based on Table 47-98. Light Suffix Code Standard Bulb Catalog Number -- 24 60 X17 X20 X26 E22D0C E22D24C E22R2C E22D0C E22DT24C E22RT2C 6 6 6 6 X27 X28 X29 X30 E22TL1C E22TL2C E22TL3C E22TL4C E22TLT1C E22TLT2C E22TLT3C E22TLT4C Lamp Voltage Tall Bulb Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Table 47-100. Master Packed Contact Blocks and Light Units Description Catalog Number Contact Blocks or Light Units Master Packed in Quantities of 100 Only -- Contact Block 1NC (Available singly in Catalog as E22B1) Contact Block 1NO (Available singly in Catalog as E22B2) Light Unit without Lamp Full Voltage (Available singly in Catalog as E22D) Light Unit Resistor Type 120V 60 Hz (Available singly in Catalog as E22R2) Light Unit Transformer Type 120V 60 Hz (Available singly in Catalog as E22TL1) Price U.S. $ E22AA6 E22AA7 E22AA12 E22AA24 E22AA11 Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-69 Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-72 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Components Replacement LEDs and Bulbs -- Standard Size Table 47-101. Replacement LEDs for Indicating Lights, Illuminated Pushbuttons, Illuminated Push-Push Operators and Double-Headed Pushbuttons Voltage Color Continuous AC/DC Catalog Number 6V - 12V AC DC Catalog Number Catalog Number Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED612RN E22LED612ON E22LED612YN E22LED612GN E22LED612BN E22LED612WN E22LED006RAF E22LED006OAF E22LED006YAF E22LED006GAF E22LED006BAF E22LED006WAF E22LED006RDF E22LED006ODF E22LED006YDF E22LED006GDF E22LED006BDF E22LED006WDF 24V Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED024RN E22LED024ON E22LED024YN E22LED024GN E22LED024BN E22LED024WN E22LED024RAF E22LED024OAF E22LED024YAF E22LED024GAF E22LED024BAF E22LED024WAF E22LED024RDF E22LED024ODF E22LED024YDF E22LED024GDF E22LED024BDF E22LED024WDF 48V Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED048RN E22LED048ON E22LED048YN E22LED048GN E22LED048BN E22LED048WN E22LED048RAF E22LED048OAF E22LED048YAF E22LED048GAF E22LED048BAF E22LED048WAF E22LED048RDF E22LED048ODF E22LED048YDF E22LED048GDF E22LED048BDF E22LED048WDF 60V Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED060RN E22LED060ON E22LED060YN E22LED060GN E22LED060BN E22LED060WN E22LED060RAF E22LED060OAF E22LED060YAF E22LED060GAF E22LED060BAF E22LED060WAF E22LED060RDF E22LED060ODF E22LED060YDF E22LED060GDF E22LED060BDF E22LED060WDF 120V Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED120RN E22LED120ON E22LED120YN E22LED120GN E22LED120BN E22LED120WN E22LED120RAF E22LED120OAF E22LED120YAF E22LED120GAF E22LED120BAF E22LED120WAF E22LED120RDF E22LED120ODF E22LED120YDF E22LED120GDF E22LED120BDF E22LED120WDF Standard LED Lamp 47 Flashing Price U.S. $ Price U.S. $ Table 47-102. Replacement Bulbs -- T3-1/4 (BA9) Bayonet Base Type for Indicating Lights, Illuminated Pushbuttons, Illuminated Push-Push Operators and Double-Headed Pushbuttons Description Mfg. Part Number Operating Voltage (V)/ Wattage (W) Catalog Number #755 #756 #1819 W1225 W1226 W1121 6V (0.9W) 12V (1.2W) 24V (1.2W) 48/50V (1.0W) 60V (1.2W) 120V (2.4W) 28-2202 28-5184 28-2468-24 28-2468-19 28-2468-20 28-2468-7 NE51H-R22 NE51H-R68 120 (0.3W) 240 (0.6W) 28-3754 28-3755 Price U.S. $ Standard Incandescent Bulb Neon Neon bulbs are suitable for use in indicating lights only. Not to be used with any operator. Note: See Page 47-73 for Replacement LEDs and bulbs for Push-Pulls and selector switches. Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-73 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Components Replacement LEDs and Bulbs -- Tall Size Table 47-103. Replacement Tall LEDs for Illuminated Selector Switches and Push-Pull Operators ONLY Voltage 6V - 12V 24V 48V 60V Tall LED Lamp 120V Color Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White Continuous AC/DC Catalog Number Price U.S. $ E22LEDT612RN E22LEDT612ON E22LEDT612YN E22LEDT612GN E22LEDT612BN E22LEDT612WN E22LEDT024RN E22LEDT024ON E22LEDT024YN E22LEDT024GN E22LEDT024BN E22LEDT024WN E22LEDT048RN E22LEDT048ON E22LEDT048YN E22LEDT048GN E22LEDT048BN E22LEDT048WN E22LEDT060RN E22LEDT060ON E22LEDT060YN E22LEDT060GN E22LEDT060BN E22LEDT060WN E22LEDT120RN E22LEDT120ON E22LEDT120YN E22LEDT120GN E22LEDT120BN E22LEDT120WN Flashing AC Catalog Number DC Catalog Number E22LEDT006RAF E22LEDT006OAF E22LEDT006YAF E22LEDT006GAF E22LEDT006BAF E22LEDT006WAF E22LEDT024RAF E22LEDT024OAF E22LEDT024YAF E22LEDT024GAF E22LEDT024BAF E22LEDT024WAF E22LEDT048RAF E22LEDT048OAF E22LEDT048YAF E22LEDT048GAF E22LEDT048BAF E22LEDT048WAF E22LEDT060RAF E22LEDT060OAF E22LEDT060YAF E22LEDT060GAF E22LEDT060BAF E22LEDT060WAF E22LEDT120RAF E22LEDT120OAF E22LEDT120YAF E22LEDT120GAF E22LEDT120BAF E22LEDT120WAF E22LEDT006RDF E22LEDT006ODF E22LEDT006YDF E22LEDT006GDF E22LEDT006BDF E22LEDT006WDF E22LEDT024RDF E22LEDT024ODF E22LEDT024YDF E22LEDT024GDF E22LEDT024BDF E22LEDT024WDF E22LEDT048RDF E22LEDT048ODF E22LEDT048YDF E22LEDT048GDF E22LEDT048BDF E22LEDT048WDF E22LEDT060RDF E22LEDT060ODF E22LEDT060YDF E22LEDT060GDF E22LEDT060BDF E22LEDT060WDF E22LEDT120RDF E22LEDT120ODF E22LEDT120YDF E22LEDT120GDF E22LEDT120BDF E22LEDT120WDF Price U.S. $ Table 47-104. Replacement Tall Bulbs -- T3-1/4 (BA9) Bayonet Base Type for Illuminated Selector Switches and Push-Pull Operators ONLY Description Operating Voltage (V)/ Wattage (W) Catalog Number 6V (1.0W) 12V (1.2W) 24V (1.2W) 32V (1.2W) 48V (1.0W) 60V (1.2W) 120V (2.2W) 28-6731 28-6731-2 28-6731-3 28-6731-7 28-6731-4 28-6731-5 28-6731-6 47 Price U.S. $ Tall Incandescent Bulb Note: See Page 47-72 for Replacement LEDs and bulbs for indicating lights and pushbutton switches. Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-74 January 2010 EM22 and E22 Series, Accessories Accessories Table 47-105. EM22 and E22 Series Accessories Description Catalog Number Octagonal Wrench -- For easy tightening of back-of-panel mounting nut on E22 (plastic) operators E22CW Octagonal Wrench -- For easy tightening of back-of-panel mounting nut on EM22 (metal) operators E22CWM Bulb Removal Tool -- To facilitate bulb removal from front of panel on all illuminated operators E22BA3 Hole Cutting Tool -- For 22.5 mm Diameter mounting hole. Maximum Thickness: Steel -- 16 SWG (1.63 mm) Aluminum -- 14 SWG (2.03 mm) E22BA5 Price U.S. $ Overall Dimensions Inches (mm) 1.57 (40) 4.92 (125) 1.57 (40) 5.50 (140) 0.39 (10) 2.44 (62) Hole Plug -- Forms oil- and watertight seal for unused panel holes -- UL Listed Type 4-4X-13 Black Nylon Stainless Steel 1.10 (28) E22BHP E22BA8 0.55 (14) Protective Boot -- Silicon Rubber. For use with 25 mm Diameter Flush and Extended pushbutton operators only -- Clear Red Green Black Oversize Yellow Legend Plates -- 1.77" (45 mm) Blank 1.77" (45 mm) Printed EMERGENCY STOP 2.56" (65 mm) Printed EMERGENCY STOP 2.56" (65 mm) Printed EMERGENCY OFF 2.56" (65 mm) Printed EMO 2.76" (70 mm) Blank 2.76" (70 mm) Printed EMERGENCY STOP 2.76" (70 mm) Printed EMERGENCY OFF 2.76" (70 mm) Printed EMO Mounting Adapter -- Supplied as standard with E22 operators. Provides contact block and light unit mounting. 47 E22BCM E22BRM E22BGM E22BBM 1.18 (30) 0.71 (18) E22VA2 E22VA9 E22VA7 E22VA6 E22VA3 E22VA1 E22VA8 E22VA4 E22VA5 E22BA1 1.81 (46) 0.71 (18) Mounting Adapter with Barrier -- Supplied as standard with E22 Trigger Action Emergency Stop Operators. Provides contact block unit mounting only. E22BA7 1.81 (46) 0.71 (18) Auto Latch Mounting Adapter -- Supplied as E22BA1A standard with EM22 operators. Provides contact block and light unit mounting. Yellow plates comply with EN418 Machine Safety Standard background requirements for E-Stops. Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-75 January 2010 EM22 and E22 Series, Accessories Table 47-105. EM22 and E22 Series Accessories (Continued) Description Catalog Number Mounting Adapter with Barrier -- Supplied as standard with EM22 Trigger Action Emergency Stop Operators. Provides contact block unit mounting only. E22BA7A 5-Way Mounting Adapter -- Provides contact block and light unit mounting for up to 10 circuits. The standard 3-way mounting adapter E22BA1 allows up to 6 circuits. For non-illuminated PBs and 2-position selector switches For illuminated PBs and 2-position selector switches For non-illuminated 3-position selector switches with Cam #1 For illuminated 3-position selector switches with Cam #1 Additional information - See Page 47-77 Price U.S. $ Overall Dimensions Inch (mm) LOCK E22BA11 1.81 (46) E22BA11L E22BA12 E22BA12L Operator Plug -- Must be inserted into rear E22BA2 of momentary action pushbutton and mushroom head operators when 3rd Contact Block is installed in center position. Not to be used with maintained action or illuminated operators -- minimum order quantity 10 pieces. To assemble, push plug into the rear of the operator. On mushroom operators, cut down the plug to 15.2 mm [0.62"] prior to assembly. Plug is notched to indicate cut down length. Adapter Kit -- Enables a 22.5 mm operator to be mounted in a 30.5 mm mounting hole -- panel thickness from 1/16 to 7/32 inch (1.6 to 5.6 mm). 1.97 (50) 1.02 (26) 0.41 (10.5) 0.87 (22) E22ARK 47 Locating Ring -- Provides additional antiE22LRM rotation features when using optional panel mounting hole notch -- minimum order quantity 10 pieces (metal) Padlockable Transparent Cover -- Suitable for use with 25 mm Flush and Extended Pushbutton operators only E22PCM Padlockable Transparent Cover -- Suitable E22PCPM for use with 25 mm Extended Pushbutton operators only. Enables NC circuit to be held open. Padlockable Transparent Cover -- Suitable for use with 28 mm Mushroom operators, Knob and Key Selector switches 0.93 (23.7) 1.25 (31.8) E22BA9 1.1 (27.9) 1.25 (31.8) Quick Connect Terminals -- For easy instal- E22AT lation of wired connections. 300V clearance. Minimum order quantity 10 pieces. 5-Way mounting adapters cannot be used with 3-position Push-Pull operators, Cam #2 3-position selector switches, trigger action E-Stops or E22B4/ E22BF4 contact blocks. Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-76 January 2010 EM22 and E22 Series, Accessories Table 47-105. EM22 and E22 Series Accessories (Continued) Description Catalog Number Contact Blocks with Quick Connect Terminal Assembled -- 300V clearance -- 1NC 1NO 1NO Early Make 1NC Late Break 1NO-1NC 2NO Light Units with Quick Connect Terminals Assembled -- 300V clearance -- Transformer Type AC Only -- 120/110V, 60/50 Hz Resistor/Diode AC 120/110V Full Voltage AC/DC 24V Without Bulb Price U.S. $ Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm) E22BF1 E22BF2 E22BF3 E22BF4 E22BF11 E22BF20 1.42 (36) 1.26 (32) 0.39 (10) 1.54 (39) Transformer Type E22TLF1 E22RF2 2.17 (55) 0.39 (10) E22DF24 E22DF 1.42 (36) 1.26 (32) Mechanical Push Rod -- For use with all non-illuminated pushbutton and momentary mushroom head operators. Suitable for external mechanical reset of overload relays. Must be cut to proper length. Uncut -- 4.72 inches (119.9 mm) long E22MRL Single Circuit Full Voltage & Resistor Types 0.39 (10) 1.0 (25.4) 0.43 (11) 0.98 to 4.72 (25 to 120) Mushroom Shroud -- Protects against inadvertent operation. Chrome shroud (cut-away type for use with E22MSP push/pull pushbuttons) Black shroud (cut-away type for use with E22MBSP push/pull pushbuttons) 1.85 (47) 0.98 (25) Mushroom Shroud -- Protects against inadvertent operation. Chrome shroud (cut-away type) Black shroud (cut-away type) 47 E22MS E22MBFS 1.85 (47) 0.98 (25) Mushroom Shroud -- Protects against inadvertent operation. Chrome shroud (full type) Black shroud (full type) E22MSF E22MBFSF 1.85 (47) 0.98 (25) Mushroom Guard -- For 40 mm Trigger Action Switch -- To be used with E22LTA2 and E22LTA2N123 operators. E22MGTA 1.71 (43.5) 3.00 (76.2) 1.60 (40.6) Dia. 0.89 (22.5) 0.26 (6.5) 1.73 (44) 0.20 (5) E22BF4 contact block not available for use with 5-way mounting adapters. For devices not listed, contact your Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-833-3927. For use with 28 mm and 40 mm diameter mushroom pushbutton operators. Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-77 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Accessories 5-Way Mounting Adapter Legend Plates, Three Styles Available Panel The E22 5-way mounting adapter listed below allows up to 5 single circuit or up to 5 double circuit contact blocks (10 total circuits) to be mounted behind a single operator. Optional Anti-Rotation Ring #E22LRP Slightly more spacing (approximately 0.79 in. [20 mm]) is required for this mounting adapter as indicated in the Minimum Spacing table below. Bezel, Choice of Chrome or Matte Black Variety of Operators Light Units and Contact Blocks Secured to Mounting Adapter Without Tools Octagonal Mounting Nut Which Eliminates Spacer Washers and Set Screws #15-1438. Tightening Torque: 15 lb-in (1.7 Nm) For selector switch applications, the cam and contact blocks selection must be determined using the procedure and selection tables listed on Pages 47-60 - 47-61. 5-Way Mounting Adapter Table 47-106. Minimum Spacing -- Inches (mm) Size/Type of Operator Dimension A Mounting Adapter Type(s) Two One 3-Way & Two 3-Way One 5-Way 5-Way All Types up to 1.18 in. (30 mm) Dia. Including Knob and Key Operated Selector Switches -- except those listed below Lever Operated Selector Switch Operators and 1.18 - 1.57 in. (30 - 40 mm) Diameter Operators 1.97 in. (50 mm) Diameter Operators Large Yellow Round Legend Plate -- 2.76 in. (70 mm) Diameter Pushbutton Operators fitted with Rubber Boots or Padlockable Cover 1.18 (30) 1.58 (40) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) 1.77 (45) 1.77 (45) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) 2.16 (55) 2.16 (55) 2.95 (75) 2.95 (75) 2.16 (55) 2.16 (55) 2.95 (75) 2.95 (75) 1.38 (35) 1.58 (40) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) A Dimension B B 0.89 (22.5) +0.02 (0.4) Diameter 0.13 (3.2) + _ 0.01 (0.2) 0.96 (24.3) +0.02 (0.4) -0 (0) Notch Mounting Hole as Shown Table 47-107. 5-Way Mounting Adapter Description Catalog Number 5-Way Mounting Adapter -- Provides contact block and light unit mounting for up to 10 circuits. The standard 3-way mounting adapter E22BA1 allows up to 6 circuits. For non-illuminated PBs, 2-position selector switches and 2-position Push-Pulls For illuminated PBs, 2-position selector switches and 2-position Push-Pulls For non-illuminated 3-position selector switches with Cam #1 For illuminated 3-position selector switches with Cam #1 Price U.S. $ Figure 47-17. Minimum Spacing in Inches (mm) LOCK 1.81 (46) E22BA11 E22BA11L E22BA12 1.02 (26) E22BA12L Cannot be used with 3-position Push-Pull operators, Cam #2 3-position selector switches, push-push operators, trigger action pushbutton or E22B4/E22BF4 contact blocks. See Table 47-108. 1.97 (50) Figure 47-18. Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm) Table 47-108. 5-Way Mounting Adapter Selection Chart Front of Panel Devices Back of Panel Options Non-illuminated Illuminated E22BA11 E22BA12 E22BA11L E22BA12L Flush and Extended Pushbuttons 28, 40, 50 mm Mushroom (Momentary) 50 mm Mushroom Latch (Pull-to-Release) 40 mm Mushroom Latch (Key Release) 28 and 40 mm Mushroom Latch (Twist-to-Release) 29.5 and 40 mm 2-Position Push-Pull 29.5 and 40 mm 3-Position Push-Pull Double Headed Pushbutton 2-Position Selector Switch -- Cam 2 3-Position Selector Switch -- Cam 1 3-Position Selector Switch -- Cam 2 Trigger Action Pushbutton Push-Push Operator -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Four single circuit contact blocks maximum. Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-78 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Accessories and Replacement Parts Accessories (Continued) Table 47-111. Replacement Caps -- Push-Pull Description Table 47-109. E22 Series Accessories (Continued) 47 Description Catalog Number Octagonal Mounting Nut 15-1438 Molded Black Bezel -- For converting chrome bezel to black bezel -- Suitable for Knob, Lever and Key Selector Switches E22AZB Chrome Bezel -- Suitable for Knob, Lever and Key Selector Switches 28-6028 Price U.S. $ Flush 25 mm Dia. Red Green Blue Clear Amber White Yellow E22ADR E22ADG E22ADV E22ADC E22ADA E22ADW E22ADY Ext. 25 mm Dia. Lenses with Octagonal Bezel for 25 mm Diameter Extended Illuminated Pushbuttons -- 10 per package, minimum order 10. Red Green Blue Clear Amber White Yellow E22AER E22AEG E22AEV E22AEC E22AEA E22AEW E22AEY Std. Flush Button 25 mm Dia. Color Caps with Octagonal Bezel for Standard Nonilluminated 25 mm Diameter Flush Pushbuttons -- 10 per package, minimum order 10. Red Green Blue White Yellow Black Gray Orange E22ABR E22ABG E22ABV E22ABW E22ABY E22ABB E22ABE E22ABN Std. Ext. Button 25 mm Dia. Color Caps with Octagonal Bezel for Standard Nonilluminated 25 mm Diameter Extended Pushbuttons -- 10 per package, minimum order 10. Red Green Blue White Yellow Black Gray Orange E22ACR E22ACG E22ACV E22ACW E22ACY E22ACB E22ACE E22ACN Black Red Green Yellow White Blue Gray Amber Red EMERGENCY STOP E22AHS1 E22AHS2 E22AHS3 E22AHS4 E22AHS5 E22AHS6 E22AHS7 E22AHS8 -- E22AH1 E22AH2 E22AH3 E22AH4 E22AH5 E22AH6 E22AH7 E22AH8 E22AH2N8 Clear Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber Red EMERGENCY STOP E22AFS0 E22AFS2 E22AFS3 E22AFS4 E22AFS5 E22AFS6 E22AFS9 -- E22AF0 E22AF2 E22AF3 E22AF4 E22AF5 E22AF6 E22AF9 E22AF2N8 Non-illuminated Table 47-112. Replacement Selector Switch Levers and Knobs Color Levers Catalog Number Knobs Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Catalog Number E22AV21 E22AV22 E22AV23 E22AV24 E22AV25 E22AV26 E22AV27 E22AV28 E22AX1 E22AX2 E22AX3 E22AX4 E22AX5 E22AX6 E22AX7 E22AX8 E22AX21 E22AX22 E22AX23 E22AX24 E22AX25 E22AX26 E22AX27 E22AX28 E22AW20 E22AW22 E22AW23 E22AW24 E22AW25 E22AW26 E22AW29 E22AR0 E22AR2 E22AR3 E22AR4 E22AR5 E22AR6 E22AR9 E22AR20 E22AR22 E22AR23 E22AR24 E22AR25 E22AR26 E22AR29 53-4183-36 53-4183-31 53-4183-32 53-4183-34 53-4183-35 53-4183-33 53-4183-37 53-4183-38 53-4185-36 53-4185-31 53-4185-32 53-4185-34 53-4185-35 53-4185-33 53-4185-37 53-4185-38 53-4184-36 53-4184-31 53-4184-32 53-4184-34 53-4184-35 53-4184-33 53-4184-37 53-4184-38 53-4183-26 53-4183-21 53-4183-22 53-4183-24 53-4183-25 53-4183-23 53-4183-27 53-4185-26 53-4185-21 53-4185-22 53-4185-24 53-4185-25 53-4185-23 53-4185-27 53-4184-26 53-4184-21 53-4184-22 53-4184-24 53-4184-25 53-4184-23 53-4184-27 Non-illuminated -- 45 Throw Black Red Green Yellow White Blue Gray Orange E22AV1 E22AV2 E22AV3 E22AV4 E22AV5 E22AV6 E22AV7 E22AV8 Illuminated -- 45 Throw Clear Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber E22AW0 E22AW2 E22AW3 E22AW4 E22AW5 E22AW6 E22AW9 Non-illuminated -- 60 Throw Replacement Parts Black Red Green Yellow White Blue Gray Orange Table 47-110. Replacement Lenses -- Indicating Lights Standard Indicating Light 1.57 Inches (40 mm) Catalog Price Number U.S. $ Illuminated Lenses with Octagonal Bezel for 25 mm Diameter Flush Illuminated Pushbutton -- 10 per package, minimum order 10. Color 1.16 Inches (29.5 mm) Catalog Price Number U.S. $ Glass Lens For Use with Insert 53-4122-36 53-4122-31 53-4122-32 53-4122-34 53-4122-35 53-4122-33 53-4122-37 53-4122-38 Illuminated -- 60 Throw Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Clear Red Green Yellow White E22AE0 E22AE2 E22AE3 E22AE4 E22AE5 E22AG0 E22AG2 E22AG3 E22AG4 E22AG5 E22AC0 E22AC2 E22AC3 E22AC4 E22AC5 Blue Amber E22AE6 E22AE9 E22AG6 E22AG9 E22AC6 E22AC9 Price U.S. $ Clear Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber 53-4122-26 53-4122-21 53-4122-22 53-4122-24 53-4122-25 53-4122-23 53-4122-27 Four- to Eight-Position Selector Switches -- Non-illuminated Black 53-2617-16 Plastic indicating light lens with insert suitable for printed legends. For replacement Indicating Light Legend Inserts, order E22AL5. Minimum order quantity 10 pieces. For more information visit: www.eaton.com 53-2620-16 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-79 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Legend Plates with Standard Markings Options Legend Plates Engraved Legend Plates with Standard Markings -- 1/8" High Character Size Aluminum -- Aluminum legend plates have a plastisol backing to help prevent rotation of the operator when installed in an unnotched hole. Operators installed with aluminum legend plates and legend plates with clip-in inserts maintain their UL Listed Type 4-4X-13 rating. Plastic -- Both the laminated plastic legend plates and legend plates with clip-in inserts offer the choice of four background colors. Either side of the legend plate or insert can be field engraved. Letter Color Split Field Color Jumbo Plastic Push-Pull Aluminum 0.79 (20) 1.77 (45) 1.77 (45) Field Color Standard Aluminum 1.57 (40) 1.17 (30) Background Color Standard Aluminum Jumbo Aluminum 0.79 (20) Standard SelfAdhesive Plastic Figure 47-19. Color Diagram and Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Table 47-113. Engraved Legend Plates Nameplate Type Standard Aluminum with Plastisol Backing NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 and Self-Adhesives used on Enclosures Standard Plastic, NEMA 1 Only Letter Color Background Color Field Color Black Silver Black White Black Black Black Silver Red White Red Red Black White White Black Silver Silver Pushbutton Price U.S $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Price U.S $. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No Engraving) CLAMP CLOSE DOWN EMERG. STOP E22NS36 E22NS90 E22NS11 E22NS12 -- E22NS37 -- -- -- E22NS13 E22NSP77 E22NSP90 E22NSP11 E22NSP12 -- E22NSP77 E22NSP90R E22NSP11R E22NSP12R E22NSP13R E22NSP76 E22NSP90W E22NSP11W E22NSP12W -- E22NSP76 E22NSP90S E22NSP11S E22NSP12S -- FAST FASTER FEEDER OFF FEEDER ON FOR E22NS14 E22NS87 E22NS95 E22NS94 E22NS4 -- -- -- -- -- E22NSP14 E22NSP87 E22NSP95 E22NSP94 E22NSP4 E22NSP14R E22NSP87R E22NSP95R E22NSP94R E22NSP4R E22NSP14W E22NSP87W E22NSP95W E22NSP94W E22NSP4W E22NSP14S E22NSP87S E22NSP95S E22NSP94S E22NSP4S FORWARD HIGH IN INCH JOG E22NS15 E22NS16 E22NS17 E22NS18 E22NS19 -- -- -- -- -- E22NSP15 E22NSP16 E22NSP17 E22NSP18 E22NSP19 E22NSP15R E22NSP16R E22NSP17R E22NSP18R E22NSP19R E22NSP15W E22NSP16W E22NSP17W E22NSP18W E22NSP19W E22NSP15S E22NSP16S E22NSP17S E22NSP18S E22NSP19S To order Jumbo Legend Plates replace the 5th character with an L. For example E22NL87 is an aluminum, Jumbo Legend Plate marked "FASTER". To order self-adhesive legend plates replace the 5th character with a C. For example E22NC87 is a Self-Adhesive Legend Plate marked "FASTER". Standard Size Aluminum Jumbo Size Reversible Plastic Standard Size Reversible Plastic Self-Adhesive Plastic Standard Size Plastic with Clip-In Insert Push-Pull Operators Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-80 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Legend Plates with Standard Markings Table 47-113. Engraved Legend Plates (Continued) Nameplate Type Standard Aluminum with Plastisol Backing NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 and Self-Adhesives used on Enclosures Standard Plastic, NEMA 1 Only Letter Color Background Color Field Color Black Silver Black White Black Black Black Silver Red White Red Red Black White White Black Silver Silver Pushbutton (Cont.) Price U.S $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Price U.S $. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 JOG FOR JOG REV LEFT LOW LOWER E22NS96 E22NS21 E22NS10 E22NS22 E22NS23 -- -- -- -- -- E22NSP96 E22NSP21 E22NSP10 E22NSP22 E22NSP23 E22NSP96R E22NSP21R E22NSP10R E22NSP22R E22NSP23R E22NSP96W E22NSP21W E22NSP10W E22NSP22W E22NSP23W E22NSP96S E22NSP21S E22NSP10S E22NSP22S E22NSP23S LUBE FAIL MOTOR RUN MOTOR RUNNING MOTOR STOP MOTOR STOPPED E22NS92 E22NS81 E22NS56 E22NS82 E22NS57 -- -- -- -- -- E22NSP92 E22NSP81 E22NSP56 E22NSP82 E22NSP57 E22NSP92R E22NSP81R E22NSP56R E22NSP82R E22NSP57R E22NSP92W E22NSP81W E22NSP56W E22NSP82W E22NSP57W E22NSP92S E22NSP81S E22NSP56S E22NSP82S E22NSP57S O OFF ON I OPEN -- -- E22NS25 E22NS65 E22NS26 E22NS64 E22NS24 -- -- -- -- -- E22NSP25 E22NSP65 E22NSP26 E22NSP64R E22NSP24R E22NSP25R E22NSP65R E22NSP26R -- -- E22NSP25W E22NSP65W E22NSP26W -- -- E22NSP25S E22NSP65S E22NSP26S OUT OVERLOAD TRIPPED OVERLOAD RESET POWER ON RAISE E22NS27 E22NS98 E22NS100 E22NS80 E22NS28 -- -- -- -- -- E22NSP27 E22NSP98 E22NSP100 E22NSP80 E22NSP28 E22NSP27R E22NSP98R E22NSP100R E22NSP80R E22NSP28R E22NSP27W E22NSP98W E22NSP100W E22NSP80W E22NSP28W E22NSP27S E22NSP98S E22NSP100S E22NSP80S E22NSP28S READY RESET REV REVERSE RIGHT E22NS86 E22NS29 E22NS5 E22NS30 E22NS79 -- -- -- -- -- E22NSP86 E22NSP29 E22NSP5 E22NSP30 E22NSP79 E22NSP86R E22NSP29R E22NSP5R E22NSP30R E22NSP79R E22NSP86W E22NSP29W E22NSP5W E22NSP30W E22NSP79W E22NSP86S E22NSP29S E22NSP5S E22NSP30S E22NSP79S RUN SAFE SLOW SLOWER START E22NS31 E22NS85 E22NS32 E22NS88 E22NS33 -- -- -- -- -- E22NSP31 E22NSP85 E22NSP32 E22NSP88 E22NSP33 E22NSP31R E22NSP85R E22NSP32R E22NSP88R E22NSP33R E22NSP31W E22NSP85W E22NSP32W E22NSP88W E22NSP33W E22NSP31S E22NSP85S E22NSP32S E22NSP88S E22NSP33S STOP SUPPLY ON TEST TRANSFER TRIP -- E22NS61 E22NS83 E22NS93 E22NS84 E22NS34 -- -- -- -- -- E22NSP61 E22NSP83 E22NSP93 E22NSP84 E22NSP34R E22NSP61R E22NSP83R E22NSP93R E22NSP84R -- E22NSP61W E22NSP83W E22NSP93W E22NSP84W -- E22NSP61S E22NSP83S E22NSP93S E22NSP84S UNCLAMP UP E22NS91 E22NS35 -- -- E22NSP91 E22NSP35 E22NSP91R E22NSP35R E22NSP91W E22NSP35W E22NSP91S E22NSP35S INCH/REVERSE FOR/REV FOR/REV HAND/AUTO HAND/AUTO E22NS59 E22NS101 E22NS38 E22NS102 E22NS39 -- -- -- -- -- E22NSP59 E22NSP101 E22NSP38 E22NSP102 E22NSP39 E22NSP59R E22NSP101R E22NSP38R E22NSP102R E22NSP39R E22NSP59W E22NSP101W E22NSP38W E22NSP102W E22NSP39W E22NSP59S E22NSP101S E22NSP38S E22NSP102S E22NSP39S HIGH/LOW HIGH/LOW INCH/RUN INCH/RUN JOG/RUN E22NS103 E22NS40 E22NS114 E22NS60 E22NS104 -- -- -- -- -- E22NSP103 E22NSP40 E22NSP114 E22NSP60 E22NSP104 E22NSP103R E22NSP40R E22NSP114R E22NSP60R E22NSP104R E22NSP103W E22NSP40W E22NSP114W E22NSP60W E22NSP104W E22NSP103S E22NSP40S E22NSP114S E22NSP60S E22NSP104S JOG/ RUN LEFT/RIGHT LEFT/RIGHT LOC/REM LOC/REMOTE E22NS41 E22NS117 E22NS66 E22NS116 E22NS63 -- -- -- -- -- E22NSP41 E22NSP117 E22NSP66 E22NSP116 E22NSP63 E22NSP41R E22NSP117R E22NSP66R E22NSP116R E22NSP63R E22NSP41W E22NSP117W E22NSP66W E22NSP116W E22NSP63W E22NSP41S E22NSP117S E22NSP66S E22NSP116S E22NSP63S 2-Position Selector Switch To order Jumbo Legend Plates replace the 5th character with an L. For example E22NL87 is an aluminum, Jumbo Legend Plate marked "FASTER". To order self-adhesive legend plates replace the 5th character with a C. For example E22NC87 is a Self-Adhesive Legend Plate marked "FASTER". Center to Right Throw -- 45 or 60 travel. Left to Right Throw -- 45 or 60 travel. Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-81 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Legend Plates with Standard Markings Table 47-113. Engraved Legend Plates (Continued) Nameplate Type Standard Aluminum with Plastisol Backing NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 and Self-Adhesives used on Enclosures Standard Plastic, NEMA 1 Only Letter Color Background Color Field Color Black Silver Black White Black Black Black Silver Red White Red Red Black White White Black Silver Silver 2-Position Selector Switch (Cont.) Price U.S $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Price U.S $. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAN/AUTO MAN/AUTO O/I O/I OFF/ON E22NS118 E22NS67 E22NS120 E22NS122 E22NS105 -- -- -- -- -- E22NSP118 E22NSP67 E22NSP120 E22NSP122 E22NSP105 E22NSP118R E22NSP67R E22NSP120R E22NSP122R E22NSP105R E22NSP118W E22NSP67W E22NSP120W E22NSP122W E22NSP105W E22NSP118S E22NSP67S E22NSP120S E22NSP122S E22NSP105S OFF/ON OPEN/CLOSE OPEN/CLOSE RUN/JOG RUN/JOG E22NS42 E22NS106 E22NS43 E22NS107 E22NS44 -- -- -- -- -- E22NSP42 E22NSP106 E22NSP43 E22NSP107 E22NSP44 E22NSP42R E22NSP106R E22NSP43R E22NSP107R E22NSP44R E22NSP42W E22NSP106W E22NSP43W E22NSP107W E22NSP44W E22NSP42S E22NSP106S E22NSP43S E22NSP107S E22NSP44S SAFE/RUN SAFE/RUN SEQ/TEST SEQ/TEST START/JOG E22NS108 E22NS45 E22NS115 E22NS62 E22NS109 -- -- -- -- -- E22NSP108 E22NSP45 E22NSP115 E22NSP62 E22NSP109 E22NSP108R E22NSP45R E22NSP115R E22NSP62R E22NSP109R E22NSP108W E22NSP45W E22NSP115W E22NSP62W E22NSP109W E22NSP108S E22NSP45S E22NSP115S E22NSP62S E22NSP109S START/JOG START/STOP START/STOP STOP/RESET STOP/RESET E22NS46 E22NS110 E22NS47 -- -- -- -- -- E22NS112 E22NS58 E22NSP46 E22NSP110 E22NSP47 -- -- E22NSP46R E22NSP110R E22NSP47R E22NSP112R E22NSP58R E22NSP46W E22NSP110W E22NSP47W -- -- E22NSP46S E22NSP110S E22NSP47S -- -- UP/DOWN UP/DOWN E22NS111 E22NS48 -- -- E22NSP111 E22NSP48 E22NSP111R E22NSP48R E22NSP111W E22NSP48W E22NSP111S E22NSP48S AUTO/OFF/HAND FOR/OFF/REV FOR/SAFE/REV HAND/OFF/AUTO I/O/II E22NS49 E22NS50 E22NS69 E22NS51 E22NS121 -- -- -- -- -- E22NSP49 E22NSP50 E22NSP69 E22NSP51 E22NSP121 E22NSP49R E22NSP50R E22NSP69R E22NSP51R E22NSP121R E22NSP49W E22NSP50W E22NSP69W E22NSP51W E22NSP121W E22NSP49S E22NSP50S E22NSP69S E22NSP51S E22NSP121S MAN/OFF/AUTO ON/STOP/SAFE OPEN/OFF/CLOSE RUN/SAFE/JOG UP/OFF/DOWN E22NS68 -- E22NS53 E22NS70 E22NS54 -- E22NS71 -- -- -- E22NSP68 -- E22NSP53 E22NSP70 E22NSP54 E22NSP68R E22NSP71R E22NSP53R E22NSP70R E22NSP54R E22NSP68W -- E22NSP53W E22NSP70W E22NSP54W E22NSP68S -- E22NSP53S E22NSP70S E22NSP54S -- -- E22NS73 E22NS75 E22NSP73 E22NSP75 E22NSP73R E22NSP75R E22NSP73W E22NSP75W E22NSP73S E22NSP75S 3-Position Selector Switch Push-Pulls Only Pull-ON Push-OFF Pull-START Push-STOP To order Jumbo Legend Plates replace the 5th character with an L. For example E22NL87 is an aluminum, Jumbo Legend Plate marked "FASTER". To order self-adhesive legend plates replace the 5th character with a C. For example E22NC87 is a Self-Adhesive Legend Plate marked "FASTER". Field Color is Split, green on the left side, red on the right side. Center to Right Throw -- 45 or 60 travel. Left to Right Throw -- 45 or 60 travel. Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-82 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Legend Plates and Legend Plate Carriers 1.1 (27.5) 0.44 (11.2) Standard Figure 47-20. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Table 47-114. Legend Plates and Legend Plate Carriers Nameplate Type Plastic with Clip-In Insert without Carrier NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Legend Plate Price U.S. $... Legend Plate Carrier Price U.S. $... Letter Color Background Color Field Color White Black Black White Red Red Black White White Black Silver Silver Pushbutton 47 Legend Plate Carrier E22ND (No Engraving) CLAMP CLOSE DOWN EMERG. STOP E22ND77 E22ND90 E22ND11 E22ND12 -- E22ND77 E22ND90R E22ND11R E22ND12R E22ND13R E22ND76 E22ND90W E22ND11W E22ND12W -- E22ND76 E22ND90S E22ND11S E22ND12S -- FAST FASTER FEED OFF FEEDER ON FOR E22ND14 E22ND87 E22ND95 E22ND94 E22ND4 E22ND14R E22ND87R E22ND95R E22ND94R E22ND4R E22ND14W E22ND87W E22ND95W E22ND94W E22ND4W E22ND14S E22ND87S E22ND95S E22ND94S E22ND4S FORWARD HIGH IN INCH JOG E22ND15 E22ND16 E22ND17 E22ND18 E22ND19 E22ND15R E22ND16R E22ND17R E22ND18R E22ND19R E22ND15W E22ND16W E22ND17W E22ND18W E22ND19W E22ND15S E22ND16S E22ND17S E22ND18S E22ND19S JOG FOR JOG REV LEFT LOW LOWER E22ND96 E22ND21 E22ND10 E22ND22 E22ND23 E22ND96R E22ND21R E22ND10R E22ND22R E22ND23R E22ND96W E22ND21W E22ND10W E22ND22W E22ND23W E22ND96S E22ND21S E22ND10S E22ND22S E22ND23S LUBE FAIL MOTOR RUN MOTOR RUNNING MOTOR STOP MOTOR STOPPED E22ND92 E22ND81 E22ND56 E22ND82 E22ND57 E22ND92R E22ND81R E22ND56R E22ND82R E22ND57R E22ND92W E22ND81W E22ND56W E22ND82W E22ND57W E22ND92S E22ND81S E22ND56S E22ND82S E22ND57S O OFF ON I OPEN -- -- E22ND25 E22ND65 E22ND26 E22ND64R E22ND24R E22ND25R E22ND65R E22ND26R -- -- E22ND25W E22ND65W E22ND26W -- -- E22ND25S E22ND65S E22ND26S OUT OVERLOAD TRIPPED OVERLOAD RESET POWER ON RAISE E22ND27 E22ND98 E22ND100 E22ND80 E22ND28 E22ND27R E22ND98R E22ND100R E22ND80R E22ND28R E22ND27W E22ND98W E22ND100W E22ND80W E22ND28W E22ND27S E22ND98S E22ND100S E22ND80S E22ND28S READY RESET REV REVERSE RIGHT E22ND86 E22ND29 E22ND5 E22ND30 E22ND79 E22ND86R E22ND29R E22ND5R E22ND30R E22ND79R E22ND86W E22ND29W E22ND5W E22ND30W E22ND79W E22ND86S E22ND29S E22ND5S E22ND30S E22ND79S RUN SAFE SLOW SLOWER START E22ND31 E22ND85 E22ND32 E22ND88 E22ND33 E22ND31R E22ND85R E22ND32R E22ND88R E22ND33R E22ND31W E22ND85W E22ND32W E22ND88W E22ND33W E22ND31S E22ND85S E22ND32S E22ND88S E22ND33S One carrier required for each clip-in insert. Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-83 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Legend Plates and Legend Plate Carriers Table 47-114. Legend Plates and Legend Plate Carriers (Continued) Nameplate Type Plastic with Clip-In Insert without Carrier NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Legend Plate Price U.S. $... Legend Plate Carrier Price U.S. $... Letter Color Background Color Field Color White Black Black White Red Red Black White White Black Silver Silver STOP SUPPLY ON TEST TRANSFER TRIP -- E22ND61 E22ND83 E22ND93 E22ND84 E22ND34R E22ND61R E22ND83R E22ND93R E22ND84R -- E22ND61W E22ND83W E22ND93W E22ND84W -- E22ND61S E22ND83S E22ND93S E22ND84S UNCLAMP UP E22ND91 E22ND35 E22ND91R E22ND35R E22ND91W E22ND35W E22ND91S E22ND35S INCH/REVERSE FOR/REV FOR/REV HAND/AUTO HAND/AUTO E22ND59 E22ND101 E22ND38 E22ND102 E22ND39 E22ND59R E22ND101R E22ND38R E22ND102R E22ND39R E22ND59W E22ND101W E22ND38W E22ND102W E22ND39W E22ND59S E22ND101S E22ND38S E22ND102S E22ND39S HIGH/LOW HIGH/LOW INCH/RUN INCH/RUN JOG/RUN E22ND103 E22ND40 E22ND114 E22ND60 E22ND104 E22ND103R E22ND40R E22ND114R E22ND60R E22ND104R E22ND103W E22ND40W E22ND114W E22ND60W E22ND104W E22ND103S E22ND40S E22ND114S E22ND60S E22ND104S JOG/RUN LEFT/RIGHT LEFT/RIGHT LOC/REM LOC/REMOTE E22ND41 E22ND117 E22ND66 E22ND116 E22ND63 E22ND41R E22ND117R E22ND66R E22ND116R E22ND63R E22ND41W E22ND117W E22ND66W E22ND116W E22ND63W E22ND41S E22ND117S E22ND66S E22ND116S E22ND63S MAN/AUTO MAN/AUTO O/I O/I OFF/ON E22ND118 E22ND67 E22ND120 E22ND122 E22ND105 E22ND118R E22ND67R E22ND120R E22ND122R E22ND105R E22ND118W E22ND67W E22ND120W E22ND122W E22ND105W E22ND118S E22ND67S E22ND120S E22ND122S E22ND105S OFF/ON OPEN/CLOSE OPEN/CLOSE RUN/JOG RUN/JOG E22ND42 E22ND106 E22ND43 E22ND107 E22ND44 E22ND42R E22ND106R E22ND43R E22ND107R E22ND44R E22ND42W E22ND106W E22ND43W E22ND107W E22ND44W E22ND42S E22ND106S E22ND43S E22ND107S E22ND44S SAFE/RUN SAFE/RUN SEQ/TEST SEQ/TEST START/JOG E22ND108 E22ND45 E22ND115 E22ND62 E22ND109 E22ND108R E22ND45R E22ND115R E22ND62R E22ND109R E22ND108W E22ND45W E22ND115W E22ND62W E22ND109W E22ND108S E22ND45S E22ND115S E22ND62S E22ND109S START/JOG START/STOP START/STOP STOP/RESET STOP/RESET E22ND46 E22ND110 E22ND47 -- -- E22ND46R E22ND110R E22ND47R E22ND112R E22ND58R E22ND46W E22ND110W E22ND47W -- -- E22ND46S E22ND110S E22ND47S -- -- UP/DOWN UP/DOWN E22ND111 E22ND48 E22ND111R E22ND48R E22ND111W E22ND48W E22ND111S E22ND48S AUTO/OFF/HAND FOR/OFF/REV FOR/SAFE/REV HAND/OFF/AUTO I/O/II E22ND49 E22ND50 E22ND69 E22ND51 E22ND121 E22ND49R E22ND50R E22ND69R E22ND51R E22ND121R E22ND49W E22ND50W E22ND69W E22ND51W E22ND121W E22ND49S E22ND50S E22ND69S E22ND51S E22ND121S MAN/OFF/AUTO ON/STOP/SAFE OPEN/OFF/CLOSE RUN/SAFE/JOG UP/OFF/DOWN E22ND68 -- E22ND53 E22ND70 E22ND54 E22ND68R E22ND71R E22ND53R E22ND70R E22ND54R E22ND68W -- E22ND53W E22ND70W E22ND54W E22ND68S -- E22ND53S E22ND70S E22ND54S Pushbutton (Cont.) 2-Position Selector Switch 47 3-Position Selector Switch Center to Right Throw -- 45 or 60 travel. Left to Right Throw -- 45 or 60 travel. Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-84 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Legend Plates with Non-standard Markings Legend Plates with Non-standard Markings When Ordering Specify Catalog Number of Blank Legend Plate from previous page plus suffix "STAMP", and describe special engraving in Block Letters. Insert the following in Order Notes: Character Size -- 3/32, 1/8 or 3/16 inch (2.4, 3.2 or 4.8 mm) Field Color of Plastic Legend Plates or Insert types. Line location by Number(s) (1 - 17) and legend desired Note: If legends are required in line locations not specified, drawing must be supplied with order. Table 47-117. Legend Characters Available Table 47-115. Ordering Examples Description Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Aluminum Letter Size: 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) Location: 5 -- POWER 6 -- HOUSE 7 -- PUMP E22NS36STAMP Maximum Allowable Number of Characters per Line Plastic Letter Size: E22NLP76STAMP 3/16 in. (4.8 mm) Field Color: White Location: 8 -- FEEDER 9 -- OPEN Max. 11 Characters per Line Standard Size Plate 1 2 3 4 Max. 10 Characters per Line Standard Size Plate 10 11 Line Location Number Max. 8 Characters per Line Standard Size Plate 10 11 15C 17R Line Location Number 15L 15R 2-Position Selector Switches Center to Right Throw 2-Position Selector Switches Left to Right Throw 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) High Characters Line Location Number 12 47 Figure 47-24. How to Use Illustrations 3/32 inch (2.4 mm) High Characters 3/32 inch (2.4 mm) High Characters Line Location Number Max. 11 Max. 8 5 Characters Characters per Line per Line 6 Jumbo Standard 7 Size Plate Size Plate Line Location Number for Ordering Maximum Maximum 15 1 11 Number of Number of Characters Characters per Line for per Line for Jumbo Standard Size Legend Size Legend Plate Plate Line Location Number Line Location Number Line Location Number Max. 15 Characters per Line Jumbo Size Plate ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ /-.,1234567890 Max. 8 Characters per Line Standard Size Plate Line Location Number 15C 16L 17R Line Location Number 15L 16L 15R 17R 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) High Characters 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) High Characters Line Location Number Max. 11 Max. 8 Characters Characters 8 per Line per Line 9 Jumbo Standard Size Plate Size Plate Figure 47-23. Insert Type Plates Table 47-116. Type of Legend Plate (Used on Selector Switch) Description Character Size (Height) 3/32 Inch 1/8 Inch 3/16 Inch (2.4 mm) (3.2 mm) (4.8 mm) 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) High Characters Figure 47-21. Aluminum and Plastic Legend Plates Character Size (Height) Inches Max. Number of Characters 1/8 Inch (3.2 mm) 6 3/16 Inch (4.8 mm) 5 3/32 Inch (2.4 mm) 8 Aluminum or Plastic Standard Size 5 Jumbo Size 7 Insert Type: Standard Size 5 3 5 3 5 3 -- 3-Position Selector Switches 4-Position Selector Switches Figure 47-25. Selector Switch Legend Plates Line Location Number 21 20 23 24 22 25 Figure 47-22. Enclosure Legend Plates -- Self-Adhesive Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-85 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Printed Legends Printed Legends For Indicating Lights, Illuminated and Non-illuminated Pushbuttons, and 1.10, 1.57 and 1.97" (28, 40 and 50 mm) (Plastic) Diameter Mushroom Head Operators. How To Order: Select legend required from listing below and add Suffix Code Number to Catalog Number of operator. Example: E22A2N25 -- Red indicating light with insert printed "ON." Cat. No. E22A6N5 Cat. No. E22EB2N35 Price Adder: U.S. $ -- Table 47-118. Printed Legends Legend Suffix Code Number Legend Suffix Code Number FOR N4 RESET N29 (Emergency Stop) N125 REV N5 RUN N31 (Start) N887 N6 START N33 (Stop) N888 N7 STOP N34 (Jog) N889 CLOSE N11 UP N35 (Reset) N890 INCH N18 O (Off) N64 N892 JOG N19 l (On) N65 N893 OFF N24 POWER ON N80 N894 ON N25 READY N86 N895 OPEN N26 N124 N896 l (Push-Push) Legend Suffix Code Number Additional legends and symbols are listed in Table 47-113 on Pages 47-79 - 47-81 -- to order as printed legend, add prefix N to listed Code Number and follow instructions on how to order above. A one-time set-up charge will apply to all orders for non-listed, special legends. Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-86 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Legend Plates for Four- to Eight-Position Selector Switch Legend Plates for Selector Switches Legend Plates with Standard Text Blank Plastic Legend Plates -- Reversible Table 47-121. Legend Plates with Standard Text Legend plates have a black background with white lettering. Legend plates without text. Black one side, red reverse side. White text. Size Inches (mm) Table 47-119. Blank and Custom Legend Plates 1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45) 2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60) Size Inches (mm) Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Blank 1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45) E22NJP36 2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60) E22NGP36 1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45) 2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60) Custom Engraved 1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45) E22NJP36STAMP 2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60) E22NGP36STAMP Custom Engraved Legend Plates have the Suffix STAMP added to the Catalog Number. Non-standard Legends To order custom engraved legend plates, specify field color, add suffix "STAMP" to Blank Plate Catalog Number and specify desired engraving for each position. Example: E22NGP36STAMP, OFF - PUMP 1 - PUMP 2 PUMP 3 - PUMP 4, Black field. 1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45) 2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60) Switch Positions 2 1 2 1 2 1 Catalog Number 3 3 4 Price U.S. $ E22NJP215 E22NGP215 E22NJP216 E22NGP216 4 5 3 E22NJP217 E22NGP217 4 5 6 1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45) 2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60) 2 1 3 5 7 1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45) 2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60) 2 1 8 1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45) 2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60) 1 0 E22NJP218 E22NGP218 4 3 6 E22NJP219 E22NGP219 4 5 7 2 6 3 E22NJP210 E22NGP210 0.79 (20) A 47 1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45) 2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60) 0.98 (25) 1 0 2 E22NJP211 E22NGP211 3 4 Lever Operator 1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45) 2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60) 0.79 (20) 1 0 2 E22NJP212 E22NGP212 3 4 5 A 0.98 (25) 1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45) 2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60) Knob Operator 1 0 2 4 6 1.69 (43) to Remove Key A 0.79 (20) 1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45) 2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60) 1 0 7 E22NJP213 E22NGP213 3 2 5 E22NJP214 E22NGP214 3 4 6 5 Key Operator Figure 47-26. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Table 47-120. Selector Switch Dimensions Number of Circuits Dimension A Inches (mm) 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 2.83 (72) 3.31 (84) 3.78 (96) 4.25 (108) Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-87 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Enclosures Enclosures These totally insulated, NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13 rated polycarbonate enclosures are available in 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 and 9 hole configurations in single or double depth. Table 47-122. Enclosures -- UL (NEMA) 4, 4X, 12, 13 Cover Holes, Centerlines and Legend Plate Selection Will Accommodate 2.65 Inch (65 mm) Legend Plates Listed on Page 47-74 Usable Depth Inches (mm) Catalog Number 2.5 (64) 3.4 (87) E22CSP1 E22CDP1 With Conduit Opening in Rear of Enclosure Note: For mounting dimensions and limitations see Pages 47-88 and 47-94. With Safety Yellow Cover E22CDP1R 2.2 (57) 3.15 (80) With Conduit Opening in Rear of Enclosure 1.42 inch (36 mm) Price U.S. $ E22CSP1Y E22CDP1Y E22CDP1RY 2.2 (57) 3.15 (80) E22CSP2 E22CDP2 2.2 (57) 3.15 (80) E22CSP3 E22CDP3 2.2 (57) 3.15 (80) E22CSP4 E22CDP4 Will Accommodate Self-Adhesive Legend Plates Listed on Pages 47-79 - 47-81 1.42 inch (36 mm) Will Accommodate Self-Adhesive Legend Plates Listed on Pages 47-79 - 47-81 1.18 inch (30 mm) Will Accommodate Self-Adhesive Legend Plates Listed on Pages 47-79 - 47-81 47 Vertical 1.38 inch (35 mm) Horizontal 1.89 inch (48 mm) 3.15 (80) E22CDP6 3.15 (80) E22CDP9 Will Accommodate Aluminum & Plastic Legend Plates Listed on Pages 47-79 - 47-81 Vertical 1.97 inch (50 mm) Horizontal 1.38 inch (35 mm) Will Accommodate Aluminum & Plastic Legend Plates Listed on Pages 47-79 - 47-81 Yellow covers comply with background requirements for EN418 Safety of Machinery Standard. Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-88 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Enclosures Operator Mounting Dimensions Table 47-123. Enclosure Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) No. of Elements Outside Dimension Mounting A B C D E F 1 2 3 or 4 6 9 2.68 (68) 3.15 (80) 3.15 (80) 4.72 (120) 4.72 (120) 2.96 (75) 4.72 (120) 6.30 (160) 4.80 (122) 7.87 (200) 2.36 (60) 2.36 (60) 2.36 (60) -- -- 3.54 (90) 3.54 (90) 3.54 (90) 3.35 (85) 3.54 (90) 2.24 (57) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) 3.54 (90) 3.54 (90) 1.81 (46) 4.09 (108) 5.82 (148) 4.33 (110) 7.40 (188) F Front of Panel -- See Product Selection -- Components Rear of Panel -- See Page 47-94 B 4 Mounting Holes 1.65 (42) E C D Double Depth A Single Depth Conduit Entry 1 - 4 Element 0.83 (21) 6 & 9 Element 1.02 (26) 1 - 4 Element 0.87 (22) 6 & 9 Element 1.26 (32) Figure 47-27. Enclosure Dimensions in Inches (mm) Enclosure Component Application Table 47 Use the table below to determine which operators will or will not fit in a specific enclosure. For example, a 50 mm mushroom head pushbutton operator will only fit in a 1-hole Cutler-Hammer enclosure. Table 47-124. Enclosure Component Application Number of Holes in Enclosure 1 2 3 4 6 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No No No No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No Mushroom Head Pushbuttons 1.14 inch (29 mm) 1.57 inch (40 mm) 1.97 inch (50 mm) Push-Pull Operators 1.14 inch (29 mm) 1.57 inch (40 mm) Selector Switch Operators Knob Lever -- Vertical Lever -- Horizontal Key Illuminated Operators With Transformer 5-Way Adapter Over-Sized Yellow Legend Plate 45 mm 70 mm When installed next to standard-sized operator only. When installed in the bottom position only. With conduit entrance at bottom. With components mounted horizontally. With components mounted vertically. For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-89 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series -- Dimensions Approximate Dimensions Note: Approximate dimensions in Inches (mm). For Rear of Panel Extensions. See Table 47-128 on Page 47-94. Non-illuminated Pushbutton Components 1.16 (29.5) 0.63 (16) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) Figure 47-28. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia. Flush Button 1.16 (29.5) 0.87 (22) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) Figure 47-29. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia. Extended Button 1.16 (29.5) 0.87 (22) Ship. Wt. 2.2 oz. (0.06 kg) Figure 47-30. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia. with Full Shroud CA08102001E Illuminated Pushbutton Components 1.1 (28) 0.87 (22) Ship. Wt. 1.4 oz. (0.04 kg) Figure 47-31. E22/EM22 Series 28 mm Dia. Mushroom Head Button 1.57 (40) 0.87 (22) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) Figure 47-32. E22/EM22 Series 40 mm Dia. Mushroom Head Button 1.97 (50) 1.02 (26) Ship. Wt. 1.6 oz. (0.05 kg) Figure 47-33. E22/EM22 Series 50 mm Dia. Mushroom Head Button For more information visit: www.eaton.com 1.16 (29.5) 0.63 (16) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) Figure 47-34. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia. Flush Lens 1.16 (29.5) 0.79 (20) Ship. Wt. 1.6 oz. (0.05 kg) Figure 47-35. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia. Extended Lens 1.16 (29.5) 1.1 (28) Ship. Wt. 2.2 oz. (0.06 kg) Figure 47-36. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia. Extended Lens with Shroud 47 47-90 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series -- Dimensions Alternate Action (Push-Push) Components 1.16 (29.5) 0.60 (15.2) Table 47-125. Minimum Spacing in Inches (mm) Size/Type of Operator B Push-Push Operators up to 1.18 (30) Dia. Including Knob and Key Operated Selector Switches -- except those listed below 3-way adapter 1.18 (30) 1.97 (50) Pushbutton Operators fitted with Rubber Boots or Padlockable Cover 3-way adapter 1.38 (35) 1.97 (50) 1.60 (40.6) Horizontal spacing for one 3-way mounting adapter. Figure 47-37. E22 Series Non-illuminated Flush Operator 0.94 1.16 (23.9) (29.5) 0.83 (21.0) Dimensions A A 0.89 (22.5) +0.02 (0.4) Diameter 0.13 (3.2) + _ 0.01 (0.2) 0.96 (24.3) +0.02 (0.4) -0 (0) B Notch Mounting Hole as Shown 1.83 (46.4) Figure 47-38. E22 Series Non-illuminated Extended Operator 1.06 1.16 (26.9) (29.5) 0.89 (22.5) Dia. 0.05 (1.3) 1.18 (30.0) 1.79 (45.5) 0.83 (21.0) 1.83 (46.4) Figure 47-39. E22 Series Illuminated Flush Operator Standard 1.17 (29.8) Jumbo 1.57 (40.0) Figure 47-43. Push-Push Nameplate Dimensions 47 1.16 (29.5) Twist-to-Release, Push-Pull and Key Release Components 0.59 (15) 1.60 (40.6) 1.1 (28) 1.57 (40) Figure 47-40. EM22 Series Non-illuminated Flush Operator 0.87 (22) Ship. Wt. 1.4 oz. (0.04 kg) 0.94 1.16 (23.9) (29.5) Figure 47-44. E22/EM22 Series 28 mm Diameter Twist-to-Release Button 0.87 (22) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) Figure 47-46. E22/EM22 Series 40 mm Dia. Push-Pull Button 0.82 (20.8) 0.94 (23.9) Figure 47-41. EM22 Series Non-illuminated Extended Operator 1.06 1.16 (26.9) (29.5) 0.82 (20.8) 1.57 (40) 0.87 (22) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) Figure 47-45. E22/EM22 Series 40 mm Dia. Twist-to-Release Button 1.83 (46.4) 1.97 (50) 1.02 (26) Ship. Wt. 1.6 oz. (0.05 kg) Figure 47-47. E22/EM22 Series 50 mm Dia. Push-Pull Button Figure 47-42. EM22 Series Illuminated Flush Operator For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-91 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series -- Dimensions Push-Pull Components -- Non-illuminated Operators 1.57 (40) 1.57 (40) 1.57 (40) to Remove Key Ship. Wt. 2.2 oz. (0.06 kg) 0.87 (22) Figure 47-48. E22/EM22 Series 40 mm Dia. Key Release Button Indicating Light Components 1.57 (40) 1.3 (33) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) Figure 47-56. E22/EM22 Series 3-Position 40 mm Dia. Lens (Spring Return to Center) 1.3 (33) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) Figure 47-52. E22/EM22 Series 2-Position 40 mm Dia. Button (Maintained) 1.57 (40) 1.16 (29.5) 1.57 (40) 0.63 (16) Ship. Wt. 0.8 oz. (0.02 kg) Figure 47-49. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia. Standard Lens 1.3 (33) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) Figure 47-57. E22/EM22 Series 3-Position 40 mm Dia. Push-Pull Pushbutton (Spring Return to Center from Pulled Position) 1.3 (33) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) Figure 47-53. E22/EM22 Series 3-Position 40 mm Dia. Button (Spring Return to Center) Non-illuminated Selector Switches 1.16 (29.5) 0.63 (16) Ship. Wt. 0.8 oz. (0.02 kg) 1.57 (40) Figure 47-50. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia. Lens Insert Version 0.87 (22) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) Figure 47-58. E22 Series 2-Position -- 45 Throw -- Lever 1.3 (33) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) 1.16 (29.5) 0.91 (23) Ship. Wt. 1.7 oz. (0.05 kg) 0.98 (25) Figure 47-54. E22/EM22 Series 3-Position 40 mm Dia. Push-Pull Pushbutton (Spring Return to Center from Pulled Position) Push-Pull Components -- Illuminated Operators 0.98 (25) 0.87 (22) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) Figure 47-51. E22 Series 25 mm Dia. Glass Lens Figure 47-59. E22 Series 3-Position -- 45 Throw -- Lever 1.57 (40) 1.3 (33) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) Figure 47-55. E22/EM22 Series 2-Position 40 mm Dia. Lens (Maintained) CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 0.79 (20) 0.87 (22) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) Figure 47-60. E22 Series 2-Position -- 45 Throw -- Knob 47 47-92 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series -- Dimensions 0.79 (20) 0.98 (25) 0.87 (22) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) Figure 47-61. E22 Series 3-Position -- 45 Throw -- Knob 0.79 (20) 1.57 (40) to Remove Key Ship. Wt. 2.7 oz. (0.08 kg) 0.87 (22) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) Figure 47-71. EM22 Series -- 60 Throw -- Lever Figure 47-66. E22/EM22 Series Key Operated Illuminated Selector Switches 0.79 (20) 0.98 (25) 0.87 (22) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) 0.87 (22) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) Figure 47-62. E22/EM22 Series 2-Position -- 60 Throw -- Lever 0.98 (25) 0.87 (22) Ship. Wt. 1.6 oz. (0.05 kg) Figure 47-72. EM22 Series -- 60 Throw -- Knob Rotary Cam Selector Switch Figure 47-67. E22 Series 2-Position -- 45 Throw -- Lever 1- or 2-Pole Block 0.98 (25) 0.79 (20) 0.87 (22) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) 47 0.95 (24) Figure 47-73. Rotary Cam Selector Switch For each additional (1- or 2-pole) block add 0.47" (12 mm). 0.87 (22) Figure 47-63. E22/EM22 Series 3-Position -- 60 Throw -- Lever 2.79 (71) 0.98 (25) Figure 47-68. E22 Series 3-Position -- 45 Throw -- Knob 0.79 (20) 0.87 (22) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) Figure 47-64. E22/EM22 Series 2-Position -- 60 Throw -- Knob 0.98 (25) 0.87 (22) Ship. Wt. 1.6 oz. (0.05 kg) Figure 47-69. E22 Series 2-Position -- 60 Throw -- Lever 0.79 (20) 0.87 (22) Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg) Figure 47-65. E22/EM22 Series 3-Position -- 60 Throw -- Knob 0.79 (20) 0.87 (22) Figure 47-70. E22 Series 3-Position -- 60 Throw -- Knob For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-93 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series -- Dimensions Specialty Operators Joystick 1.0 (25.4) 2.6 (66) 2.76 (70.0) Dia. 0.89 +0.02 / -0 (22.5 +0.4 / -0) A Adjacent Operator B Legend Plate 0.89 (22.5) Dia. Four-Position Joystick Operator Adjacent Operator Figure 47-74. Potentiometer with Knob Operator Figure 47-77. Joystick Mounting -- Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1.73 (44.0) With Flats Table 47-126. Minimum Panel Spacing Between 4-Position Joystick and Adjacent Operators in Inches (mm) 1.0 (25.4) Size and Type of Adjacent Operator 1.1 - 4.9 (28 - 125) Figure 47-75. Flush Pushbutton Operator with Mechanical Push Rod 1.28 (32.5) 2.58 (65.5) 0.25 (6.4) Figure 47-76. Wobble Stick Operator A Figure 47-78. Joystick Nameplate Dimensions -- Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) B All types except those listed 2.56 below (65) 2.56 (65) Lever selector switches and 40 mm dia. operators 2.76 (70) 3.15 (80) 50 mm dia. operators 2.95 (75) 2.95 (75) 40 mm dia. emergency stop 3.15 pushbutton (80) 3.15 (80) Operators with rubber boots 2.76 or padlockable covers (70) 3.35 (85) 40 mm dia. emergency stop 3.15 pushbutton with 70 mm (80) rectangular guard 3.54 (90) Double head pushbutton 2.76 (70) 3.35 (85) Four-position joystick operator 3.94 (100) 3.94 (100) 47 6.41 (162.8) 1.17 (29.8) 6.14 (156.0) 1.17 (29.8) 30 30 3.35 (85.1) 3.26 (82.9) 30 30 2.17 (55.1) One Contact Block 3.00 (76.2) Two Contact Blocks 2.17 (55.1) One Contact Block 3.00 (76.2) Two Contact Blocks Joystick without Center Lock Joystick with Center Lock Figure 47-79. Joystick Operator Dimensions -- Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 0.04 (1.0) Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-94 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series -- Dimensions Mounting Table 47-127. Minimum Spacing in Inches (mm) Size/Type of Operator Panel thickness -- Inches (mm) Nominal: 0.27 (6.8) - Legend plates, aluminum or plastic: 0.05 (1.3) - Locating ring: 0.06 (1.5) - Large yellow round legend plate: 0.04 (1.0) - Padlockable cover: 0.06 (1.6) - Rubber boot: 0.05 (1.3) Minimum: 0.04 (1.0) Note: Installation of certain accessories will increase the total (overall) panel thickness by the amount shown. The total panel thickness with all accessories installed cannot exceed the maximum allowable nominal dimension of 0.27 inch (6.8 mm). Dimensions A A B 1.18 (30) 1.58 (40) -- 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) Lever Operated Selector Switch Operators and 1.18 - 1.57 (30 - 40) Dia. Operators 1.77 (45) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) Dia. Operators 2.16 (55) 2.16 (55) 2.16 (55) Large Yellow Round Legend Plate -- 2.76 (70) Dia. 2.95 (75) 2.95 (75) 2.95 (75) Pushbutton Operators fitted with Rubber Boots or Padlockable Cover 3-way adapter 5-way adapter 1.38 (35) 1.58 (40) -- 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) All Types up to 1.18 (30) Dia. Including Knob and Key Operated Selector Switches -- except those listed below 3-way adapter 5-way adapter Horizontal spacing for one 3-way and one 5-way mounting adapter. Horizontal spacing for two 5-way mounting adapters. A 0.89 (22.5) +0.02 (0.4) Diameter 0.13 (3.2) + _ 0.01 (0.2) 0.96 (24.3) +0.02 (0.4) -0 (0) B Notch Mounting Hole as Shown Figure 47-80. Minimum Spacing in Inches (mm) Dual Contact Dual Block Trans. Block Contact Added Added Light Circuit Block/ Contact to to Light Unit Unit Block Trans. Trans. Unit Unit 47 E D C B A Figure 47-81. Rear of Panel Extensions Table 47-128. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) A B C D E Single Circuit Block -- Full Voltage and Resistor Units Dual Circuit, Contact Block Transformer Light Unit Trans. Light Unit and Single Circuit Contact Block Trans. Light Unit and Dual Circuit Contact Block 2.91 (74) 3.7 (94) 4.3 (110) 3.15 (80) 3.9 (99) 4.5 (115) Pushbuttons All Types and Push-Pull 2.0 (51) 2.6 (66) Key, Lever and Knob Selector Switches 2.22 (57) 2.83 (72) For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-95 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Ordering Examples Ordering Complete Devices Ordering Complete Devices Using Single Composite Catalog Number All Type E22 and EM22 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights can be ordered as complete devices, with Light Units and/or Contact Blocks, using a single composite Catalog Number. The components including operator, Light Unit and/or Contact Blocks are shipped unassembled in an overpack bag. To order, select the required operator from the component listing on previous pages in this catalog and add Suffix Codes to the Catalog Number as listed on Page 47-98. For illuminated operators, add Light Unit Suffix Code first, then the Contact Block Suffix (if required). For nonilluminated operators, simply add Contact Block Suffix Code to operator Catalog Number. Table 47-129. Catalog Numbering System E22T2 X11 C Illuminated Pushbutton Operator Ordering Example Illuminated extended red pushbutton operator with 120V Transformer Type Light Unit and two contact blocks (1NO-1NC) is shown in Table 47-129. Contact Blocks 1NO-1NC Transformer Light Unit Example: Individually packaged components shipped in an overpack bag with single composite Catalog Number. = Composite Cat. No. E22T2X11C Operator Cat. No. E22T2 from Page 47-36 Light Unit Suffix Code X11 from Table on Page 47-98 Contact Blocks Suffix Code C from Table on Page 47-98 Ordering Rotary Cam Selector Switches Custom Switch Ordering Instructions To order a custom assembled Rotary Cam Selector Switch, construct a Catalog Number from Table 47-133 using the adjacent example and the numbering guide at the bottom for reference. Switches will accept up to 12 Poles in any sequence. List the Code Letter or Numbers for the Circuit Combinations in the assembly sequence required -- the first circuit designated will be assembled directly behind the operator and the remaining Circuit Combinations will be assembled in the order listed. Wiring terminals accept one or two 20 - 14 AWG (0.5 - 2.5 mm2) solid or stranded conductors. Torque wiring terminals to 5 lb-in (0.6 Nm). Rated insulation voltage (U i) is 440V. Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) is 4kV. UL 508 CSA C22.2 No. 14 IEC 408 Right Left Right & Left Center Right & Center Left & Center All Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Lever/Knob Key Price U.S. $ Price U.S. $ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Table 47-130. Key Removal Code Code Up to Key Removal Position Circuit Combinations Approvals Specifications Rated 10A @ 300V AC Contacts: silver with gold plating DOL - motor rating: 120V 1/3 hp Mechanical Life: 5,000,000 operations IP65 Wiring terminals rated IP2X Table 47-131. Maintained From maintained position only. Table 47-132. Spring Return Circuit Combinations Up to Lever/Knob Key Price U.S. $ Price U.S. $ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-92 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 47-96 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Ordering Examples Ordering Example -- Custom Order -- Approx. 2 - 3 Weeks Delivery Example: Three-Position Key Operated Selector Switch with Chrome Bezel, having 5 poles assembled in order as follows: Key to be removable from center position only. Base Catalog Number Operator Type Operator Mode Circuit Combinations Key Removal Code E22Y D 30 DCDGC -4 O O O X O X O X X O X X X O X 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Complete Catalog Number = E22YD30DCDGC-4 Black levers and knobs are standard. For alternate color, insert Code Letter as sixth digit from left -- Red "R", Green "G", Yellow "Y", White "W", Blue "V" -- Example: E22YCR20AABBB Table 47-133. Selection Table Operator Type Operator Mode Code Letter Code Number Description Black Bezel E Lever Operated F Knob Operated G Key Operated Circuit Combinations (Select Maximum of 12) Code Circuit Letter Description Two-Position Selector Switch 20 Chrome Bezel B Lever Operated C Knob Operated D Key Operated 47 Left Center Right -- -- X O X O -- -- O X O X Left Center Right X X X O O O O X O O X X O O X X X O 2-Position Maintained Center to Right 25 Left to Right Three-Position Selector Switch 30 3-Position Maintained 31 Spring Return from Right and Left 32 Spring Return Left to Center Four-Position Selector Switch A B A B C D E F G H 1 40 J K L M N P R S T V W 4 5 6 E22Y Base Operator Number Type 2 3 4 4-Position Maintained X O O O X O O X O X X O X X O X O O O X O X X O X X O X O O X O O X X O O X X X X O O O O X X O X O X O O X X X -- Operator Mode Circuit Combinations Maximum of 12 Poles Key Removal Code from Table 47-130 (if Required) For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-97 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Composite Catalog Number Structure Catalog Number Structure Table 47-134. E22 Catalog Numbering System Code Series E22P 2 N29 X4 C E22 Plastic Operator EM22 Metal Operator Operator Code (1 to 3 Alphas) Code Description Non-illuminated, Momentary Pushbutton P 25 mm Flush Button E 25 mm Extended Button M 28 mm Mushroom Button L 40 mm Mushroom Button JP P50 mm Mushroom (Plastic) Button J 50 mm Mushroom (Aluminum) Button Non-illuminated, Maintained (Latching) Pushbutton ML 28 mm Twist-to-Release LL 40 mm Twist-to-Release LTA 40 mm Trigger Action JPL 50 mm Latch-In/Pull-toRelease (Plastic) JL 50 mm Latch-In/Pull-toRelease (Aluminum) G 40 mm Key Release Button LTG 40 mm Keyed Trigger Action Non-illuminated, Push-Pull Pushbutton 29.5 mm, 2-Position EH Maintained 29.5 mm, 3-Position FH Spring Return Center ED 40 mm, 2-Position Maintained FD 40 mm, 3-Position Spring Return Center Non-illuminated, Push-Push Pushbutton PP 25 mm Flush Button EP 25 mm Extended Button Non-illuminated, Selector Switches (Alpha + Digits) X _ _ _ Knob, 2- and 3-Position V _ _ _ Lever, 2- and 3-Position K _ _ _ Key, 2- and 3-Position Bezel Code (1 Alpha) Code Description (Blank) Chrome B Black (E22 Only) F Full Shroud for Pushbutton X Full Shroud for Illuminated Pushbutton Color Code - Non-illuminated Operators (1 Digit) Code Description 1 Black 2 Red 3 Green 4 Yellow 5 White 6 Blue 7 Gray 8 Orange Color Code - Illuminated Operators (1 to 2 Digits) Code Description 0 Clear 2 Red 22 Red (LED) 3 Green 33 Green (LED) 4 Yellow 5 White 6 Blue 66 Blue (LED) 9 Amber For Illuminated Devices Use These Operator Codes PLUS Use Code From Adjacent Chart Illuminated, Momentary Pushbuttons N 25 mm Flush Button T 25 mm Extended Button Illuminated, Push-Pull Pushbuttons GH 29.5 mm, 2-Position Maintained HH 29.5 mm, 3-Position Spring Return Center GD 40 mm, 2-Position Maintained HD 40 mm, 3-Position Spring Return Center Illuminated, Push-Push Pushbuttons NP 25 mm Flush Button TP 25 mm Extended Button Illuminated, Selector Switches (Alpha + Digits) S _ _ _ Knob, 2- and 3-Position W _ _ _ Lever, 2- and 3-Position Indicating Lights H 25 mm Standard Lens A 25 mm Printable Lens F 25 mm Glass Lens Legend Code (N + Digits) Code Description (Blank) No Legend N___ Contact Code Alphas Single Dual & Circuit Blocks Singles Configuration A -- 1NO B -- 1NC C W 1NO/1NC D V 2NO E -- 2NC F WA or VB 2NO/1NC G WB 1NO/2NC H VA 3NO J -- 3NC K -- 1NO/1NC Overlapping S -- 1NO/1NC 3-Position Push-Pull -- PP 1NO/2NC for Selector Switch -- RR 2NO/2NC for Selector Switch DD VV 4NO EE -- 4NC CC WW 2NO/2NC CE WE 1NO/3NC DAB VW 3NO/1NC DDA VVA 5NO EEB -- 5NC DEB WWB 2NO/3NC DAE VWB 3NO/2NC DDB VVB 4NO/1NC EEA WEB 1NO/4NC Dual & Circuit Dual & Circuit Single Configuration Single Configuration VVV 6NO -- 1NO/7NC -- 6NC VVVVA 9NO WWW 3NO/3NC -- 9NC VWW 4NO/2NC WWWWA 5NO/4NC VVW 5NO/1NC WWWWB 4NO/5NC VVVA 7NO VWWWA 6NO/3NC -- 7NC -- 3NO/6NC WWWA 4NO/3NC VVWWA 7NO/2NC WWWB 3NO/4NC -- 2NO/7NC WWWE 2NO/5NC VVVVB 8NO/1NC VWWA 5NO/2NC -- 1NO/8NC VVVB 6NO/1NC VVVVV 10NO -- 1NO/6NC -- 10NC VVVV 8NO WWWWW 5NO/5NC -- 8NC -- 6NO/4NC WWWW 4NO/4NC VVWWW 7NO/3NC WWWF 3NO/5NC -- 3NO/7NC VWWW 5NO/3NC VVVWW 8NO/2NC VVWW 6NO/2NC -- 2NO/8NC -- 2NO/6NC VVVVW 9NO/1NC VVVW 7NO/1NC -- 1NO/9NC Light Source Code (X + Digits) Code Description Code Description X2 Direct Voltage w/6V Lamp X29 PresTest 380V X3 Direct Voltage w/12V Lamp Transformer, X4 Direct Voltage w/24V Lamp Prewired 1NO/1NC X6 Direct Voltage w/48V Lamp X30 PresTest 440V X7 Direct Voltage w/60V Lamp Transformer, X8 Direct Voltage w/120V Lamp Prewired 1NO/1NC X10 120V Resistor w/60V Lamp X37 6-12V Red LED X11 120V Transformer w/6V Lamp X38 6-12V Green LED X12 240V Transformer w/6V Lamp X39 6-12V Yellow LED X13 415V Transformer w/6V Lamp X40 24V Red LED X14 480V Transformer w/6V Lamp X41 24V Green LED X20 PresTest 24V Direct, Prewired X42 24V Yellow LED 1NO/1NC X43 120V Red LED X26 PresTest 120V Resistor, X44 120V Green LED Prewired 1NO/1NC X45 120V Yellow LED X27 PresTest 120V Transformer, X51 6-12V Blue LED Prewired 1NO/1NC X52 24V Blue LED X28 PresTest 220V Transformer, X53 48V Red LED Prewired 1NO/1NC X54 48V Green LED Additional Units Available For use with indicating lights only. Will have tall lamp/LED for selector switch and push-pull operators. Standard size lamp and LED for all other operators. CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Code X55 X56 X57 X58 X59 X60 X61 X87 X89 X90 X91 X92 X94 X95 X96 X97 X98 Description 48V Yellow LED 48V Blue LED 60V Red LED 60V Green LED 60V Yellow LED 60V Blue LED 120V Blue LED 48V Orange LED 6-12V White LED 24V White LED 48V White LED 120V White LED 6-12V Orange LED 24V Orange LED 120V Orange LED 60V White LED 60V Orange LED 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-98 January 2010 E22 and EM22 Series, Suffix Codes Suffix Codes Table 47-135. Contact Blocks Description Suffix Code Single or Combination of Single Circuit Blocks Dual or Combination of Dual with Single Circuit Blocks Component Reference Cat. No. Standard Contact Blocks for All Operators Except 3-Position Push-Pull and Special Function 1NO 1NC 1NO-1NC 1NO-1NC 2NO 2NO 2NC 1NO-1NC overlapping 2NO-1NC 2NO-1NC 2NO-1NC 2NC-1NO 2NC-1NO 3NO 3NO 3NC 1NO-3NC 2NO-2NC 3NO-1NC 4NO A B C -- D -- E K -- -- -- W -- V -- -- E22B2 E22B1 E22B2 + B1 E22B11 E22B2 + B2 E22B20 E22B1 + B1 E22B3 + B4 F -- -- G -- H -- J -- -- -- -- -- WA VB -- WB -- VA -- WE WW VW VV E22B2 + B2 + B1 E22B11 + B2 E22B20 + B1 E22B1 + B1 + B2 E22B11 + B1 E22B2 + B2 + B2 E22B20 + B2 E22B1 + B1 + B1 E22B11 + B1 + B1 E22B11 + B11 E22B20 + B11 E22B20 + B20 Special Function Block Combination: For Use with 3-Position Push-Pulls 1NO-1NC Late Break 1NO-1NO S -- E22B1 + B4 T -- E22B1 + B5 Special Function Block Combination: For Use on Selector Switches (supplied with external jumper) 1NO-2NC 2NO-2NC 47 -- -- PP RR E22B12 E22B11 + B11 Special Function Block Combination: For Use on Trigger-Action Emergency Stop Pushbuttons 1NC 2NC 1NC-1NO 2NC-1NO QB QE QC QG -- -- -- -- E22CB1 E22CB1 + CB1 E22CB11 E22CB1 + CB1 + B2 Can not be used with illuminated devices, push-pulls, twist-to-release operators or selector switches. Operator plug E22BA2 must be installed. E22B4 contact block not available for use with 5-way mounting adapter. Can not be used with illuminated push-push devices. Operator plug E22BA2P must be installed with non-illuminated devices. Can not be used on push-push devices. Table 47-136. Light Units -- Standard Size for all Operators Excluding Selector Switches and Push-Pull Units Description Direct Voltage Light Unit AC/DC -- Without Lamp With 6V Lamp With 12V Lamp With 24V Lamp With 48V Lamp With 60V Lamp Direct Voltage Light Unit AC/DC -- For Indicating Lights Only With 120V Lamp Resistor Type Light Unit AC/DC -- 120V/60 Hz Transformer Type Light Unit AC only -- 120V/60 Hz 240V/60 Hz 480V/60 Hz Neon Light Unit AC only -- 120V with Lamp 240V with Lamp PresTest Light Unit -- Prewired with 1NO-1NC Contact Blocks -- Transformer Type 120V/60 Hz Direct Voltage without Lamp Direct Voltage with 24V Lamp Resistor Type -- 120V LED Light Units -- Direct Voltage Suffix Code Component Reference Cat. No. X1 X2 X3 X4 X6 X7 X8 E22D E22D6 E22D12 E22D24 E22D50 E22D60 E22D120 X10 E22R2 X11 X12 X14 E22TL1 E22TL2 E22TL4 X15 X16 E22DN120 E22DN240 X27 E22TL1C X17 E22D0C E22D24C X20 E22R2C X26 See Page 47-70 Resistor unit is not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style. LED compatible. Table 47-137. Light Units -- For Selector Switch and Push-Pull Operators Only Description Direct Voltage Light Unit AC/DC -- Without Tall Lamp With 6V Tall Lamp With 12V Tall Lamp With 24V Tall Lamp With 48V Tall Lamp With 60V Tall Lamp Direct Voltage Light Unit AC/DC -- For Indicating Lights Only With 120V Lamp Resistor Type Light Unit AC/DC -- 120V Tall Bulb/60 Hz Transformer Type Light Unit AC only 120V Tall Bulb/60 Hz 240V Tall Bulb/60 Hz 480V Tall Bulb/60 Hz PresTest Light Unit -- Prewired with 1NO-1NC Contact Blocks -- Transformer Type 120V Tall Bulb/60 Hz Direct Voltage without Tall Lamp Direct Voltage with 24V Tall Lamp Resistor Type -- 120V Tall Lamp LED Light Units -- Direct Voltage Suffix Code Component Reference Cat. No. X1 X2 X3 X4 X6 X7 E22DE E22DT6 E22DT12 E22DT24 E22DT50 E22DT60 X8 E22D120 X10 E22RT2 X11 X12 X14 E22TL1T E22TL2T E22TL4T -- X27 E22TLT1C X17 E22DT0C E22DT24C X20 E22RT2C X26 See Page 47-70 Resistor unit is not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style. LED compatible. For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight 47-99 January 2010 E30 Series Product Description Contents Description Page Product Description . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection -- Operators Square Multifunction Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square Multifunction Operators and Indicating Lights . . . . . . . Product Selection -- Operator Components Operating Buttons Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Buttons and Lens Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator Lens Only . . . . . . Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Options Markings and Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Parts . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-99 47-99 47-99 47-100 47-101 47-102 The E30 industrial pushbutton and indicating light line from Eaton's electrical business features a wide selection of square, multifunction operators which conveniently mount in a standard 30.5 mm [1-13/64 inches] diameter panel hole. Up to six input and indicating functions can be grouped into a single operating head, saving valuable panel space. Attractive square operator styling, coupled with custom legending of colored buttons and lenses and many special function accessories, makes E30 components ideally suited for use on control consoles and for a variety of industrial OEM applications. Features 47-105 47-106 47-107 47-108 Type E30 control units consist of a basic operator with one or more buttons and lenses and contact block selection dependent on the specific operator configuration. 47-109 47-112 47-113 47-114 Pushbutton operators will accommodate up to four single depth stackable contact blocks behind each operating button, up to eight circuits maximum. Indicating lights are supplied complete with either a transformer light unit up to 600V AC supply line voltage or full voltage light unit up to 120V AC/DC supply line voltage. Combination pushbutton with indicating light operators are supplied complete with a transformer or full voltage unit. Contact blocks must be ordered separately, up to four circuits maximum. Die Cast Construction Each operator has high pressure type seals to prevent the passage of oil and other contaminants through the operator into the contact structure or panel interior. Each operator uses a Buna N cork gasket between the mounting flange on the operator and the panel to maintain oiltightness. Standards and Certifications UL Listed -- File No. E131568 CSA Certified -- File No. LR68551 Ingress Protection Single and Dual Indicating Lights UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13 All Other Operators UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 47 Multifunction Operator Upper Contact Block Operating Plunger Quarter Turn Screw -- Mounts Locking Ring to Operator Gasket Buttons and Lenses Supplied Blank or with Custom Legend(s) Single Circuit Contact Block Retaining Nut Secures Operator to Panel Lower Contact Block Operating Plunger Locking Ring -- Supplied with Operator -- Serves as Mount for Light Element and Contact Blocks Transformer or Full Voltage Light Element -- Supplied with Operator E30 Series CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Two Circuit Contact Block Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight 47-100 January 2010 E30 Series, Technical Data and Specifications Technical Data and Specifications Electrical Ratings Table 47-138. Contact Block Meet or Exceed NEMA Contact Rating Designation A600 and P300 Climate Conditions A600 (AC) Terminals Make and Emergency Interrupting Capacity (Amps) Light Units Normal Load Break (Amps) Continuous Amperes Terminals are saddle clamp type for 2 stranded or solid wires up to 12 AWG (4.0 mm2) Torque -- 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm) Contact Block Terminals are saddle clamp type for 2 stranded or solid wires up to 12 AWG (4.0 mm2) Torque -- 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm) Material 47 Description Operating: -20 to 150F (-29 to 65C) Operator is a zinc base die casting with a copper-nickel-chrome plated finish. Withstands the 200 hr. salt spray test in accordance with MIL Spec. QQ-M-151A and NEMA 4X testing. All internal parts, including shafts, washers and springs, are made of stainless steel. The buttons and lenses are made of colorfast, wear resistant, molded acetal resin. The contact blocks are made of molded, heat resistant, mineral filled phenolic. The contact block plungers are molded of nylon filled phenolic. The contacts are silver. P300 (DC) 120V 240V 480V 600V 24/28V 125V 250V 60 30 15 12 5.73 1.1 0.55 6 3 5.73 1.1 0.55 UL A600/P300 nominal connect 10A 1NO, 1NC, 2NO, 2NC, 1NO-1NC, early make, late break and overlapping configurations Mechanical positive drive operation on NC contacts Palladium alloy contact for logic level or highly corrosive environments Reliability Nibs These nibs combine a scrubbing action with high pressure density when the contacts are closed. They push through particles and films found on contact surfaces in industrial environments. The reliability nibs self-adjust to the application -- dry circuit, normal or heavy-duty. 1.5 10 1.2 5 Maximum Ratings for Logic Level and Hostile Atmosphere Applications Maximum amperes: 0.5A Maximum volts: 120V AC/DC Light Unit Bulbs -- average life: Transformer type: 20,000 hrs. Resistor/direct voltage type: 2,500 hrs. min. @ rated voltage LED: 60,000 to 100,000 hrs. Dry Circuit Medium Duty Heavy-Duty Figure 47-82. Reliability Nibs For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight 47-101 January 2010 E30 Series, Operators Product Selection -- Operators When Ordering a Complete E30 Control Unit Specify Ordering Example: E30AB E30KB130 E30KB231 E30KLA1 E30KLA2 Catalog Number of Operator Catalog Number of Button(s) Catalog Number of Contact Block(s) Catalog Number of Accessories (if required) "START" "STOP" 1NO 1NC Square Multifunction Operators Table 47-139. Single Button Operator/without Button -- Order Buttons Separately -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operation Special Features Catalog Number Momentary -- E30AA Price U.S. $ Button Type Button Type Required Single Button Operator shown with Extended Button Order from Table on Page 47-105 Table 47-140. Two Button Operator/without Buttons -- Order Buttons Separately -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operation Two Button Operator shown with Extended Buttons Special Features Catalog Number Momentary -- E30AB Momentary Momentary With Mechanical Interlock E30AC Maintained (All Contacts) Release (All Contacts) Maintained (All Contacts) Release (All Contacts) Top Button Bottom Button Momentary With Mechanical Interlock Price U.S. $ Button Type Button Types Required E30AD E30AP Order from Table on Page 47-105 47 Limited to two single circuit, one double circuit 600V or two 120V (E30KLA9) contact blocks behind each button. Buttons are interlocked so that one of the two is maintained at all times. Depressing the other button releases the maintained button and maintains the depressed button. Table 47-141. Two Button Operator with Long (OFF) Release Bar -- Includes OFF Bar/Button -- Order Other Buttons Separately -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operation Two Button Operator shown with Long Release Bar Special Features Catalog Number Maintained -- E30AF Maintained Maintained With Mechanical Interlock E30AG Maintained Momentary With Mechanical Interlock E30AH Maintained (All Contacts) Maintained (Bottom Contacts Only) Top Button Operates Both Top and Bottom Contacts E30AK Top Button Bottom Button Maintained Price U.S. $ Button Type Button Types Required Order from Table on Page 47-105 Operators are supplied as standard with red extended bar(s) marked "OFF" as shown in sketch. For other colors or markings, contact your nearest Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-356-1243. For replacement of standard red release bar, order E30KR100. Limited to two single circuit, one double circuit 600V or two 120V (E30KLA9) contact blocks behind each button. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-112 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-105 Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-108 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-114 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight 47-102 January 2010 E30 Series, Operators & Indicating Lights Square Multifunction Operators and Indicating Lights Table 47-142. Two Button Operator with (OFF) Release -- Includes OFF Bar/Button(s) -- Order Other Buttons Separately -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operation Top Button Bottom Button Maintained Momentary Special Features Catalog Number Release Bar for Top Button E30AL Price U.S. $ Button Type Button Types Required Two Button Operator shown with Release Bar for Top Button Two Button Operator shown with Individual Release Bars for Each Button Order from Table on Page 47-105 Maintained Maintained Individual Release Bars for Each Button E30AN Maintained with Interlock Maintained with Interlock Individual Release Bars for Each Button E30AM Button Types Required Order from Table on Page 47-105 Operators are supplied as standard with red extended release bar(s) marked "OFF" as shown in sketch. For other colors or markings, contact your nearest Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-356-1243. For replacement of standard red release bar, order E30KR101. Table 47-143. Single Indicating Light Unit/without Lens -- Order Lenses Separately -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Type of Light Element Transformer (60/50 Hertz AC) Lens Type Full Voltage (60/50 Hertz AC or DC) Voltage Lamp Number Catalog Number 120 6PSB E30BA Price U.S. $ Voltage Lamp Number Catalog Number 24 120 24PSB 120PSB E30BJ E30BM Price U.S. $ Lens Type Required Single Indicating Light Unit shown with Lens 47 Order from Table on Page 47-106 Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED Part Numbers, see Table 47-149 on Page 47-104. Table 47-144. Dual Indicating Light Unit/without Lenses -- Order Lenses Separately -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Type of Light Element Transformer (60/50 Hertz AC) Voltage Lamp Number Catalog Number 120 6PSB E30CA Price U.S. $ Voltage Lamp Number Catalog Number 24 120 24PSB 120PSB E30CJ E30CM Dual Indicating Light Unit shown with Lens Lens Type Full Voltage (60/50 Hertz AC or DC) Price U.S. $ Lens Type Required Order from Table on Page 47-107 Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED Part Numbers, see Table 47-149 on Page 47-104. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-112 Buttons and Lens. . . . . . . . . Pages 47-105 - 47-107 Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-108 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-114 Replacement Lamps and Lamp Receptacles . . . . . Page 47-113 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight 47-103 January 2010 E30 Series, Operators & Indicating Lights Square Multifunction Operators and Indicating Lights (Continued) Table 47-145. Single Button Operator with Indicating Light/without Button or Lens -- Order Button and Lenses Separately -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operation (Bottom Button) Type of Light Element Transformer (60/50 Hertz AC) Catalog Voltage Lamp Number Number Momentary 120 6PSB Price U.S. $ E30DA Full Voltage (60/50 Hertz AC or DC) Voltage Lamp Catalog Price Number Number U.S. $ 24 120 24PSB 120PSB Button/Lens Type E30DX3 E30DF Button and Lens Types Required Single Button Operator and Indicating Light shown with Button & Lens Order from Tables on Pages 47-105 and 47-107 Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED Part Numbers, see Table 47-149 on Page 47-104. Table 47-146. Single Button Operator with (OFF) Release Bar and Indicating Light -- Includes OFF Bar/Button -- Order Other Button and Lens Separately -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operation (Bottom Button) Type of Light Element Transformer (60/50 Hertz AC) Catalog Voltage Lamp Number Number Maintained 120 6PSB Price U.S. $ E30DG Full Voltage (60/50 Hertz AC or DC) Voltage Lamp Catalog Price Number Number U.S. $ 24 120 24PSB 120PSB E30DX13 E30DM Button/Lens Type Button and Lens Types Required Single Button Operator with Release Bar and Indicating Light shown with Button & Lens Order from Tables on Pages 47-105 and 47-107 These operators are supplied as standard with red extended release bar(s) marked "OFF" as shown in sketch. For other colors or markings, contact your nearest Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-356-1243. For replacement of standard red release bar, order E30KR101. Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED Part Numbers, see Table 47-149 on Page 47-104. Table 47-147. Two Button Operator with Indicating Light/without Buttons or Lens -- Order Buttons and Lenses Separately -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Button Operation Two Button Operator with Indicating Light shown with Button & Lens Type of Light Element Transformer (60/50 Hertz AC) Catalog Voltage Lamp Number Number Price U.S. $ Full Voltage (60/50 Hertz AC or DC) Voltage Lamp Catalog Price Number Number U.S. $ Momentary 120 6PSB E30EA 24 120 24PSB 120PSB E30EX3 E30EF Momentary 120 with Interlock 6PSB E30EG 24 120 24PSB 120PSB E30EX13 E30EM Button/Lens Type Button and Lens Types Required Order from Tables on Pages 47-106 - 47-107 Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED Part Numbers, see Table 47-149 on Page 47-104. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Buttons and Lens . . . . . . . Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement lamps and Lamp Receptacles . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-112 Pages 47-105 - 47-107 Page 47-108 Page 47-114 Page 47-113 1CD1C 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight 47-104 January 2010 E30 Series, Operators & Indicating Lights Square Multifunction Operators and Indicating Lights (Continued) Table 47-148. Two Button Operator with Dual Indicating Lights/without Buttons and Lenses -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Two Button Operator with Dual Indicating Lights shown with Button & Lens Button Operation Type of Light Element Transformer (60/50 Hertz AC) Voltage Lamp Catalog Price No. Number U.S. $ Momentary 120 6PSB E30JA Full Voltage (60/50 Hertz AC or DC) Voltage Lamp Catalog Price No. Number U.S. $ 24 120 24PSB 120PSB E30JX3 E30JF Button/Lens Type Button and Lens Types Required Order from Tables on Pages 47-106 - 47-107 Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED Part Numbers, see Table 47-149. Table 47-149. Replacement Lamps -- Incandescent and LED Lamp Voltage Incandescent Lamps Manufacturers Base Part Number Style 6 12 24 28 6PSB 12PSB 24PSB 28PSB T2 Slide T2 Slide T2 Slide T2 Slide 48 120 48PSB 120PSB T2 Slide T2 Slide Eaton's CutlerHammer Part Number 28-1022 28-1025 28-1026 28-1027 28-1028 28-1029 Price U.S. $ LED Lamps Eaton's Cutler-Hammer Part Number Red Green Yellow Blue 35-1523 35-1523-11 35-1523-4 35-1523-4 35-1523-14 35-1523-7 35-1523-17 35-1523-18 35-1523-19 35-1523-19 35-1523-20 35-1523-21 35-1523-2 35-1523-12 35-1523-5 35-1523-5 35-1523-15 35-1523-8 35-1523-3 35-1523-13 35-1523-6 35-1523-6 35-1523-16 35-1523-9 Price U.S. $ E30 blue LED bulbs may not provide sufficient intensity for some applications. 47 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Buttons and Lens. . . . . . . . Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Lamps and Lamp Receptacles . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-112 Pages 47-105 - 47-107 Page 47-108 Page 47-114 Page 47-113 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight 47-105 January 2010 E30 Series, Components -- Operating Buttons Product Selection -- Operator Components Operating Buttons Only Table 47-150. Type A Buttons with Standard Markings Type A Extended Button for Use with Operator E30AA, Legend Characters 3/16 Inch (4.8 mm) High Color Marking Extended Button Short Button Color Catalog Price Catalog Price Number U.S. $ Number U.S. $ Marking Extended Button Short Button Button Catalog Price Catalog Price Application Number U.S. $ Number U.S. $ Black Black Red Red Red Red Green Blank START Blank EMERG. STOP OFF STOP Blank E30KA100 -- E30KA200 E30KA204 E30KA218 E30KA231 E30KA300 START Blank Blank Blank Blank Blank Blank E30KA150 E30KA180 E30KA250 -- E30KA268 E30KA281 E30KA350 Green Yellow White Gray Brown Orange Blue E30KA330 E30KA400 E30KA500 E30KA600 E30KA700 E30KA800 E30KA900 E30KA380 E30KA450 E30KA550 E30KA650 E30KA750 E30KA850 E30KA950 Table 47-151. Type B Buttons with Standard Markings Type B Extended Button for Use with Operators E30AB thru AE, AL and DA thru DF, Legend Characters 3/16 Inch (4.8 mm) High Color Marking Extended Button Short Button Color Catalog Price Catalog Price Number U.S. $ Number U.S. $ Marking Extended Button Short Button Button Catalog Price Catalog Price Application Number U.S. $ Number U.S. $ Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black E30KB100 E30KB101 E30KB102 E30KB103 E30KB105 E30KB107 E30KB109 E30KB110 E30KB111 E30KB112 E30KB113 E30KB114 E30KB115 E30KB116 E30KB117 E30KB119 E30KB120 E30KB121 E30KB122 E30KB124 REVERSE RUN SLOW START TEST UP Blank EMER. STOP OFF STOP Blank START Blank Blank AUTO HAND Blank Blank Blank Blank E30KB125 E30KB126 E30KB128 E30KB130 E30KB132 E30KB134 E30KB200 E30KB204 E30KB218 E30KB231 E30KB300 E30KB330 E30KB400 E30KB500 E30KB501 E30KB508 E30KB600 E30KB700 E30KB800 E30KB900 Blank AUTO CLOSE DOWN FAST FORWARD HIGH IN INCH JOG JOG FOR. JOG REV. LOW LOWER MAN ON OPEN OUT RAISE RESET E30KB150 E30KB151 E30KB152 E30KB153 E30KB155 E30KB157 E30KB159 E30KB160 E30KB161 E30KB162 E30KB163 E30KB164 E30KB165 E30KB166 E30KB167 E30KB169 E30KB170 E30KB171 E30KB172 E30KB174 Black Black Black Black Black Black Red Red Red Red Green Green Yellow White White White Gray Brown Orange Blue E30KB175 E30KB176 E30KB178 E30KB180 E30KB182 E30KB184 E30KB250 -- E30KB268 E30KB281 E30KB350 E30KB380 E30KB450 E30KB550 -- -- E30KB650 E30KB750 E30KB850 E30KB950 Table 47-152. Type C Buttons with Standard Markings Type C Extended Button for Use with Operators E30AF thru AK, AL thru AM and DG thru DM, Legend Characters 1/8 Inch (3.2 mm) High Color Marking Extended Button Catalog Price Number U.S. $ Short Button Catalog Price Number U.S. $ Color Marking Extended Button Catalog Price Number U.S. $ Short Button Catalog Price Number U.S. $ Black Black Black Black Black Blank AUTO CLOSE DOWN FAST E30KC100 E30KC101 E30KC102 E30KC103 E30KC105 E30KC150 E30KC151 E30KC152 E30KC153 E30KC155 Black Black Black Black Black RESET REVERSE RUN SLOW START E30KC124 E30KC125 E30KC126 E30KC128 E30KC130 E30KC174 E30KC175 E30KC176 E30KC178 E30KC180 Black Black Black Black Black FORWARD HAND HIGH IN INCH E30KC107 E30KC108 E30KC109 E30KC110 E30KC111 E30KC157 E30KC158 E30KC159 E30KC160 E30KC161 Black Black Red Red Red TEST UP Blank OFF STOP E30KC132 E30KC134 E30KC200 E30KC218 E30KC231 E30KC182 E30KC184 E30KC250 -- E30KC281 Black Black Black Black Black JOG JOG FOR. JOG REV. LOW LOWER E30KC112 E30KC113 E30KC114 E30KC115 E30KC116 E30KC162 E30KC163 E30KC164 E30KC165 E30KC166 Green Green Yellow White Gray Blank START Blank Blank Blank E30KC300 E30KC330 E30KC400 E30KC500 E30KC600 E30KC350 E30KC380 E30KC450 E30KC550 E30KC650 Black Black Black Black Black MAN ON OPEN OUT RAISE E30KC117 E30KC119 E30KC120 E30KC121 E30KC122 E30KC167 E30KC169 E30KC170 E30KC171 E30KC172 Brown Blank Orange Blank Blue Blank E30KC700 E30KC800 E30KC900 E30KC750 E30KC850 E30KC950 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . Blank Lens/Buttons with Non-standard Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Button Application Page 47-112 Page 47-108 Pages 47-109 - 47-111 Page 47-114 1CD1C 47 47-106 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight January 2010 E30 Series, Components -- Operating Buttons & Lenses Operating Buttons and Lens Only Standard Color Buttons and Lens Marking BLACK LETTERING on -- White, Amber, Yellow and Clear. WHITE LETTERING on -- Green, Red, Blue, Brown, Black, Orange and Gray. For lenses with special markings or with standard markings but in a different color, refer to instructions on Pages 47-109 - 47-111. Table 47-153. Type E Buttons with Standard Markings Color Marking Extended Button Catalog Number Type E Button for Use with Operators E30EA thru EM, FA thru FM and JA thru JM, Legend Characters 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) High Color Marking Price U.S. $ Extended Button Catalog Number Black Black Black Black Black Blank CLOSE DOWN FAST FORWARD E30KE100 E30KE102 E30KE103 E30KE105 E30KE107 Black Black Black Black Black RESET REVERSE RUN SLOW START E30KE124 E30KE125 E30KE126 E30KE128 E30KE130 Black Black Black Black Black HIGH IN INCH JOG JOG FOR. E30KE109 E30KE110 E30KE111 E30KE112 E30KE113 Black Black Red Red Red TEST UP Blank OFF STOP E30KE132 E30KE134 E30KE200 E30KE218 E30KE231 Black Black Black Black Black JOG REV. LOW LOWER ON OPEN E30KE114 E30KE115 E30KE116 E30KE119 E30KE120 Green Green Yellow White Gray Blank START Blank Blank Blank E30KE300 E30KE330 E30KE400 E30KE500 E30KE600 Black Black OUT PHASE E30KE121 E30KE122 Brown Orange Blue Blank Blank Blank E30KE700 E30KE800 E30KE900 Price U.S. $ Button Application Table 47-154. Type F Lenses with Standard Markings 47 Type F Lens for Use with Operators E30BA thru BY, Legend Characters 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) High Color Marking Catalog Number Red Red Red Red Green Blank MOTOR RUN ON POWER ON Blank E30KF10 E30KF11 E30KF12 E30KF13 E30KF20 Green Green MOTOR STOP MOTOR RUN E30KF21 E30KF23 Price U.S. $ Color Marking Catalog Number Green Amber Blue Clear White OFF Blank Blank Blank Blank E30KF22 E30KF30 E30KF40 E30KF50 E30KF60 Price U.S. $ Lens Application Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-112 Page 47-108 Page 47-114 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight 47-107 January 2010 E30 Series, Components -- Operator Lenses Operator Lens Only Standard Color Buttons and Lens Marking BLACK LETTERING on -- White, Amber, Yellow and Clear. WHITE LETTERING on -- Green, Red, Blue, Brown, Black, Orange and Gray. For lenses with special markings or with standard markings but in a different color, refer to instructions on Pages 47-109 - 47-111. Table 47-155. Type G Lenses with Standard Markings Type G Lens for Use with Operators E30CA thru CM and DA thru DM, Legend Characters 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) High Except MOTOR RUN, POWER ON & MOTOR STOP are 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) High Color Marking Catalog Number Red Red Red Red Green Blank MOTOR RUN ON POWER ON Blank Green Green MOTOR RUN MOTOR STOP Price U.S. $ Color Marking Catalog Number E30KG10 E30KG11 E30KG12 E30KG13 E30KG20 Green Green Amber Blue Clear OFF READY Blank Blank Blank E30KG22 E30KG23 E30KG30 E30KG40 E30KG50 E30KG24 E30KG21 White Blank E30KG60 Color Marking Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Lens Application Price U.S. $ Lens Application Price U.S. $ Lens Application Table 47-156. Type J Lenses with Standard Markings Type J Lens for Use with Operators E30EA thru EM, FA thru FM and GA thru GM, Legend Characters 1/8 (3.2 mm) High Color Marking Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Red Red Red Red Red Blank MOTOR RUN ON POWER ON MOTOR STOP E30KJ10 E30KJ11 E30KJ12 E30KJ13 E30KJ14 Green Green Amber Blue Clear OFF ON Blank Blank Blank E30KJ22 E30KJ24 E30KJ30 E30KJ40 E30KJ50 Green Green Green Blank MOTOR STOP MOTOR RUN E30KJ20 E30KJ21 E30KJ23 White Blank E30KJ60 Table 47-157. Type K Lenses with Standard Markings -- Sold in pairs only Color Type K Lenses for Use with Operators E30JA thru JW, Legend Characters 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) High Left Hand Lens Right Hand Lens Marking Left Hand Lens Right Hand Lens Catalog Number Red Red Green Green Red Green Green Red ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON E30KK12 E30KK13 E30KK22 E30KK23 47 Table 47-158. Type K Lenses -- Blank -- Sold in pairs only Color Left Hand Lens Right Hand Lens Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Green Amber Blue Clear White Green Green Green Green Green Green Amber Amber Amber Amber Amber Amber Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Color Catalog Number Left Hand Lens Right Hand Lens E30KK10 E30KK11 E30KK17 E30KK14 E30KK15 E30KK16 Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Red Green Amber Blue Clear White E30KK41 E30KK42 E30KK43 E30KK40 KE30K45 E30KK46 Red Green Amber Blue Clear White E30KK21 E30KK20 E30KK27 E30KK24 E30KK25 E30KK26 Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Red Green Amber Blue Clear White E30KK51 E30KK52 E30KK53 E30KK54 E30KK50 E30KK56 Red Green Amber Blue Clear White E30KK31 E30KK32 E30KK30 E30KK34 E30KK35 E30KK36 White White White White White White Red Green Amber Blue Clear White E30KK61 E30KK62 E30KK63 E30KK64 E30KK65 E30KK60 Price U.S. $ Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-114 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight 47-108 January 2010 E30 Series, Components -- Contact Blocks Contact Blocks Mounting Limitations Standard Contact Blocks -- Molded, phenolic construction. Enclosed silver contacts with reliability "nibs" that improve the reliability of switching performance under dry circuit, corrosive atmosphere and fine dust conditions. For more extreme conditions, the Logic Level contact blocks described below are recommended. Figure 47-83 and Table 47-161 give the contact block mounting limitations for Type E30 pushbutton and combination pushbutton and light operators. Mounting positions 1 thru 8 indicate single depth contact blocks. Each of these positions can represent either a single circuit 600 volt block or a 2-circuit 120 volt block. The 2-circuit 600 volt block requires two of the numbered positions shown. Table 47-159. Standard Contact Block Ratings -- Maximum Amperes Current AC Volts A600 Make & Emergency Inter. Capacity Normal Load Break DC Volts P300 120 240 480 600 24/28 125 250 60 30 15 12 5.73 1.1 0.55 6 3 1.5 1.2 Continuous Current 5.73 1.1 0.55 10 Logic Level Contact Blocks -- Feature palladium contacts. Palladium, which is more inert than gold, is well suited for voltages and currents approaching zero. When mounted in an enclosure rated for highly corrosive environments, logic level contact blocks can be used where exposure to chemicals may cause failure to other types of materials. Table 47-161. Mounting Positions Catalog Number of Operator E30AA thru E30AM E30BA thru E30CM E30DA thru E30DM E30EA thru E30GM E30JA thru E30JM Contact Blocks Can Be Mounted in Positions Listed Below 1-2-3-4 None None 2-3-4 3-4 5-6-7-8 None 5-6-7-8 6-7-8 7-8 Upper Contact Block Stack Operating Plunger 1 Maximum Amperes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5A Maximum Volts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120V AC/DC Logic level contact blocks are UL A600/P500 rated per table above. Lower Stack Except Operator E30AD, AJ or AK which will accommodate contact blocks 1, 2, 5 and 6 only. (See figure below.) Table 47-160. Maximum Ratings for Logic Level and Hostile Atmosphere Application Upper Stack 5 2 6 Upper Contact Block Stack 3 4 7 8 Contact Block Mounting Positions Lower Contact Block Stack Lower Contact Block Stack Operating Plunger Figure 47-83. Mounting Positions Table 47-162. Contact Block Selection Table Contact Block Type Circuit Pressure Terminals STANDARD Catalog Number 47 1NO Screw Terminals Quick Connect Terminals LOGIC LEVEL Price U.S. $ Catalog Number STANDARD Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ 600 Volt AC, 250 Volt DC -- Single Circuit E30KLA1 E30KLAE1 E30KLB1 1NC E30KLA2 E30KLAE2 E30KLB2 1NO-1NC 600 Volt AC, 250 Volt DC -- Two Circuit E30KLA3 E30KLAE3 E30KLB3 2NO E30KLA4 E30KLAE4 E30KLB4 2NC E30KLA5 E30KLAE5 E30KLB5 E30KLA6 -- E30KLB6 2NO (One Early Closing) E30KLA7 -- E30KLB7 2NC (One Late Opening) E30KLA8 -- E30KLB8 1NO-1NC 120 Volt AC Only -- Two Circuit Special Contact Operation 1NO-1NC Overlapping Quick Connect Terminals E30KLA9 -- E30KLB9 Do not use with maintained operators. Contacts must be same polarity. Supplied with non-stacking screws. Limited to 2 contact blocks mounted in positions 1 and 5. Individually boxed contact blocks master packed 10 per carton. Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight 47-109 January 2010 E30 Series, Options -- Legend Plates Options Markings and Legend Plates Buttons or Lenses with Non-standard Horizontal Markings Markings not listed as STANDARD MARKINGS below are considered nonstandard. If more than one marking is required on a button or lens, order non-standard markings. Description Price Per Pair U.S. $ No. of Characters per Line Lenses Buttons Green Type B button to be marked with non-standard legend "ALL ELEVATORS DOWN." Line Position Catalog No.: E30KB300STAMP Letter Size: 1/8" Pos. A -- ALL Pos. C -- ELEVATORS Pos. F -- DOWN Specify Catalog Number of blank button or lens of desired color, plus Suffix "STAMP" for Non-standard or "STD" for Standard markings in Order Price Each U.S. $ All Types except K Type K Ordering Example: Ordering Instructions Table 47-163. Button Markings Notes. See Pages 47-105 - 47-107. Specify size, legend desired and location in Order Notes by alphas as shown in example. Do not exceed maximum number of legend characters per line. 7 A 8 9 7 C E 8 8 Figure 47-84. How to Use the Legend Location Figure TYPE A BUTTONS AND TYPE F LENSES 1/8" (3 mm) High Char. E 9 9 G D 8 9 G 8 9 K 8 8 8 9 9 8 J 9 B 8 9 E 8 9 J 8 9 M 8 9 A 8 9 D 8 9 G 8 9 K 8 9 N 8 TYPE F LENS ONLY 3/16" (5 mm) High Char. 9 F 9 D 8 9 H 8 8 9 B 8 9 F 8 9 K 8 9 B 8 9 E 8 9 J 8 9 K 8 A 8 C 8 F 8 J 8 L 8 TYPE B BUTTONS AND TYPE G LENSES 1/8" (3 mm) High Char. 9 C 8 TYPE C BUTTONS 1/8" (3 mm) 6 C High Char. 5 B 5 D 9 B 8 9 D 8 4 6 4 7 9 7 3/16" (5 mm) High Char. A C E 6 9 5 B 5 D 8 B 8 8 D 8 47 8 C 6 C TYPE K BUTTONS TYPE D BUTTONS 1/8" (3 mm) High Char. 3/16" (5 mm) High Char. 8 8 8 A C F 5 5 B TYPE E BUTTONS AND TYPE J LENSES 1/8" (3 mm) 9 B 8 High Char. 3/16" (5 mm) High Char. A C 7 7 A C 8 8 6 B 3/16" (5 mm) High Char. 1/8" (3 mm) High Char. 9 B 4 E 4 A 4 C 4 D 4 F 4 B 3/16" (5 mm) High Char. B 4 E 4 8 Figure 47-85. Legend Locations Table 47-164. Standard Markings AUTO CLOSE DOWN EMERG. STOP FAST FORWARD HAND HIGH IN INCH JOG JOG FOR. JOG REV. LOW LOWER MAN. OFF ON OPEN OUT RAISE RESET REVERSE RUN SLOW START STOP TEST UP MOTOR RUN MOTOR STOP POWER ON READY Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47-110 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight January 2010 E30 Series, Options -- Legend Plates LEGEND PLATES E30KM1 OR KM11 LEGEND PLATES E30KM5 OR KM15 B LEGEND PLATES E30KM4 OR KM14 LEGEND PLATES E30KM6 OR KM16 C G D H A B A E A J B F B K LEGEND PLATES E30KM3 OR KM13 C B H B F L D M LEGEND PLATES E30KM2 OR KM12 K D F G B F M A E L B F M D M B C B M F Figure 47-86. Legend Arrangements and Legend Locations 4.69 (119.1) Three Span 3.06 (77.7) Two Span 1.44 (36.6) One Span LINE B L I N E L I N E A C LEGEND PLATES E30KN76 OR KN76B 1/8" character size only with a maximum of six characters. 0.78 (19.8) 0.39 (9.9) Large Standard 0.08 (1.9) 0.05 (1.3) 0.02 (0.5) 47 Legend Plates Figure 47-87. Legend Plates E30KN76 or KN76B Figure 47-88. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Table 47-165. Maximum Number and Size of Permissible Legend Characters of Custom Stamped Legend Plates Type No. of Lines Size and Maximum Number of Characters Per Line One Span 3/32" (2.5 mm) Two Span 1/8" (3 mm) 3/16" (5 mm) 3/32" (2.5 mm) Three Span 1/8" (3 mm) 3/16" (5 mm 3/32" (2.5 mm) 1/8" (3 mm) 3/16" (5 mm) Standard 1 13 10 10 30 22 22 47 34 34 Large 1 2 13 13 10 10 10 10 30 30 23 23 23 23 47 47 36 36 36 36 CHARACTERS AVAILABLE FOR NON-STANDARD MARKINGS 3/32 Inch (2.5 mm) -- 1/8 Inch (3 mm) -- 3/16 Inch (5 mm) ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ ./--, For more information visit: www.eaton.com 1234567890 CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight 47-111 January 2010 E30 Series, Options -- Legend Plates Buttons or Lenses with Non-standard Vertical Markings Ordering Instructions Specify Catalog Number of blank button or lens of desired color, selected from listings on Pages 47-105 - 47-107. Specify size, legend desired, location and state "vertically marked" in Order Notes. Note: Specify either 1/8 or 3/16 inch (3.2 or 4.8 mm) character height. Do not exceed maximum number of characters as outlined in table below. Ordering Example: Green Type K button to be marked with "RUN" "ON." Description Legend Plates Ordering Example: Legend plates for Type E30 Compact Pushbutton and Indicating Light operators hook directly onto the operator and are clamped in place when the operator locking nut behind the panel is secured. Three span legend plate to be marked "MASTER CONTROL", "STATION A" and "STATION B." Two and three span plates are designed for use where two or more operators are mounted adjacent to each other on minimum horizontal mounting centers. These legend plates mount in the same manner as single span units. Blank Legend Plates and Legend Plates with Markings Price Ea. Catalog No: E30KM3STAMP Letter Size: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) Pos. C -- MASTER CONTROL Pos. B -- STATION A Pos. F -- STATION B Table 47-167. Blank Legend Plate Type One Span Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Black Standard Large E30KM1 E30KM4 Price Ea. Catalog No.: E30KK20STAMP Letter Size: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) Vertically Marked Pos. B -- RUN Pos. E -- ON Standard -- One Span Table 47-166. Maximum Number of Characters Description Description Large -- One Span When Ordering Legend Plates with Markings Type Maximum Number of Characters 1/8 Inch (3.2 mm) 3/16 Inch (4.8 mm) Buttons A B C D E 7 7 4 5 7 5 5 3 3 5 Lenses F G J K 7 7 7 3 5 5 5 2 Catalog Number of Blank Legend Plate Insert the following in Order Notes: Legends Required Size of Characters -- 3/32, 1/8, 3/16 inch (2.4, 3.2, 4.8 mm) Positions of legends on one line Standard and two line Large legend plates by alphas as shown in sketches on following page. 47 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight 47-112 January 2010 E30 Series, Accessories Accessories Table 47-168. Accessories Description Color/Type Full Shroud Catalog Number Collar -- Snap on Mounting for assembly in the field. Black Permits color coding of operator heads. Size: 1-19/32 x Red 1-19/32 x 9/16". Green Yellow White Gray Orange Blue Brown E30KR1 E30KR2 E30KR3 E30KR4 E30KR5 E30KR6 E30KR8 E30KR9 E30KR10 Shroud -- Similar to collar above except for extension above the face of button to prevent accidental actuation of button. Half shroud with an extension on only half the collar may be positioned to protect top or bottom button. Full Shroud (Gray) E30KT6 Half Shroud (Gray) E30KT7 Guard -- Two collars deep, removable slide prevents accidental operation. White slide can be marked with grease pencil. Red with White Slide E30KR31 Price U.S. $ Half Shroud Red with Clear Slide Terminal Block -- 2 terminals, each will accommodate 2 wire terminations. Padlock Attachment for locking single button and bottom button of multi-function operators in the depressed position. Locks NC contacts open or early closing NO contacts closed. Cannot be used in conjunction w/collar, shroud or boot. Transparent Boot -- Guards against ingress of foreign material and freezing rain. Note: If this boot is used in conjunction with operator types AD or AE, an extended type button must be used in the top position and a short button in the lower position. 47 Square Hole Plug -- Gray Enameled Stainless Steel E30KR32 E30KR30 Short Button E30KT1 Extended Button E30KT2 E30KT3 E30KT4 E30KT5 Lamp and Lens Removal Tool -- Will not fit Cat. No. E30B Light Units listed on Page 47-102. E30KV1 Octagonal Wrench for mounting operators to panel. E22CW Button and Lens Removal Tool E30KV2 Color coordinating collars, padlock attachments or legend plates cannot be used with operators equipped with a transparent boot. Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-114 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight 47-113 January 2010 E30 Series, Accessories -- Replacement Parts Replacement Parts Table 47-169. Replacement Light Units for E30 Components Voltage AC and DC Part Numbers -- Receptacles without Lamps Single Indicating Light Price U.S. $ Dual Indicating Light Price U.S. $ Single Light Single Pushbutton Price U.S. $ Single Light Dual Pushbutton Price U.S. $ Dual Light Dual Pushbutton Price U.S. $ Full Voltage Type 6V 12V 18/24V 28V 32V 48V 120V 57-2579-3A 57-2579-3A 57-2579-3A 57-2579-3A 57-2579-3A 57-2579-3A 57-2579-3A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2568-2A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2568-2A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2579-3A 57-2579-3A 57-2579-3A 57-2579-3A -- 57-2579-3A 57-2579-3A 57-2567A 57-2567A 57-2567A 57-2567A 57-2567A 57-2567A 57-2567A 42-2672A 42-2672-2A 42-2672-3A 42-2672-4A 42-2672-5A 42-2672-6A 42-2663A 42-2663-2A 42-2663-3A 42-2663-4A 42-2663-5A 42-2663-6A 42-2663A 42-2663-2A 42-2663-3A 42-2663-4A 42-2663-5A 42-2663-6A 42-2671A 42-2671-2A 42-2671-3A 42-2671-4A 42-2671-5A 42-2671-6A 42-2664A 42-2664-2A 42-2664-3A 42-2664-4A 42-2664-5A 42-2664-6A 28-1010 15-1885 16-2092 52-1116 28-1010 15-1885 16-2092 52-1116 28-1010 15-1885 16-2092 52-1116 Transformer Type 120V 208V 240V 380V 480V 600V Description and Part Numbers -- Related Parts Inner Lens Retaining Nut Gasket Locking Ring 28-1008 15-1885 16-2092 52-1116 28-1010 15-1885 16-2092 52-1116 Table 47-170. Replacement Lamps for E30 Illuminated Operators Mfg. Lamp Type Voltage Base Style Application Part Number 6PSB 6V T2 Slide E30 Transformer and Full Voltage 28-1022 12PSB 24PSB 28PSB 48PSB 60PSB 120PSB 12V 24V 28V 48V 60V 120V T2 Slide T2 Slide T2 Slide T2 Slide T2 Slide T2 Slide E30 Full Voltage E30 Full Voltage E30 Full Voltage E30 Full Voltage E30 Full Voltage E30 Full Voltage 28-1025 28-1026 28-1027 28-1028 28-1598 28-1029 T3-1/4 Wedge E30 Single Transformer 28-949 #259 6.3V Price U.S. $ 47 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47-114 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight January 2010 E30 Series, Dimensions Dimensions 0.53 (13.5) 1.75 (44.5) 0.81 (20.6) 1.72 (43.7) 1.72 (43.7) 2 Circ. Cont. Blocks Plunger Extends to 0.25 (6.4) 0.81 (20.6) 0.53 (13.5) 1.75 (44.5) 1.13 (28.7) 1.13 (28.7) 1.88 (47.8) 0.88 (22.4) 1.88 (47.8) 1.47 (37.3) 0.63 (16) Std. Square Button 0.78 (19.8) Ext. Button Panel 0.88 0.88 0.06 (1.5) Min. 0.25 (6.4) Max. (22.4) (22.4) 1 Circ. Cont. Blocks Pushbutton Operators 0.53 (13.5) 1.75 (44.5) 0.81 (20.6) 1.13 (28.7) Transformer Types DA - DL 0.88 (22.4) 0.88 (22.4) Plunger Extends Panel 0.84 to 0.25 (6.4) on 0.06 (1.5) Min. (21.3) 0.25 (6.4) Max. Contact Blocks Combination Pushbutton & Indicating Light Operators Operator Types E30EA - E30GM Operator Types E30JA - E30JW Transformer or Full Voltage Light Element Panel Plungers 0.06 (1.5) Min. Extended 0.25 (6.4) Max. to 0.25 (6.4) Combination Pushbutton & Indicating Light Operators Full Voltage Types DF, DM and DX 0.88 (22.4) 1.88 (47.8) 1.47 (37.3) Square 1.72 (43.7) 1.47 (37.3) Square 1.72 (43.7) 0.84 (21.3) 0.53 (13.5) 1.75 (44.5) 0.81 (20.6) 1.13 (28.7) 1.72 (43.7) 0.88 (22.4) 1.88 (47.8) Operator Types E30BA - E30BM Operator Types E30CA - E30CM 1.47 (37.3) Square Panel 0.84 0.06 (1.5) Min. (21.3) 0.25 (6.4) Max. Indicating Light Operators 47 0.69 (17.5) 1.63 (41.3) 0.5 (12.7) 0.75 (19.1) 1.44 (36.6) 0.11 (2.8) Max. 2.25 (57) o 1.20 (30.5) Drilling Dimensions - Minimum Spacing 0.31 (7.9) Dia. Hole Padlocking Attachment 0.6 (15) 1.59 (40.4) 0.56 (14.2) 1.13 (28.7) Drill .14 (3.5) Half Shroud E30KT7 Figure 47-89. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Drilling Dimensions -- Minimum Spacing Dimensions shown allow adequate space for the addition of one or two high legend plates and color coordinating collars. Note: Locating nib hole or notch is 0.136" (3.5 mm) drill. Alternate to drilling mounting holes use Greenlee Tool Co. punch (No. 730-S) to punch the hole and (No. 730-K) to punch the notch. For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-115 January 2010 10250T Series Product Description Contents Description Page Product Description . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact Operation . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Point-of-Purchase Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Non-illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units. . . . . . . Indicating Light Units . . . . Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights. . . . Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Potentiometers . . . . . . . . . . Push-Pulls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switch Units . . . . Selector Switch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switch Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Selector Switch Operators. . . . . . . Joysticks Units . . . . . . . . . . Joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roto-Push(R) Units. . . . . . . . Roto-Push Operators . . . . . Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Options Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering Complete Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-115 47-116 47-116 47-116 47-116 47-116 47-117 47-118 47-119 Grounding Nibs The 30.5 mm pushbutton line features a zinc die cast construction with chrome-plated housing and mounting nut. The same durable construction is also available with the corrosive resistant E34 line of pushbuttons. See E34 section on Pages 47-166 - 47-189. 10250T line operators have "grounding nibs" -- four metal points on the operator casting designed to bite through most paints and other coatings on metal panels to enhance the ground connection when the operator is securely tightened. Grounding Nibs Reliability Nibs Eaton's Cutler-Hammer(R) contact blocks feature enclosed silver contacts with pointed "reliability nibs" for reliable performance from logic level up to 600V. To ensure reliable switching, nibs bite through oxide which can form on silver contacts, eliminating the need for expensive logic level blocks for most applications. Grounding Nibs Diaphragm Seal with Drainage Holes Liquid Drainage 47-122 47-123 Eaton's Cutler-Hammer pushbutton operators offer front of panel drainage via holes in the operator bushing. Hidden from view by the mounting nut, these holes prevent buildup of liquid inside the operator, which can prevent operation in freezing environments. The holes also provide a route for escaping liquid in high pressure washdowns, effectively relieving pressure from the internal diaphragm seal, ensuring reliable sealing in applications even beyond NEMA 4. Dry Circuit 47-124 47-125 Medium Duty 47-126 47-128 47-129 47-132 Heavy-Duty Figure 47-90. Reliability Nibs 47-133 47-135 47-138 47-139 47-139 47-142 47-143 47-148 Reliability nibs improve performance in dry circuit, corrosive, fine dust and other contaminated atmospheres. Under normal environmental conditions, the minimum operational voltage is 5V and the minimum operational current is 1 mA, AC/DC. For operation under a wider range of environmental conditions, logic level contact blocks with inert palladium tipped contacts are recommended. Foam Neoprene Panel Sealing Gasket Drainage Hole Flexible Diaphragm Stainless Steel Operating Spring Colorfast Molded Button Drainage Hole Mounting Nut 47-151 47-153 47-155 47-157 47-159 47-160 Figure 47-91. Diaphragm Seal Terminal Clamps Shipped Ready to Wire 47-163 47-164 Mounting Nut Legend Plate Operator Color Coded Plungers Red = NC Green = NO 10250T Series CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Stackable Contact Blocks up to 12 Circuits per Operator 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-116 January 2010 10250T Series, Technical Data and Specifications Features Benefits Life Pushbuttons: 10 x 10 6 operations Contact blocks: 10 x 10 6 operations PresTest units: 10 x 10 6 operations Lever and key selector switches: 0.25 x 10 6 operations Twist to release pushbuttons: 0.3 x 10 6 operations Shock resistance Duration: 20 mS 5g Climate Conditions Heavy-duty zinc die cast construction Enclosed silver contacts with reliability nibs Diaphragm seals with drainage holes Grounding nibs on the operator casing Reliability nibs improve contact reliability even under dry circuit and fine dust conditions Drainage holes prevent buildup of liquid inside the operator which can prevent operation in freezing environments Grounding nibs bit through paint and other coatings to provide secure ground Electrical Ratings Short Circuit Coordination to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Rated conditional short circuit current: 1 kA Fuse type: GE Power Controls TIA 10, Red Spot Type gG, 10A, 660V AC, 460V DC, BS88-2, IEC 60269-2-1 Operating Temperature: 1 to 150F (-17 to 66C) Storage Temperature: -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C) Altitude: 6,562 ft. (2,000m) Humidity: Max. 95% RH @ 60C Fuse UL rating: A600, P600 AC load life duty cycle 1200 operations/hour - 10A: 110V pf 0.4 - 1 x 10 6 operations - 5A: 250V pf 0.4 - 1 x 10 6 operations - 2A: 660V pf 0.4 - 1 x 10 6 operations Switching capacity AC15 rated make/break (11 x le at 1.1 x Ue) - 6A: 120V pf 0.3 - 4A: 240V pf 0.3 - 2A: 660V pf 0.3 Terminals Contact Operation Slow make and break. All normally closed contacts have positive opening operation, i.e., normally closed contacts are forced open in the event of contact weld or spring breakage. Standards and Certifications 47 CE EN60947-5-1 UL 508 -- File No. 131568 CSA C22.2 No. 14 -- File No. LR68551 Ingress Protection When mounted in similarly rated enclosure -- Standard Indicating Lights UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13 IEC IP65 All Other Operators UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 IEC IP65 Technical Data and Specifications Mechanical Ratings Frequency of operation All pushbuttons: 6000 operations/hr. Key and lever selector switches: 3000 operations/hr. Auto-latch devices: 1200 operations/hr. Insulation: Ui = 660V AC or DC Thermal: lth = 10A Marking NC-NO on the contact block to meet the NEMA requirements. Dual marking system 1 - 2 for normally closed, 3 - 4 for normally open to meet BS5472 (Cenelec EN50 005) Clamps Terminals are saddle clamp type for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) to 2 x 14 AWG (2.5 mm2) conductors Torque = 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm) Degree of protection against direct electrical contact: IP2X with fingerproof shroud Light Units Transformers: will withstand short circuit for 1 hour per IEC 60997-5-1 Bulbs -- average life Transformer type: 20,000 hrs. Resistor/direct voltage type: 2500 hrs. minimum @ rated V LED: 60,000 to 100,000 hrs. DC13 rated make/break (1.1 x le at 1.1 x Ue) - 1.0A: 125V L/R 0.95 at 300 mS - .55A: 250V L/R 0.95 at 300 mS - .1A: 660V L/R 0.95 at 300 mS - 10A: 110V pure resistive Maximum ratings for logic level and hostile atmosphere application Maximum amperes: 0.5A Maximum volts: 120V AC/DC Table 47-171. Contact Block Meet or Exceed NEMA Rating Designations A600, A300 and B300 for AC and P600 for DC Description Volts AC 50 or 60 Hz 120 Make and Emerg. Interrupting Capacity (Amp) Normal Load Break (Amp) Thermal Current (Amp) Voltamperes: Make and Emerg. Interrupting Capacity Normal Load Break For more information visit: www.eaton.com 60 6 10 240 30 3 10 480 15 1.5 10 7200 7200 7200 720 720 720 Volts DC 600 12 1.2 10 7200 720 24/28 125 5.7 5.7 5.0 138 138 1.1 1.1 5.0 138 138 250 0.55 0.55 5.0 138 138 CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-117 January 2010 10250T Series, Assembled Stations Point-of-Purchase Packaging Point-of-Purchase Packaged Pilot Devices Table 47-172. 10250T Point-of-Purchase Packaged Pilot Devices Product Description Catalog Number Red Non-illuminated Push-Pull 1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved legend plates: EMERG. STOP and STOP. 10250T5B62-1-POP Red Mushroom Pushbutton 1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved legend plates: EMERG. STOP and STOP. 10250T32R-POP Red Jumbo Mushroom Pushbutton Engraved EMERG. STOP with 1NO-1NC contact block. 10250T33-POP Black Flush Pushbutton 1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved legend plates: START and JOG. 10250T30B-POP Red Extended Pushbutton 1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes one square engraved legend plate: STOP. 10250T31R-POP Red Indicating LIght Full voltage 24V AC/DC with two extra lenses: Green and Amber. Also includes two square engraved legend plates: RUN and JOG. 10250T206NC1N-POP Red Indicating Light Resistor 120V AC/DC with two extra lenses: Green and Amber. Also includes one square engraved legend plate: RUN and JOG. 10250T34R-POP Red Illuminating Pushbutton Full voltage 24V AC/DC with 1NO-1NC contact block and two extra lenses: Green and Amber. Also includes one square engraved legend plate: POWER ON. 10250T476C21-1-POP Red Illuminating Pushbutton Resistor 120V AC/DC with 1NO-1NC contact block and two extra lenses: Green and Amber. Also includes one square engraved legend plate: POWER ON. 10250T411C21-1-POP Black Knob Two-Position Selector Switch 1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes three square engraved legend plates: OFF/ON, HAND/AUTO and RUN/JOG. 10250T20KB-POP Black Knob ThreePosition Selector Switch 1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes 1 square engraved legend plate: HAND/OFF/AUTO. 10250T22KB-POP Price U.S. $ Emergency Stop Operators Momentary Pushbuttons Indicating Lights Illuminated Pushbuttons Selector Switches Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-118 January 2010 10250T Series, Assembled Devices -- Momentary Pushbutton Units Product Selection Non-illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units Flush, Extended, Mushroom Head or Jumbo Mushroom Head Operators Table 47-173. Pushbutton Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Contact Type Button Color Extended Button Mushroom Button Jumbo Mushroom Flush Button -- Black Cat. No. 10250T23B Extended Button -- Red Cat. No.10250T31R Mushroom Button -- Red Cat. No.10250T32R Jumbo Mushroom -- Red Cat. No.10250T17213-3 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Price U.S. $ Price U.S. $ Price U.S. $ 1NO Black Red Green Yellow Red -- Engraved EMERG. STOP 10250T23B 10250T23R 10250T23G 10250T23Y -- 10250T25B 10250T112-53 10250T25G 10250T25Y -- 10250T26B 10250T122-53 10250T26G 10250T26Y -- 10250T27B 10250T172-53 10250T27G 10250T27Y 10250T17213-53 1NC Black Red Green Yellow Red -- Engraved EMERG. STOP 10250T101-51 10250T102-51 10250T103-51 10250T104-51 -- 10250T111-51 10250T25R 10250T113-51 10250T120-51 -- 10250T121-51 10250T26R 10250T123-51 10250T124-51 -- 10250T171-51 10250T27R 10250T173-51 10250T174-51 10250T29 1NO-1NC Black Red Green Yellow Red -- Engraved EMERG. STOP 10250T30B 10250T30R 10250T30G 10250T30Y -- 10250T31B 10250T31R 10250T31G 10250T31Y -- 10250T32B 10250T32R 10250T32G 10250T32Y -- 10250T33B 10250T33R 10250T33G 10250T33Y 10250T33 2NO Black Red Green Yellow Red -- Engraved EMERG. STOP 10250T101-2 10250T102-2 10250T103-2 10250T104-2 -- 10250T111-2 10250T112-2 10250T113-2 10250T120-2 -- 10250T121-2 10250T122-2 10250T123-2 10250T124-2 -- 10250T171-2 10250T172-2 10250T173-2 10250T174-2 10250T17213-2 2NC Black Red Green Yellow Red -- Engraved EMERG. STOP 10250T101-3 10250T102-3 10250T103-3 10250T104-3 -- 10250T111-3 10250T112-3 10250T113-3 10250T120-3 -- 10250T121-3 10250T122-3 10250T123-3 10250T124-3 -- 10250T171-3 10250T172-3 10250T173-3 10250T174-3 10250T17213-3 47 Flush Button Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-155 - 47-156 Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Pages 47-153 - 47-154 Pages 47-151 - 47-152 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-119 January 2010 10250T Series, Momentary Pushbutton Components Pushbuttons Note: To order complete assembled unit using one composite Catalog Number, add Contact Block and Legend Plate Suffix to the end of Operator Catalog Number. Example: 10250T101-1TS33 Table 47-174. Momentary Pushbutton Operators, Non-illuminated -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Color Catalog Number Black Red Green Yellow Gray White Blue Orange 10250T101 10250T102 10250T103 10250T104 10250T105 10250T106 10250T108 10250T109 Black Red Green Yellow White Blue Orange 10250T111 10250T112 10250T113 10250T120 10250T116 10250T118 10250T119 Price U.S. $ Flush Button Operator 10250T101 Extended Button Half Shrouded Button Vertical Horizontal Black Red Green Yellow Gray White Blue Orange 10250T501 10250T502 10250T503 10250T504 10250T505 10250T506 10250T508 10250T509 10250T511 10250T512 10250T513 10250T514 10250T515 10250T516 10250T518 10250T519 Black Red Green Yellow Blue 10250T121 10250T122 10250T123 10250T124 10250T129 Contact Block 10250T1 Mushroom Button Legend Plate 10250TS33 Jumbo Mushroom Button Black Red Red (EMERG. STOP) Green Yellow 10250T171 10250T172 10250T17213 10250T173 10250T174 Low Operating Force -- Jumbo Mushroom Black Red Green Yellow Clear 10250ED1164-2 10250ED1164-3 10250ED1164-4 10250ED1164-5 10250ED1164 To order operator with factory assembled Extended Retaining Nut, 10250TA12, for thick panel applications, add Suffix Letter E to listed Catalog Number. Example: 10250T101E Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications. Operating Force -- Standard = 2.4 lb; Low Force = 1.6 lb. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 - 47-156 Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 - 47-154 Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 - 47-152 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-120 January 2010 10250T Series, Interlocked and Padlockable Components Pushbuttons (Continued) Table 47-175. Mechanically Interlocked Pushbutton Operators -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Description Catalog Number Minimum hole centers 1.62", maximum 250". Mounts in extra deep enclosures only. Black flush and green flush Black flush and long red Black flush and red mushroom head Black flush and lock-down red mushroom head 10250TA66 10250TA67 10250TA68 10250TA69 Black flush and red jumbo mushroom head Green flush and long red Black long and long red Green flush and red mushroom head Green flush and black flush 10250TA76 10250TA72 10250TA73 10250TA77 10250TA75 Price U.S. $ Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm) Adjustable 1.62 (41.1) Min. 2.5 (63.5) Max. 0.88 (22.4) for Each Additional Contact Block 1.07 (27.2) 0.89 (22.6) NC contacts must be mounted behind lock-down mushroom head operator to ensure lockout. Lockout Pushbutton Operators with Padlock Attachments The following pushbutton and mushroom operators include an integral padlock attachment for applications requiring lockout/tagout of specific machine functions. They are available in styles which allow locking of a button in the down position Table 47-176. Padlockable in the Down Position 47 (stopped position) or locking a button in the up position (to prevent starting). Select the "Hand" latch type which functions as a momentary pushbutton until the operator presses the button and moves the padlock attachment into position for locking, or choose the -- "Spring Loaded" latch type where the padlock attachment springs into place when the button is pressed. Units accept a customer supplied 1/4" padlock. UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Type Color Latch Type Catalog Number Flush Head Red Hand 10250TA16 Mushroom Head Red Red Hand Spring Loaded 10250TA42 10250TA45 Jumbo Head Red Red Red (EMERG. STOP) Hand Spring Loaded Spring Loaded 10250TA52 10250TA55 10250ED952 Price U.S. $ Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1.13 (28.7) 1.78 (45.2) 2.03 (51.6) 1.09 (27.7) 2.0 (50.8) Operators can be latched down without a padlock. Padlock not included. Jumbo mushroom heads are not recommended for use in applications where exposure to ultraviolet light exists. Table 47-177. Padlockable in the Up Position -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Type Color Latch Type Catalog Number Mushroom Head Hand Hand 10250TA41 10250TA43 Black Green Price U.S. $ Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2.5 (63.5) 1.63 (41.4) 2.0 (50.8) 1.75 (44.5) 1.5 (38.1) Jumbo Mushroom Head Black Green Yellow Hand Hand Hand 10250TA51 10250TA53 10250TA54 2.31 (58.7) 2.38 (60.5) 1.75 (44.5) 2.5 (63.5) Operators can be latched down without a padlock. Padlock not included. Jumbo mushroom heads are not recommended for use in applications where exposure to ultraviolet light exists. Note: Hand Attachment must be manually moved into place for locking. Spring Loaded: when operator is pressed -- attachment springs into place. Must be moved manually to release button. Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 - 47-154 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-121 January 2010 10250T Series, Special Pushbutton Components Pushbuttons (Continued) Key Pushbutton Operator These devices incorporate an integral locking mechanism which enables locking units in various positions (Locked Down), locking units to prevent operation (Locked Up) or setting unit to lock when the button is pressed (Push to Lock), requiring the key to be inserted to return to normal operation. With the key in the center position, these operators function as a normal momentary pushbutton (Free). Replacement Keys or Dissimilar Locks for Key Operators Below Table 47-178. Replacement Keys Listed operators have identical locks and keys (Key Code H661) Catalog Number 10250ED824. For dissimilar lock and key combinations, see listing on Page 47-136. Description Catalog Number Replacement Keys (Code H661) 10250ED824 Price U.S. $ Table 47-179. Key Pushbutton Operator -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Key Position and Pushbutton Operations C L R Key Removal Positions Vertical Mounting Catalog Number Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm) Price U.S. $ 3-Position Lock Up Lock Up Lock Up Free Free Free Lock Down Lock Down Lock Down All L and R C and R 10250T430 10250T431 10250T432 Free Free Free Free Free Free -- -- Lock Down Lock Down Push to Lock Push to Lock L and C L C and R R C and R R 10250T433 10250T434 10250T435 10250T436 10250T437 10250T438 1.13 (28.7) 1.38 (35.1) 2-Position Lock Up Lock Up -- -- -- -- 1.5 (38.1) Key Operated Pushbutton Horizontal mounting available on request. Latch-In, Twist-to-Release Operator Table 47-180. Operator Only with Button -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Description Catalog Number Latch-In, Twist-to-Release Operator with Red Mushroom Head Button 10250ED1043-4 Price U.S. $ Dimensions in Inches (mm) 0.24 (6) 0.86 (21.8) 47 1.55 (39.3) Spring Return 2.37 (60.3) Auto-Latch 1.5 (38.1) Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-155 - 47-156 Page 47-148 Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Pages 47-153 - 47-154 Pages 47-151 - 47-152 1CD1C Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-122 January 2010 10250T Series, Assembled Devices -- Illuminated Pushbutton Units Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units LED or Incandescent Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer Type Plastic Lenses 24V Full Voltage Illuminated Pushbutton -- Red Catalog Number 10250T476C21-53 Table 47-181. Illuminated Pushbutton Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Lamp Type Voltage Color Illuminated Pushbutton 1NO 1NO-1NC Catalog Number LED Incandescent Full Voltage Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ 24V AC/DC Red Green Amber Yellow Blue White 10250T397LRD24-53 10250T397LGD24-53 10250T397LAD24-53 10250T397LYD24-53 10250T397LLD24-53 10250T397LWD24-53 10250T397LRD24-1 10250T397LGD24-1 10250T397LAD24-1 10250T397LYD24-1 10250T397LLD24-1 10250T397LWD24-1 10250T397LRD24-51 10250T397LGD24-51 10250T397LAD24-51 10250T397LYD24-51 10250T397LLD24-51 10250T397LWD24-51 120V AC Red Green Amber Yellow Blue White 10250T397LRD2A-53 10250T397LGD2A-53 10250T397LAD2A-53 10250T397LYD2A-53 10250T397LLD2A-53 10250T397LWD2A-53 10250T397LRD2A-1 10250T397LGD2A-1 10250T397LAD2A-1 10250T397LYD2A-2 10250T397LLD2A-1 10250T397LWD2A-1 10250T397LRD2A-51 10250T397LGD2A-51 10250T397LAD2A-51 10250T397LYD2A-51 10250T397LLD2A-51 10250T397LWD2A-51 Transformer 120V AC Red Green Amber Yellow Blue White 10250T411LRD06-53 10250T411LGD06-53 10250T411LAD06-53 10250T411LYD06-53 10250T411LLD06-53 10250T411LWD06-53 10250T411LRD06-1 10250T411LGD06-1 10250T411LAD06-1 10250T411LYD06-1 10250T411LLD06-1 10250T411LWD06-1 10250T411LRD06-51 10250T411LGD06-51 10250T411LAD06-51 10250T411LYD06-51 10250T411LLD06-51 10250T411LWD06-51 Full Voltage 24V AC/DC Red Green Amber Yellow Blue Clear White 10250T476C21-53 10250T476C22-53 10250T476C43-53 10250T476C23-53 10250T476C24-53 10250T476C25-53 10250T476C26-53 10250T476C21-1 10250T476C22-1 10250T476C43-1 10250T476C23-1 10250T476C24-1 10250T476C25-1 10250T476C26-1 10250T476C21-51 10250T476C22-51 10250T476C43-51 10250T476C23-51 10250T476C24-51 10250T476C25-51 10250T476C26-51 #757 Resistor 120V AC/DC Red Green Amber Yellow Blue Clear White 10250T471C21-53 10250T471C22-53 10250T471C43-53 10250T471C23-53 10250T471C24-53 10250T471C25-53 10250T471C26-53 10250T471C21-1 10250T471C22-1 10250T471C43-1 10250T471C23-1 10250T471C24-1 10250T471C25-1 10250T471C26-1 10250T471C21-51 10250T471C22-51 10250T471C43-51 10250T471C23-51 10250T471C24-51 10250T471C25-51 10250T471C26-51 120MB Transformer 120 AC Red Green Amber Yellow Blue Clear White 10250T75R 10250T75G 10250T75A 10250T75Y 10250T75B 10250T75C 10250T75W 10250T76R 10250T76G 10250T76A 10250T76Y 10250T76B 10250T76C 10250T76W 10250T77R 10250T77G 10250T77A 10250T77Y 10250T77B 10250T77C 10250T77W #755 47 Price U.S. $ LED/Lamp Number 1NC Bayonet Base For flashing module Catalog Number 10250TFL1, add Suffix Code FM to listed Catalog Number. Example: 10250T75RFM. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-155 - 47-156 Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Pages 47-153 - 47-154 Pages 47-151 - 47-152 Page 47-157 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-123 January 2010 10250T Series, Assembled Devices -- Indicating Light Units Indicating Light Units LED or Incandescent Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer Type Standard and PresTest Types Plastic Lenses PresTest -- This device incorporates a press-to-test feature whereby depressing the lens disconnects the light from the source being monitored and connects the lamp to a continuously energized circuit for immediate detection of faulty lamps. Table 47-182. Indicating Light Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Lamp LED Type Full Voltage Transformer Incandescent Voltage Color Indicating Light PresTest 24V Full Voltage Indicating Light -- Red Catalog Number 10250T206NC1N 120V AC Transformer PresTest -- Green Catalog Number 10250T74NG Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ 24V AC/DC Red Green Amber Yellow Blue White 10250T197LRP24 10250T197LGP24 10250T197LAP24 10250T197LYP24 10250T197LLP24 10250T197LWP24 10250T297LRP24 10250T297LGP24 10250T297LAP24 10250T297LYP24 10250T297LLP24 10250T297LWP24 120V AC Red Green Amber Yellow Blue White 10250T197LRP2A 10250T197LGP2A 10250T197LAP2A 10250T197LYP2A 10250T197LLP2A 10250T197LWP2A 10250T297LRP2A 10250T297LGP2A 10250T297LAP2A 10250T297LYP2A 10250T297LLP2A 10250T297LWP2A 120V AC Red Green Amber Yellow Blue White 10250T181LRP06 10250T181LGP06 10250T181LAP06 10250T181LYP06 10250T181LLP06 10250T181LWP06 10250T221LRP06 10250T221LGP06 10250T221LAP06 10250T221LYP06 10250T221LLP06 10250T221LWP06 LED/Lamp Number Price U.S. $ Bayonet Base 47 Full Voltage 24V AC/DC Red Green Amber Yellow Blue Clear White 10250T206NC1N 10250T206NC2N 10250T206NC19N 10250T206NC3N 10250T206NC4N 10250T206NC5N 10250T206NC6N 10250T235NC21 10250T235NC22 10250T235NC43 10250T235NC23 10250T235NC24 10250T235NC25 10250T235NC26 #757 Resistor 120V AC/DC Red Green Amber Yellow Blue Clear White 10250T201NC1N 10250T201NC2N 10250T201NC19N 10250T201NC3N 10250T201NC4N 10250T201NC5N 10250T201NC6N 10250T231NC21 10250T231NC22 10250T231NC43 10250T231NC23 10250T231NC24 10250T231NC25 10250T231NC26 120MB Transformer 120V AC Red Green Amber Yellow Blue Clear White 10250T34R 10250T34G 10250T34A 10250T34Y 10250T34B 10250T34C 10250T34W 10250T74NR 10250T74NG 10250T74NA 10250T74NY 10250T74NB 10250T74NC 10250T74NW #755 Standard indicating lights are rated UL (NEMA) 3S as well. For flashing lamp add letter F to listed Catalog Number. Example: 10250T34RF. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-155 - 47-156 Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Pages 47-153 - 47-154 Pages 47-151 - 47-152 Page 47-157 1CD1C Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-124 January 2010 10250T Series, Illuminated Components Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights LED or Incandescent Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer Type Table 47-183. Operators without Lens Light Unit Type Type Voltage Illuminated Pushbutton Catalog Number Incandescent LED (LEDs not included) Full Voltage AC/DC PresTest Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Master Test Price U.S. $ Catalog Number LED/Lamp Number Price U.S. $ 6 12 24 32 48 10250T473 10250T474 10250T476 10250T477 10250T478 10250T203N 10250T204N 10250T206N 10250T207N 10250T208N 10250T232N 10250T233N 10250T235N 10250T238N 10250T239N -- -- -- -- -- #755 #756 #757 #1828 #1835 Resistor AC/DC 120 240 10250T471 10250T472 10250T201N 10250T202N 10250T231N 10250T240N -- -- 120MB 120MB Transformer AC Only 24 120 240 277 380 480 600 10250T416 10250T411 10250T422 10250T419 10250T413 10250T414 10250T415 -- 10250T181N 10250T182N 10250T198N 10250T183N 10250T184N 10250T185N -- 10250T221N 10250T222N -- 10250T223N 10250T224N 10250T225N -- -- -- -- -- -- -- #755 Neon AC/DC 120 240 -- -- 10250T226N 10250T227N -- -- -- -- NE51H-R22 NE51H-R68 Solid-State 50/60 Hz Only 120 -- -- -- 10250T189N 120MB Full Voltage -- 10250T397L 10250T197L 10250T297L -- Transformer AC Only 24 120 240 277 380 480 600 10250T416L 10250T411L 10250T412L 10250T419L 10250T413L 10250T414L 10250T415L -- 10250T181L 10250T182L 10250T198L 10250T183L 10250T184L 10250T185L -- 10250T221L 10250T222L -- 10250T223L 10250T224L 10250T225L -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bayonet Base 47 Price U.S. $ Indicating Light These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color. See Page 47-157 for LED Selection and Page 47-165 for Catalog Numbering System. Resistor units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style. For flashing lamp, add letter F to listed Catalog Number. Example: 10250T181NF. Resistant to shock and vibration. For best illumination use amber, yellow or clear lens. Table 47-184. Indicating and Master Test Lenses Color Plastic Catalog Number Plastic Glass Red Green Amber Yellow Blue Clear White Table 47-186. PresTest Lenses Glass Color Price Catalog U.S. $ Number 10250TC1N 10250TC2N 10250TC19N 10250TC3N 10250TC4N 10250TC5N 10250TC6N Plastic Price U.S. $ 10250TC7N 10250TC8N 10250TC9N -- 10250TC10N 10250TC11N 10250TC12N Catalog Number Plastic Glass Red Green Amber Yellow Blue Clear White 10250TC21 10250TC22 10250TC43 10250TC23 10250TC24 10250TC25 10250TC26 Glass Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ 10250TC13N 10250TC14N 10250TC15N -- 10250TC16N 10250TC17N 10250TC18N Table 47-185. Illuminated Pushbutton Lenses Color Catalog Number Red Green Yellow Amber Blue Clear White 10250TC21 10250TC22 10250TC23 10250TC43 10250TC24 10250TC25 10250TC26 Price U.S. $ Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Pages 47-151 - 47-152 Page 47-157 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-125 January 2010 10250T Series, Assembled Devices -- Push-Pull Units Push-Pull Units Two- and Three-Position Non-illuminated Table 47-187. 2-Position Push-Pull Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position Pull Button Type/Color Push-Pull Push Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Contact Type Mounting Location A B 2-Position Maintained Push, Maintained Pull 40 mm/Red O X 10250T5B62-1X X O O X X O 1NO 1NC 40 mm Engraved EMERG. STOP/Red 10250T5B63-1X 1NO 1NC 65 mm Alum. Engraved 10250T5J63-1X EMERG. STOP/Red O X 1NO 1NC X O 65 mm Alum. Engraved 10250ED1080-2 EMERG. STOP/Red O X X O 1NO 1NC Special Security Jumbo Mushroom Head Table 47-188. 3-Position Pull-Pull Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position Pull Intermediate Button Type/Color Push Push-Pull Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Contact Type Mounting Location A B 47 3-Position Maintained Push, Momentary Pull X X O X O O 40 mm/ Black 40 mm/Red 40 mm Engraved EMERG. STOP/Red 10250T9B60-3X 10250T9B62-3X 10250T9B63-3X 40 mm/Black 40 mm/Red 40 mm/Black 40 mm/Red 10250T4B60-3X 10250T4B62-3X 10250T10B60-1X 10250T10B62-1X 1NC 1NC 3-Position Momentary Push, Momentary Pull X X O X O O O X O O X O 1NC 1NC 1NO 1NC X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. To order different type or color buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the table below. Example: 10250T5B64-1X. Table 47-189. Button and Color Selection Table Standard -- 40 mm Color Suffix Catalog Code Number Red Red (EMERG. STOP) Green Black Blue B62 B63 B61 B60 B64 Price U.S. $ Jumbo Mushroom Head (Anodized) Aluminum -- 65 mm 10250TB62 10250TB63 10250TB61 10250TB60 10250TB64 Color Suffix Catalog Code Number Red Red (EMERG. STOP) Green Black Yellow J62 J63 J61 J60 J64 Price U.S. $ 10250TJ62 10250TJ63 10250TJ61 10250TJ60 10250TJ64 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-155 - 47-156 Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Pages 47-153 - 47-154 Pages 47-151 - 47-152 1CD1C Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-126 January 2010 10250T Series, Assembled Devices -- Illuminated Push-Pull Units Illuminated Push-Pull Units LED or Incandescent Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer Type Two-Position Maintained 2-Position Push-Pull Operator with Red Button (Standard) and Full Voltage Light Unit Table 47-190. 2-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position Lamp Maintained -- Pull Maintained -- Push O X X O Type Red Standard Push-Pull Voltage Catalog Number LED Full Voltage 24V AC/DC X O Incandescent Full Voltage Resistor 10250T563LRD06-1X 24V AC/DC 10250T579C47-1X 120V AC/DC 10250T580C47-1X 120V AC Contact Mounting Location LED/Lamp Type Number A B 1NO 1NC Bayonet Base 1NO 1NC #757 10250T589LRD06-1X 120V AC Transformer 24V AC 10250T597LRD24-1X 120V AC/DC 10250T597LRD2A-1X Transformer 24V AC O X Price U.S. $ 10250T589C47-1X 120MB #755 10250T563C47-1X X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from table below. Example: 10250T579C63-1X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page 47-131. Table 47-191. Lens and Color Selection Table Type Lens Color Incand. Suffix Code LED Suffix Code Catalog Number Standard - 40 mm Red Red (EMERGENCY STOP) Green Blue Amber White Clear C47 C53 C48 C49 C50 C51 C52 RD ED GD LD AD WD CD 10250TC47 10250TC53 10250TC48 10250TC49 10250TC50 10250TC51 10250TC52 Side-Lighted Aluminum - 40 mm Red Red (EMERGENCY STOP) Green Blue Amber Yellow White Clear C57 C63 C58 C59 C64 C60 C61 C62 RS ES GS LS AS YS WS CS 10250TC57 10250TC63 10250TC58 10250TC59 10250TC64 10250TC60 10250TC61 10250TC62 Aluminum Transparent Center - 40 mm Red Green Amber C65 C66 C67 RH GH AH 10250TC65 10250TC66 10250TC67 47 Price U.S. $ Clear anodized aluminum and colored lens. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Light Units . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-155 - 47-156 Page 47-131 Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Pages 47-153 - 47-154 Pages 47-151 - 47-152 Page 47-157 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-127 January 2010 10250T Series, Assembled Devices -- Illuminated Push-Pull Units Illuminated Push-Pull Units (Continued) LED or Incandescent Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer Type Three-Position Momentary 3-Position Push-Pull Operator with Red Button (Standard) and Transformer Light Unit Table 47-192. 3-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position Lamp Type Voltage Momentary -- Maintained -- Momentary -- Pull Intermediate Push Catalog Number LED O X O O X O Full Voltage Transformer Full Voltage X X O X O O Transformer IncanFull descent Voltage O O X O Transformer Full Voltage 120V AC 10250T1097LRD2A-1X 24V AC 10250T1089LRD06-1X 120V AC 10250T1063LRD06-1X O X O O Transformer Price U.S. $ Mounting Location A B 120V AC 10250T497LRD2A-3X 24V AC 10250T489LRD06-3X 120V AC 10250T463LRD06-3X 1NO 1NC Bayonet Base 1NC 1NC 24V AC/DC 10250T1079C47-1X #757 120MB 10250T1080C47-1X 24V AC 10250T1089C47-1X 120V AC 10250T1063C47-1X 1NO 1NC #755 24V AC/DC 10250T479C47-3X #757 120MB 10250T480C47-3X 24V AC 10250T489C47-3X 120V AC 10250T463C47-3X LED/ Lamp Number Bayonet Base 24V AC/DC 10250T497LRD24-3X Resistor 120V AC X X Contact Type 24V AC/DC 10250T1097LRD24-1X Resistor 120V AC O X Red Standard Push-Pull 1NC 1NC #755 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from table on the bottom of Page 47-126. Example: 10250T1079C53-1X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page 47-131. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Light Units . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-155 - 47-156 Page 47-131 Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Pages 47-153 - 47-154 Pages 47-151 - 47-152 Page 47-157 1CD1C 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-128 January 2010 10250T Series, Assembled Devices -- Illuminated Push-Pull Units & Potentiometers Illuminated Push-Pull Units (Continued) LED or Incandescent Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer Type Three-Position -- Maintained Push, Momentary Pull 3-Position Push-Pull Operator with Red Button (Standard) and Full Voltage Light Unit Table 47-193. 3-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position Lamp Type Voltage Momentary -- Maintained -- Maintained -- Pull Intermediate Push LED X X O X O O O X O O Price U.S. $ Full Voltage 24V AC/DC 10250T997LRD24-3X Transformer 24V AC 10250T989LRD06-3X 120V AC 10250T963LRD06-3X IncanFull descent Voltage X X Red Standard Push-Pull Catalog Number 120V AC Contact Type 10250T997LRD2A-3X Mounting Location LED/ Lamp B Number A Bayonet Base 1NC 1NC #757 24V AC/DC 10250T979C47-3X Resistor 120V AC 10250T980C47-3X Transformer 24V AC 10250T989C47-3X 120V AC 10250T963C47-3X 1NC 1NC 120MB #755 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from table on the bottom of Page 47-126. Example: 10250T979C53-3X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page 47-131. Potentiometers Table 47-194. Potentiometer with Knob and Standard Dial Plate -- Linear Type 10% -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 12, 13 Vertical or Horizontal One-Hole Mounting Potentiometer Ohms 2 Watt (60V Max.) Single Potentiometer with Standard Aluminum Dial Plate 47 Catalog Number 1000 2500 5000 10000 25000 50000 10250T331 10250T332 10250T338 10250T333 10250T334 10250T335 Operator Only 10250T330 Alternative -- Black Plastic Large Legend with Standard Markings E34LP99 Dimensions in Inches (mm) Price U.S. $ With Standard Aluminum Dial Plate Large Dial Plate 1.88 (47.8) Std. Dial Plate 1.09 1.0 (27.7) (25.4) 1.31 (33.3) 0.94 (23.9) 0.94 (23.9) 0.94 (23.9) 0.75 (19.1) Potentiometer Large dial plate with space for legend is available at no charge. To order, add suffix 36 to Catalog Number. Example: 10250T33136. To order separately, see footnote below. Large dial plate has space at top for 15 letters. 3/32 inch high. For custom stamped legend plates, order legend plate as separate item 10250TR30 and specify stamping. For use with commercially purchased potentiometers having shaft dimensions per dimension drawing on Page 47-161. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Light Units . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-155 - 47-156 Page 47-131 Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Pages 47-153 - 47-154 Pages 47-151 - 47-152 Page 47-157 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-129 January 2010 10250T Series, Push-Pull Components Push-Pull Operators An illuminated Push-Pull pushbutton unit, arranged for one-hole mounting, can replace two pushbuttons and a pilot light or the non-illuminated form can replace two pushbuttons. These units are available in three basic types: Maintained -- (Two-Position). Maintains in the pulled or pushed position until manually actuated to the opposite mode. Momentary -- (Three-Position). Spring returns to an intermediate position when pulled or pushed and released. Momentary Pull, Maintained Push -- (Three-Position). Spring returns to intermediate position when pulled. Maintains in pushed position until manually returned to intermediate (ready to reset) position. Maintained stop holds circuit open and will prevent other series connected operators from starting the system. The Operators, Buttons, Contact Blocks, etc., are offered as building block components that can be intermixed to satisfy many requirements. This minimizes the need for a varied and costly inventory. 2-Position Maintained Push-Pull without Button on Lens Catalog Number 10250T5 Table 47-195. Typical Applications Control 3-Wire 3-Position Momentary Line - Diagram L1 Operator Push-Pull Operator A Circuit M B Circuit 2-Wire 2-Position Maintained L2 Operator Mode Momentary 2NC START (Mom.) Push & Pull Contact Block 10250T4 10250T3 Normal Pos. (Maint.) STOP (Mom.) No Intermediate Position STOP (Maint.) OL Momentary 1NO-1NC Push & Pull Contact Block 10250T10 10250T1 M Push-Pull Operator M L1 Circuits L2 OL Maintained 1NC START (Maint.) Push & Pull Contact Block 10250T5 10250T51 47 A or B Circuit 3-Wire Momentary L1 Pull Maintained Push A Circuit Push-Pull Operator M B Circuit OL L2 Maintained 2NC START (Mom.) Push & Contact Block Momentary 10250T3 Pull 10250T9 Normal Pos. (Maint.) STOP (Maint.) M Note: A and B circuits shown in the application illustrations are defined in the "Application Guide" on the following page. CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-130 January 2010 10250T Series, Push-Pull Components Push-Pull Operators (Continued) Application Guide To assist in the selection of contact blocks, the sketch to the right shows pictorially by symbols A and B locations of contact circuits after assembly of contact blocks and adapter to the operator. The chart below shows the effect of the push and pull operations on either NO or NC contacts. (X = contact closed, O = contact open) Locating Nib A B Figure 47-92. Contact Circuit Locations Table 47-196. Push-Pull Operator Components Type of Operator Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Contact Block -- Max. of 2 Blocks, 4 Circuits Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement Out -- Pull Intermediate In -- Push Contact Block Mounting Location A B A B A B 2-Position Operator without Lens Maintained Push-Pull Maintained Push-Pull with Anti-Theft Jumbo Mushroom 10250T5 10250ED1080 1NO 1NC O or X O X No Intermediate Position X or O X O 2NO 2NC O X O X X O X O 1NO 1NC O or X O X X or O X O 2NO 2NC O X O X X O X O 1NO 1NC O or X O X O or O O X X or O O O 2NO 2NC O X O X O O O X X O O O 1NO 1NC O or X O X O or O O O X or O X O 2NO 2NC O X O X O O O O X O X O No Intermediate Position 3-Position Operator without Lens Momentary Push-Pull 47 10250T4 Maintained Push-Momentary Pull 10250T9 Momentary Push-Pull 10250T10 Special function contact blocks shown on Page 47-148 CANNOT be used with 3-position push-pull operators 10250T4, 10250T9 or 10250T10. Button or Lens . . . . . . . . . . Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-131 Page 47-148 Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Pages 47-153 - 47-154 Pages 47-151 - 47-152 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-131 January 2010 10250T Series, Push-Pull Components Push-Pull Operators (Continued) Table 47-198. Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices Color Push-Pull Light Units, Lenses and Buttons Table 47-197. Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices Light Unit Type Type Voltage Catalog Number LED (LEDs not included) Full Voltage -- Incandescent 10250T97L Transformer 24 AC Only 120 50/60 Hz 208 240 277 380 480 600 10250T89L 10250T63L 10250T64L 10250T65L 10250T82L 10250T66L 10250T67L 10250T68L Full Voltage AC or DC 10250T69 10250T70 10250T79 10250T83 Resistor AC or DC Price U.S. $ 6 12 24/28 32 LED/Lamp Number Catalog Number C47 C53 C48 C49 C50 C51 C52 10250TC47 10250TC53 10250TC48 10250TC49 10250TC50 10250TC51 10250TC52 Price U.S. $ Standard Red Red (EMER. STOP) Green Blue Amber White Clear Bayonet Base RD ED GD LD AD WD -- Side-Lighted Anodized Aluminum Ring 120 240 10250T80 10250T81 120MB Transformer 24 AC Only 120 50/60 Hz 208 240 277 380 480 600 10250T89 10250T63 10250T64 10250T65 10250T82 10250T66 10250T67 10250T68 #755 Red Red (EMER. STOP) Green Blue Amber Yellow White Clear C57 C63 C58 C59 C64 C60 C61 C62 RS ES GS LS AS YS WS -- 10250TC57 10250TC63 10250TC58 10250TC59 10250TC64 10250TC60 10250TC61 10250TC62 Heavy-Duty Aluminum with Transparent Center Red Green Amber Blue White These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color, see Page 47-157. C65 C66 C67 C69 C68 RH GH AH -- -- 10250TC65 10250TC66 10250TC67 10250TC69 10250TC68 Suffix Codes should only be used for assembling composite Catalog Numbers. To order lens above, order by Catalog Number. Table 47-199. Buttons for Non-illuminated Push-Pull Devices Color Ordering example with one composite number: Nonilluminated 10250T5 + 10250TB62 + 10250T1 = Suffix Code Catalog Number B62 B63 B61 B60 B64 10250TB62 10250TB63 10250TB61 10250TB60 10250TB64 Price U.S. $ Standard 10250T579C47-1X Red Red (EMER. STOP) Green Black Blue 10250T5 + 10250T97L + 10250TC47 +Voltage Code + 10250T1 = Jumbo Mushroom Head (Anodized) Aluminum 10250T597LRD24-1X Red Red (EMER. STOP) Green Black Yellow 10250T5B62-1X Incandescent 10250T5 + 10250T79 + 10250TC47 + 10250T1 = LED Incand. LED Suffix Suffix Code Code 06 -- 6V AC/DC 12 -- 12V AC/DC 24 -- 24V AC/DC 48 -- 48V AC/DC 60 -- 60V AC/DC 2A -- 120V AC 2D -- 120V DC J62 J63 J61 J60 J64 10250TJ62 10250TJ63 10250TJ61 10250TJ60 10250TJ64 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications. Legend Plates For a complete listing of available Legend Plates see Pages 47-151 - 47-152. Jumbo Standard P S R T Figure 47-93. Legend Plates Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-148 Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Pages 47-153 - 47-154 Pages 47-151 - 47-152 1CD1C 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-132 January 2010 10250T Series, Assembled Devices -- Selector Switch Units Selector Switch Units 3-Position Maintained Switch Catalog Number 10250T21KB Two-, Three- and Four-Position Maintained Non-illuminated and Illuminated 3-Position Maintained Switch Catalog Number 10250T22KB Table 47-200. 2-Position Selector Switch -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position X O O X Operator Non-illuminated Action Black Knob Black Lever M Catalog Number Catalog Number 10250T20KB 10250T20LB Illuminated -- 120V Transformer Price U.S. $ Red Knob Red Lever Catalog Number Catalog Number 10250ED1117-KR 10250ED1117-LR Price U.S. $ Contact Type Mounting Location A B 1NC 1NO M X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Color Selection table. Example: 10250T20KG. Table 47-201. 3-Position Selector Switch -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position 47 X O O O O X X O O O X O O O X Operator Action M M Non-illuminated Illuminated -- 120V Transformer Black Knob Black Lever Price U.S. $ Catalog Catalog Red Knob Red Lever Price U.S. $ Contact Type Number Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 10250T21KB 10250T21LB 10250ED1117-2KR 10250ED1117-2LR 1NO 1NO 10250T22KB 10250T22LB 10250ED1117-3KR 10250ED1117-3LR 1NO M Mounting Location A B 2NC (Series) 1NO X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Color Selection table. Example: 10250T20KG. Table 47-202. 4-Position Selector Switch -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position X O O O O X O O O O X O O O O X Operator Action M M Non-illuminated Illuminated -- 120V Transformer Black Knob Black Lever Catalog Number Catalog Number 10250T46KB 10250T46LB Price Red Knob U.S. $ Catalog Number Red Lever Price U.S. $ Catalog Number 10250ED1117-4KR 10250ED1117-4LR Mounting Location A B 1NC 1NO 1NO 1NC M M Contact Type X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Color Selection table. Example: 10250T20KG. Table 47-203. Color Selection Illuminated Non-illuminated Color Code Letter Color Code Letter Color Code Letter Color Code Letter Color Code Letter Color Code Letter Red Green R G White Blue W B Amber Clear A C Black Red B R Green White G W Blue Orange L O Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Circuit Arrangements . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-155 - 47-156 Pages 47-133 - 47-134 Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Pages 47-153 - 47-154 Pages 47-151 - 47-152 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-133 January 2010 10250T Series, Components -- Selector Switch Selection Table 47-204. Example Selection Table Systematic Approach Application: HAND-OFF-AUTO Selector Switch. In this circuit, one incoming line is distributed to two other outgoing circuits by the switch. The two circuits can be looked at individually. 10250T Series Selector Switch Selection Step 1: Elementary Diagram. Construct on paper, or in your mind, a simple elementary diagram of the switching scheme as follows: Cam and Contact Block Selection Selector switches in their varied forms (2-position, 3-position and 4-position) are a big factor contributing to the great flexibility of control that a well rounded line of "pushbuttons" can achieve. Because of their flexibility, they tend to cause difficulty with product selection and application. The following systematic approach should simplify that task. Cam and contact block selection is better understood if you: Work with each incoming and outgoing wire/circuit separately. Recognize the terms NO and NC only identify the type of contact by its mode before mounting to the operator. The "X-O" table (Page 47134) shows how that contact will act after assembly to the operator with the selected cam shape. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. Up to six NO or NC contacts may be mounted behind each plunger location for a total of twelve contacts. Single circuit contact blocks have only one plunger with the other side of the block "open." Therefore, single circuit contact blocks transmit motion to blocks behind them only for the position containing the circuit. Each cam has two separate lobes, each of which operates one of the two contact block plungers independently of each other. Those are identified as position A (locating nib side) and position B (opposite of locating nib). The position designations give direction in selecting and mounting of the contact blocks (see Figure 47-94). Locating Nib A B Figure 47-94. Contact Circuit Locations CA08102001E HAND Incoming Line Outgoing Circuit OFF AUTO No. "X-O" Pattern 1 X O O 4 O O X HAND OFF AUTO X O O In this circuit, you want a contact closed on the left (HAND) but open in the center and right. For the AUTO circuit, the "X-O" diagram would look like this: HAND OFF AUTO O O X Putting them together, the complete "X-O" diagram is: XOO OOX Once the "X-O" diagram has been generated, the next step is to select the cam and contact block, or blocks, needed to perform the desired "X-O" functions. The selection table on the following page lists the various types (shapes) of cams by number to choose from and the type of contact and position to achieve the function outlined in your "X-O" diagram. Step 3: Cam Selection. The cam you select determines the operation of all contact blocks mounted to the operator. It is selected on the basis that it provides the simplest circuitry for the desired "X-O" diagram. The selection tables of the following page show all the "X-O" combinations. For the purpose of this example, the applicable portion of those tables is shown in Table 47-204. For more information visit: www.eaton.com Cam Code #3 Top Bottom A B Top A NC NO NO Bottom B NO NO Wired in series. Now to make the cam selection, make a simple worksheet such as: Outgoing Circuit Step 2: "X-O" Pattern. From the elementary diagram, you can construct an "X-O" diagram which describes when the contacts are to be closed (X) or open (O) in the various positions of the switch. The "X-O" for the HAND circuit looks like this: Cam Code #2 XOO OOX Cam 2 (A)NO - (B)NC (B)NO Cam 3 (A)NO (B)NO It becomes immediately obvious that cam 3 is the better choice for two reasons, (1) the series combination can be avoided making it simpler to wire, (2) only two contacts are required, which is less expensive than the three contacts required by cam 2. Step 4: Contact Block Selection. Having selected the cam, contact block selection is simply a matter of gathering the A position and B position circuits into pairs which make up the most convenient contact block arrangement. If there is an imbalance in the number of circuits under A or B, then single circuit blocks must be selected for these leftover circuits. Back to the worksheet, having selected cam 3 do this: X O X O O X ANO BNO 10250T2 Step 5: Selector Switch Operator. Lastly, you have to choose from the many types of operators -- knob and lever in various colors or keyed. Also what combinations of maintained and spring return functions are required. Selection of these operators can be found on Page 47-135. For the above example you may want a 3-position maintained black knob, cam 3 -- Catalog Number 10250T1323. The Complete Switch: 10250T1323 with one 10250T2 or, for one composite catalog number, 10250T21KB found on Page 47-132. 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-134 January 2010 10250T Series, Components -- Selector Switch Selection Selector Switch Selection (Continued) Table 47-206. 3-Position Switch -- Cam and Contact Block Selection No. Table 47-205. 2-Position Selector Switch Contact Block Selection No. Desired Circuit and Operator Position Bottom Plunger B 1 X 2 X X Operator with Cam Code #3 Mounting Location Mounting Location Top Plunger A Bottom Plunger B Top Plunger A NO NC NO O X O NC X O NO NO 4 O O X NO Circuits shown illustrate connections to obtain a selector switch circuit combination and are shown with their appropriate line diagrams. Field wiring of jumper connections required as shown. X = Closed Circuit O = Open Circuit 47 NO NO Diagrams Series Connection NC X X NO Bottom Plunger B NC 3 O O Operator with Cam Code #2 O NC 2 Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function (Jumpers must be installed where indicated) Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function Top Plunger A 1 Desired Circuit and Operator Position 5 O X X NC 6 O NO X NO NC O NC NC NC Table 47-207. 4-Position Switch -- Contact Block Selection No. Desired Circuit and Operator Position Top Plunger A Figure 47-95. Wiring of Jumper Connections 1 X O O O 2 O X O O For selection and number of available contact blocks per operator, see Page 47-148. Bottom Plunger B Top Plunger A 10 X O X O O X O 4 O O O X NO NC NO 11 X X X O NC 5 X O O 7 8 9 O X O X O X X X X O O NO NO NC NO NO NC NC NC NO NC NC 12 O NC NO X NC 6 Bottom Plunger B O NO 3 Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function Mounting Location NC Contact Blocks Com- Desired Circuit and bina- Operator Position tion No. Mounting Location Parallel Connection Note: 4-Position Selector Switches limited to 4 contact blocks. Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function O X X X O NO NO NO NC NC NO X 13 X O X X O X NO NC For more information visit: www.eaton.com 14 X X O X CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-135 January 2010 10250T Series, Selector Switch Components Selector Switch Operators 2-Position Maintained Black Knob Selector Switch -- Cam 1 Cat. No. 10250T1311 3-Position Maintained Black Lever Selector Switch -- Cam 3 Cat. No. 10250T3023 2-Position Maintained Horizontal Mount, Key Removal #1 Keyed Selector Switch -- Cam 1 Cat. No. 10250T16111 Selector Switch Operators with Caps Table 47-208. Selector Switch Operators with Caps -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Positions 2-Position -- 60 Throw Operator Action Black Knob Selector Switch -- Vertical Mounting Cam Code Catalog Price Number U.S. $ 1 10250T1311 1 10250T3011 1 10250T1371 1 10250T3071 M 2 3 10250T1322 10250T1323 2 3 10250T3022 10250T3023 M 2 3 10250T1332 10250T1333 2 3 10250T3032 10250T3033 S 2 3 10250T1342 10250T1343 2 3 10250T3042 10250T3043 S 2 3 10250T1352 10250T1353 2 3 10250T3052 10250T3053 7 10250T1367 7 10250T3067 M M M S 3-Position -- 60 Throw M M M S M S M M 4-Position -- 40 Throw M M M M Black Lever Selector Switch -- Vertical Mounting Cam Code Catalog Price Number U.S. $ M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages 47-133 - 47-134. Field convertible to Horizontal Mounting or order operator only and separate operator cap. Table 47-209. Key Operators with Cam -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Positions 2-Position -- 60 Throw Operator Action Cam Code Optional Key Removal Positions Vertical Mounting Catalog Number Horizontal Mounting Catalog Number 1 1, 2, 3 10250T1511_ 10250T1611_ 1 2 10250T1571_ 10250T1581_ 2 3 1-7 M 10250T1522_ 10250T1523_ 10250T1622_ 10250T1623_ 2 3 1, 4, 5 M 10250T1532_ 10250T1533_ 10250T1632_ 10250T1633_ 2 3 4 S 10250T1542_ 10250T1543_ 10250T1642_ 10250T1643_ 2 3 2, 4, 6 S 10250T1652_ 10250T1653_ 10250T1662_ 10250T1663_ 7 7 10250T1677_ 10250T1687_ M M M S 3-Position -- 60 Throw M M M S M S M M 4-Position -- 40 Throw M M M Price U.S. $ M M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages 47-133 - 47-134. Choose key removal position required for application from Table 47-210 on Page 47-136. Add key removal Code No. to listed Catalog Number. Example: 10250T15112. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-155 - 47-156 Page 47-148 Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Pages 47-153 - 47-154 Pages 47-151 - 47-152 1CD1C 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-136 January 2010 10250T Series, Selector Switch Components Selector Switch Operators (Continued) Table 47-210. Key Removal Positions Code Suffix Key Removal Positions Code Suffix Key Removal Positions 1 2 3 4 Right Only Left Only Right & Left Center Only 5 6 7 Right & Center Left & Center All Positions Note: Key removal in "spring return from" positions not recommended. C L R Figure 47-96. Key Removal Positions Replacement Keys or Dissimilar Locks for Key Operators Operators listed on Page 47-135 have identical locks and keys (Key Code H661) Catalog Number 10250ED824. For dissimilar lock and key combinations, see listing at right. Selector Switch Operators with Dissimilar Locks and Keys -- UL (NEMA) 4, 4X and 13 The locks in all key operators listed on Pages 47-121, 47-135 and 47-180) are identical and use key code number H661. Two keys are supplied with every lock. For additional code number H661 keys, order Catalog Number 10250ED824. For others, order 10250ED1130 and designate lock number. When dissimilar locks for each operator or each group of operators are required, select from the lock and key combination listed below. When Ordering Operator Only or a Complete Control Unit with a substitute lock, order from table below and add "except Lock and Key Code No. ..." Table 47-212. "H" Series Locks without Master Key -- with Key Slot Cover Lock and Key Code Numbers H501 H620 H621 H634 H635 H639 H643 H654 Table 47-213. "M" Series Locks with Master Key -- with Key Slot Cover Lock and Key Code Numbers MD1 MD2 MD3 MD4 MD5 MD7 MD9 MD10 MD11 MD13 MD14 MD15 MD16 MD19 MD20 ME2 ME3 ME5 ME6 ME7 ME8 ME11 ME16 ME17 ME18 ME19 MJ1 MJ3 MJ4 MJ5 Adder U.S. $ MJ6 MJ10 MJ11 MJ13 MJ15 MJ16 MD17 Table 47-214. Master Keys for Above Locks Application For Code: MD1 - MD20 ME2 - ME18 MJ1 - MJ16 Catalog Number Price U.S. $ 10250ED825-3 10250ED825-4 10250ED825-5 Adder U.S. $ H663 H675 H683 H688 Table 47-211. Replacement Key Description Catalog Number Replacement Keys (Code H661) 10250ED824 Price U.S. $ 47 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-137 January 2010 10250T Series, Selector Switch Components Selector Switch Operators (Continued) Selector Switch Operators without Caps 2-Position Selector Switch Maintained, Cam Code 1 Catalog Number 10250T4011 Note: Operators below can be ordered with caps assembled to them by adding the Code Number from Table 47-216 to the end of Catalog Number below. Example: 10250T4011KB Table 47-215. Selector Switch Operators without Caps Operator Action Positions 2-Position -- 60 Throw Cam Code Catalog Number 1 10250T4011 1 10250T4081 M 2 3 10250T4022 10250T4023 M 2 3 10250T4032 10250T4033 S 2 3 10250T4042 10250T4043 S 2 3 10250T4052 10250T4053 7 10250T4067 M M M S 3-Position -- 60 Throw M M M S M S M M 4-Position -- 40 Throw M M M Price U.S. $ M M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages 47-133 - 47-134. Table 47-216. Operating Caps Color Knob Catalog and Code Number Lever Price U.S. $ Catalog and Code Number Black Red Green Yellow White Gray Blue Orange 10250TKB 10250TKR 10250TKG 10250TKY 10250TKW 10250TKA 10250TKL 10250TKO 10250TLB 10250TLR 10250TLG 10250TLY 10250TLW 10250TLA 10250TLL 10250TLO Color Lever Coin Slot Catalog and Code Number Black Red Green Yellow White Gray Blue Orange 10250TSB 10250TSR 10250TSG 10250TSY 10250TSW 10250TSA 10250TSL 10250TSO Price Catalog and U.S. $ Code Number 47 Price U.S. $ Price U.S. $ 10250TCB 10250TCR 10250TCG 10250TCY 10250TCW 10250TCA 10250TCL 10250TCO Designed for added ingress protection. For use in maintained operators only. CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 - 47-156 Page 47-148 Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Pages 47-153 - 47-154 Pages 47-151 - 47-152 1CD1C Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-138 January 2010 10250T Series, Selector Switch Components Illuminated Selector Switch Operators 2-Position Maintained 120V AC Transformer Selector Switch, Cam Code 1 Catalog Number 10250T5971 Illuminated Selector Switches without Caps Table 47-217. Operator without Knob or Lever Operator Action Positions Transformer Type -- 50/60 Hz 6 Volt #755 Lamp 2-Position - 60 Throw M M 3-Position - 60 Throw M M M M M S M S M 47 M S S 4-Position - 40 Throw M M M M Price U.S. $ Full Voltage Type -- AC or DC Lamps: 6V -- #755, 12V -- #756, 24V -- #757, 48V -- #1835, 120/240V -- 120MB Voltage Catalog and Cam Price Code Number Code U.S. $ Voltage Catalog and Code Number Cam Code 24 120 208 240 380 480 600 24 120 208 240 380 480 600 24 120 208 240 380 480 600 24 120 208 240 380 480 600 24 120 208 240 380 480 600 24 120 208 240 380 480 600 10250T5961 10250T5971 10250T6511 10250T5981 10250T5991 10250T6001 10250T6011 10250T602_ 10250T603_ 10250T652_ 10250T604_ 10250T605_ 10250T606_ 10250T607_ 10250T654_ 10250T620_ 10250T655_ 10250T656_ 10250T657_ 10250T658_ 10250T659 10250T660_ 10250T621_ 10250T661_ 10250T662_ 10250T663_ 10250T664_ 10250T665_ 10250T614_ 10250T615_ 10250T653_ 10250T616_ 10250T617_ 10250T618_ 10250T619_ 10250T6087 10250T6097 10250T6547 10250T6107 10250T6117 10250T6127 10250T6137 1 6 12 24 48 120 240 10250T6201 10250T6211 10250T6221 10250T6231 10250T6361 10250T6371 1 + 2 or 3 6 12 24 48 120 240 10250T624_ 10250T625_ 10250T626_ 10250T627_ 10250T638_ 10250T639_ + 2 or 3 + 2 or 3 6 12 24 48 120 240 10250T612_ 10250T632_ 10250T642_ 10250T672_ 10250T622_ 10250T682_ + 2 or 3 + 2 or 3 6 12 24 48 120 240 10250T613_ 10250T633_ 10250T643_ 10250T673_ 10250T623_ 10250T683_ + 2 or 3 + 2 or 3 6 12 24 48 120 240 10250T628_ 10250T629_ 10250T630_ 10250T631_ 10250T640_ 10250T641_ + 2 or 3 7 6 12 24 48 120 240 10250T6327 10250T6337 10250T6347 10250T6357 10250T6427 10250T6437 7 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws. For selection of the proper cam and contact block, to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection table on Pages 47-133 - 47-134. Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page 47-157. Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density. Table 47-218. Illuminated Knobs and Levers Color Knob Cat. and Code No. Red Green Yellow Blue Clear White Amber 10250TER 10250TEG 10250TEA 10250TEL 10250TEC 10250TEW 10250TEM Lever Price U.S. $ Cat. and Code No. Price U.S. $ 10250TFR 10250TFG 10250TFA 10250TFL 10250TFC 10250TFW 10250TFM Amber, Clear and White lenses have a black arrow (pointer), Red, Green and Blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer). For more information visit: www.eaton.com Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 - 47-156 Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 - 47-154 Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 - 47-152 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-139 January 2010 10250T Series, Joystick Units and Components Joystick Units Table 47-219. Joystick Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position Two-Position Up Center Down O O X Operator Action 2-Position Assembled Unit Catalog Number S Price U.S. $ Contact Mounting Location Type A B 10250T452-3X 1NC M O O S X 1NC X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). Field convertible momentary to maintained or vice versa. Joysticks be allowed. These operators are field convertible from momentary to maintained operation or vice versa. Two-Position Joystick Operators The device mounts in the standard 30.5 mm mounting hole. Allow sufficient panel space for lever movement. The maximum travel of the knob operator (full up to full down) is 2.2" (24) momentary, 2.5" (30) maintained, but ample space for lever operation must The use of NC contacts is preferred because they provide positive drive contact opening and a direct relationship between lever movement and affected terminal, i.e., up movement affects the top terminals. 2-Position Joystick Operator Table 47-220. 2-Position Joystick Operators -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Contact Block Limitations Description Momentary Mode 4NC Contact Blocks Max. 3NO Contact Blocks Max. 2-Position Operator Only -- AC Applications Only Maintained Mode 2 Contact Blocks Max. Catalog Number Momentary Up and Down Maintained Up -- Momentary Down Maintained Down -- Momentary Up Maintained Up and Down Price U.S. $ 10250T452 10250T4521 10250T4522 10250T4525 Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm) Contact 0.89 Block (22.6) 2.2 (55.9) mom. 2.5 (63.5) main. 2.06 (52.3) 2.13 (54.1) 0.88 (22.4) per Block Handle Position Up Center Down Contact Block Catalog Number 0.06 (1.5) to 0.26 (6.6) Panel Thickness 1.25 (31.8) Field convertible momentary to maintained or vice versa. To expedite shipment of maintained types, order momentary operator 10250T452 which is a stocked device. Table 47-221. Contact Block Operation and Selection 3.88 (98.6) X O O O Price U.S. $ Type O 10250T51 O X 10250T51 1NC X O 10250T45 X O O 10250T3 2LONC (Series) 1NC O X O X X O 10250T45 1NC 1LONC O X O O X X O O O O X O X X O 10250T44 Mounting Location Top Bottom A B 1NC 1LONC 1NC 1NO 1NC 1NO Bolded circuit corresponds to "X-O" circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. See Figure 47-97 for "A" and "B" mounting location. NO = Normally Open, NC = Normally Closed, LONC = Late Opening Normally Closed. Four circuits in single block depth -- rated 300V max. CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Locating Nib Top Contacts Up Center Bottom Contacts Up NC Contact at Top Is Closed, NO at Bottom Is Closed Down Center All NC and NO Contacts Are Open (1/2 Way), Late Opening NC Is Closed Down NC Contact at Bottom Is Closed, NO at Top Is Closed Figure 47-97. A and B Mounting Location Application Caution Joystick operators are not recommended on certain DC applications above 24V DC which may involve lightly engaging the contacts (teasing) to achieve speed control, positioning, jogging, etc. Excessive arcing and deterioration of the contacts will occur. Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148 Pages 47-153 - 47-154 Pages 47-151 - 47-152 1CD1C 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-140 January 2010 10250T Series, Joystick Components Joysticks (Continued) Four-Position Joystick Operators The joystick operated control unit is intended for AC application only. For other use, see Application Caution on preceding page. The panel area required for the 4-position operator is equivalent to two standard pushbutton operators. Note: The latch holds the lever in the center position. The trigger latch must be released before lever can moved into any position. 4-Position Joystick Operator 4-Position Joystick Operator with Latch Table 47-222. 4-Position Joystick Operators -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Contact Block Limitations Description 4 Contact Blocks Max. -- 2 in Each Position Operator Only -- AC Application Only Catalog Number 4-Position -- without Latch 4-Position -- with Latch Price U.S. $ Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm) 10250T451_ 10250T461_ 1.25 (31.8) 4.0 (101.6) Hole Plug To plug unused hole 10250TA7 1.88 (47.8) 0.88 (22.4) per Unit 1.19 (30.2) 3.75 (95.3) Momentary operators -- spring return to center. For maintained operators add Suffix Code from Table 47-223. Example: 10250T45110. Operator without latch, maintained in left and right positions. Field Conversion -- Gate The factory assembled 4-position operator is assembled with a gate arranged for four handle positions. 47 4-Position Gate The 8-position gate controls the four functions shown as "Up," "Down," "Left" and "Right." The remaining four diagonal positions each actuate two adjacent functions (see Figure 47100); for example, "Left Down" actuates both "Left" and "Down." The operator may be arranged for spring return of handle to center position, or maintained in up to eight positions (see description of maintained position operator). Figure 47-98. Handle Positions Three additional gates, supplied with every operator, allow on the job conversion to 3- or 8-position operation as illustrated below. Left Up Up Left or 2-Position Gate or or Right Up Right or 3-Position Gate Left Down Down Right Down Table 47-223. Maintained Positions Maintained Positions Up Down Left Right Suffix Number X -- -- -- X X X -- -- -- X X X -- X -- X -- -- X -- -- X X -- X X -- X X -- -- X -- -- X -- X -- X X -- X X X -- -- -- X -- -- X -- X X -- X X X X 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Note: On an 8-position gate, when an adjacent vertical and horizontal position are both maintained, the included diagonal position is also maintained. Figure 47-100. Adjacent Functions 8-Position Gate Figure 47-99. 2-, 3- or 8-Position Operation Maintained Position For maintained position (non-spring return), locate required maintained position or positions of operating lever in Table 47-223 and add appropriate Suffix Number to the Catalog Number selected from Table 47-222. Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-148 Pages 47-153 - 47-154 Pages 47-151 - 47-152 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-141 January 2010 10250T Series, Joystick Components Joysticks (Continued) Four-Position Joystick Operators (Continued) Contact Block Operation Contact blocks mount directly to the back of the operator. For reliable operation, the maximum number of contact blocks that should be installed behind each operator lever is 2 (4 total). The contact blocks and their mounting locations would be as follows: 2nd 1st Circuit Circuit Figure 47-101 identifies the circuits activated by each of the eight possible lever positions. Contact block plungers 1, 2, 3, 4 are depressed (change state) when handle is in the position indicated by arrows below. NO NO NC NO 10250T1 10250T2 NC NO NO 10250T1 10250T2 1 A complete bill of material for this example would include: Table 47-225. Example Order 3 4 Figure 47-101. Circuit Activation Note: Joystick in its resting state, center position, does not activate contact block plungers. Ordering Example: Suppose you are looking for a 4-position momentary joystick without a latch and the following circuit arrangements. X = Closed Circuit, O = Open Circuit. Table 47-224. Example Circuit Arrangements Up Down Left Right 1st Circuit X X X X 2nd Circuit X O O X 2-position legend plate to be marked "UP" "DOWN." Catalog No.: 10250TJ2S4STAMP Letter Size: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) Pos. K -- UP Pos. M -- DOWN Table 47-226. 2-Position K NO Figure 47-102. Example Contact Blocks and Locations 2 Ordering Example: Qty. Catalog Number 1 2 2 10250T451 10250T2 10250T1 Blank Legend Plates for Joystick Operators When ordering engraved legend plates, order by Catalog Number and insert the following into Order Notes: Legend required Size of characters: 3/16, 1/8, 3/32 inch (4.8, 3.2, 2.4 mm) Location by letter (A - N) Locations K and M can accommodate up to 2 lines horizontally; L and N up to 2 lines vertically. 2.19 (55.6) Sq. K L N M M Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Blank Plate 10250TJS3 10250TJS4 Engraved Plate 10250TJS3STAMP 10250TJS4STAMP Table 47-227. 4-Position C A B D C F E G J D F E H Catalog Number A B G J H Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Blank Plate 10250TJS1 10250TJS2 Engraved Plate 10250TJS1STAMP 10250TJS2STAMP Maximum number of characters: Horizontal 3/16" -- 13, 1/8" -- 14, 3/32" -- 19 Vertical 3/16" -- 10, 1/8" -- 13, 3/32" -- 14 Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-142 January 2010 10250T Series, Assembled Devices -- Roto-Push Units Roto-Push(R) Units Locating Nib Two-Position Momentary Complete assembled Two-Position Roto-Push Units are listed below. These operators have black flush buttons and are arranged for vertical mounting. Order legend plates separately. A B Figure 47-103. Mounting Location Table 47-228. Roto-Push Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Typical Applications (Most Common Examples) Operator Position Collar Left Roto-Push Assembled with Contact Blocks Collar Right Catalog Number Contact Mounting Location Type Price U.S. $ A B Normal Depressed Normal Depressed 2-Position Roto-Push -- Black Flush Button for Vertical Mounting Cat. No. 10250T24111-1 FORWARD/REVERSE; HIGH/LOW; OPEN/CLOSE; UP/DOWN; etc. O O X O X O O JOG/RUN; MAN./AUTO; etc. O O X O O X RUN/JOG; START/JOG; etc. O X X X SAFE/RUN; etc. O O O O 10250T2411-2 1NO 1NO X X 10250T24111-2 1NO 1NO O O X O 10250T24111-1 1NO 1NC O X X X 10250T2415-2 1NO 1NO X = Closed Circuit, O = Open Circuit. Two-Position Latched 47 O The Two-Position Roto-Push Latch Unit is fully assembled and only requires a legend plate for a great variety of applications. When the selector collar is in the extreme left position, the button is in the free or normal position and can be operated as a standard pushbutton. Rotating the collar to the extreme right position automatically depresses and latches the button in the depressed position. The white filled groove in the button indicates the selector collar position. The selector collar has spring return to the left position except when in the extreme right latched position. Table 47-229. Rotates to a Latch-Out Mode Color and Type Contact Vertical Mounting of Button Block Catalog Price Number U.S. $ Red Long 1NC 2NC 10250T72 10250T73 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Circuit Arrangements . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-155 - 47-156 Pages 47-133 - 47-134 Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Pages 47-153 - 47-154 Pages 47-151 - 47-152 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-143 January 2010 10250T Series, Roto-Push Components Roto-Push Operators Roto-Push Components When Ordering Specify A Roto-Push control unit combines the function of a pushbutton and a selector switch. The contacts are operated by the combined action of rotating the outer collar and pushing a button contained in the collar. In selecting the cam and contact blocks for the listed function, the analysis involves considering the function with the collar rotated to the given position with the button free (designated as "N") and then in that same position with the button depressed (designated "D"). This is done for each rotational position of the collar. Catalog Number of Operator with Cam Code Suffix from tables below and on following pages, Example: 10250T2411. Catalog Number(s) for Contact Blocks and Legend Plates if required. To select the cam and contact blocks needed for 2-position and 3-position switches, use the tables on following pages. Operator and Cam 10250T24111 Table 47-230. Operator and Cam Color and Type of Button Vertical Mounting Horizontal Mounting Cam Code No. Select from Catalog and Catalog and Tables Code Code Number Number Black Flush Red Flush Green Flush Black Long Red Long Green Long 10250T241_ 10250T242_ 10250T243_ 10250T261_ 10250T262_ 10250T263_ 10250T251_ 10250T252_ 10250T253_ 10250T271_ 10250T272_ 10250T273_ Price U.S. $ Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm) + 1 to 18 1.13 (28.7) 1.38 (35.1) 0.38 (9.7) Long Button Only 1.53 (38.9) Not to be used for Emergency Stop application. 47 Two-Position Roto-Push Operator -- Rotates to a Latch-Out Mode Special Rotor Latch Special Roto Latch -- Red Long Button Catalog Number 10250T3213 This differs from the other Roto-Push operators in that as the collar is rotated to the right it depresses the button and releases the button when rotated left. But the button in the released position can be momentarily pushed independent of the collar or its position. As the button is depressed by rotating the collar, the button also rotates and indicates its mode by a white line on the button face. This button can be used as an emergency stop or latched stop. Table 47-231. Special Rotor Latch -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Color and Type of Button Vertical Mounting Red Long Black Long 10250T3213 10250T3214 Catalog Number Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm) Price U.S. $ 1.13 (28.7) 1.38 (35.1) 1.53 (38.9) 0.38 (9.7) Long Button Only Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-148 Pages 47-153 - 47-154 Pages 47-151 - 47-152 1CD1C Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-144 January 2010 10250T Series, Roto-Push Components Roto-Push Operators (Continued) Table 47-232. Cam and Contact Block Selection for Two-Position Roto-Push Combination Number Collar Position Cam Code 1 Cam Code 2 Cam Code 3 Cam Code 4 -- -- Cam Code 5 Cam Code 6 Circuit Sequence N D N D 1 O O O X 2 O O X O 3 O O X X 4 O X O O 5 O X O X 6 O X X O 7 O X X X 8 X O O O 9 X O O X A NO -- -- -- -- -- A NC B NO B NO A B NO NO B NO X O X O 11 X O X X 12 X X O O 13 X X O X 14 X X X O 47 -- -- -- -- A or B NO -- A NC B NC B NC -- -- B NC A B NO NC -- NC B NO B NO B NO -- -- A NO A NC B NO -- -- -- -- -- B NO B NC B NO B NC -- -- -- -- -- NC A NO -- -- -- -- -- A -- A NC -- -- -- A A or B NC -- NO NC A -- A A -- -- -- -- NO -- -- 10 A A B -- -- -- -- NC -- NO NC B NC A B NO NC A NC -- A B NO NC A NC -- -- N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed. A B NO NC Series Connection A B NO NC Parallel Connection Figure 47-104. Series and Parallel Connections The connections are not made at the factory. They are illustrated in the selection table as requirements, but must be made on the job. Locating Nib A B Figure 47-105. Circuit Location Letters "A" and "B" represent the locations which the two circuits of a contact block will occupy in relation to the locating nib of the operator. Figure 47-104 illustrates this pictorially. Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-145 January 2010 10250T Series, Roto-Push Components Roto-Push Operators (Continued) Table 47-232. Cam and Contact Block Selection for Two-Position Roto-Push (Continued) Combination Number Collar Position Cam Code 10 Cam Code 11 Cam Code 12 Cam Code 13 Cam Code 14 -- -- -- Circuit Sequence N D N D 15 O O O X 16 O O X O -- -- 17 O O X X 18 O X O O 19 O X O X 20 O X X O 21 O X X X 22 X O O O A B NO NO A NC B NO B NO B NO A NO A B NO NC A NO A or B NC A NC -- -- -- -- -- -- -- B -- -- NO NO A B NO NO A B NC NO A NC A NC B NC B NC A B NO NC -- -- -- A B -- -- -- -- X O O X 24 X O X O 25 X O X X A 26 X X O O B 27 X X O X 28 X X X O -- -- A NC NC A B NO NO NC B NC A B NO NC A B NC NC B -- NO NC -- 47 NC -- -- B -- -- NC NO -- A B 23 NO NO A B -- NC -- B -- A -- NC -- A or B NO A -- NO A -- NO -- N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed. A B NO NC Series Connection A B NO NC Parallel Connection Figure 47-106. Series and Parallel Connections The connections are not made at the factory. They are illustrated in the selection table as requirements, but must be made on the job. Locating Nib A B Figure 47-107. Circuit Location Letters "A" and "B" represent the locations which the two circuits of a contact block will occupy in relation to the locating nib of the operator. Figure 47-106 illustrates this pictorially. Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-146 January 2010 10250T Series, Roto-Push Components Roto-Push Operators (Continued) Table 47-233. Cam and Contact Block Selection for Three-Position Roto-Push Combination Number Collar Position Cam Code 7 Cam Code 8 Cam Code 9 Cam Code 15 Cam Code 16 Cam Code 17 Cam Code 18 Circuit Sequence 1 N D N D N D O O O O O X 2 O O O O X X 3 O O O X O O 4 O O O X O X A B NO NO -- O O O X X X 6 O O X X O O 7 O O X X O X 8 O O X X X O B NC O O X X X X 10 O X O O O O 11 O X O O O X 12 O X O O X X 13 O X O X O O B NO B NO A B NO NC -- -- -- -- -- -- NC NO B NO A B NO NC A NO 14 O X O X O X 15 O X X X O O 16 O X X X O X 17 O X X X X X NO -- A B NO NO B NO -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- A B NO NO B NO A B NO NO NC A NO A NO A B NO NO A B NO NO -- -- B -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- NO A B NO NO NO NC -- -- A A B -- -- -- -- NO -- -- -- NO -- -- -- A B A B NC B -- -- -- A -- A -- 47 NO -- -- B -- B -- -- A A NO -- -- 9 -- -- -- 5 A NO NO A NO A B NO NO -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- NO NO Limited to 4 contact blocks. See Note on Page 47-148. N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed. A B NO NC Series Connection A B NO NC Parallel Connection Figure 47-108. Series and Parallel Connections The connections are not made at the factory. They are illustrated in the selection table as requirements, but must be made on the job. Locating Nib A Letters "A" and "B" represent the locations which the two circuits of a contact block will occupy in relation to the locating nib of the operator. Figure 47-108 illustrates this pictorially. B Figure 47-109. Circuit Location Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-147 January 2010 10250T Series, Roto-Push Components Roto-Push Operators (Continued) Table 47-233. Cam and Contact Block Selection for Three-Position Roto-Push (Continued) Combination Number Collar Position Cam Code 7 Cam Code 8 Cam Code 9 Cam Code 15 Cam Code 16 Cam Code 17 Cam Code 18 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Circuit Sequence 18 N D N D N D X O O O O O A NC B NC -- 19 X O O O X X 20 X O O O X O -- -- 21 X O X X X O X X X X 23 X O X X X O X O A B A B NC NC A NO B NC NO -- -- -- -- -- NC -- X O X O X X 26 X X O O O O B 27 X X O O O X A B 28 X X O O X O 29 X X O O X X 30 X X X X O O 31 X X X X X O 32 X X X O X O 33 X X X O X X -- -- -- A B -- -- NC NO NC NC A NC NC -- B NC -- B NC -- A B -- -- A NC B NC A NC -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- NC NO -- NC A -- -- B -- NC NO NC -- -- NC NC -- B NO NC A B -- -- NC A NO B -- NC NC -- -- NC A NC B B A A -- A A B NC -- -- B A B -- NC X O 25 A -- -- X O NC O O 22 24 A A B NC -- -- -- -- NC NO NC NC 47 -- A B B A B NO NC NC NC NC Limited to 4 contact blocks. N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed. A B NO NC Series Connection A B NO NC Parallel Connection Figure 47-110. Series and Parallel Connection The connections are not made at the factory. They are illustrated in the selection table as requirements, but must be made on the job. CA08102001E Locating Nib A Letters "A" and "B" represent the locations which the two circuits of a contact block will occupy in relation to the locating nib of the operator. Figure 47-110 illustrates this pictorially. B Figure 47-111. Circuit Location Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148 For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-148 January 2010 10250T Series, Components -- Contact Blocks Contact Blocks Standard Contact Blocks UL A600/P600 rated Color-coded plungers - red/green for NC/NO circuits Silver contact tips with "reliability nibs" Gray (opaque) or amber (translucent) housings Pressure plate or spade terminals Fingerproof shrouds (for pressure terminals only) Logic Level Contact Blocks UL A600/P600 rated Color-coded plungers Inert palladium knife-blade contacts Gray (opaque) housings Pressure plate or spade terminals Special Function Contact Blocks UL A600/P600 rated Color-coded plungers Silver contact tips with "reliability nibs" Gray (opaque) housings Pressure plate terminals only Therefore standard contact blocks can be used for most logic level applications where the contacts are not exposed to any harsh environmental conditions. Special Purpose Contact Block Palladium, which is more inert than gold, is well suited for voltages and currents approaching zero and is recommended for applications where environmental conditions are a factor. Maximum 300V rated Black plungers Silver contact tips with "reliability nibs" Black (opaque) housings Pressure plate terminals only Fingerproof shrouds not available Reliability Nibs Reliability nibs are the hallmark of Eaton's Cutler-Hammer contact blocks. A pointed silver nib on the contact tip ensures reliable switching from logic level (5V) up to 600V applications. Palladium Contacts Maximum Contact Block Mounting per Operator Type Operator Max. Operator Stack Pushbuttons 6 Push-Pull Operators Roto-Push Operators 2 4 Max. Stack 2- or 3-Position Selector Switches 4-Position Selector Switches Joysticks 6 4 4 Table 47-234. Contact Blocks Symbol Circuit Descriptio n/ Notes 10250T1 Standard Pressure Terminals Catalog Price Number U.S. $ Spade Terminals Catalog Price Number U.S. $ Logic Level Pressure Terminals Catalog Price Number U.S. $ Spade Terminals Catalog Price Number U.S. $ Blank No Plunger 1NC Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T51 10250T59 10250T51E 10250T59E Blank No Plunger 1NO Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T53 10250T60 10250T53E 10250T60E NO-NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T1 10250T40 10250T1E 10250T40E 2NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T3 10250T42 10250T3E 10250T42E 2NO Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T2 10250T41 10250T2E 10250T41E 10250T71E -- 10250T47E -- 10250T57E -- 10250T45E -- 10250T55E -- 47 Special Function Blocks Blank No Plunger LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T71 -- ECNO -NC Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to 6 10250T47 blocks unless otherwise noted. -- ECNO -NO Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to 4 blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T57 -- 10250T45 -- 10250T55 -- 10250T44 -- 2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to 6 blocks unless otherwise noted. LONCECNO Overlapping contacts. Stack up to 4 blocks unless otherwise noted. Four circuits in single block depth. Rated 300V max. Stack up to 4 blocks unless otherwise noted. Special Purpose Blocks 2NO2NC All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2 type 10250T or E34 devices. Contact blocks with spade terminals are limited to a maximum of one contact block per operator and minimum spacing between devices is 2.5" (63.5 mm). Not suitable for use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also available in amber housing. Not available with fingerproof shrouds. Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, 3position push-pull operators, or 4-position selector switches. ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with 2-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments. Special purpose 10250T44 contact blocks are not suitable on selector switches or rotopush operators. Okay to use with 3-position push-pull operators only on low voltage (30V or less) circuits. Fingerproof shrouds not available. Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-116 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-149 January 2010 10250T Series, Components -- Contact Blocks Contact Blocks (Continued) Table 47-235. Contact Blocks with Fingerproof Shrouds Symbol Circuit Description/ Notes 10250T1CP Standard Logic Level Pressure Terminals Pressure Terminals Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Blank No Plunger 1NC Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T51P 10250T51EP Blank No Plunger 1NO Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T53P 10250T53EP NO-NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T1P 10250T1EP 2NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T3P 10250T3EP 2NO Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T2P 10250T2EP LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T71P 10250T71EP ECNO-NC Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to 6 blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T47P 10250T47EP ECNO-NO Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to 4 blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T57P 10250T57EP 2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to 6 blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T45P 10250T45EP LONC-ECNO Overlapping contacts. Stack up to 4 blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T55P 10250T55EP Price U.S. $ Special Function Blocks Blank No Plunger All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2 type 10250T or E34 devices. To order contact blocks with translucent amber housing, change Suffix P to CP in Catalog Number e.g. 10250T51CP. Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, 3position push-pull operators, or 4-position selector switches. ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with 2-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments. 47 Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-116 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-150 January 2010 10250T Series, Components -- Contact Blocks Contact Blocks (Continued) Table 47-236. Amber Contact Blocks Symbol Standard Circuit Description/ Notes Pressure Terminals 10250T1C Catalog Number Logic Level Spade Terminals Price Catalog U.S. $ Number Pressure Terminals Price Catalog U.S. $ Number Spade Terminals Price Catalog U.S. $ Number Price U.S. $ Blank No Plunger 1NC Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T51C 10250T59C 10250T51EC 10250T59EC Blank No Plunger 1NO Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T53C 10250T60C 10250T53EC 10250T60EC NO-NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T1C 10250T40C 10250T1EC 10250T40EC 2NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T3C 10250T42C 10250T3EC 10250T42EC 2NO Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T2C 10250T41C 10250T2EC 10250T41EC 10250T71C -- 10250T71EC -- 10250T47EC -- 10250T57EC -- 10250T45EC -- 10250T55EC -- Special Function Blocks Blank No Plunger 47 LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted. ECNO -NC Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to 6 blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T47C -- ECNO -NO Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to 4 blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T57C -- 2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to 6 blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T45C -- LONC- Overlapping contacts. Stack up to 4 ECNO blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T55C -- All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2 type 10250T or E34 devices. To order amber contact blocks with fingerproof shrouds, change Suffix to CP in the Catalog Number e.g. 10250T51CP. Not available with spade terminals. Contact blocks with spade terminals are limited to a maximum of one contact block per operator and minimum spacing between devices is 2.5" (63.5 mm). Not suitable for use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also available in amber housing. Not available with fingerproof shrouds. Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, 3position push-pull operators, or 4-position selector switches. ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with 2-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments. Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-116 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-151 January 2010 10250T Series, Legend Plates Options Legend Plates Legend Plates with Standard Markings The legend plates listed below are sized for all standard commercial enclosures and Eaton's Cutler-Hammer cast enclosures. For vertical spacing less than 1.75", replace the S in the Catalog Number with MS, or the M with P (except PushPull). No change in price. The smaller size legend plates, "MS" or "P" size, have limited space for legend. Table 47-237. For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights -- Standard Price Each -- U.S. $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Color of Field Catalog Number Square 1/2 Round Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Table 47-243 on Page 47-152 Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16" High CLAMP CLOSE DOWN EMERG. STOP FAST Black Black Black Red Black 10250TS90 10250TS73 10250TS74 10250TS13 10250TS75 10250TM90 10250TM11 10250TM12 10250TM13 10250TM14 FASTER FEEDER ON FEEDER OFF FORWARD HIGH Black Black Black Black Black 10250TS87 10250TS94 10250TS95 10250TS15 10250TS16 10250TM87 10250TM94 10250TM95 10250TM15 10250TM16 IN INCH JOG JOG FOR. JOG REV. Black Black Black Black Black 10250TS17 10250TS18 10250TS19 10250TS20 10250TS21 10250TM17 10250TM18 10250TM19 10250TM20 10250TM21 LOW LOWER LUBE-FAIL MOTOR RUN MOTOR STOP Black Black Black Black Black 10250TS22 10250TS23 10250TS92 10250TS81 10250TS82 10250TM22 10250TM23 10250TM92 10250TM81 10250TM82 OFF ON OPEN OUT POWER ON Red Black Black Black Black 10250TS24 10250TS25 10250TS26 10250TS27 10250TS80 10250TM24 10250TM25 10250TM26 10250TM27 10250TM80 RAISE READY RESET REVERSE RUN Black Black Black Black Black 10250TS28 10250TS86 10250TS29 10250TS30 10250TS31 10250TM28 10250TM86 10250TM29 10250TM30 10250TM31 SAFE SLOW SLOWER START STOP Black Black Black Black Red 10250TS85 10250TS32 10250TS88 10250TS33 10250TS34 10250TM85 10250TM32 10250TM88 10250TM33 10250TM34 TEST TRANSFER TRIP UNCLAMP UP Black Black Black Black Black 10250TS83 10250TS93 10250TS84 10250TS91 10250TS35 10250TM83 10250TM93 10250TM84 10250TM91 10250TM35 Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion. Table 47-238. Blank Plastic Legend Plates -- Square Price Each -- U.S. $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Catalog Number Square Legend Plate Catalog Number 10250TS41 Price Each -- U.S. $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Color of Catalog Number Field 1/2 Round Square Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Table 47-243 on Page 47-152 2-Position -- 5/32" High Lettering FOR. REV. HAND AUTO HIGH LOW JOG RUN MAN. AUTO OFF ON OPEN CLOSE RUN JOG SAFE RUN START JOG START STOP UP DOWN AUTO OFF HAND FOR. OFF REV. FOR. SAFE REV. HAND OFF AUTO MAN. OFF AUTO OPEN OFF CLOSE RUN SAFE JOG UP OFF DOWN ON STOP SAFE Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Red 10250TS49 10250TS50 10250TS69 10250TS51 10250TS68 10250TS53 10250TS70 10250TS54 10250TS71 10250TM49 10250TM50 10250TM69 10250TM51 10250TM68 10250TM53 10250TM70 10250TM54 10250TM71 Field Catalog Number Yellow or Red 10250TRP78 Yellow or Red Yellow 10250TRP76 10250TRP79 Price U.S. $ 45 mm Blank 70 mm Blank Red EMERG. STOP If legend plate is to be engraved, specify field color required. Table 47-241. For Push-Pull Units Price Each -- U.S. $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Color of Catalog Number Field Square 1/2 Round Standard Size -- Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/32" High PULL START/PUSH STOP PUSH ON/PULL OFF PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE PULL UP/PUSH DOWN Green/Red Black Black Black 10250TPP2 10250TPP5 10250TPP8 10250TPP11 10250TR2 10250TR5 10250TR8 10250TR11 Jumbo Size -- Letters on Legend Plates Below are 1/8" High PULL START/PUSH STOP PULL ON/PUSH OFF PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE PULL UP/PUSH DOWN Standard Jumbo 10250TSP76 10250TLP76 10250TEP76 10250TSP77 10250TLP77 10250TEP77 If legend plate is to be engraved, specify field color required. Cannot be used on cast enclosures except for top row. Suitable for most sheet metal enclosures. 10250TM38 10250TM39 10250TM40 10250TM41 10250TM67 10250TM42 10250TM43 10250TM44 10250TM45 10250TM46 10250TM47 10250TM48 Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion. Color Lettering Field 10250TS38 10250TS39 10250TS40 10250TS41 10250TS67 10250TS42 10250TS43 10250TS44 10250TS45 10250TS46 10250TS47 10250TS48 Table 47-240. 45 mm and 70 mm Plastic -- Round White or Silver Red or Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black 3-Position -- 1/8" High Lettering Black White 70 mm Round -- Plastic Catalog Number 10250TRP79 Table 47-239. For Selector Switch and Roto-Push Operators -- Standard Size Lettering Extra Large 1/2 Round Legend Plate Catalog Number 10250TM38 Green/Red Black Black Black 10250TPP3 10250TPP6 10250TPP9 10250TPP12 10250TR3 10250TR6 10250TR9 10250TR12 All Push-Pull Legend Plates include the symbols O in the center of the plate. Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion. Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-152 January 2010 10250T Series, Legend Plates Legend Plates with Non-standard Markings Blackening Kit When Ordering Specify Solution blackens aluminum exposed by engraving process. Must be applied immediately after engraving. 0.3 oz. bottle -- sufficient for approximately 1100 legend plates. Catalog Number of Blank Plate Phase plus Suffix "STAMP." Insert the following into Order Notes: Legend, Letter Size and Locations (letters A - W) -- combine letters for definitive locations as shown. Small Size 10250TMS or TP Series A Jumbo Size 10250TL or TJ Series A B C D K Table 47-242. Blackening Kit Catalog Number Price U.S. $ 10250TBK Ordering Example: Standard Size 10250TS or TM Series Catalog No.: 10250TS36STAMP Letter Size: 3/32 inch (2.4 mm) Pos. A -- POWER HOUSE Pos. B -- START PUMP 1 Extra Large Size Cat. No. 10250TNP99 A B G F AB AE AF A B Legend Characters Available C ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX YZ/-.,1234567890 Legend characters on black and red plates are white -- on satin aluminum plates, characters are black. D B4 K C4 A4 A H D4 L G I Figure 47-113. Legend Positions Figure 47-112. Legend Positions Table 47-243. Blank and Custom Engraved Legend Plates Style Color Small Standard Jumbo Extra Large 4-Position Selector Switch Push-Pull with Symbols Price U.S. $ Custom Standard Standard Jumbo Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Square Black Red Green/Red Satin Alum. 10250TMS36 10250TMS37 -- -- 10250TS36 10250TS37 -- -- 10250TL36 10250TL37 -- -- -- -- -- 10250TNP99 10250TS76 -- -- -- 10250TS72 -- -- -- 10250TPP17 -- 10250TPP20 -- 10250TPP18 -- 10250TPP21 -- 1/2 Round Black Red Green/Red Satin Alum. 10250TP36 10250TP37 -- -- 10250TM36 10250TM37 -- 10250TM89 10250TJ36 10250TJ37 -- 10250TJ89 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 10250TM72 -- -- -- 10250TR17 -- 10250TR20 -- 10250TR18 -- 10250TR21 -- 47 Blank Custom Engraved All Push-Pull Legend Plates include the symbols O in the center of the plate. When used to meet Ford Motor Co. specifications, specify engraved legend. Cannot be used on standard cast or sheet metal enclosures. Cannot be used on cast enclosures except for top row. Suitable for most sheet metal enclosures. Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion. Slightly larger than standard size for legends requiring more space -- fits cast enclosures. Table 47-244. Maximum Characters per Legend Plate and Approximate Dimensions Top (Aluminum and Plastic) Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width Style Height Character Size 3/32" High 1/8" High 3/16" High Number of Lines Number of Characters Number of Lines Number of Characters Number of Lines Number of Characters Small 1.59 (40.4) 1.59 (40.4) Square 1/2 Round 1 1 17 15 -- 1 -- 12 -- 1 -- 9 Standard and Custom 1.75 (44.5) 1.75 (44.5) Square 1/2 Round 2 2 18 15 2 2 13 12 1 1 9 9 Jumbo 2.19 (55.6) 2.19 (55.6) Square 1/2 Round 5 5 23 19 3 4 18 15 2 2 12 11 Extra Large 2.44 (62) 2.44 (62) Square 6 25 3 18 3 12 Recommended only when mounting on minimum centers [less than 1-3/4 inch (44.5 mm) vertical centers]. Can be used on top row only of any enclosure. When used to meet Ford Motor Co. specifications, specify engraved legend. Cannot be used on standard cast or sheet metal enclosures. Legend Plates for Joystick Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-141 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-153 January 2010 10250T Series, Enclosures Enclosures Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures Table 47-245. Enclosures (Case and Cover) -- Surface Mounting Number of Elements 1 Contact Block Depth Catalog Number 2 Contact Block Depth Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Cast Enclosure -- In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13 Die Cast Enclosure -- Cat. No.10250TN11 1 2 3 4 10250TN1 10250TN2 10250TN3 10250TN4 10250TN11 10250TN12 10250TN13 10250TN14 Polyester -- In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12 1 2 3 4 Polyester Enclosure -- Cat. No. E34N52 -- -- -- -- E34N51 E34N52 E34N53 E34N54 Stainless Steel -- In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12 Stainless Steel Enclosure -- Cat. No. 10250TN35 1 2 3 4 -- -- -- -- 10250TN33 10250TN34 10250TN35 10250TN36 For spacing increments, see Page 47-154. All cast enclosures can be converted to base mounting of contact blocks, with spacers 10250TA22 or 10250TA23. See listing on Page 47-156. When used with E30 pushbuttons, only the one element enclosure can be used. 14 gauge, type 304. When used with resistor light units, only the 2 contact block depth enclosure can be used. Table 47-246. Approximate Dimensions Number Element of Arrangement Elements Surface Mounting Conduit Approximate Dimensions Entrance Dimensions in Inches (mm) Wide A High B 47 Deep C Mounting D E Cast 1 2 3 4 In-Line In-Line In-Line In-Line 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 4.0 (101.6) 5.88 (149.4) 7.75 (196.9) 9.63 (244.6) 3.0 (76.3) 3.0 (76.3) 3.0 (76.3) 3.0 (76.3) 2.69 (68.3) 2.69 (68.3) 2.69 (68.3) 2.69 (68.3) 3.25 (82.6) 5.13 (130.3) 7.0 (177.8) 8.88 (225.6) 3/4 3/4 1 1 In-Line In-Line In-Line In-Line 3.81 (96.8) 3.81 (96.8) 3.81 (96.8) 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 6.63 (168.4) 8.88 (225.6) 11.13 (282.7) 3.38 (85.9) 3.38 (85.9) 3.38 (85.9) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 2.94 (74.7) 2.94 (74.7) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0) 4.88 (124.0) 7.13 (181.1) 9.38 (238.3) 3.00 (76.2) 3.50 (88.9) 3.50 (88.9) 3.50 (88.9) 3.50 (88.9) 6.75 (171.5) 9.00 (228.6) 11.25 (285.8) 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 4.25 (108.0) 7.50 (190.5) 9.00 (228.6) 12.00 (304.8) 4 Mtg. Holes -- 10-32 Screw Size for 1 - 4 Element Die Cast/ Stainless Steel Enclosure 7/32 Screw Size for Polyester Polyester 1 2 3 4 E B Stainless Steel 1 2 3 4 In-Line In-Line In-Line In-Line No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required. Depth given is for two contact block deep stations. One contact block deep stations subtract 3/4 inch (19.1 mm). C Surface Top - For Vertical Mounting 1 One Contact Block Depth Enclosure Two Contact Block Depth Enclosure 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 Top - For Horizontal Mounting Note: 2-position joystick must be used with two contact block deep enclosures (maximum number of contact blocks = 1). 4-position joysticks can not be used within these enclosures. D A Figure 47-114. Enclosure Layouts Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-154 January 2010 10250T Series, Enclosures Die Cast and Stainless Steel -- Flush Mount, Covers Only Table 47-247. Covers Only -- Flush Mounting Number of Elements Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Flush Cast Covers Flat Cover 1 2 3 4 Deep Cover In-Line Deep Cover In-Line Flat Cover 10250TF11 10250TF12 10250TF13 10250TF14 10250TF1 10250TF2 10250TF3 10250TF4 In-Line Stainless Steel Flush Plates 1 2 3 4 With Pullbox Without Pullbox 10250TS10 10250TS11 10250TS12 10250TS14 10250TS1 10250TS2 10250TS3 10250TS4 Not oiltight. NEMA 1 applications only. Table 47-248. Approximate Dimensions Number of Elements Flush Mounting Approximate Dimensions Dimensions in Inches (mm) Wide A High B Deep C Mounting D E 0.25 (6.4) 0.25 (6.4) 0.25 (6.4) 0.25 (6.4) 3.50 (88.9) 3.50 (88.9) 3.50 (88.9) 3.50 (88.9) 3.63 (92.2) 5.50 (139.7) 6.0 (152.4) 9.25 (235) Cast 1 2 3 4 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 4.0 (101.6) 5.88 (149.4) 7.75 (196.9) 9.63 (244.6) 4 Mtg. Holes - 10-32 Screw Size for 1-11 Element Encl, 1/4-20 Screw Size for 12 Element and Larger E B Stainless Steel 47 1 2 3 4 5.0 (127) 5.0 (127) 5.0 (127) 5.0 (127) 5.0 (127) 6.88 (174.8) 8.63 (219.2) 10.50 (266.7) 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 (63.5) (63.5) (63.5) (63.5) 3.25 (82.6) 3.25 (82.6) 3.25 (82.6) 3.25 (82.6) 1.88 (47.8) 3.63 (92.2) 5.50 (139.7) 7.25 (184.2) D C A Surface or Pendant Depth given is for flat cover. Deep cover 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deeper. Depth given includes pull box. Table 47-249. Spacing Increments Type Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) F G H Cast 2.44 (62) 2.5 (63.5) 1.88 (47.8) Polyester 1.88 (47.8) Min. 2.13 (54.1) 2.25 (57.2) Stainless Steel 1.69 (42.9) Min. 1.73 (43.9) 2.25 (57.2) Top - For Vertical Mounting G F Figure 47-115. Spacing Increments for Enclosures 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 Top - For Horizontal Mounting H Figure 47-116. Enclosure Arrangement Diagram Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-155 January 2010 10250T Series, Accessories Accessories Padlocks not included with padlocking attachments. For operators with built-in padlock attachment, see Page 47-120. Table 47-250. Accessories Description Catalog Number Padlock Attachments Description Price U.S. $ Flexible Weather Resistant Boot For use with button operators (extended buttons preferred). Temperature to -25F (-32C) Black 10250TA3 Red 10250TA4 10250TA10 Green (See Page 47-156 for 10250TA96 Tightening Tool.) Padlocking Attachment for Use 10250TA26 with Extended Pushbutton Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4" padlock. Transparent Boot For regular illuminated pushbutton operators and PresTest -- Temperature to -38F (-39C) 10250TA36 Padlock Hasp or Flip-Up Guard 10250TA38 When used with a 1/4" padlock, makes flush and long button and knob selector switch unaccessible, but not locked down. Without the padlock, it is a flip-up guard. Padlock hasp can be removed before assembly. Padlocking Attachment for Use with Flexible Weather Resistant Boot Used on long button operators. Stainless steel. Use only for locking NC contacts open. Boot for Flush Pushbutton Clear Black Red Green 10250TA25 10250TA46 10250TA47 10250TA48 10250TA49 Hardware and Kits 10250TA63 Padlock Attachment 10250TA64 For use with Illuminated Pushbuttons and maintained Push-Pull operators having standard button or lens only. Use 1/4" padlock. Locks in down position only. Padlocking Attachment for Non-illuminated Knob Selector Switches Provision for up to 5, 1/4" padlocks. Thrust Washers -- To meet Ford Motor Co. mounting specifications. 10250TK3 Contact Block Tape Seal -- Seals plunger openings on last contact block. Order in multiples of 10 pieces. 10250TK5 Selector Switch Operator Gasket -- Seals out dust from getting inbetween the cam and contact block plungers. Supplied as standard with all selector switches. 56-9337 Special Retaining Nut -- to accommodate thick panel: Indicating lights PresTest, pushbuttons and selector switches 10250TA11 47 10250TA30 10250TA31 10250TA6 Terminal Block -- Two terminals, each will accommodate two wire terminations. 10250TA62 Shroud for Mushroom Head Operator Prevents accidental operation. (Not for push-pull operators.) 10250TA12 Spacer Ring -- Used when legend plate is not required. 10250TA8 Extended Retaining Nut Replaces standard nut and provides guard for flush head pushbutton operators. 10250TA79 Guard for Illuminated Pushbutton 10250TA15 Stacking Screw -- Replaces transformer mounting screws on indicating light so terminal block 10250TA62 can be mounted to light to support and connect a series resistor. This screw also fits all contact blocks. Order in multiples of 10. Shrouds and Guards Shroud For jumbo mushroom head operator. Gray Yellow Price U.S. $ Boots Padlocking Attachment for Flush 10250TA2 Pushbutton Operators Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4" padlock. Will not lock NO contact. Padlocking Cover Guard Cover locked over flush button makes it unaccessible or on extended button locks NC contacts open. Takes 1/4" shank size padlock. Catalog Number 10250TA56 10250TA56Y Half Shroud - Yellow For jumbo mushroom head operator. 10250ED1241 Fingerproof Shroud -- 10 per Package Fits new style contact blocks and light units. 10250TA101 Should not be used on flush button for STOP function. Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick. Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47-156 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight January 2010 10250T Series, Accessories Table 47-250. Accessories (Continued) Description Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Hardware and Kits (Continued) Base Mounting Spacers -- Equivalent to contact 1 Block block in depth -- Deep Complete with screws, 2 Block washers, etc. Deep Grounding Kits -- Kits consist of a ring connector and a #6 screw for mounting connector to rear of contact block mounting screw. All components except Standard Indicating Lights and PresTest Indicating Lights Standard Indicating Lights PresTest Indicating Lights Contact Block Terminal Jumpers -- Available in multiples of 100 only. Term. to Term. -- within Block (short) 100 per pkg. 1000 per pkg. Term. to Term. -- Block to Block (long) 100 per pkg. 1000 per pkg. 47 Maintained Contact Attachment Release Button Assembly Mechanically interlocks with another pushbutton and contact block (not included). Provides mode indication. Minimum hole centers 1.62 inch (41.1 mm), maximum 2.313 inch (58.8 mm). Black Red Green Yellow Same with Long Button -- Black Maintained Contact Attachment Mechanically interlocks two buttons and provides position indication for one. Use with two pushbutton operators and one or more contact blocks. Roto-Push Lever Operator -- Used to provide lever operation for Roto-Push operators. Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Special Light Modules Master Test (Dual Input) Module -- Internal Form C relay suitable for either AC or DC applications. Total electrical isolation between monitored and test circuit. Fits all illuminated 10250T, E22, E30 and E34 devices. 48V DC 10250TMT8 10250TA22 10250TA23 Flasher Module -- Changes any AC illuminated device to a controlled flashing light. Fits 10250T, E30 and E34 devices. 24V 120V 10250TKG1 10250TKG2 10250TKG3 10250TFL2 10250TFL1 Flashing Incandescent Lamp 10250ED986-4 -- For use with 120V transformer type or 6V full voltage type Indicating Lights including PresTest and most E29 devices. Hole Plugs 10250TA70 10250TA70-2 Plug -- For unused holes -- Steel, painted gray (Stainless steel, use E30KT5, see Page 47-112) 10250TA7 10250TA5 Octagonal 10250T (notched to fit over selector switch lever), E29 and E30 10250TA95 10250TA14 E22, E30, E34 and Octagonal E22CW 10250T (will not fit over selector switch levers) 10250TA71 10250TA71-2 Tools Special Operators and Attachments Wobble Stick Complete with retaining nut -- fits standard button. Lever Operator For use with two vertically mounted flush pushbuttons. Description Tool for Tightening Boots -- Used to install boot Catalog Numbers, 10250TA3, A4, A10 and A25. 10250TA96 10250T, E34 Allen Wrench -- Used for removal of jumbo mushroom head. 10250TA102 Lamp Removal Tools -- 10250TA74 For transformer type illuminated pushbuttons, push-pull and selector switches. Fits #12 lamp. 10250TA17 10250TA18 10250TA19 10250TA20 10250TA39 10250TA1 For full voltage and resistor E30KV1 type illuminated pushbuttons, push-pull and selector switches and E30. Standard indicating lights. E29KLT Fits #44, #755, #6S6 and #10S6. 10250TA13 Component only. Not to be used for custom built (factory assembled) stations. Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick. Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-157 January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Renewal Parts Renewal Parts Table 47-251. Replacement Lamps -- For 10250T Illuminated Operators Mfg. Lamp Type Voltage Base Style 120MB 120V #267 #755 #756 #757 6.3V 6.3V 12V 24V #1828 32V #1835 55V NE48 120V NE51H-R22 120V NE51H-R68 240V Application Part Number T 3-1/4 Bayonet 10250T Resistor Indicating Light 28-3044 T 3-1/4 Bayonet T 3-1/4 Bayonet T 3-1/4 Bayonet T 3-1/4 Bayonet 10250T Flasher 10250T Transformer, PresTest and Full Voltage 10250T Full Voltage 10250T Full Voltage 10250ED986-4 28-2202 28-5184 28-5185 T 3-1/4 Bayonet T 3-1/4 Bayonet T 4-1/2 Bayonet T 3-1/4 Bayonet T 3-1/4 Bayonet 10250T Full Voltage 10250T Resistor 10250T Neon 10250T Neon 10250T Neon 28-5186 28-5187 28-494 28-3754 28-3755 Price U.S. $ Table 47-252. Replacement LED Lamps -- For 10250T, E34 and E22 Units Voltage Color Continuous AC/DC Catalog Number 6V - 12V Flashing Price U.S. $ AC DC Catalog Number Catalog Number Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED612RN E22LED612ON E22LED612YN E22LED612GN E22LED612BN E22LED612WN E22LED006RAF E22LED006OAF E22LED006YAF E22LED006GAF E22LED006BAF E22LED006WAF E22LED006RDF E22LED006ODF E22LED006YDF E22LED006GDF E22LED006BDF E22LED006WDF 24V Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED024RN E22LED024ON E22LED024YN E22LED024GN E22LED024BN E22LED024WN E22LED024RAF E22LED024OAF E22LED024YAF E22LED024GAF E22LED024BAF E22LED024WAF E22LED024RDF E22LED024ODF E22LED024YDF E22LED024GDF E22LED024BDF E22LED024WDF 48V Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED048RN E22LED048ON E22LED048YN E22LED048GN E22LED048BN E22LED048WN E22LED048RAF E22LED048OAF E22LED048YAF E22LED048GAF E22LED048BAF E22LED048WAF E22LED048RDF E22LED048ODF E22LED048YDF E22LED048GDF E22LED048BDF E22LED048WDF 60V Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED060RN E22LED060ON E22LED060YN E22LED060GN E22LED060BN E22LED060WN E22LED060RAF E22LED060OAF E22LED060YAF E22LED060GAF E22LED060BAF E22LED060WAF E22LED060RDF E22LED060ODF E22LED060YDF E22LED060GDF E22LED060BDF E22LED060WDF 120V Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED120RN E22LED120ON E22LED120YN E22LED120GN E22LED120BN E22LED120WN E22LED120RAF E22LED120OAF E22LED120YAF E22LED120GAF E22LED120BAF E22LED120WAF E22LED120RDF E22LED120ODF E22LED120YDF E22LED120GDF E22LED120BDF E22LED120WDF Standard LED Lamp Price U.S. $ Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-158 January 2010 10250T Series, Renewal Parts 2-Position Joystick Operator 4-Position Joystick Operator (w/o Latch) Flush Head Pushbutton Operator Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator Illuminated Pushbutton Operator Mushroom Head Operator with Padlock Attachment Full Voltage, Resistor and Transformer Type Illuminated Selector Switch Jumbo Mushroom Head Operator Transformer Type Indicating Light Knob-Operated Selector Switch Operator Potentiometers Table 47-253. 10250T Style Operator Renewal Parts Item Description No. 47 No. Part Req. Number 1 Gasket 1 16-1548 2 Mounting Nut 1 15-1530 Price U.S. $ Item Description No. No. Part Req. Number Price U.S. $ 15 Round Head Screw (#4-40 x 0.344" Long) (Supplied with Basic Unit) 2 11-4553 16 Mounting Screw 2 11-1632 17 Simple Potentiometer (Does Not Include Items 18, 28 or 29) 1,000 Ohms 2,500 Ohms 5,000 Ohms 10,000 Ohms 25,000 Ohms 50,000 Ohms 1 As Req. Below -- -- -- -- -- -- 41-782-2 41-782-3 41-782-10 41-782-4 41-782-5 41-782-6 3 Handle 1 24-5045 4 Knob Knob (Not Shown) for Joystick Operator with Latch 1 1 53-3157 53-3159 5 Common Gate (Supplied with Operator) 2 16-3400 6 Set Screw (#6-32 x 0.250" Long Hollow Hex) 2 11-2014 7 Mushroom Head Button (Includes (2) Item 6) Black Red Yellow Green Blue 1 As Req. Below -- -- -- -- -- 53-1317 53-1317-2 53-1317-3 53-1317-4 53-1317-22 18 Connector (Includes Screw and Lug) 2 25-1851 19 Indicating Plate Standard Size (Without Legend) Large Size (Specify Legend) 1 -- -- As Req. Above 30-4460 10250TR30 Set Screw 2 (#10-32 x 0.250" Long Hollow Hex) 11-544 20 Retaining Nut 1 15-1547 Jumbo Mushroom Head Button (Aluminum -- Includes (2) Item 8) Red Black Yellow Green 1 As Req. Below 21 1 1 53-1314 11-2014 -- -- -- -- 53-1317-9 53-1317-10 53-1317-11 53-1317-12 Knob Socket Set Screw (#6-32 x 0.250" Long) 29-3749-2 8 9 10 Jumbo Mushroom Head Button 1 (Aluminum -- Red EMERG. STOP) Does Not Include Item (8) 11 Position Gate: 2 Position 3 Position 4 Position 8 Position 53-1349-18 1 1 1 1 54-7278 54-7173 54-12278 54-12279 Mounting Screw (#6-32 x 0.710" Long) Washer 2 10250TA79 2 16-2038 13 Terminal Screw and Lug (Captive) Req. 80-5502 14 Gasket (Supplied with Basic Unit) 1 12 22 Coupling 1 23 Set Screw (#6-32 x 0.188" Long) 1 11-1199 24 Spacer 2 56-1066-18 25 Connector (Includes Screw and Lug) 1 25-1851-2 26 Mounting Nut 1 15-1938 27 4-Position Joystick Operating Mechanism (Complete) 1 24-6565 28 (Not Shown) 4-Position Joystick Operating Mechanism (With Latch) Complete 1 24-6565-2 29 Spring Loaded Latch 1 52-1214-2 30 Hand Operated Latch 1 52-913-3 32-803 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-159 January 2010 10250T Series, Mounting Options Mounting Terminals on Top Panel Thickness Minimum: 0.06 inch (1.6 mm) Maximum: 0.25 inch (8 mm) including legend plate Maximum can be increased to 0.375 inch (15.9 mm) using optional retaining nut Indicating light: 10250TA30 Pushbutton/selector switch: 10250TA31 Table 47-254. Mounting Matrix Legend Plate Dimensions in Inches (mm) A B C D Small 1.63 (41.3) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 1.63 (41.3) Medium 1.75 (44.5) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 1.75 (44.5) Large 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 0.14 (3.6) Dia. B Min. 0.6 (15.2) D Min. A Min. C Min. 1.22 (31) Terminals at Side Horizontal Mounting Vertical Mounting Figure 47-117. Mounting Options in Inches (mm) Horizontal mounting means terminals are located top and bottom of contact block. Vertical mounting means terminals are left and right of contact block. This allows close spacing of adjacent operators with easy access to terminals. Note: Locating nib hole or notch is 0.14 inch (3.6 mm) #29 drill. 0.14 (3.6) Dia. 0.6 (15.2) 1.20 (30.5) Figure 47-118. Drilling Dimensions in Inches (mm) 47 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47-160 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight January 2010 10250T Series, Dimensions Dimensions 0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4) Panel Thickness 1.81 (46) 1.09 (27.7) 1.06 (26.9) 0.38 (9.7) Long Button Only 1.38 (35.1) 1.78 (45.2) Flush and Long Pushbutton Half Shroud Is Same as Long Pushbutton with Lower Half of Guard Ring Cut Back 0.88 0.88 (22.4) (22.4) 2.5 1.5 (63.5) (38.1) 1.13 0.88 (22.4) (28.7) for Each Additional Contact Block 0.25 (6.4) 1.13 (28.7) 1.75 (44.5) 1.91 (48.5) 2.5 (63.5) Illuminated Pushbutton 2.03 (51.6) 1.78 (45.2) 1.75 (44.5) 1.09 (27.7) 2.0 (50.8) 1.5 (38.1) Flush Pushbutton Operator with Padlock Attachment Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator with Padlock Attachment 2.31 (58.7) 1.8 (45.7) 1.78 1.38 (45.2) (35.1) 1.78 (45.2) 1.1 (27.9) 1.38 (35.1) 2.19 (55.6) A Indicating Light - Transformer Type 1.94 (49.3) PresTest Indicating Light - Transformer Type 1.78 (45.2) 1.38 (35.1) 1.1 (27.9) Jumbo Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator with Padlock Attachment B Spade Terminal 1.63 (41.4) 1.38 (35.1) A Screw Terminal 1.38 (35.1) 1.78 (45.2) A Indicating Light - Resistor and Neon Type Lens 2.5 (63.5) Plastic 1.38 (35.1) Glass 1.59 (40.4) 1.78 (45.2) 2.38 (60.5) 1.75 (44.5) 1.56 (39.6) 1.88 (47.8) 1.81 (46) 2.0 (50.8) 1.63 (41.4) 1.78 (45.2) Push-Pull Switch 47 1.38 (35.1) 1.38 (35.1) Pushbutton with Cylinder Lock 1.13 (28.7) 2.63 (66.8) 1.65 (41.9) 1.13 (28.7) 0.69 (17.5) 1.09 (27.7) 1.63 (41.4) Mushroom and Jumbo Head Pushbutton 0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4) Panel Thickness 1.09 (27.7) 1.13 (28.7) 1.88 (47.8) 1.56 (39.6) PresTest Indicating Light - Resistor Type Dimension A Plastic 1.38 (35.1) Glass 1.56 (39.6) Master Test Indicating Light Description Relay Type Solid-State Type Dim. in Inches (mm) B C 4.38 (111.2) 2.94 (74.7) 4.28 (108.7) 2.88 (73.2) Figure 47-119. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-161 January 2010 10250T Series, Dimensions Threaded Bushing A Large Dial Plate 1.88 (47.8) Std. Dial Plate Potentiometer 1.31 (33.3) 1.09 1.0 (27.7) (25.4) Dimensions in Inches (mm) A 0.94 (23.9) B B Shaft C 0.94 (23.9) 2 Watt Single 0.94 (23.9) 25 Watt -- 2.38 1.19 0.81 Up to 25M Ohms (60.5) (30.2) (20.6) 0.75 (19.1) Shaft Dimensions of Potentiometer That C-H Operator Will Accept 1.31 0.94 0.94 (33.3) (23.9) (23.9) 50M Ohms 2.56 (65) 1.69 1.25 (42.9) (31.8) Cat. No. Operator Dimensions in Inches (mm) 10250T330 0.38 (9.7) Dia. x 0.25 (6.4) Dia. x 0.38 (9.7) Long 0.63 (16) Long A Potentiometer B 10250TH3872 0.38 (9.7) Dia. x 0.25 (6.4) Dia. x 0.38 (9.7) Long 0.88 (22.4) Long Coin Slot Knob 1.13 (28.7) 1.13 (28.7) 1.13 (28.7) Operator Dim. A Knob 1.38 (35.1) Lever 1.50 (38.1) 1.38 (35.1) Coin Slot 1.38 (35.1) Lever A 1.75 (44.5) 1.09 (27.7) Key Operated Selector Switch Contact 0.89 Block (22.6) 0.88 (22.4) per Block 0.06 (1.5) to 0.26 (6.6) Panel Thickness 1.25 (31.8) 21 1.19 1.88 (47.8) 0.88 (22.4) (30.2) Per Unit 1.22 (31) Wobble Stick Catalog No. 10250TA5 1.47 (37.3) 1.59 (40.4) 1.33 (33.8) 1.88 (47.8) 1.59 (40.4) 1.88 (47.8) 3.75 (95.3) Flexible Boot for Protecting Flush or Long Pushbutton Catalog No. 10250TA3 Typical 0.94 (23.9) 0.38 (9.7) 1.06 (26.9) 2.06 (52.3) 1.63 (41.4) 0.25 (6.4) Padlock Attachment for Flush Pushbutton Catalog No. 10250TA2 0.84 (21.3) 1.5 (38.1) Padlock Attachment for Extended Pushbutton Catalog No. 10250TA26 For more information visit: www.eaton.com Padlock Attachment for Knob Selector Switch Catalog No. 10250TA11 0.97 (24.6) Adjustable 1.62 (41.1) Min. 1.63 (41.4) Min. 2.5 (63.5) Max. 2.31 (58.7) Max. 0.88 (22.4) for Each 0.89 Additional 1.07 (22.6) Contact (27.2) Block Maintained Pushbutton Catalog No. 10250TA66 Typical Figure 47-120. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1.63 (41.4) 0.44 (11.2) Transparent Flexible Boot for Illuminated Pushbutton Catalog No. 10250TA25 Lever Operator (For Use with Two Vertically Mounted Flush Pushbuttons) Catalog No. 10250TA14 CA08102001E 21 3.75 (95.3) 4-Position Joystick Operator 3.59 (91.2) 0.84 (21.3) 2.44 (62) 1.38 (35.1) Cam 0.75 (19.1) 1.44 (36.6) 1.25 (31.8) 4.0 (101.6) 2-Position Joystick Operator 2.19 (55.6) 1.53 (38.9) Illuminated Selector Switch 2.2 (55.9) mom. 2.5 (63.5) main. 2.13 (54.1) 0.38 (9.7) Long Button Only Roto-Push 1.96 (49.8) 3.88 (98.6) 2.06 (52.3) 1.38 (35.1) 1.38 (35.1) 1.13 (28.7) 0.91 (23.1) Maintained Contact Attachment Catalog No. 10250TA17 Typical 47 47-162 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight January 2010 10250T Series, Dimensions 0.38 (9.7) 0.75 (19.1) 2.19 (55.6) 1.16 (29.5) 0.38 (9.7) 1.0 (25.4) 3.25 (82.6) 2.19 (55.6) 1.91 (48.5) 0.94 (23.9) 0.91 (23.1) 1.47 (37.3) 1.25 (31.8) 1.65 (41.9) Protecting Shroud for Jumbo Mushroom Head Button Catalog No. 10250TA56 Padlock Attachment for Maintained Push-Pull Operator Catalog No. 10250TA64 Padlock Cover Gaurd for Flush Pushbutton Catalog No. 10250TA36 0.44 (11.2) 1.53 (38.9) 1.75 (44.5) 0.84 (21.3) 1.69 (42.9) 1.50 (38.1) 1.31 (33.3) 1.50 (38.1) 1.38 (35.1) 1.75 (44.5) 1.81 (46) 1.25 (31.8) Protecting Shroud for Mushroom Head Button Catalog No. 10250TA6 Protecting Shroud for Illuminated Pushbutton Catalog No. 10250TA15 Terminals on Top 1.31 (33.3) 2.16 (54.9) Vertical Rows Master Test Module, Flasher Module A Dim. in Inches (mm) A Min. 1.63 (41.4) 1.75 (44.5) 2.25 (57.2) 2.50 (63.5) Legend Plate 1.88 (47.8) B Min. 1.88 (47.8) 1.88 (47.8) 2.25 (57.2) 2.50 (63.5) Legend Plate Dim. in Inches (mm) A B 1/2 Round Legend Plates 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.60 (66) 0.75 (19.1) Multiple Button Guard 4 Circuit Contact Block 10250T44 Small or None Standard Jumbo Extra Large 1.14 (29) 6 Mounting Holes 1 or 2 Circuit Contact Blocks Small or None Standard Jumbo Extra Large 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.60 (66) If Jumbo plates are to be placed one above the other vertically, add 0.13 (3.3) to minimum dimensions listed. Number of Elements Dimension A 2 3 4 7 4.0 (101.6) 5.88 (149.4) 7.88 (200.2) 13.38 (339.9) Small Standard Jumbo 1.56 (39.6) 1.59 (40.4) 2.06 (52.3) 0.91 (23.1) 1.07 (27.2) 1.53 (38.9) Square Legend Plates Small Standard Jumbo Extra Large 1.59 (40.4) Sq. 1.75 (44.5) Sq. 2.19 (55.6) Sq. 2.44 (62.0) Sq. 0.90 (22.9) 1.06 (26.9) 1.50 (38.1) 1.63 (41.4) For plastic legend plate, Dimension B is 1.12 (28.4). Note: Locating nib hole or notch is 1.36" - 1.4" (34.5 - 35.6 mm) #29 drill. Enclosure Size (No. of Elements) A B 1.22 (31) Panel Drilling and Minimum Spacing Legend Plate 1.78 (45.2) 1.31 (33.3) A Min. Horizontal Rows Lever for Roto-Push Operator Catalog No. 10250TA13 1.63 (41.4) Terminals at Side 47 Extended Retaining Nut Catalog No. 10250TA12 0.6 (15.2) B Min. A Min. B Min. Padlock Hasp or Flip-Up Guard Catalog No. 10250TA38 0.38 (9.7) Dia. Hole Dimensions in Inches (mm) Wide A High B Deep C Mounting D E 2, 3, & 4 3.75 (95.3) 1.94 (49.3) 0.13 (3.3) 2.69 (68.3) 1.38 (35.1) 6&7 4.0 (101.6) 2.19 (55.6) 0.13 (3.3) 2.88 (73.2) 1.63 (41.4) B E D A C Chain Hook Bracket Figure 47-121. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-163 January 2010 10250T Series, Ordering Example Ordering Complete Devices Complete 10250T Pushbuttons, Indicating Lights and/or Selector Switch operators including contact block(s) and legend plate can be ordered using a single composite catalog number. The individually packaged components will be shipped unassembled in a single overpack carton marked with the composite Catalog Number. Construct Catalog Number as follows. Ordering Example Example: Illuminated Pushbutton Device -- Catalog Number 10250T411C21-153S33 Table 47-255. Catalog Numbering System 10250T411 C21 - 1 53 S33 Insert Hyphen Before Contact Block(s) Operator Lens 10250TC21 Legend Plate 10250TS33 Contact Blocks 10250T1 & 10250T53 For a complete Catalog Number breakdown, see Pages 47-164 - 47-165. 47 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-164 January 2010 10250T Series, Catalog Number Structure Catalog Number Structure Table 47-256. Non-illuminated Pushbuttons Catalog Numbering System 10250T 10 1 - 1 Circuit Operator 10 = 11 = 12 = 17 = 50 = 51 = Flush Extended 40 mm Mushroom 65 mm Mushroom 1/2 Shroud Vertical Mount 1/2 Shroud Horizontal Mount Blank = 1= 2= 3= 51 = 53 = Button Color 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 8= 9= Black Red Green Yellow Gray White Blue Orange Operator Only 1NO-1NC 2NO 2NC 1NC 1NO Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory. Table 47-257. Illuminated and Non-illuminated Push-Pulls Catalog Numbering System 10250T 5 63 C47 - 1 Circuit Operator 5= 4= 9= 10 = Incandescent Light Unit Blank = 89 = 63 = 64 = 65 = 82 = 66 = 67 = 68 = 69 = 70 = 79 = 83 = 80 = 81 = 47 Blank = 1= 2= 3= 51 = 53 = 2-Position Maintained 3-Position Mom Push-Mom Pull 3-Position MT Push-Mom-Pull 3-Position Mom Push-Mom Pull Non-ill. 24V/XFR 120V/XFR 208V/XFR 240V/XFR 277V/XFR 380V/XFR 480V/XFR 600V/XFR 6V/FV 12V/FV 24V/FV 32V/FV 120V/RES 240V/RES LED Light Unit Blank = 89L = 63L = 64L = 65L = 82L = 66L = 67L = 68L = 97L = LED Voltage Non-ill. 24V/XFR 120V/XFR 208V/XFR 240V/XFR 277V/XFR 380V/XFR 480V/XFR 600V/XFR Full Voltage Blank = Blank = 06 = 12 = 24 = 48 = 60 = 2A = 2D = Non-ill. Incand. 6V AC/DC 12V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 48V AC/DC 60V AC/DC 120V AC 120V DC Non-illuminated Button B60 = B62 = B63 = B61 = B64 = J60 = J62 = J63 = J61 = J64 = Operator Only 1NO-1NC 2NO 2NC 1NC 1NO Black 40 mm Red 40 mm Red 40 mm - "E" STOP Green 40 mm Blue 40 mm Black 65 mm Red 65 mm Red 65 mm - "E" STOP Green 65 mm Yellow 65 mm Illuminated Incandescent LED Lens Type C47 = RD = Red 40 mm C53 = ED = Red 40 mm - "E" STOP C48 = GD = Green 40 mm C49 = LD = Blue 40 mm C50 = AD = Amber 40 mm C51 = WD = White 40 mm C52 = - = Clear 40 mm C57 = RS = Red Side Light C63 = ES = Red Side Lt. - "E" STOP C58 = GS = Green Side Light C59 = LS = Blue Side Light C64 = AS = Amber Side Light C60 = YS = Yellow Side Light C61 = WS = White Side Light C62 = - = Clear Side Light C65 = RH = Red Heavy-Duty C66 = GH = Green Heavy-Duty C67 = AH = Amber Heavy-Duty Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory. For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight 47-165 January 2010 10250T Series, Catalog Number Structure Table 47-258. Illuminated Pushbuttons Catalog Numbering System 10250T Incandescent Light Unit 416 = 412 = 412 = 419 = 413 = 414 = 415 = 473 = 474 = 476 = 477 = 478 = 471 = 472 = 24V/XFR 120V/XFR 240V/XFR 277V/XFR 380V/XFR 480V/XFR 600V/XFR 6V/FV 12V/FV 24V/FV 32V/FV 48V/FV 120V/RES 240V/RES - 1 LED Light Unit 416L = 411L = 412L = 419L = 413L = 414L = 415L = 397L = Circuit Blank = 1= 2= 3= 51 = 53 = 24V/XFR 120V/XFR 240V/XFR 277V/XFR 380V/XFR 480V/XFR 600V/XFR Full Voltage Operator Only 1NO-1NC 2NO 2NC 1NC 1NO LED Voltage Incandescent Lens Color C21 = C22 = C23 = C26 = C24 = C43 = C25 = 416 C21 Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber Clear Blank = 06 = 12 = 24 = 48 = 60 = 2A = 2D = LED Lens Color RD = GD = YD = WD = LD = AD = Incand. 6V AC/DC 12V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 48V AC/DC 60V AC/DC 120V AC 120V DC Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory. Table 47-259. Standard Indicating Lights, PresTest and Master Test Catalog Numbering System 10250T 203N C1N Light Unit Type Standard - Incandescent 181N = 182N = 198N = 183N = 184N = 185N = 203N = 204N = 206N = 207N = 208N = 201N = 202N = 226N = 227N = 120V/XFR 240V/XFR 277V/XFR 380V/XFR 480V/XFR 600V/XFR 6V/FV 12V/FV 24V/FV 32V/FV 48V/FV 120V/RES 240V/RES 120V/Neon 240V/Neon LED Voltage Standard - LED 181L = 182L = 198L = 183L = 184L = 185L = 197L = 120V/XFR 240V/XFR 277V/XFR 380V/XFR 480V/XFR 600V/XFR Full Voltage 120V/XFR 240V/XFR 380V/XFR 480V/XFR 600V/XFR Full Voltage 120V/XFR 240V/XFR 380V/XFR 480V/XFR 600V/XFR 6V/FV 12V/FV 24V/FV 32V/FV 48V/FV 120V/RES 240V/RES Plastic Glass Lens Color Plastic Glass Lens Color Standard/Master/PresTest - LED C1N = C7N = Red C2N = C8N = Green C3N = - = Yellow C6N = C12N = White C4N = C10N = Blue C19N = C9N = Amber C5N = C11N = Clear RP = GP = YP = WP = LP = AP = PresTest - Incandescent C21 = C22 = C23 = C26 = C24 = C43 = C25 = C13N = C14N = -= C18N = C16N = C15N = C17N = Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber Clear Master Test - Incandescent Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory. CA08102001E 47 Standard/Master - Incandescent 187N = 120V/XFR 189N = 240V AC - SS Incand. 6V AC/DC 12V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 48V AC/DC 60V AC/DC 120V AC 120V DC PresTest - LED 221L = 222L = 223L = 224L = 225L = 297L = PresTest - Incandescent 221N = 222N = 223N = 224N = 225N = 232N = 233N = 235N = 238N = 239N = 231N = 240N = Blank = 06 = 12 = 24 = 48 = 60 = 2A = 2D = For more information visit: www.eaton.com RG = GG = -= WG = LG = AG = Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber 47-166 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight January 2010 E34 Series Product Description Contents 47 Description Page Product Description . . . . . . . . . Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Momentary Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicating Light Units . . . . . Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights . . . . Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Potentiometers . . . . . . . . . . Push-Pulls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switch Units . . . . . Selector Switch Selection. . . Selector Switch Operators . . Illuminated Selector Switch Operators . . . . . . . Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Options Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering Complete Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-166 47-166 47-167 47-167 47-168 47-168 47-169 47-170 47-171 47-172 47-174 47-175 47-177 47-178 47-180 47-181 47-182 Liquid Drainage Operator Eaton's Cutler-Hammer(R) E34 Series 30.5 mm pushbutton line features the same rugged die cast construction of our 10250T line with an additional twolayer 100% solid thermosetting cathodic epoxy coating. This coating provides a flat black smooth, consistent, corrosion resistant surface that has passed a demanding 600 hour salt spray test. (The industry standard for this 4X test requires only 200 hours.) Eaton's Cutler-Hammer pushbutton operators offer front of panel drainage via holes in the operator bushing. Hidden from view by the mounting nut, these holes prevent buildup of liquid inside the operator, which can prevent operation in freezing environments. The holes also provide a route for escaping liquid in high pressure washdowns, effectively relieving pressure from the internal diaphragm seal, ensuring reliable sealing in applications even beyond NEMA 4. Ultraviolet Light Foam Neoprene Panel Sealing Gasket Drainage Hole E34 cathodic coating is not recommended for use in applications where exposure to ultraviolet light exists -- use NEMA 4X 10250T operators. Flexible Diaphragm Reliability Nibs Eaton's Cutler-Hammer contact blocks feature enclosed silver contacts with pointed "reliability nibs" for reliable performance from logic level up to 600V. To ensure reliable switching, nibs bite through oxide which can form on silver contacts, eliminating the need for expensive logic level blocks for most applications. Stainless Steel Operating Spring Colorfast Molded Button Drainage Hole Mounting Nut Figure 47-123. Diaphragm Seal Features 47-184 47-185 47-187 47-189 47-190 47-191 Epoxy-coated metal operators Corrosion resistant Integral ground screw terminal on operators FDA approved for sanitary chemical resistance requirements Dry Circuit Medium Duty 47-192 Heavy-Duty 47-193 Figure 47-122. Reliability Nibs Octagonal Mounting Nut Self-Adjusts to Panel Thickness -- Eliminates Spacer Washers and Set Screws Die Cast Construction with Thick, Tough Corrosion Resistant Coating Internal Sealing Diaphragm for Excellent Sealing 3 Styles of Legend Plates in 4 Sizes Terminal Clamps Shipped Open Ready to Wire Wide Variety of Operator Types and Colors Stackable Contact Blocks up to 12 Circuits per Operator E34 Series For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-167 January 2010 E34 Series, Technical Data and Specifications Standards and Certifications CE EN60947-5-1 UL 508 -- File No. E131568 CSA C22.2 No. 14 -- File No. LR68551 FDA 3-A Sanitary Standards Ingress Protection When mounted in similarly rated enclosure -- Standard Indicating Lights UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13 IEC IP65 All Other Operators UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 IEC IP65 Technical Data and Specifications Electrical Ratings Table 47-260. Contact Block Meet or Exceed NEMA Rating Designations A600, A300 and B300 for AC and P600 for DC Description Volts AC 50 or 60 Hz 120 Make and Emergency Interrupting Capacity (Amp) Normal Load Break (Amp) Thermal Current (Amp) Voltamperes: Make and Emergency Interrupting Capacity Normal Load Break 240 Frequency of operation All pushbuttons: 6000 operations/hr. Key and lever selector switches: 3000 operations/hr. Auto-latch devices: 1200 operations/hr. Life Pushbuttons: 10 x 10 6 operations Contact blocks: 10 x 10 6 operations PresTest units: 10 x 10 6 operations Lever and key selector switches: 0.25 x 10 6 operations Twist to release pushbuttons: 0.3 x 10 6 operations 5.7 1.1 0.55 6 10 3 10 1.5 10 1.2 10 5.7 5.0 1.1 5.0 0.55 5.0 7200 7200 7200 7200 138 138 138 720 720 720 720 138 138 138 Insulation: Ui = 660V AC or DC Thermal: lth = 10A Fuse Operating Temperature: 1 to 150F (-17 to 66C) Storage Temperature: -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C) Altitude: 6,562 ft. (2,000m) Humidity: Max. 95% RH @ 60C CA08102001E UL rating: A600, P600 AC load life duty cycle 1200 operations/hour - 10A: 110V pf 0.4 - 1 x 10 6 operations - 5A: 250V pf 0.4 - 1 x 10 6 operations - 2A: 660V pf 0.4 - 1 x 10 6 operations Switching capacity AC15 rated make/break (11 x le at 1.1 x Ue) - 6A: 120V pf 0.3 - 4A: 240V pf 0.3 - 2A: 660V pf 0.3 Climate Conditions 250 12 Rated conditional short circuit current: 1 kA Fuse type: GE Power Controls TIA 10, Red Spot Type gG, 10A, 660V AC, 460V DC, BS88-2, IEC 60269-2-1 Shock resistance Duration: 210 mS 5g 125 15 24/28 30 Short Circuit Coordination to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Volts DC 600 60 Mechanical Ratings 480 DC13 rated make/break (1.1 x le at 1.1 x Ue) - 1.0A: 125V L/R 0.95 at 300 mS - 0.55A: 250V L/R 0.95 at 300 mS - 0.1A: 660V L/R 0.95 at 300 mS - 10A: 110V pure resistive Maximum ratings for logic level and hostile atmosphere application Maximum amperes: 0.5A Maximum volts: 120V AC/DC For more information visit: www.eaton.com Low voltage switching: Conical shaped points or "reliability nibs" improve performance in dry circuit, corrosive, fine dust and other contaminated atmospheres. Under normal environmental conditions, the minimum operational voltage is 5V and the minimum operational current is 1 mA, AC/DC. Contact operation: Slow make and break. All normally closed contacts have positive opening operation, i.e., normally closed contacts are forced open in the event of contact weld or spring breakage. Light Units Transformers: will withstand short circuit for 1 hour per IEC 60947-5-1 Bulbs -- average life: Transformer type: 20,000 hrs. Resistor/direct voltage type: 2500 hrs. minimum @ rated V LED: 60,000 to 100,000 hrs. Terminals Marking: NC-NO on the contact block to meet the NEMA requirements. Dual marking system 1 - 2 for normally closed, 3 - 4 for normally open to meet BS5472 (Cenelec EN50 005). Clamps: Terminals are saddle clamp type for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) to 2 x 14 AWG (2.5 mm2) conductors. Torque = 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm) Degree of protection against direct electrical contact: IP2X with fingerproof shroud 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-168 January 2010 E34 Series, Assembled Devices -- Momentary Pushbutton and Indicating Light Units Product Selection Momentary Pushbutton Units Non-illuminated Table 47-261. Pushbutton Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Contact Type Button Color Flush Button Catalog Number Extended Button Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Mushroom Button Jumbo Mushroom Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Price U.S. $ 1NO Black Red Green Red -- Engraved EMERG. STOP E34PB1-53X E34PB2-53X E34PB3-53X -- E34EB1-53X E34EB2-53X E34EB3-53X -- E34LB1-53X E34LB2-53X E34LB3-53X -- E34JB1-53X E34JB2-53X E34JB3-53X E34JB2N8-53X 1NC Black Red Green Red -- Engraved EMERG. STOP E34PB1-51X E34PB2-51X E34PB3-51X -- E34EB1-51X E34EB2-51X E34EB3-51X -- E34LB1-51X E34LB2-51X E34LB3-51X -- E34JB1-51X E34JB2-51X E34JB3-51X E34JB2N8-51X 1NO-1NC Black Red Green Red -- Engraved EMERG. STOP E34PB1-1X E34PB2-1X E34PB3-1X -- E34EB1-1X E34EB2-1X E34EB3-1X -- E34LB1-1X E34LB2-1X E34LB3-1X -- E34JB1-1X E34JB2-1X E34JB3-1X E34JB2N8-1X Anodized aluminum head -- may not be suitable for some corrosive environments. Indicating Light Units 47 Plastic Lenses 24V Full Voltage Indicating Light -- Red Catalog Number E34FB24H2X Table 47-262. Indicating Light Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Lamp Type Voltage Color Indicating Light Catalog Number LED Incandescent Full Voltage Price U.S. $ LED/Lamp Number 24V AC/DC Red Green Amber E34FB197LRP24 E34FB197LGP24 E34FB197LAP24 Bayonet Base 120V AC Red Green Amber E34FB197LRP2A E34FB197LGP2A E34FB197LAP2A Full Voltage 24V AC/DC Red Green Amber E34FB24H2X E34FB24H3X E34FB24H9X #757 Resistor 120V AC/DC Red Green Amber E34RB120H2X E34RB120H3X E34RB120H9X 120MB Transformer 120V AC 50/60 Hz Red Green Amber E34TB120H2X E34TB120H3X E34TB120H9X #755 Anodized aluminum head -- may not be suitable for some corrosive environments. Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 - 47-165. Additional Light Units . . . . . Page 47-170 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-185 - 47-186 Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184 Replacement Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-157 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-169 January 2010 E34 Series, Momentary Pushbutton Components Pushbuttons Table 47-263. Momentary Pushbutton Operators, Non-illuminated -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Color Catalog Number Black Red Green Yellow White Blue Gray Orange E34PB1 E34PB2 E34PB3 E34PB4 E34PB5 E34PB6 E34PB7 E34PB8 Black Red Green Yellow White Blue Gray Orange E34EB1 E34EB2 E34EB3 E34EB4 E34EB5 E34EB6 E34EB7 E34EB8 Price U.S. $ Contact Blocks See Page 47-182 for additional contact blocks, fingerproof shrouds and Transparent Amber colored blocks. Flush Button Extended Button Contact Block Table 47-264. Contact Blocks Symbol Blank No Plunger Half Shrouded Button Black Red Green Yellow White Blue Gray Orange Vertical Horizontal E34EVB1 E34EVB2 E34EVB3 E34EVB4 E34EVB5 E34EVB6 E34EVB7 E34EVB8 E34EHB1 E34EHB2 E34EHB3 E34EHB4 E34EHB5 E34EHB6 E34EHB7 E34EHB8 Blank No Plunger Circuit Catalog Number NC 10250T51 NO 10250T53 NO-NC 10250T1 2NC 10250T3 2NO 10250T2 Price U.S. $ Mushroom Button Black Red Green Yellow Blue E34LB1 E34LB2 E34LB3 E34LB4 E34LB6 47 Anodized Aluminum Jumbo Mushroom Button Black Red Red (Engraved EMER. STOP) Green Yellow E34JB1 E34JB2 E34JB2N8 E34JB3 E34JB4 Anodized aluminum head -- may not be suitable for some corrosive environments. Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 - 47-165. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-187 - 47-188 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-185 - 47-186 Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-170 January 2010 E34 Series, Illuminated Components Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Table 47-265. Operators without Lens Light Unit Type Type Voltage Illuminated Pushbutton Catalog Number LED (LEDs not included) Incandescent 47 Indicating Light Price U.S. $ Catalog Number PresTest Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Lamp Number Price U.S. $ Full Voltage -- E34CB497L E34FB197L E34FPB297L Transformer AC Only 24 120 240 277 380 480 600 E34XB024L E34XB120L E34XB240L E34XB277L E34XB380L E34XB480L E34XB600L -- E34TB120L E34TB240L E34TB277L E34TB380L E34TB480L E34TB600L -- E34TPB120L E34TPB240L -- E34TPB380L E34TPB480L E34TPB600L Bayonet Base Full Voltage AC/DC 6 12 24 32 48 E34CB06 E34CB12 E34CB24 E34CB32 E34CB48 E34FB06 E34FB12 E34FB24 E34FB32 E34FB48 E34FPB06 E34FPB12 E34FPB24 E34FPB32 E34FPB48 #755 #756 #757 #1828 #1835 Resistor AC/DC 120 240 E34SB120 E34SB240 E34RB120 E34RB240 E34RPB120 E34RPB240 120MB 120MB Transformer AC Only 24 120 240 277 380 480 600 E34XB024 E34XB120 E34XB240 E34XB277 E34XB380 E34XB480 E34XB600 -- E34TB120 E34TB240 E34TB277 E34TB380 E34TB480 E34TB600 -- E34TPB120 E34TPB240 -- E34TPB380 E34TPB480 E34TPB600 #755 Neon AC/DC 120 240 -- -- E34NB120 E34NB240 -- -- NE51H-R-22 NE51H-4-68 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color, see Page 47-157 for LED Selection and Pages 47-193 - 47-194 for Catalog Numbering Structure. Resistor units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style. Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 - 47-165. Table 47-266. Indicating Light Lens Color Table 47-268. PresTest Lens Glass Plastic Catalog Number Plastic Glass Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber Clear Price U.S. $ E34H2 E34H3 E34H4 E34H5 E34H6 E34H9 E34H0 Catalog Number Color Price U.S. $ E34G2 E34G3 E34G4 E34G5 E34G6 E34G9 E34G0 Plastic Glass Glass lens has black anodized aluminum bezel. Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber Clear Glass Plastic Catalog Number Price U.S. $ E34V2 E34V3 E34V4 E34V5 E34V6 E34V9 E34V0 Catalog Number Price U.S. $ E34P2 E34P3 E34P4 E34P5 E34P6 E34P9 E34P0 Glass lens has black anodized aluminum bezel. Table 47-267. Illuminated Pushbutton Lens Color Catalog Number Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber Clear E34V2 E34V3 E34V4 E34V5 E34V6 E34V9 E34V0 Price U.S. $ Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191 Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-185 - 47-186 Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184 Replacement Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-157 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-171 January 2010 E34 Series, Assembled Devices -- Push-Pull Units Push-Pull Units Two- and Three-Position Non-illuminated Table 47-269. 2-Position Push-Pull Units Non-illuminated -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position Pull Button Type/Color Push Push-Pull Catalog Number Contact Type Price U.S. $ Mounting Location A B Maintained Push, Maintained Pull O X X O 40 mm/Red E34GDBC2-1X 40 mm Engraved EMERGENCY STOP/Red E34GDBC2N8-1X 65 mm Alum. Engraved EMERGENCY STOP/Red E34GDBJ2N8-1X 1NO 1NC X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. To order different type or color buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the table below. Example: E34GDBC6-1X. Table 47-270. 3-Position Push-Pull Units Non-illuminated -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position Pull Button Type/Color Intermediate Push Push-Pull Catalog Number Contact Type Price U.S. $ Mounting Location A B Maintained Push, Momentary Pull X X O X O O 40 mm/ Black E34GFBC1-3X 40 mm/Red E34GFBC2-3X 40 mm Engraved EMERGENCY STOP/Red E34GFBC2N8-3X 40 mm/Black E34GEBC1-3X 1NC 1NC Momentary Push, Momentary Pull X X O X O X O O O O X O 1NC 40 mm/Red E34GEBC2-3X 1NC 40 mm/Black E34GHBC1-1X 1NO 40 mm/Red E34GHBC2-1X 1NC 47 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. To order different type or color buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the Button and Color Selection Table below. Example: E34GDBC6-1X. Table 47-271. Button and Color Selection Table Standard -- 40 mm Color Suffix Catalog Code Number Black Red Red (EMERG. STOP) Green Blue C1 C2 C2N8 C3 C6 Price U.S. $ Jumbo Mushroom Head (Anodized) Aluminum -- 65 mm E34C1 E34C2 E34C2N8 E34C3 E34C6 Color Suffix Catalog Code Number Red J2 Red (EMER. STOP) J2N8 Price U.S. $ E34J2 E34J2N8 Anodized aluminum may not be suitable for use on some corrosive applications. Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 - 47-165. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-187 - 47-188 Page 47-191 Pages 47-185 - 47-186 Page 47-184 1CD1C Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-172 January 2010 E34 Series, Assembled Devices -- Illuminated Push-Pull Units Illuminated Push-Pull Units Two-Position Maintained Illuminated Illuminated Push-Pull Unit Table 47-272. 2-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position Lamp Type Voltage Maintained -- Pull Maintained -- Push Catalog Number LED O X O X Full Voltage Price U.S. $ Contact Mounting Location Type A B 24V AC/DC E34GDB97LRD24-1X 120V AC/DC E34GDB97LRD2A-1X X O X O Red Standard Push-Pull Transformer IncanFull Voltage descent Resistor 24V AC E34GDB89LRD06-1X 120V AC E34GDB63LRD06-1X 1NO Transformer 24V AC E34GDB89M2-1X 120V AC E34GDB63M2-1X Bayonet Base 1NC 24V AC/DC E34GDB79M2-1X 120V AC/DC E34GDB80M2-1X LED/Lamp Number #757 1NO 120MB 1NC #755 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from Lens and Color Selection Table below. Example: E34GDB79 M3-1X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page 47-176. Table 47-273. Lens and Color Selection Table 47 Type Color Incand. Suffix Code LED Suffix Code Catalog Number Standard Red Red (EMER. STOP) Green Blue Amber White Clear M2 M2N8 M3 M6 M9 M5 M0 RD ED GD LD AD WD CD E34M2 E34M2N8 E34M3 E34M6 E34M9 E34M5 E34M0 Price U.S. $ Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 - 47-165. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-187 - 47-188 Additional Light Units . . . . Page 47-176 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-185 - 47-186 Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184 Replacement Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-157 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-173 January 2010 E34 Series, Assembled Devices -- Illuminated Push-Pull Units Illuminated Push-Pull Units (Continued) Three-Position Momentary Illuminated Illuminated Push-Pull Unit Table 47-274. 3-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position Momentary -- Pull Lamp Voltage Maintained -- Momentary -- Intermediate Push O O X O Full 24V AC/DC Voltage Transformer O X O O Transformer E34GHB97LRD2A-1X 24V AC E34GHB89LRD06-1X 120V AC E34GHB63LRD06-1X O X X X O O O X X O O O Price U.S. $ Mounting Location A E34GEB97LRD2A-3X 24V AC E34GEB89LRD06-3X 120V AC E34GEB63LRD06-3X E34GHB80M2-1X Transformer 24V AC E34GHB89M2-1X 120V AC E34GHB63M2-1X Full 24V AC/DC Voltage E34GEB79M2-3X Resistor 120V AC E34GEB80M2-3X Transformer 24V AC E34GEB89M2-3X 120V AC E34GEB63M2-3X B 1NO 1NC Bayonet Base 1NC 1NC #757 E34GHB79M2-1X Resistor 120V AC LED/Lamp Number Bayonet Base E34GEB97LRD24-3X 120V AC Incan- Full 24V AC/DC descent Voltage Contact Type E34GHB97LRD24-1X 120V AC Full 24V AC/DC Voltage X X Red Standard Push-Pull Catalog Number LED O X Type 1NO 1NC 120MB #755 47 #757 1NC 1NC 120MB #755 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from Lens and Color Selection Table on the bottom of Page 47-172. Example: E34GEB79M3-3X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page 47-176. Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 - 47-165. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Light Units . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-187 - 47-188 Page 47-176 Page 47-191 Pages 47-185 - 47-186 Page 47-184 Page 47-157 1CD1C Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-174 January 2010 E34 Series, Assembled Devices -- Illuminated Push-Pull Units and Potentiometers Illuminated Push-Pull Units (Continued) Three-Position -- Maintained Push, Momentary Pull Illuminated Illuminated Push-Pull Unit Table 47-275. 3-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position Momentary -- Pull Lamp Type Voltage Maintained -- Maintained -- Intermediate Push Catalog Number LED X X O X O O Red Standard Push-Pull Contact Type Price U.S. $ 1NC Transformer 1NC E34GFB89LRD06-3X 120V AC E34GFB63LRD06-3X Incan- Full 24V AC/DC E34GFB79M2-3X descent Voltage X X O X O O A Full 24V AC/DC E34GFB97LRD24-3X Voltage 120V AC E34GFB97LRD2A-3X 24V AC Resistor 120V AC E34GFB80M2-3X Transformer 24V AC E34GFB89M2-3X 120V AC E34GFB63M2-3X Mounting Location LED/Lamp Number B Bayonet Base #757 1NC 120MB 1NC #755 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from table on the bottom of Page 47-172. Example: E34GFB79M3-3X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page 47-176. Potentiometers Table 47-276. Potentiometer with Knob and Standard Dial Plate -- Linear Type 10% -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Vertical or Horizontal One-Hole Mounting Potentiometer Ohms 2 Watt (60V Max.) Single Potentiometer with Standard Aluminum Dial Plate Catalog Number 47 1000 2500 5000 10000 25000 50000 Operator Price U.S. $ E34PDB1F1 E34PDB1F2 E34PDB1F5 E34PDB1F10 E34PDB1F25 E34PDB1F50 Only Dimensions in Inches (mm) Large Dial Plate 1.88 (47.8) Std. Dial Plate E34PDB1A0 Alternative - Black Plastic Large Legend with Standard Markings 1.09 1.0 (27.7) (25.4) 1.31 (33.3) 0.94 (23.9) 0.94 (23.9) E34LP99 0.94 (23.9) 0.75 (19.1) With Standard Aluminum Dial Plate Potentiometer Large dial plate with space for legend is available at no charge. To order, add Suffix 36 to Catalog Number. Example: E34PDB1F136. To order separately, see footnote below. Large dial plate has space at top for 15 letters. 3/32 inch high. For custom stamped legend plates, order legend plate as separate item 10250TR30 and specify stamping. For use with commercially purchased potentiometers having shaft dimensions per dimension drawing on Page 47-161. Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 - 47-165. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Light Units . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-187 - 47-188 Page 47-176 Page 47-191 Pages 47-185 - 47-186 Page 47-184 Page 47-157 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-175 January 2010 E34 Series, Push-Pull Components 2-Position Maintained Push-Pull without Button on Lens Catalog Number E34GDB Push-Pull Operators An illuminated Push-Pull pushbutton unit, arranged for one-hole mounting, can replace two pushbuttons and a pilot light or the non-illuminated form can replace two pushbuttons. These units are available in three basic types: Maintained -- (Two-Position). Maintains in the pulled or pushed position until manually actuated to the opposite mode. Application Guide Momentary -- (Three-Position). Spring returns to an intermediate position when pulled or pushed and released. Momentary Pull, Maintained Push -- (Three-Position). Spring returns to intermediate position when pulled. Maintains in pushed position until manually returned to intermediate (ready to reset) position. Maintained stop holds circuit open and will prevent other series connected operators from starting the system. To assist in the selection of contact blocks, the sketch to the right shows pictorially by symbols A and B locations of contact circuits after assembly of contact blocks and adapter to the operator. The chart below shows the effect of the push and pull operations on either NO or NC contacts. (X = contact closed, O = contact open) Locating Nib The Operators, Buttons, Contact Blocks, etc., are offered as building block components that can be intermixed to satisfy many requirements. This minimizes the need for a varied and costly inventory. A B Figure 47-124. Contact Circuit Locations Table 47-277. Push-Pull Operator Components Type of Operator Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Contact Block -- Max. of 2 Blocks, 4 Circuits Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement Out -- Pull Intermediate In -- Push Contact Block Mounting Location A B A B A No Intermediate Position X O B 2-Position Operator without Lens Maintained Push-Pull E34GDB 1NO 1NC O X 2NO 2NC O X 1NO 1NC O X 2NO 2NC O X 1NO 1NC O X 2NO 2NC O X or O X O X or X O X O X O 3-Position Operator without Lens Momentary Push-Pull E34GEB Maintained Push-Momentary Pull E34GFB Momentary Push-Pull E34GHB or or O X O O O X O O O X O O O X O O or or O X X O O X X O O O X O O O X O or O O O O or X O X O Special function contact blocks shown on Page 47-182 CANNOT be used with 3-position push-pull operators E34GEB, E34GFB or E34GHB. Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 - 47-165. Note: See Typical Applications on Page 47-129. Button or Lens . . . . . . . . . . . Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-176 Page 47-182 Page 47-191 Pages 47-185 - 47-186 Page 47-184 1CD1C 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-176 January 2010 E34 Series, Push-Pull Components Push-Pull Operators (Continued) Table 47-281. LED Selection Table Push-Pull Light Units, Lenses and Buttons Table 47-278. Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices Light Unit Type Type LED (LEDs not included) Incandescent Voltage Catalog Number Full Voltage -- 10250T97L Transformer AC Only 50/60 Hz 24 120 208 240 277 380 480 600 10250T89L 10250T63L 10250T64L 10250T65L 10250T82L 10250T66L 10250T67L 10250T68L Full Voltage AC or DC 6 12 24/28 32 Price U.S. $ LED/Lamp Number Bayonet Base 10250T69 10250T70 10250T79 10250T83 #755 #756 #757 #1828 Resistor AC or DC 120 240 10250T80 10250T81 120MB Transformer AC Only 50/60 Hz 24 120 208 240 277 380 480 600 10250T89 10250T63 10250T64 10250T65 10250T82 10250T66 10250T67 10250T68 #755 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color from chart at right. Voltage Color Catalog Number 6V AC/DC Suitable for Use with Transformers Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED006RN E22LED006ON E22LED006YN E22LED006GN E22LED006BN E22LED006WN 12V AC/DC Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED012RN E22LED012ON E22LED012YN E22LED012GN E22LED012BN E22LED012WN 24V AC/DC Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED024RN E22LED024ON E22LED024YN E22LED024GN E22LED024BN E22LED024WN 48V AC/DC Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED048RN E22LED048ON E22LED048YN E22LED048GN E22LED048BN E22LED048WN 60V AC/DC Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED060RN E22LED060ON E22LED060YN E22LED060GN E22LED060BN E22LED060WN 120V AC Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED120RA E22LED120OA E22LED120YA E22LED120GA E22LED120BA E22LED120WA 120V DC Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED120RD E22LED120OD E22LED120YD E22LED120GD E22LED120BD E22LED120WD Table 47-279. Buttons for Non-illuminated Push-Pull Devices 47 Color Incand. Suffix Code Catalog Number Black Red Red (EMERG. STOP) Green Blue C1 C2 C2N8 C3 C6 E34C1 E34C2 E34C2N8 E34C3 E34C6 Jumbo -- Red Jumbo -- Red (EMERGENCY STOP) J2 J2N8 E34J2 E34J2N8 Price U.S. $ Price U.S. $ Note: For a complete listing of all LEDs available, see Page 47-165. Ordering example with one composite number: Non-illuminated E34GDB + E34C2 + 10250T1 = E34GDBC2-1X Anodized aluminum may not be suitable for use on some corrosive applications. Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 - 47-165. Incandescent E34GDB + 10250T79 + E34M2 + 10250T1 = E34GDB79M2-1X LED E34GDB + 10250T97L + E34M2 +Voltage Code + 10250T1 = E34GDB97LRD24-1X Table 47-280. Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices Color Incand. Suffix Code LED Catalog Suffix Number Code Red Red (EMERG. STOP) Green Blue Amber M2 M2N8 M3 M6 M9 RD ED GD LD AD E34M2 E34M2N8 E34M3 E34M6 E34M9 White Clear M5 M0 WD -- E34M5 E34M0 Price U.S. $ Suffix Codes should only be used for assembling composite Catalog Numbers. To order lens, order by Catalog Number. For more information visit: www.eaton.com 06 -- 6V AC/DC 12 -- 12V AC/DC 24 -- 24V AC/DC 48 -- 48V AC/DC 60 -- 60V AC/DC 2A -- 120V AC 2D -- 120V DC Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . Page 47-182 Page 47-191 Pages 47-185 - 47-186 Page 47-184 Page 47-157 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-177 January 2010 E34 Series, Assembled Devices -- Selector Switch Units Selector Switch Units Two-, Three- and Four-Position -- Maintained Non-illuminated and Illuminated 4-Position Maintained Switch Lever 2-Position Maintained Switch Knob Table 47-282. 2-Position Selector Switch -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position X O Operator Action Non-illuminated Price U.S. $ Illuminated -- 120V Transformer Black Knob Black Lever Red Knob Red Lever Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number E34VFB120ER-1X E34VFB120FR-1X Catalog Number E34VFBK1-1X E34VFBL1-1X O X M Price Contact Mounting U.S. $ Type Location A Cam Code B 1NC 1 M 1NO X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. M = Maintained. To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Color Selection table. Example: E34VFBK2-X1. Table 47-283. 3-Position Selector Switch -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Non-illuminated Action Operator Position X O O O O X X O O X O O O X Illuminated -- 120V Transformer Price U.S. $ Black Knob Black Lever Red Knob Red Lever Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number E34VHBK1-2X E34VHBL1-2X E34VHB120TER-2X E34VHB120TFR-2X Contact Type Mounting Location A Cam Code B 1NO 3 1NO E34VHBK1-23X E34VHBL1-23X M M O Price U.S. $ E34VHB120TER-23X E34VHB120TFR-23X 1NO 3 M 2NC (Series) 1NO X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. M = Maintained. To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Color Selection table. Example: E34VFBK2-X1. 47 Table 47-284. 4-Position Selector Switch -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position Operator Non-illuminated Action Black Lever Black Knob X O O O O X O O O O X O O O O X Price U.S. $ Illuminated -- 120V Transformer Red Knob Red Lever Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number E34VTBK1-23X E34VTBL1-23X E34VRB120TER-23X E34VRB120TFR-23X M M M M Price U.S. $ Contact Mounting Type Location A Cam Code B 1NC 1NO 1NO 1NC 7 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. M = Maintained. To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Color Selection table. Example: E34VFBK2-X1. Table 47-285. Color Selection, Non-illuminated Color Code Letter Black Red Green Yellow White Blue Gray Orange 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CA08102001E Note: For Light Unit Voltage Suffix and Knobs, Levers tables, see Page 47-181. Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 - 47-165. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-187 - 47-188 Additional Circuit Arrangements . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-178 - 47-179 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-185 - 47-186 Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-178 January 2010 E34 Series, Selector Switch Selection Table 47-286. Example Selection Table Systematic Approach Application: HAND-OFF-AUTO Selector Switch. In this circuit, one incoming line is distributed to two other outgoing circuits by the switch. The two circuits can be looked at individually. E34 Series Selector Switch Selection Cam and Contact Block Selection Selector switches in their varied forms (2-position, 3-position and 4-position) are a big factor contributing to the great flexibility of control that a well rounded line of "pushbuttons" can achieve. Because of their flexibility, they tend to cause difficulty with product selection and application. The following systematic approach should simplify that task. Cam and contact block selection is better understood if you: 47 Work with each incoming and outgoing wire/circuit separately. Recognize the terms NO and NC only identify the type of contact by its mode before mounting to the operator. The "X-O" chart (Page 47-179) shows how that contact will act after assembly to the operator with the selected cam shape. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. Up to six NO or NC contacts may be mounted behind each plunger location for a total of twelve contacts. Single circuit contact blocks have only one plunger with the other side of the block "open." Therefore, single circuit contact blocks transmit motion to blocks behind them only for the position containing the circuit. Each cam has two separate lobes, each of which operates one of the two contact block plungers independently of each other. Those are identified as position A (locating nib side) and position B (opposite of locating nib). The position designations give direction in selecting and mounting of the contact blocks (see Illustration below). Locating Nib A B Step 1: Elementary Diagram. Construct on paper, or in your mind, a simple elementary diagram of the switching scheme as follows: HAND Incoming Line Outgoing Circuit OFF AUTO No. "X-O" Pattern 1 X O O 4 O O X HAND OFF AUTO X O O In this circuit, you want a contact closed on the left (HAND) but open in the center and right. For the AUTO circuit, the "X-O" diagram would look like this: HAND OFF AUTO O O X Putting them together, the complete "X-O" diagram is: XOO OOX Once the "X-O" diagram has been generated, the next step is to select the cam and contact block, or blocks, needed to perform the desired "X-O" functions. The selection table on the following page lists the various types (shapes) of cams by number to choose from and the type of contact and position to achieve the function outlined in your "X-O" diagram. Step 3: Cam Selection. The cam you select determines the operation of all contact blocks mounted to the operator. It is selected on the basis that it provides the simplest circuitry for the desired "X-O" diagram. The selection tables of the following page show all the "X-O" combinations. For the purpose of this example, the applicable portion of those charts is shown in Table 47-286. Cam Code #3 Top Bottom A B Top A NC NO NO Bottom B NO NO Wired in series. Now to make the cam selection, make a simple worksheet such as: Outgoing Circuit Step 2: "X-O" Pattern. From the elementary diagram, you can construct an "X-O" diagram which describes when the contacts are to be closed (X) or open (O) in the various positions of the switch. The "X-O" for the HAND circuit looks like this: Cam Code #2 XOO OOX Cam 2 (A)NO - (B)NC (B)NO Cam 3 (A)NO (B)NO It becomes immediately obvious that cam 3 is the better choice for two reasons, (1) the series combination can be avoided making it simpler to wire, (2) only two contacts are required, which is less expensive than the three contacts required by cam 2. Step 4: Contact Block Selection. Having selected the cam, contact block selection is simply a matter of gathering the A position and B position circuits into pairs which make up the most convenient contact block arrangement. If there is an imbalance in the number of circuits under A or B, then single circuit blocks must be selected for these leftover circuits. Back to the worksheet, having selected cam 3 do this: X O X O O X ANO BNO 10250T2 Step 5: Selector Switch Operator. Lastly, you have to choose from the many types of operators -- knob and lever in various colors or keyed. Also what combinations of maintained and spring return functions are required. Selection of these operators can be found on Page 47-180. For the above example you may want a 3-position maintained black knob, cam 3 -- Catalog Number E34VHBK1. The Complete Switch: E34VHBK1 with one 10250T2 or, for one composite catalog number, E34VHBK1-Y1 found on Page 47-177. Figure 47-125. Contact Circuit Locations For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-179 January 2010 E34 Series, Selector Switch Selection Selector Switch Selection (Continued) Table 47-288. 3-Position Switch -- Cam and Contact Block Selection No. Table 47-287. 2-Position Selector Switch Contact Block Selection No. Desired Circuit and Operator Position Bottom Plunger B 1 X 2 X X Operator with Cam Code #3 Mounting Location Mounting Location Top Plunger A Bottom Plunger B Top Plunger A NO NC NO O X O NC X O NO NO NO NO NO 4 O O X NO Diagrams Circuits shown illustrate connections to obtain a selector switch circuit combination and are shown with their appropriate line diagrams. Field wiring of jumper connections required as shown. X = Closed Circuit O = Open Circuit Series Connection NC X or X 5 O X NC 6 O NO X X NO NC O NC NC NC Table 47-289. 4-Position Switch -- Contact Block Selection No. Desired Circuit and Operator Position Top Plunger A Note: 4-Position Selector Switches limited to 4 contact blocks. 1 X O O O 2 O X O O Com- Desired Circuit and bina- Operator Position tion No. Bottom Plunger B Top Plunger A 10 X O X O O X O 4 O O O X NO NC NO 11 X X X O NC 5 X O O 7 8 9 O X O X O X X X X O O NO NO NC NO NO NC NC NC NO NC NC 12 O NC NO X NC 6 Bottom Plunger B O NO 3 Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function Mounting Location NC Contact Blocks For selection and number of available contact blocks per operator, see Page 47-182. Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function Mounting Location Parallel Connection Figure 47-126. Wiring of Jumper Connections CA08102001E Bottom Plunger B NC 3 O O Operator with Cam Code #2 or O NC 2 Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function (Jumpers must be installed where indicated) Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function Top Plunger A 1 Desired Circuit and Operator Position O X X X O NO NO NO NC NC NO X 13 X O X X O X NO NC For more information visit: www.eaton.com 14 X X O X 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-180 January 2010 E34 Series, Selector Switch Components Table 47-291. Key Operators with Cam and Cap -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Positions 2-Position Maintained Black Knob Selector Switch -- Cam 1 Catalog Number E34VFBK1 3-Position Maintained Keyed Selector Switch Catalog Number E34KGHB1 Operator Action 2-Position -- 60 Throw Cam Key Vertical Code Removal Mounting Positions Catalog Number Horiz. Mounting 1 1, 2, 3 E34KFB_ E34KFHB_ 1 2 E34KEB_ E34KEHB_ 2 3 1-7 M E34KGB_ E34KHB_ E34KGHB_ E34KHHB_ 2 3 1, 4, 5 M E34KJB_ E34KKB_ E34KJHB_ E34KKHB_ 2 3 4 S E34KLB_ E34KLHB_ E34KMB_ E34KMHB_ 2 3 2, 4, 6 S E34KNB_ E34KPB_ E34KNHB_ E34KPHB_ 7 7 E34KTB_ E34KTHB_ M M M S Selector Switch Operators Table 47-290. Operators with Knob Assembled -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Positions Black Knob Selector Switch -- Vertical Mounting Operator Action 2-Position -- 60 Throw M M M M S M M S S M M S M M 47 M Catalog Number Price U.S. $ 1 E34VFBK1 1 E34VEBK1 2 3 E34VGBK1 E34VHBK1 2 3 E34VJBK1 E34VKBK1 2 3 E34VLBK1 E34VMBK1 2 3 E34VNBK1 E34VPBK1 Table 47-292. Key Removal Positions 7 E34VTBK1 S M S M M Catalog Number S M 4-Position -- 40 Throw M M Cam Code M M 3-Position -- 60 Throw 3-Position -- 60 Throw Price U.S. $ M 4-Position -- 40 Throw M M M M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages 47-178 - 47-179. Choose key removal position required for application from Table 47-292. Add key removal Code No. to listed Catalog Number. Example: E34KFB2. Code Suffix Key Removal Positions Code Suffix Key Removal Positions 1 2 3 4 Right Only Left Only Right & Left Center Only 5 6 7 Right & Center Left & Center All Positions M M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages 47-178 - 47-179. Field convertible to Horizontal Mounting. For other colors of either the knob or lever, replace the underlined characters of the Catalog Number with the appropriate Suffix Code from Alternate Knob and Lever Table below. Example: E34VFBL2. M Note: Key removal in "spring return from" positions not recommended. Dissimilar Locks and Keys C L Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 - 47-165. R Listed operators have identical locks and keys (Key Code H661), Catalog Number 10250ED824. For dissimilar lock and key combinations, see Page 47-136. Figure 47-127. Key Removal Positions Table 47-293. Alternate Knobs and Levers for Operators Above Color Black Red Green Yellow White Blue Gray Orange Knob Lever Suffix Code Catalog Number K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 E34K1 E34K2 E34K3 E34K4 E34K5 E34K6 E34K7 E34K8 Price U.S. $ Lever Designed for Added Ingress Protection Suffix Code Catalog Number L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 E34L1 E34L2 E34L3 E34L4 E34L5 E34L6 E34L7 E34L8 Price U.S. $ Suffix Code Catalog Number A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 E34A1 E34A2 E34A3 E34A4 E34A5 E34A6 E34A7 E34A8 Price U.S. $ For use on maintained operators only. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-187 - 47-188 Page 47-191 Page 47-184 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-181 January 2010 E34 Series, Selector Switch Components 2-Position Maintained 120V AC Transformer Selector Switch, Cam 1 Catalog Number E34VFB120 Illuminated Selector Switch Operators Table 47-294. Operator without Knob or Lever Positions Operator Action Transformer Type -- 50/60 Hz Full Voltage Type -- AC or DC 6 Volt #755 Lamp Lamps -- #755, #757, #1835, 120MB Catalog Number 2-Position -- 60 Throw M M 3-Position -- 60 Throw M M S S Cam Code 3 Cam Code 2 Cam Code 3 E34VHB_ E34SGB_ E34SHB_ E34VPB_ E34SNB_ E34SPB_ E34VJB_ E34VKB_ E34SJB_ E34SKB_ E34VLB_ E34VMB_ E34SLB_ E34SMB_ E34VRB_ -- E34SRB_ -- M M E34SFB_ 2 Price U.S. $ S M E34VFB_ E34VNB_ M 4-Position -- 40 Throw Cam Code 1 E34VGB_ M Catalog Number Cam Code 1 Cam Code M Price U.S. $ S M M M M Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws. For selection of the proper cam and contact block required to obtain a specific circuit sequence, see selection table on Pages 47-178 - 47-179. Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed in Page 47-157. 120MB lamps are used on both 120V and 240V operators. Add Code Suffix for Light Unit Voltage to listed Catalog Number from Light Unit Voltage Suffix Table at bottom of page. Example: For 24V transformer type light unit, order E34VFB024. 120 and 240V transformer only. 120 full voltage only. Table 47-295. Light Unit Voltage Suffix -- Add to operator Catalog Number listed in table above. Table 47-296. Knobs, Levers Color Type of Light Unit Transformer Type 50/60 Hz Voltage Suffix Code Voltage Suffix Code 24 120 208 240 380 024 120 208 240 380 6 12 24 48 120 06 12 24 48 120 480 600 480 600 240 240 Lever Catalog Number and Code Number Full Voltage Type AC or DC Adder U.S. $ Knob Red Green Yellow Blue Clear White Amber Adder U.S. $ Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed in Page 47-157. Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density. 10250TER 10250TEG 10250TEA 10250TEL 10250TEC 10250TEW 10250TEM 10250TFR 10250TFG 10250TFA 10250TFL 10250TFC 10250TFW 10250TFM Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (pointer). Red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer). Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 - 47-165. Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . CA08102001E Price U.S. $ For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-182 Page 47-191 Pages 47-185 - 47-186 Page 47-184 1CD1C 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-182 January 2010 E34 Series, Components -- Contact Blocks Contact Blocks Special Function Contact Blocks Standard Contact Blocks UL A600/P600 rated Color-coded plungers - red/green for NC/NO circuits Silver contact tips with "reliability nibs" Black (opaque) or amber (translucent) housings Pressure plate or spade terminals Fingerproof shrouds (for pressure terminals only) Special Purpose Contact Block Logic Level Contact Blocks UL A600/P600 rated Black plungers Inert palladium knife-blade contacts Black (opaque) housings Pressure plate or spade terminals Fingerproof shrouds not available UL A600/P600 rated Black plungers Silver contact tips with "reliability nibs" Black (opaque) housings Pressure plate terminals only Fingerproof shrouds not available Maximum 300V rated Black plungers Silver contact tips with "reliability nibs" Black (opaque) housings Pressure plate terminals only Fingerproof shrouds not available Reliability Nibs Reliability nibs are the hallmark of Eaton's Cutler-Hammer contact blocks. A pointed silver nib on the contact tip ensures reliable switching from logic level (5V) up to 600V applications. Therefore standard contact blocks can be used for most logic level applications where the contacts are not exposed to any harsh environmental conditions. Palladium Contacts Palladium, which is more inert than gold, is well suited for voltages and currents approaching zero and is recommended for applications where environmental conditions are a factor. Maximum Contact Block Mounting per Operator Type Operator Max. Operator Stack Pushbuttons 6 Push-Pull Operators Roto-Push Operators 2 4 Max. Stack 2- or 3-Position Selector Switches 4-Position Selector Switches Joysticks 6 4 4 Table 47-297. Contact Blocks Symbol Circuit Description/ Notes 10250T1 Standard Pressure Terminals Catalog Price Number U.S. $ Spade Terminals Catalog Price Number U.S. $ Logic Level Pressure Terminals Catalog Price Number U.S. $ Spade Terminals Catalog Price Number U.S. $ Blank No Plunger 1NC Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T51 10250T59 10250T51E 10250T59E Blank No Plunger 1NO Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T53 10250T60 10250T53E 10250T60E NO-NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T1 10250T40 10250T1E 10250T40E 2NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T3 10250T42 10250T3E 10250T42E 2NO Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T2 10250T41 10250T2E 10250T41E LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T71 -- 10250T71E -- ECNO -NC Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to 6 blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T47 -- 10250T47E -- ECNO -NO Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to 4 blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T57 -- 10250T57E -- 2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to 6 blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T45 -- 10250T45E -- LONCECNO 10250T55 -- 10250T55E -- Four circuits in single block depth. Rated 300V 10250T44 max. Stack up to 4 blocks unless otherwise noted. -- 47 Special Function Blocks Blank No Plunger Overlapping contacts. Stack up to 4 blocks unless otherwise noted. Special Purpose Blocks 2NO2NC All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2 type 10250T or E34 devices. Contact blocks with spade terminals are limited to a maximum of one contact block per operator and minimum spacing between devices is 2.5" (63.5 mm). Not suitable for use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also available in amber housing. Not available with fingerproof shrouds. Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, 3position push-pull operators, or 4-position selector switches. ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with 2-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments. Special purpose 10250T44 contact blocks are not suitable on selector switches or rotopush operators. Okay to use with 3-position push-pull operators only on low voltage (30V or less) circuits. Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-116 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-183 January 2010 E34 Series, Components -- Contact Blocks Contact Blocks (Continued) Table 47-298. Contact Blocks with Fingerproof Shrouds Symbol Circuit Description/ Notes 10250T1CP Standard Logic Level Pressure Terminals Pressure Terminals Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Blank No Plunger 1NC Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T51P 10250T51EP Blank No Plunger 1NO Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T53P 10250T53EP NO-NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T1P 10250T1EP 2NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T3P 10250T3EP 2NO Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T2P 10250T2EP LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T71P 10250T71EP ECNO-NC Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to 6 blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T47P 10250T47EP ECNO-NO Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to 4 blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T57P 10250T57EP 2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to 6 blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T45P 10250T45EP LONC-ECNO Overlapping contacts. Stack up to 4 blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T55P 10250T55EP Price U.S. $ Special Function Blocks Blank No Plunger All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2 type 10250T or E34 devices. To order contact blocks with translucent amber housing, change Suffix P to CP in Catalog Number e.g. 10250T51CP. Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, 3position push-pull operators, or 4-position selector switches. ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with 2-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments. 47 Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-167 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-184 January 2010 E34 Series, Legend Plates Options Legend Plates Field Color Legend plates can be supplied printed on black, red, silver or white field. To order legend printed on a color other than indicated -- add Suffix Code to the end of the Catalog Number as follows: Example: E34SP26R -- Standard plate with red field marked OPEN. Table 47-299. For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights Price Each -- U.S. $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color of Field Catalog Number Standard Jumbo Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16" High 47 Jumbo Table 47-300. For Selector Switch Operators "R" for Red field; "W" for White field; or "S" for Silver field. Legend Standard Price Each -- U.S. $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Legend Color Catalog Number of Standard Jumbo Field PULL ON/ PUSH OFF PULL OPEN/ PUSH CLOSE PULL UP/ PUSH DOWN Black E34PP5 E34R5 Black E34PP8 E34R8 Black E34PP11 E34R11 Color Catalog Number of Standard Jumbo Field 2 Position -- 3/16" High Lettering FOR. REV. HAND AUTO HIGH LOW JOG RUN MAN. AUTO Black Black Black Black Black E34SP38 E34SP39 E34SP40 E34SP41 E34SP67 E34LP38 E34LP39 E34LP40 E34LP41 E34LP67 OFF ON OPEN CLOSE RUN JOG SAFE RUN START JOG Black Black Black Black Black E34SP42 E34SP43 E34SP44 E34SP45 E34SP46 E34LP42 E34LP43 E34LP44 E34LP45 E34LP46 START STOP UP DOWN Black E34SP47 Black E34SP48 E34LP47 E34LP48 CLAMP CLOSE DOWN EMERG. STOP FAST Black Black Black Red Black E34SP90 E34SP73 E34SP74 E34SP13 E34SP75 E34LP90 E34LP73 E34LP74 E34LP13 E34LP75 FASTER FEEDER ON FEEDER OFF FORWARD HIGH Black Black Black Black Black E34SP87 E34SP94 E34SP95 E34SP15 E34SP16 E34LP87 E34LP94 E34LP95 E34LP15 E34LP16 AUTO OFF HAND FOR. OFF REV. FOR. SAFE REV. HAND OFF AUTO MAN. OFF AUTO Black Black Black Black Black E34SP49 E34SP50 E34SP69 E34SP51 E34SP68 E34LP49 E34LP50 E34LP69 E34LP51 E34LP68 IN INCH JOG JOG FOR. JOG REV. Black Black Black Black Black E34SP17 E34SP18 E34SP19 E34SP20 E34SP21 E34LP17 E34LP18 E34LP19 E34LP20 E34LP21 OPEN OFF CLOSE RUN SAFE JOG UP OFF DOWN ON STOP SAFE Black Black Black Black E34SP53 E34SP70 E34SP54 E34SP71 E34LP53 E34LP70 E34LP54 E34LP71 LOW LOWER LUBE-FAIL MOTOR RUN MOTOR STOP Black Black Black Black Black E34SP22 E34SP23 E34SP92 E34SP81 E34SP82 E34LP22 E34LP23 E34LP92 E34LP81 E34LP82 OFF ON OPEN OUT POWER ON Red Black Black Black Black E34SP24 E34SP25 E34SP26 E34SP27 E34SP80 E34LP24 E34LP25 E34LP26 E34LP27 E34LP80 RAISE READY RESET REVERSE RUN Black Black Black Black Black E34SP28 E34SP86 E34SP29 E34SP30 E34SP31 E34LP28 E34LP86 E34LP29 E34LP30 E34LP31 SAFE SLOW SLOWER START STOP Black Black Black Black Red E34SP85 E34SP32 E34SP88 E34SP33 E34SP34 E34LP85 E34LP32 E34LP88 E34LP33 E34LP34 TEST TRANSFER TRIP UNCLAMP UP Black Black Black Black Black E34SP83 E34SP93 E34SP84 E34SP91 E34SP35 E34LP83 E34LP93 E34LP84 E34LP91 E34LP35 Table 47-301. For Push-Pull Units Price Each -- U.S. $. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/32 inch (2.4 mm) high lettering. 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) high lettering. 1.77 (45) 3 Position -- 3/16" High Lettering 1.77 (45) Standard 2.19 (55.6) 2.19 (55.6) Jumbo Figure 47-128. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Table 47-302. Blank Plastic Legend Plates -- Square Price Each -- U.S. $. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Colors Lettering Black White Catalog Number Field Side 1 Side 2 White Red Silver Black Standard Jumbo Extra Large 10250TSP76 10250TSP77 10250TLP76 10250TLP77 10250TEP76 10250TEP77 Legend Plates with Non-standard Markings or Aluminum Legend Plates See 10250T listing on Page 47-152. 3/32" high lettering. Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-185 January 2010 E34 Series, Enclosures Enclosures Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures Table 47-303. Enclosures (Case and Cover) -- Surface Mounting Number of Elements 1 Contact Block Depth 2 Contact Block Depth Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Cast Enclosure -- In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13 Die Cast Enclosure -- Cat. No. E34N11 Polyester Enclosure -- Cat. No. E34N52 1 2 3 4 E34N1 E34N2 E34N3 E34N4 E34N11 E34N12 E34N13 E34N14 Polyester -- In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12 1 2 3 4 -- -- -- -- E34N51 E34N52 E34N53 E34N54 Stainless Steel -- In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12 Stainless Steel Enclosure -- Cat. No. 10250TN35 1 2 3 4 -- -- -- -- 10250TN33 10250TN34 10250TN35 10250TN36 For spacing increments, see Page 47-186. All cast enclosures can be converted to base mounting of contact blocks, with spacers 10250TA22 or 10250TA23. See listing on Page 47-156. When used with E30 pushbuttons, only the one element enclosure can be used. 14 gauge, type 304. Table 47-304. Approximate Dimensions Number of Elements Element Arrangement Surface Mounting Conduit Entrance Dimensions in Inches (mm) Wide A High B Deep C Mounting D E 47 Cast 1 2 3 4 Approximate Dimensions In-Line In-Line In-Line In-Line 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 4.0 (101.6) 5.88 (149.4) 7.75 (196.9) 9.63 (244.6) 3.0 (76.3) 3.0 (76.3) 3.0 (76.3) 3.0 (76.3) 2.69 (68.3) 2.69 (68.3) 2.69 (68.3) 2.69 (68.3) 3.25 (82.6) 5.13 (130.3) 7.0 (177.8) 8.88 (225.6) 3/4 3/4 1 1 In-Line In-Line In-Line In-Line 3.81 (96.8) 3.81 (96.8) 3.81 (96.8) 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 6.63 (168.4) 8.88 (225.6) 11.13 (282.7) 3.38 (85.9) 3.38 (85.9) 3.38 (85.9) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 2.94 (74.7) 2.94 (74.7) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0) 4.88 (124.0) 7.13 (181.1) 9.38 (238.3) 3.00 (76.2) 3.50 (88.9) 3.50 (88.9) 3.50 (88.9) 3.50 (88.9) 6.75 (171.5) 9.00 (228.6) 11.25 (285.8) 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 4.25 (108.0) 7.50 (190.5) 9.00 (228.6) 12.00 (304.8) 4 Mtg. Holes -- 10-32 Screw Size for 1 - 4 Element Die Cast/ Stainless Steel Enclosure 7/32 Screw Size for Polyester Polyester 1 2 3 4 E B Stainless Steel 1 2 3 4 In-Line In-Line In-Line In-Line No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required. Depth given is for two contact block deep stations. One contact block deep stations subtract 3/4 inch (19.1 mm). C Surface Top - For Vertical Mounting 1 One Contact Block Depth Enclosure Two Contact Block Depth Enclosure 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 Top - For Horizontal Mounting Note: These E34 Die Cast Enclosures feature a corrosion resistant coating identical to finish on the E34 operators except gray in color. Not for use in ultraviolet light applications. D A Figure 47-129. Enclosure Layouts Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-186 January 2010 E34 Series, Enclosures Enclosures (Continued) Die Cast and Stainless Steel -- Flush Mount, Covers Only These E34 Die Cast Covers feature a corrosion resistant coating identical to the finish on the E34 operators except gray in color. Table 47-305. Covers Only -- Flush Mounting Number of Elements Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Flush Cast Covers Flat Cover 1 2 3 4 Deep Cover In-Line Deep Cover In-Line Flat Cover E34F11 E34F12 E34F13 E34F14 E34F1 E34F2 E34F3 E34F4 In-Line Stainless Steel Flush Plates 1 2 3 4 With Pullbox Without Pullbox 10250TS10 10250TS11 10250TS12 10250TS14 10250TS1 10250TS2 10250TS3 10250TS4 Not oiltight. NEMA 1 applications only. Table 47-306. Approximate Dimensions Number of Elements Flush Mounting Approximate Dimensions Dimensions in Inches (mm) Wide A High B Deep C Mounting D E 0.25 (6.4) 0.25 (6.4) 0.25 (6.4) 0.25 (6.4) 3.50 (88.9) 3.50 (88.9) 3.50 (88.9) 3.50 (88.9) 3.63 (92.2) 5.50 (139.7) 6.0 (152.4) 9.25 (235) Cast 1 2 3 4 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 4.0 (101.6) 5.88 (149.4) 7.75 (196.9) 9.63 (244.6) Screw Size for 12 Element and Larger E B Stainless Steel 47 1 2 3 4 5.0 (127) 5.0 (127) 5.0 (127) 5.0 (127) 5.0 (127) 6.88 (174.8) 8.63 (219.2) 10.50 (266.7) 2.50 (63.5) 2.50 (63.5) 2.50 (63.5) 2.50 (63.5) 3.25 (82.6) 3.25 (82.6) 3.25 (82.6) 3.25 (82.6) 1.88 (47.8) 3.63 (92.2) 5.50 (139.7) 7.25 (184.2) D C A Surface or Pendant Depth given is for flat cover. Deep cover 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deeper. Depth given includes pull box. Table 47-307. Spacing Increments Type Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) F G H Cast 2.44 (62) 2.5 (63.5) 1.88 (47.8) Polyester 1.88 (47.8) Min. 2.13 (54.1) 2.25 (57.2) Stainless Steel 1.69 (42.9) Min. 1.73 (43.9) 2.25 (57.2) Top - For Vertical Mounting G F Figure 47-130. Spacing Increments for Enclosures 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 Top - For Horizontal Mounting H Figure 47-131. Enclosure Layouts Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-187 January 2010 E34 Series, Accessories Accessories Table 47-308. Accessories Description Catalog Number Padlocking Attachment for Flush Pushbutton Operators. Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4" padlock. Will not lock NO contact. Price U.S. $ Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm) E34TA2 0.84 (21.3) 0.75 (19.1) 0.94 (23.9) 1.63 (41.4) 0.25 (6.4) Flexible Weather Resistant Boot for use with flush pushbutton operators. Clear Black Red Green 10250TA46 10250TA47 10250TA48 10250TA49 Flexible Weather Resistant Boot for use with button operators (extended buttons preferred). Black Red Green Clear 10250TA3 10250TA4 10250TA10 10250TA85 Transparent Boot for regular, illuminated pushbutton operators and PresTest. 10250TA25 1.47 (37.3) 1.59 (40.4) 1.92 (48.8) 1.59 (40.4) Special Retaining Nut -- to accommodate thick panel. Indicating light PresTest, pushbuttons and selector switches Shroud for Mushroom Head Operator -- prevents accidental operation. (Not for Push-Pull operators.) E34TA30 E34TA31 E34TA6 1.53 (38.9) 47 1.50 (38.1) Extended Retaining Nut -- Replaces standard nut and provides guard for flush type pushbutton operators. E34TA12 1.25 (31.8) 1.38 (35.1) Guard for Illuminated Pushbutton 1.31 (33.3) E34TA15 1.63 (41.4) 1.50 (38.1) Padlocking Attachment for non-illuminated knob selector switches -- accommodates up to 5, 1/4" padlocks. E34TA11 Should not be used on flush button for STOP function. Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick. Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47-188 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight January 2010 E34 Series, Accessories Table 47-308. Accessories (Continued) Description Catalog Number Thrust Washer -- To meet Ford Motor Company mounting specifications. Contact Block Terminal Jumps -- Available in multiples of 100 only. Term. to Term. -- Within Block (short): 100 per package 1000 per package Price U.S. $ Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm) E34TK3 0.45 (11.4) Terminal to Terminal -- Block to Block (long): 100 per package 1000 per package 10250TA71 10250TA71-2 Master Test (Dual Input) Module -- Internal Form C relay suitable for either AC or DC applications. Total electrical isolation between monitored and test circuit. Fits all illuminated 10250T, E22, E30 and E34 devices. 48V DC 10250TMT8 0.25 (6.4) 0.25 (6.4) 10250TA70 10250TA70-2 0.86 (21.8) 1.63 (41.4) Flasher Module -- Internal Form C relay suitable for AC applications. One unit required for each operator in master test circuit. 24V AC 120V AC 1.78 (45.2) 1.31 (33.3) 10250TFL2 10250TFL1 1.14 (29) 6 Mounting Holes Panel Mounting Nut Wrench -- E22, E30, E34 and Octagonal 10250T. E22CW Fingerproof Shroud -- 10 per Package Fits new style contact blocks and light units. 10250TA101 47 Table 47-309. Replacement Lamps -- For E34 Illuminated Operators Mfg. Lamp Type Voltage Base Style 120MB 120V #267 #755 #756 #757 6.3V 6.3V 12V 24V #1828 32V #1835 55V NE48 120V NE51H-R22 120V NE51H-R68 240V Application Part Number Price U.S. $ T 3-1/4 Bayonet 10250T Resistor Indicating Light 28-3044 T 3-1/4 Bayonet T 3-1/4 Bayonet T 3-1/4 Bayonet T 3-1/4 Bayonet 10250T Flasher 10250T Transformer, PresTest and Full Voltage 10250T Full Voltage 10250T Full Voltage 10250ED986-4 28-2202 28-5184 28-5185 T 3-1/4 Bayonet T 3-1/4 Bayonet T 4-1/2 Bayonet T 3-1/4 Bayonet T 3-1/4 Bayonet 10250T Full Voltage 10250T Resistor 10250T Neon 10250T Neon 10250T Neon 28-5186 28-5187 28-494 28-3754 28-3755 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-189 January 2010 E34 Series, Renewal Parts Renewal Parts Flush Head Pushbutton Operator Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator Jumbo Mushroom Head Operator Transformer Type Indicating Light Knob-Operated Selector Switch Operator Illuminated Pushbutton Operator Potentiometers Full Voltage, Resistor and Transformer Type Illuminated Selector Switch Table 47-310. Numbers Listed Are for E34 Style Operators Item Description No. No. Part Req. Number Price U.S. $ Item Description No. No. Part Req. Number 1 Gasket 1 16-1548 12 Mounting Screw 2 11-1632 2 Mounting Nut 1 15-1530-4 13 1 As Req. Below 3 Set Screw (#6-32 x 0.250" Long Hollow Hex) 2 11-2014 4 Mushroom Head Button (Includes (2) Item 5) Black Red Yellow Green Blue 1 As Req. Below -- -- -- -- -- 53-1317 53-1317-2 53-1317-3 53-1317-4 53-1317-22 Simple Potentiometer (Does Not Include Items 18, 28 or 29) 1,000 Ohms 2,500 Ohms 5,000 Ohms 10,000 Ohms 25,000 Ohms 50,000 Ohms -- -- -- -- -- -- 41-782-2 41-782-3 41-782-10 41-782-4 41-782-5 41-782-6 14 Connector (Includes Screw and Lug) 2 25-1851 5 Set Screw (#10-32 x 0.250" Long Hollow Hex) 2 11-544 15 6 Jumbo Mushroom Head Button (Aluminum -- Includes (2) Item 5) Red Black Yellow Green 1 As Req. Below Indicating Plate Standard Size (Without Legend) Large Size (Specify Legend) 1 -- -- As Req. Above 30-4460 10250TR30 16 Retaining Nut 1 15-1547-3 -- -- -- -- 53-1317-9 53-1317-10 53-1317-11 53-1317-12 17 Knob Socket Set Screw (#6-32 x 0.250" Long) 1 1 53-1314 11-2014 18 Coupling 1 1 11-2014 29-3749-2 19 Set Screw (#6-32 x 0.188" Long) 1 11-1199 20 Spacer 2 56-1066-18 21 Connector (Includes Screw and Lug) 1 25-1851-2 22 Mounting Nut 1 15-1938-2 7 8 Jumbo Mushroom Head Button 1 (Aluminum -- Red EMERG. STOP) Does Not Include Item 5 53-1349-18 Mounting Screw (#6-32 x 0.710" Long) Washer 2 10250TA79 2 16-2038 9 Terminal Screw and Lug (Captive) Req. 80-5502 10 Gasket (Supplied with Basic Unit) 1 32-803 11 Round Head Screw (#4-40 x 0.344" Long) (Supplied with Basic Unit) 2 11-4553 Price U.S. $ Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-190 January 2010 E34 Series, Mounting Options Mounting Terminals on Top Panel Thickness Minimum: 0.06 inch (1.6 mm) Maximum: 0.25 inch (8 mm) including legend plate Maximum can be increased to 0.375 inch (15.9 mm) using optional retaining nut Indicating light: E34TA30 Pushbutton/selector switch: E34TA31 B Min. A Min. Horizontal Mounting 1.22 (31) Vertical Mounting Figure 47-132. Mounting Options in Inches (mm) Legend Plate Dimensions in Inches (mm) A B C D Small 1.63 (41.3) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 1.63 (41.3) Medium 1.75 (44.5) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 1.75 (44.5) Note: Locating nib hole or notch is 0.14 inch (3.6 mm) Large 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) C Min. Terminals at Side Horizontal mounting means terminals are located top and bottom of contact block. Vertical mounting means terminals are left and right of contact block. This allows close spacing of adjacent operators with easy access to terminals. Table 47-311. Mounting Matrix 0.6 (15.2) D Min. 0.14 (3.6) Dia. 0.14 (3.6) Dia. 0.6 (15.2) 1.20 (30.5) Figure 47-133. Drilling Dimensions in Inches (mm) 47 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-191 January 2010 E34 Series, Dimensions Dimensions 1.06 (26.9) 0.88 (22.4) Extended Pushbutton Flush Pushbutton 0.88 (22.4) Contact Blk. 0.88 (22.4) Each Addl. Contact Blk. 1.78 (45.2) 1.09 (27.7) 2.50 (63.5) 0.88 (22.4) 0.25 (6.4) Jumbo Mushroom Pushbutton 1.09 (27.7) 2.63 (66.8) 1.65 (41.9) 1.13 (28.7) 1.78 (45.2) 1.38 (35.1) 1.1 (27.9) 1.09 (27.7) 1.78 (45.2) 1.09 (27.7) 0.69 (17.5) Illuminated Pushbutton 1.5 (38.1) 1.58 (40.1) to Remove Key Selector Switch 0.88 (22.4) Keyed Selector Switch Figure 47-134. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) For more information visit: www.eaton.com 1.58 (40.1) Knob Light Unit 0.88 1.09 (22.4) (27.7) 1.58 (40.1) Lever Each Additional Contact Block Contact Block Each Addl. Contact Blk. Contact Block Each Additional Contact Block 1.58 (40.1) Knob 1.09 (27.7) 47 1.38 (35.1) 1.13 (28.7) PresTest Indicating Light 0.88 (22.4) 1.38 (35.1) Indicating Light Light Unit Contact Blk. Each Addl. Contact Blk. 1.38 (35.1) 1.09 (27.7) Mushroom Pushbutton 1.78 (45.2) 0.69 (17.5) 1.50 (38.1) 0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4) Panel Thickness 1.13 (28.7) CA08102001E 0.88 (22.4) 1.09 (27.7) Push-Pull Switch 1.9 (48.3) 1.78 (45.2) 1.78 (45.2) Half Shroud Pushbutton Contact Light Block Unit 1.75 (44.5) 1.38 (35.1) Contact Blk. 1.09 (27.7) 1.78 (45.2) 1.63 (41.4) Each Addl. Contact Blk. 1.38 (35.1) Contact Blk. 0.88 (22.4) 1.44 (36.6) Each Addl. Contact Blk. 1.09 (27.7) Contact Blk. 1.78 (45.2) 1.38 (35.1) Each Addl. Contact Blk. 0.88 (22.4) Contact Blk. Each Addl. Contact Blk. 1.78 (45.2) 1.44 (36.6) 1.09 (27.7) 1.58 (40.1) Lever Illuminated Selector Switch 47-192 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight January 2010 E34 Series, Ordering Example Ordering Complete Devices Complete E34 Pushbuttons, Indicating Lights and/or Selector Switch operators including contact block(s) and legend plate can be ordered using a single composite catalog number. The individually packaged components will be shipped unassembled in a single overpack carton marked with the composite Catalog Number. Table 47-312. Catalog Numbering System E34XB120 V2 - Operator 153 SP90 Insert Hyphen Before Contact Block(s) Ordering Example Illuminated Pushbutton Device -- Catalog Number E34XB120V2-153SP90 Lens E34V2 Legend Plate E34SP90 Contact Blocks 10250T1 & 10250T53 For a complete Catalog Number breakdown, see Pages 47-193 - 47-194. 47 For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-193 January 2010 E34 Series, Catalog Number Structure Catalog Number Structure Table 47-313. Non-illuminated Pushbuttons Catalog Numbering System E34 PB 1 - 1 Circuit Operator PB = EB = LB = JB = EVB = EHB = Flush Extended 40 mm Mushroom 65 mm Mushroom 1/2 Shroud Vertical Mount 1/2 Shroud Horizontal Mount Blank = 1= 2= 3= 51 = 53 = Button Color 1= 2= 3= 4= 7= 5= 6= 8= Black Red Green Yellow Gray White Blue Orange Operator Only 1NO-1NC 2NO 2NC 1NC 1NO Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory. Table 47-314. Illuminated and Non-illuminated Push-Pulls Catalog Numbering System E34 GDB 63 M2 - 1 Circuit Operator GDB = GEB = GFB = GHB = Blank = 1= 2= 3= 51 = 53 = 2-Position Maintained 3-Position Mom Push-Mom Pull 3-Position MT Push-Mom-Pull 3-Position Mom Push-Mom Pull Incandescent Light Unit Blank = 89 = 63 = 64 = 65 = 82 = 66 = 67 = 68 = 69 = 70 = 79 = 83 = 80 = 81 = Non-ill. 24V/XFR 120V/XFR 208V/XFR 240V/XFR 277V/XFR 380V/XFR 480V/XFR 600V/XFR 6V/FV 12V/FV 24V/FV 32V/FV 120V/RES 240V/RES LED Light Unit Blank = 89L = 63L = 64L = 65L = 82L = 66L = 67L = 68L = 97L = LED Voltage Non-ill. 24V/XFR 120V/XFR 208V/XFR 240V/XFR 277V/XFR 380V/XFR 480V/XFR 600V/XFR Full Voltage Blank = Blank = 06 = 12 = 24 = 48 = 60 = 2A = 2D = Button Black 40 mm Red 40 mm Red 40 mm - "E" STOP Green 40 mm Blue 40 mm Black 65 mm Red 65 mm Red 65 mm - "E" STOP Green 65 mm Yellow 65 mm Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory. CA08102001E Non-ill. Incand. 6V AC/DC 12V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 48V AC/DC 60V AC/DC 120V AC 120V DC Non-illuminated C1 = C2 = C2N8 = C3 = C6 = -= J2 = J2N8 = -= -= Operator Only 1NO-1NC 2NO 2NC 1NC 1NO For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 Illuminated Incandescent LED M2 = RD = M2N8 = ED = M3 = GD = M6 = LD = M9 = AD = M5 = WD = M0 = -= Lens Type Red 40 mm Red 40 mm - "E" STOP Green 40 mm Blue 40 mm Amber 40 mm White 40 mm Clear 40 mm Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight 47-194 January 2010 E34 Series, Catalog Number Structure Table 47-315. Illuminated Pushbuttons Catalog Numbering System E34 XB 24 V2 - 1 Light Unit Type Circuit XB = Transformer CB = Full Voltage SB = Resistor Incandescent Light Unit 024 = 120 = 240 = 277 = 380 = 480 = 600 = 06 = 12 = 24 = 32 = 48 = 120 = 240 = 24V/XFR 120V/XFR 240V/XFR 277V/XFR 380V/XFR 480V/XFR 600V/XFR 6V/FV 12V/FV 24V/FV 32V/FV 48V/FV 120V/RES 240V/RES Blank = 1= 2= 3= 51 = 53 = LED Light Unit 024L = 120L = 240L = 277L = 380L = 480L = 600L = 497L = 24V/XFR 120V/XFR 240V/XFR 277V/XFR 380V/XFR 480V/XFR 600V/XFR Full Voltage Operator Only 1NO-1NC 2NO 2NC 1NC 1NO LED Voltage Blank = 06 = 12 = 24 = Incand. 6V AC/DC 12V AC/DC 24V AC/DC Incandescent Lens Color V2 = V3 = V4 = V5 = V6 = V9 = V0 = Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber Clear 48 = 60 = 2A = 2D = 48V AC/DC 60V AC/DC 120V AC 120V DC LED Lens Color RD = GD = YD = WD = LD = AD = Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory. Table 47-316. Standard Indicating Lights, PresTest and Master Test Catalog Numbering System E34 FB06 H2 Light Unit Type Standard - Incandescent 47 TB120 = TB240 = TB277 = TB380 = TB480 = TB600 = FB06 = FB12 = FB24 = FB32 = FB48 = RB120 = RB240 = NB120 = NB240 = 120V/XFR 240V/XFR 277V/XFR 380V/XFR 480V/XFR 600V/XFR 6V/FV 12V/FV 24V/FV 32V/FV 48V/FV 120V/RES 240V/RES 120V/Neon 240V/Neon LED Voltage Standard - LED TB120L = TB240L = TB277L = TB380L = TB480L = TB600L = FB197L = 120V/XFR 240V/XFR 277V/XFR 380V/XFR 480V/XFR 600V/XFR Full Voltage PresTest - LED TPB120L = TPB240L = TPB380L = TPB480L = TPB600L = FPB297L = Blank = 06 = 12 = 24 = 48 = 60 = 2A = 2D = 120V/XFR 240V/XFR 380V/XFR 480V/XFR 600V/XFR Full Voltage Plastic Lens Color Standard/Master - Incandescent PresTest - Incandescent TPB120 = TPB240 = TPB380 = TPB480 = TPB600 = FPB06 = FPB12 = FPB24 = FPB32 = FPB48 = RPB120 = RPB240 = Glass Incand. 6V AC/DC 12V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 48V AC/DC 60V AC/DC 120V AC 120V DC 120V/XFR 240V/XFR 380V/XFR 480V/XFR 600V/XFR 6V/FV 12V/FV 24V/FV 32V/FV 48V/FV 120V/RES 240V/RES H2 = H3 = H4 = H5 = H6 = H9 = H0 = G2 = G3 = G4 = G5 = G6 = G9 = G0 = Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber Clear Plastic Glass Lens Color Standard/Master/PresTest - LED RP = GP = YP = WP = LP = AP = RG = GG = YG = WG = LG = AG = Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber PresTest - Incandescent V2 = V3 = V4 = V5 = V6 = V9 = V0 = P2 = P3 = P4 = P5 = P6 = P9 = P0 = Red Green Yellow White Blue Amber Clear Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory. For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight 47-195 January 2010 HT800 Series Product Description Benefits Description Page The Cutler-Hammer(R) HT800 Series Product Description . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Momentary Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Pushbutton Units. . . . . . . . Indicating Light Units . . . . . Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switch Units . . . . . Selector Switch Contact Block Selection . . . . . . . . . Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Options Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-195 47-195 47-195 from Eaton's electrical business is a family of 30.5 mm pushbutton devices which includes momentary, illuminated and mushroomhead pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating lights and push-pull switches. The HT800 devices have a familiar appearance found in most industrial applications and are suitable for replacement of several other manufacturers' 30.5 mm pushbutton devices. Features Contents 47-195 47-196 47-197 47-198 47-200 47-201 47-203 47-205 47-205 47-206 47-208 47-210 47-214 Anodized aluminum mounting rings Watertight double V-gasket seals Extended height bulbs Transparent housing contact blocks Color-coded contact blocks Gold-plated contacts (on low voltage contact block) Reliability ridge on movable contact Stackable screw-mounted contact blocks Contact blocks can be mounted in left/right or top/bottom positions Standard NC contact opens before NO contact closes (break before make operation) Bright and long lasting LED indicating lights in six colors Field convertible maintained selector switches -- from two- to threeposition and vice versa Field selectable knob/lever mounting positions -- at any 22.5 increment HT800 Series CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Corrosion resistant NEMA 4X finish Watertight and oiltight NEMA 4, 13 ingress protection Increased side illumination of indicating lights and illuminated pushbuttons Easy visual inspection of contact conditions Easily identifiable NO (white) or NC (black) contact blocks Gold-plated contacts suitable for logic level circuits Reliability ridge penetrates contamination buildup on stationary contacts Left/right or top/bottom mounted contact blocks allow correct positioning in retrofit applications All-purpose selector switches are convertible and can rotate in 22.5 increments to suit panel layouts Standards and Certifications UL508 per File No. E131568 CSA C22.2 No. 14 per File No. LR68551 Ingress Protection UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 when mounted in similarly rated enclosures 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight 47-196 January 2010 HT800 Series, Technical Data and Specifications Technical Data and Specifications Table 47-317. HT800 -- Specifications Description Specification Mechanical Ratings Frequency of Operation Pushbuttons Selector Switches Push-Pull Operators 6,000 Operations per hour 3,000 Operations per hour 3,000 Operations per hour Mechanical Endurance/Life Pushbuttons Selector Switches Push-Pull Operators 10 x 106 Operations 6K Ops/Hr with 6 NO on left and 6 NC on right 250 x 103 Operations 3K Ops/Hr with 2 NO on left and 2 NC on right 250 x 103 Operations 3K Ops/Hr with 6 NO on left and 6 NC on right Climatic Conditions Operating Temperature 10 to 140F (-12 to 60C) Storage Temperature -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C) Altitude 6,562 ft. (2,000m) Humidity 95% RH @ 60C Terminals Contact Blocks #6-32 posi-drive saddle clamp type, 1 x 16 AWG to 2 x 14 AWG, 12 in-lbs max. Light Units #6-32 posi-drive saddle clamp type, 1 x 22 AWG to 2 x 14 AWG, 7 in-lbs max. Electrical Ratings Standard Contact Blocks UL (NEMA) Rating See Table 47-318. Logic Level Contact Block Power Rating 5V 1 mA (minimum) 28V 500 mA (maximum) Table 47-318. Electrical Ratings -- HT800 Standard Contact Blocks, UL Rating Description/Function 47 Contact Type Catalog Number AC DC Standard Normally Open contact NO HT8A A600 P600 Standard Normally Closed contact NC HT8B A600 P600 Normally Open Early Make Contact will make circuit before standard NO contact. DC ratings do not apply. NOEM HT8C A600 -- Normally Closed Late Break contact will open after standard NC contact. DC ratings do not apply. NCLB HT8D A600 -- Logic level, low voltage NO contact. Gold plated contacts. NO HT8E 5V 1 mA (minimum) 28V 500 mA (maximum) Heavy duty. Standard duty. Table 47-319. UL A600 and P600 Ratings Description Make and Emerg. Interrupting Capacity (Amp) Normal Load Break (Amp) Thermal Current (Amp) Voltamperes: Make and Emerg. Interrupting Capacity Normal Load Break Volts DC Volts AC 50 or 60 Hz 120 240 60 6 10 30 3 10 7200 720 7200 720 480 15 1.5 10 7200 720 600 12 1.2 10 7200 720 125 1.1 1.1 5 138 138 250 0.55 0.55 5 138 138 600 0.2 0.2 5 138 138 DC ratings do not apply to NOEM (Normally Open Early Make) and NCLB (Normal Closed Late Break) contact blocks HT8C and HT8D. Maximum make or break volt-amperes at 300V or less. For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight 47-197 January 2010 HT800 Series, Momentary Pushbutton Units Product Selection Momentary Pushbutton Units, Non-illuminated Flush, Extended or 40 mm Mushroom Head Operators Flush Head Operator Cat. No. HT8AAH Extended Head Operator Cat. No. HT8ABH 40 mm Mushroom Head Operator Cat. No. HT8AEH Table 47-320. Momentary Contact Pushbutton Units, Non-illuminated -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 Contact Type Button Color Flush Head Extended Head Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Mushroom Head (40 mm) Price U.S. $ Catalog Number No Contact Black Red Green HT8AAH HT8AAR HT8AAG HT8ABH HT8ABR HT8ABG HT8AEH HT8AER HT8AEG 1NO Black Red Green HT8AAHA HT8AARA HT8AAGA HT8ABHA HT8ABRA HT8ABGA HT8AEHA HT8AERA HT8AEGA 1NC Black Red Green HT8AAHB HT8AARB HT8AAGB HT8ABHB HT8ABRB HT8ABGB HT8AEHB HT8AERB HT8AEGB 1NO-1NC Black Red Green HT8AAHAB HT8AARAB HT8AAGAB HT8ABHAB HT8ABRAB HT8ABGAB HT8AEHAB HT8AERAB HT8AEGAB 2NO-2NC Black Red Green HT8AAHF1Q1 HT8AARF1Q1 HT8AAGF1Q1 HT8ABHF1Q1 HT8ABRF1Q1 HT8ABGF1Q1 HT8AEHF1Q1 HT8AERF1Q1 HT8AEGF1Q1 Price U.S. $ 47 NO Contact Block NC Contact Block Table 47-321. Contact Blocks Description/Function Contact Type Catalog Number Standard Normally Open contact NO HT8A Standard Normally Closed contact NC HT8B Normally Open Early Make contact will make circuit before standard NO contact. DC ratings do not apply. NOEM HT8C Normally Closed Late Break contact will NCLB open after standard NC contact. DC ratings do not apply. HT8D Logic level, low voltage NO contact. Gold plated contacts. HT8E NO Price U.S. $ Maximum of (4) contact blocks per side or a total of (8) contact blocks recommended. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-208 Page 47-210 Page 47-206 1CD1C Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight 47-198 January 2010 HT800 Series, Illuminated Pushbutton Units Illuminated Pushbutton Units Incandescent or LED Full Voltage or Transformer Type 24V and 120V Illuminated Pushbutton Operator Cat. No. HT8GBRV7 Table 47-322. Illuminated Pushbuttons -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 Type Volts Lens Color Operator Only 1NO Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ 1NC Price U.S. $ Catalog Number 1NO-1NC Price U.S. $ Catalog Number 2NO-2NC Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Incandescent Lamp Full Voltage Transformer 47 120V No Lens AC/DC Red Green Amber Clear White Yellow Blue HT8GBFV HT8GBRV7 HT8GBGV7 HT8GBAV7 HT8GBCV7 HT8GBWV7 HT8GBYV7 HT8GBBV7 -- HT8GBRAV7 HT8GBGAV7 HT8GBAAV7 HT8GBCAV7 HT8GBWAV7 HT8GBYAV7 HT8GBBAV7 -- HT8GBRBV7 HT8GBGBV7 HT8GBABV7 HT8GBCBV7 HT8GBWBV7 HT8GBYBV7 HT8GBBBV7 -- HT8GBRABV7 HT8GBGABV7 HT8GBAABV7 HT8GBCABV7 HT8GBWABV7 HT8GBYABV7 HT8GBBABV7 -- HT8GBRF1Q1V7 HT8GBGF1Q1V7 HT8GBAF1Q1V7 HT8GBCF1Q1V7 HT8GBWF1Q1V7 HT8GBYF1Q1V7 HT8GBBF1Q1V7 24V No Lens AC/DC Red Green Amber Clear White Yellow Blue HT8GBFV HT8GBRV3 HT8GBGV3 HT8GBAV3 HT8GBCV3 HT8GBWV3 HT8GBYV3 HT8GBBV3 -- HT8GBRAV3 HT8GBGAV3 HT8GBAAV3 HT8GBCAV3 HT8GBWAV3 HT8GBYAV3 HT8GBBAV3 -- HT8GBRBV3 HT8GBGBV3 HT8GBABV3 HT8GBCBV3 HT8GBWBV3 HT8GBYBV3 HT8GBBBV3 -- HT8GBRABV3 HT8GBGABV3 HT8GBAABV3 HT8GBCABV3 HT8GBWABV3 HT8GBYABV3 HT8GBBABV3 -- HT8GBRF1Q1V3 HT8GBGF1Q1V3 HT8GBAF1Q1V3 HT8GBCF1Q1V3 HT8GBWF1Q1V3 HT8GBYF1Q1V3 HT8GBBF1Q1V3 No Lens Red Green Amber Clear White Yellow Blue HT8GBT1 HT8GBRT1 HT8GBGT1 HT8GBAT1 HT8GBCT1 HT8GBWT1 HT8GBYT1 HT8GBBT1 -- HT8GBRAT1 HT8GBGAT1 HT8GBAAT1 HT8GBCAT1 HT8GBWAT1 HT8GBYAT1 HT8GBBAT1 -- HT8GBRBT1 HT8GBGBT1 HT8GBABT1 HT8GBCBT1 HT8GBWBT1 HT8GBYBT1 HT8GBBBT1 -- HT8GBRABT1 HT8GBGABT1 HT8GBAABT1 HT8GBCABT1 HT8GBWABT1 HT8GBYABT1 HT8GBBABT1 -- HT8GBRF1Q1T1 HT8GBGF1Q1T1 HT8GBAF1Q1T1 HT8GBCF1Q1T1 HT8GBWF1Q1T1 HT8GBYF1Q1T1 HT8GBBF1Q1T1 120V No Lens AC/DC Red Green Amber Clear White Yellow Blue HT8GBFV HT8GBRF7 HT8GBGF7 HT8GBAF7 HT8GBCF7 HT8GBWF7 HT8GBYF7 HT8GBBF7 -- HT8GBRAF7 HT8GBGAF7 HT8GBAAF7 HT8GBCAF7 HT8GBWAF7 HT8GBYAF7 HT8GBBAF7 -- HT8GBRBF7 HT8GBGBF7 HT8GBABF7 HT8GBCBF7 HT8GBWBF7 HT8GBYBF7 HT8GBBBF7 -- HT8GBRABF7 HT8GBGABF7 HT8GBAABF7 HT8GBCABF7 HT8GBWABF7 HT8GBYABF7 HT8GBBABF7 -- HT8GBRF1Q1F7 HT8GBGF1Q1F7 HT8GBAF1Q1F7 HT8GBCF1Q1F7 HT8GBWF1Q1F7 HT8GBYF1Q1F7 HT8GBBF1Q1F7 24V No Lens AC/DC Red Green Amber Clear White Yellow Blue HT8GBFV HT8GBRF3 HT8GBGF3 HT8GBAF3 HT8GBCF3 HT8GBWF3 HT8GBYF3 HT8GBBF3 -- HT8GBRAF3 HT8GBGAF3 HT8GBAAF3 HT8GBCAF3 HT8GBWAF3 HT8GBYAF3 HT8GBBAF3 -- HT8GBRBF3 HT8GBGBF3 HT8GBABF3 HT8GBCBF3 HT8GBWBF3 HT8GBYBF3 HT8GBBBF3 -- HT8GBRABF3 HT8GBGABF3 HT8GBAABF3 HT8GBCABF3 HT8GBWABF3 HT8GBYABF3 HT8GBBABF3 -- HT8GBRF1Q1F3 HT8GBGF1Q1F3 HT8GBAF1Q1F3 HT8GBCF1Q1F3 HT8GBWF1Q1F3 HT8GBYF1Q1F3 HT8GBBF1Q1F3 No Lens Red Green Amber Clear White Yellow Blue HT8GBT1 HT8GBRL1 HT8GBGL1 HT8GBAL1 HT8GBCL1 HT8GBWL1 HT8GBYL1 HT8GBBL1 -- HT8GBRAL1 HT8GBGAL1 HT8GBAAL1 HT8GBCAL1 HT8GBWAL1 HT8GBYAL1 HT8GBBAL1 -- HT8GBRBL1 HT8GBGBL1 HT8GBABL1 HT8GBCBL1 HT8GBWBL1 HT8GBYBL1 HT8GBBBL1 -- HT8GBRABL1 HT8GBGABL1 HT8GBAABL1 HT8GBCABL1 HT8GBWABL1 HT8GBYABL1 HT8GBBABL1 -- HT8GBRF1Q1L1 HT8GBGF1Q1L1 HT8GBAF1Q1L1 HT8GBCF1Q1L1 HT8GBWF1Q1L1 HT8GBYF1Q1L1 HT8GBBF1Q1L1 120V AC LED Full Voltage Transformer 120V AC Light unit base operator without lens or bulb. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-208 Page 47-210 Page 47-206 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight 47-199 January 2010 HT800 Series, Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units Incandescent or LED Full Voltage or Transformer Type 24V and 120V Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Operator Cat. No. HT8GDRV7 Table 47-323. Guarded Illuminated Pushbuttons -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 Type Volts Lens Color Operator Only 1NO Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ 1NC Price U.S. $ Catalog Number 1NO-1NC Price U.S. $ Catalog Number 2NO-2NC Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Incandescent Lamp Full 120V No Lens Voltage AC/DC Red Green Amber Clear White Yellow Blue HT8GDFV HT8GDRV7 HT8GDGV7 HT8GDAV7 HT8GDCV7 HT8GDWV7 HT8GDYV7 HT8GDBV7 -- HT8GDRAV7 HT8GDGAV7 HT8GDAAV7 HT8GDVAV7 HT8GDWAV7 HT8GDYAV7 HT8GDBAV7 -- HT8GDRBV7 HT8GDGBV7 HT8GDABV7 HT8GDCBV7 HT8GDWBV7 HT8GDYBV7 HT8GDBBV7 -- HT8GDRABV7 HT8GDGABV7 HT8GDAABV7 HT8GDCABV7 HT8GDWABV7 HT8GDYABV7 HT8GDBABV7 -- HT8GDRF1Q1V7 HT8GDGF1Q1V7 HT8GDAF1Q1V7 HT8GDCF1Q1V7 HT8GDWF1Q1V7 HT8GDYF1Q1V7 HT8GDBF1Q1V7 24V No Lens AC/DC Red Green Amber Clear White Yellow Blue HT8GDFV HT8GDRV3 HT8GDGV3 HT8GDAV3 HT8GDCV3 HT8GDWV3 HT8GDYV3 HT8GDBV3 -- HT8GDRAV3 HT8GDGAV3 HT8GDAAV3 HT8GDVAV3 HT8GDWAV3 HT8GDYAV3 HT8GDBAV3 -- HT8GDRBV3 HT8GDGBV3 HT8GDABV3 HT8GDCBV3 HT8GDWBV3 HT8GDYBV3 HT8GDBBV3 -- HT8GDRABV3 HT8GDGABV3 HT8GDAABV3 HT8GDCABV3 HT8GDWABV3 HT8GDYABV3 HT8GDBABV3 -- HT8GDRF1Q1V3 HT8GDGF1Q1V3 HT8GDAF1Q1V3 HT8GDCF1Q1V3 HT8GDWF1Q1V3 HT8GDYF1Q1V3 HT8GDBF1Q1V3 No Lens Red Green Amber Clear White Yellow Blue HT8GDT1 HT8GDRT1 HT8GDGT1 HT8GDAT1 HT8GDCT1 HT8GDWT1 HT8GDYT1 HT8GDBT1 -- HT8GDRAT1 HT8GDGAT1 HT8GDAAT1 HT8GDCAT1 HT8GDWAT1 HT8GDYAT1 HT8GDBAT1 -- HT8GDRBT1 HT8GDGBT1 HT8GDABT1 HT8GDCBT1 HT8GDWBT1 HT8GDYBT1 HT8GDBBT1 -- HT8GDRABT1 HT8GDGABT1 HT8GDAABT1 HT8GDCABT1 HT8GDWABT1 HT8GDYABT1 HT8GDBABT1 -- HT8GDRF1Q1T1 HT8GDGF1Q1T1 HT8GDAF1Q1T1 HT8GDCF1Q1T1 HT8GDWF1Q1T1 HT8GDYF1Q1T1 HT8GDBF1Q1T1 Full 120V No Lens Voltage AC/DC Red Green Amber Clear White Yellow Blue HT8GDFV HT8GDRF7 HT8GDGF7 HT8GDAF7 HT8GDCF7 HT8GDWF7 HT8GDYF7 HT8GDBF7 -- HT8GDRAF7 HT8GDGAF7 HT8GDAAF7 HT8GDCAF7 HT8GDWAF7 HT8GDYAF7 HT8GDBAF7 -- HT8GDRBF7 HT8GDGBF7 HT8GDABF7 HT8GDCBF7 HT8GDWBF7 HT8GDYBF7 HT8GDBBF7 -- HT8GDRABF7 HT8GDGABF7 HT8GDAABF7 HT8GDCABF7 HT8GDWABF7 HT8GDYABF7 HT8GDBABF7 -- HT8GDRF1Q1F7 HT8GDGF1Q1F7 HT8GDAF1Q1F7 HT8GDCF1Q1F7 HT8GDWF1Q1F7 HT8GDYF1Q1F7 HT8GDBF1Q1F7 24V No Lens AC/DC Red Green Amber Clear White Yellow Blue HT8GDFV HT8GDRF3 HT8GDGF3 HT8GDAF3 HT8GDCF3 HT8GDWF3 HT8GDYF3 HT8GDBF3 -- HT8GDRAF3 HT8GDGAF3 HT8GDAAF3 HT8GDCAF3 HT8GDWAF3 HT8GDYAF3 HT8GDBAF3 -- HT8GDRBF3 HT8GDGBF3 HT8GDABF3 HT8GDCBF3 HT8GDWBF3 HT8GDYBF3 HT8GDBBF3 -- HT8GDRABF3 HT8GDGABF3 HT8GDAABF3 HT8GDCABF3 HT8GDWABF3 HT8GDYABF3 HT8GDBABF3 -- HT8GDRF1Q1F3 HT8GDGF1Q1F3 HT8GDAF1Q1F3 HT8GDCF1Q1F3 HT8GDWF1Q1F3 HT8GDYF1Q1F3 HT8GDBF1Q1F3 No Lens Red Green Amber Clear White Yellow Blue HT8GDT1 HT8GDRL1 HT8GDGL1 HT8GDAL1 HT8GDCL1 HT8GDWL1 HT8GDYL1 HT8GDBL1 -- HT8GDRAL1 HT8GDGAL1 HT8GDAAL1 HT8GDCAL1 HT8GDWAL1 HT8GDYAL1 HT8GDBAL1 -- HT8GDRBL1 HT8GDGBL1 HT8GDABL1 HT8GDCBL1 HT8GDWBL1 HT8GDYBL1 HT8GDBBL1 -- HT8GDRABL1 HT8GDGABL1 HT8GDAABL1 HT8GDCABL1 HT8GDWABL1 HT8GDYABL1 HT8GDBABL1 -- HT8GDRF1Q1L1 HT8GDGF1Q1L1 HT8GDAF1Q1L1 HT8GDCF1Q1L1 HT8GDWF1Q1L1 HT8GDYF1Q1L1 HT8GDBF1Q1L1 Transformer 120V AC LED Transformer 120V AC Light unit base operator without lens or bulb. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-208 Page 47-210 Page 47-206 1CD1C 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight 47-200 January 2010 HT800 Series, Indicating Light Units Indicating Light Units Incandescent or LED Full Voltage or Transformer Type Standard and PresTest Types 24V and 120V PresTest -- This device incorporates a press-to-test feature whereby depressing the lens disconnects the light from the source being monitored and connects the lamp to a continuously energized circuit for immediate detection of faulty lamps. Indicating Light Unit Cat. No. HT8HFRV7 PresTest Light Unit Cat. No. HT8GTRV7 Table 47-324. Indicating Light Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 Type Volts Lens Color Indicating Light 120V AC/DC No Lens Red Green Amber Clear White Yellow Blue HT8HFFV HT8HFRV7 HT8HFGV7 HT8HFAV7 HT8HFCV7 HT8HFWV7 HT8HFYV7 HT8HFBV7 HT8GTFV HT8GTRV7 HT8GTGV7 HT8GTAV7 HT8GTCV7 HT8GTWV7 HT8GTYV7 HT8GTBV7 24V AC/DC No Lens Red Green Amber Clear White Yellow Blue HT8HFFV HT8HFRV3 HT8HFGV3 HT8HFAV3 HT8HFCV3 HT8HFWV3 HT8HFYV3 HT8HFBV3 HT8GTFV HT8GTRV3 HT8GTGV3 HT8GTAV3 HT8GTCV3 HT8GTWV3 HT8GTYV3 HT8GTBV3 120V AC 50/60 Hz No Lens Red Green Amber Clear White Yellow Blue HT8HBT1 HT8HBRT1 HT8HBGT1 HT8HBAT1 HT8HBCT1 HT8HBWT1 HT8HBYT1 HT8HBBT1 HT8GTT1 HT8GTRT1 HT8GTGT1 HT8GTAT1 HT8GTCT1 HT8GTWT1 HT8GTYT1 HT8GTBT1 120V AC/DC No Lens Red Green Amber Clear White Yellow Blue HT8HFFV HT8HFRF7 HT8HFGF7 HT8HFAF7 HT8HFCF7 HT8HFWF7 HT8HFYF7 HT8HFBF7 HT8GTFV HT8GTRF7 HT8GTGF7 HT8GTAF7 HT8GTCF7 HT8GTWF7 HT8GTYF7 HT8GTBF7 24V AC/DC No Lens Red Green Amber Clear White Yellow Blue HT8HFFV HT8HFRF3 HT8HFGF3 HT8HFAF3 HT8HFCF3 HT8HFWF3 HT8HFYF3 HT8HFBF3 HT8GTFV HT8GTRF3 HT8GTGF3 HT8GTAF3 HT8GTCF3 HT8GTWF3 HT8GTYF3 HT8GTBF3 120V AC 50/60 Hz No Lens Red Green Amber Clear White Yellow Blue HT8HBT1 HT8HBRL1 HT8HBGL1 HT8HBAL1 HT8HBCL1 HT8HBWL1 HT8HBYL1 HT8HBBL1 HT8GTT1 HT8GTRL1 HT8GTGL1 HT8GTAL1 HT8GTCL1 HT8GTWL1 HT8GTYL1 HT8GTBL1 Catalog Number PresTest Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Incandescent Full Voltage Transformer 47 LED Full Voltage Transformer Light unit base operator without lens or bulb. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-208 Page 47-210 Page 47-206 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight 47-201 January 2010 HT800 Series, Push-Pull Units Push-Pull Units 40 mm Mushroom Head Two-Position Maintained Non-illuminated Table 47-325. 2-Position Push-Pull, Maintained, Non-illuminated -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 Contact Type Operator Position Button Color 2-Position Maintained Push-Pull Round Head Flat Head Mushroomhead Button Mushroomhead Button Maintained Maintained Out In Catalog Number No Contact NCLB NCLB Price U.S. $ -- Black Red Green HT8CBH HT8CBR HT8CBG HT8DBH HT8DBR HT8DBG O X Black Red Green HT8CBHA HT8CBRA HT8CBGA HT8DBHA HT8DBRA HT8DBGA X O Black Red Green HT8CBHB HT8CBRB HT8CBGB HT8DBHB HT8DBRB HT8DBGB O X X O Black Red Green HT8CBHAB HT8CBRAB HT8CBGAB HT8DBHAB HT8DBRAB HT8DBGAB X X O O Black Red Green HT8CBHD1B HT8CBRD1B HT8CBGD1B HT8DBHD1B HT8DBRD1B HT8DBGD1B X X O O Black Red Green HT8CBHD1D HT8CBRD1D HT8CBGD1D HT8DBHD1D HT8DBRD1D HT8DBGD1D NC NCLB NC Catalog Number -- NO NO-NC Price U.S. $ Round Head 2-Position Push-Pull Unit Cat. No. HT8CBR Flat Head 2-Position Push-Pull Unit Cat. No. HT8DBH NCLB = Normally Closed Late Break. 47 NO Contact Block NC Contact Block Table 47-326. Contact Blocks Description/Function Contact Type Catalog Number Standard Normally Open contact NO HT8A Standard Normally Closed contact NC HT8B Normally Open Early Make contact will make circuit before standard NO contact. DC ratings do not apply. NOEM HT8C Normally Closed Late Break contact will open after standard NC contact. DC ratings do not apply. NCLB HT8D Logic level, low voltage NO contact. Gold plated contacts. NO HT8E Price U.S. $ Maximum of (4) contact blocks per side or a total of (8) contact blocks recommended. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-208 Page 47-210 Page 47-206 1CD1C Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight 47-202 January 2010 HT800 Series, Illuminated Push-Pull Units Illuminated Push-Pull Units Incandescent or LED Full Voltage or Transformer Type 24V and 120V Illuminated Push-Pull Unit Cat. No. HT8FBRABV7 Table 47-327. Illuminated Push-Pull Units -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 Type Volts Lens Color Operator Only 1NO Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ 1NC Price U.S. $ Catalog Number 1NO-1NC Price U.S. $ Catalog Number 2NCLB Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Incandescent Lamp Full Voltage Transformer 120V Red AC/DC Green HT8FBRV7 HT8FBGV7 HT8FBRAV7 HT8FBGAV7 HT8FBRBV7 HT8FBGBV7 HT8FBRABV7 HT8FBGABV7 HT8FBRD1DV7 HT8FBGD1DV7 24V Red AC/DC Green HT8FBRV3 HT8FBGV3 HT8FBRAV3 HT8FBGAV3 HT8FBRBV3 HT8FBGBV3 HT8FBRABV3 HT8FBGABV3 HT8FBRD1DV3 HT8FBGD1DV3 120V AC Red Green HT8FBRT1 HT8FBGT1 HT8FBRAT1 HT8FBGAT1 HT8FBRBT1 HT8FBGBT1 HT8FBRABT1 HT8FBGABT1 HT8FBRD1DT1 HT8FBGD1DT1 120V Red AC/DC Green HT8FBRF7 HT8FBGF7 HT8FBRAF7 HT8FBGAF7 HT8FBRBF7 HT8FBGBF7 HT8FBRABF7 HT8FBGABF7 HT8FBRD1DF7 HT8FBGD1DF7 24V Red AC/DC Green HT8FBRF3 HT8FBGF3 HT8FBRAF3 HT8FBGAF3 HT8FBRBF3 HT8FBGBF3 HT8FBRABF3 HT8FBGABF3 HT8FBRD1DF3 HT8FBGD1DF3 120V AC HT8FBRL1 HT8FBGL1 HT8FBRAL1 HT8FBGAL1 HT8FBRBL1 . HT8FBGBL1 HT8FBRABL1 HT8FBGABL1 HT8FBRD1DL1 HT8FBGD1DL1 LED Full Voltage Transformer Red Green Complete illuminated push-pull switches will not fit in a standard 3" deep enclosure. 47 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-208 Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-197 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-210 Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-206 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight 47-203 January 2010 HT800 Series, Selector Switch Units Selector Switch Units Two-, Three- and Four-Position Non-illuminated Standard Knob Operator Cat. No. HT8JAH3A Standard Lever Operator Cat. No. HT8JDH3A Table 47-328. 2-Position Selector Switch Units, Non-illuminated -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 Contact Type Operator Position Operating Mode M = Maintained S = Momentary Standard Black Knob Catalog Number No Contacts 2NO-2NC Price U.S. $ Catalog Number -- -- M S M M M S HT8JAH3A HT8JKH3A HT8JNH3A HT8JDH3A HT8JLH3A HT8JPH3A O X M S M M M S HT8JAH3AA5 HT8JKH3AA5 HT8JNH3AA5 HT8JDH3AA5 HT8JLH3AA5 HT8JPH3AA5 X O O X M S M M M S HT8JAH3AAA5 HT8JKH3AAA5 HT8JNH3AAA5 HT8JDH3AAA5 HT8JLH3AAA5 HT8JPH3AAA5 X O X O O X O X M S M M M S HT8JAH3AF1Q1 HT8JKH3AF1Q1 HT8JNH3AF1Q1 HT8JDH3AF1Q1 HT8JLH3AF1Q1 HT8JPH3AF1Q1 1NO 2NO Standard Black Lever Price U.S. $ X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 47 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-208 Page 47-205 Page 47-210 Page 47-206 1CD1C Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight 47-204 January 2010 HT800 Series, Selector Switch Units Standard Knob Operator Cat. No. HT8JBH1D Standard Lever Operator Cat. No. HT8JEH1D Table 47-329. 3-Position Selector Switch Units, Non-illuminated -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 Contact Type Operator Position Operating Mode M = Maintained S = Momentary Standard Black Knob Catalog Number No Contacts 2NO-2NC Price U.S. $ Catalog Number -- -- -- M S M S M M M M M M S S HT8JBH1D HT8JRH1D HT8JUH1D HT8JXH1D HT8JEH1D HT8JSH1D HT8JVH1D HT8JYH1D X O O O O X M S M S M M M M M M S S HT8JBH1DAA5 HT8JRH1DAA5 HT8JUH1DAA5 HT8JXH1DAA5 HT8JEH1DAA5 HT8JSH1DAA5 HT8JVH1DAA5 HT8JYH1DAA5 X O O O X O O O X M S M S M M M M M M S S HT8JBH1DF1Q1 HT8JRH1DF1Q1 HT8JUH1DF1Q1 HT8JXH1DF1Q1 HT8JEH1DF1Q1 HT8JSH1DF1Q1 HT8JVH1DF1Q1 HT8JYH1DF1Q1 X O O X O X O X O X X O M S M S M M M M M M S S HT8JBH1DF1Q1 HT8JRH1DF1Q1 HT8JUH1DF1Q1 HT8JXH1DF1Q1 HT8JEH1DF1Q1 HT8JSH1DF1Q1 HT8JVH1DF1Q1 HT8JYH1DF1Q1 2NO 2NO-2NC Standard Black Lever Price U.S. $ X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. For OXO, NC contacts must be wired in series -- see Table 47-332 on Page 47-205. 47 Standard Knob Operator Cat. No. HT8JCH8E Standard Lever Operator Cat. No. HT8JFH8E Table 47-330. 4-Position Selector Switch Units, Non-illuminated -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 Contact Type Operator Position Operating Mode M = Maintained S = Momentary Standard Black Knob Catalog Number No Contacts 2NO-2NC -- -- -- -- X O O O O X O O O O X O O O O X Standard Black Lever Price U.S. $ Catalog Number M S M M M M M M M M M S HT8JCH8E HT8LNH8E HT8LRH8E HT8JFH8E HT8LPH8E HT8LSH8E M S M M M M M M M M M S HT8JCH8EF1Q1 HT8LNH8EF1Q1 HT8LRH8EF1Q1 HT8JFH8EF1Q1 HT8LPH8EF1Q1 HT8LSH8EF1Q1 Price U.S. $ X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-208 Page 47-205 Page 47-210 Page 47-206 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight 47-205 January 2010 HT800 Series, Selector Switch Selection, Contact Blocks Selector Switch Contact Block Selection Contact Blocks For 2-, 3- and 4-Position Selector Switches Table 47-331. 2-Position Selector Switch (Cam Code 3A) Operator Position Left Right NO Contact Block X Table 47-334. Contact Blocks O O NO X NC or NC or NO Table 47-332. 3-Position Selector Switch (Cam Code 1D) Operator Position X O O Left O X Right NC O X O X X X X O Contact Type Catalog Number Standard Normally Open contact NO HT8A Standard Normally Closed contact NC HT8B Normally Open Early Make contact will NOEM make circuit before standard NO contact. DC ratings do not apply. HT8C Normally Closed Late Break contact will NCLB open after standard NC contact. DC ratings do not apply. HT8D Logic level, low voltage NO contact. Gold plated contacts. HT8E NO Price U.S. $ See Page 47-196 for contact block electrical ratings. Table 47-335. Contact Block Location (Viewed from Rear) Suffix Codes O O Description/Function NO NC Contact Block NC NO NC NC Left X O O O O X O O O O X O O O O X Right Side A A2 B1 B2 C C2 D1 D2 E1 F1 F4 A5 A6 B B6 C5 C6 D D6 E5 Q1 Table 47-333. 4-Position Selector Switch (Cam Code 8E) Operator Position Left Side = = = = = = = = = = = NO 2NO NC 2NC NOEM 2 NOEM NCLB 2 NCLB NOEM-NCLB NO & NC 1NO-1NC = = = = = = = = = = NO 2NO NC 2NC NOEM 2 NOEM NCLB 2 NCLB NOEM-NCLB NO & NC Maximum of (2) contact blocks per side or a total of (4) contact blocks recommended. Right NO NC NO NC Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 47-206 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight January 2010 HT800 Series, Legend Plates Options Legend Plates Standard Jumbo Table 47-336. For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights Legend Color of Field Catalog Number (Standard) Price U.S. $ Catalog Number (Jumbo) Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16" High 47 CLAMP CLOSE DOWN EMERG. STOP FAST FASTER FEEDER ON FEEDER OFF FORWARD HIGH IN INCH JOG JOG FOR. JOG REV. LOW LOWER LUBE-FAIL MOTOR RUN MOTOR STOP OFF ON OPEN OUT POWER ON RAISE READY RESET REVERSE RUN SAFE SLOW SLOWER START STOP TEST TRANSFER TRIP UNCLAMP UP Black Black Black Red Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Red Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Red Black Black Black Black Black HT8SP90 HT8SP73 HT8SP74 HT8SP13 HT8SP75 HT8SP87 HT8SP94 HT8SP95 HT8SP15 HT8SP16 HT8SP17 HT8SP18 HT8SP19 HT8SP20 HT8SP21 HT8SP22 HT8SP23 HT8SP92 HT8SP81 HT8SP82 HT8SP24 HT8SP25 HT8SP26 HT8SP27 HT8SP80 HT8SP28 HT8SP86 HT8SP29 HT8SP30 HT8SP31 HT8SP85 HT8SP32 HT8SP88 HT8SP33 HT8SP34 HT8SP83 HT8SP93 HT8SP84 HT8SP91 HT8SP35 Table 47-337. For Selector Switch Operators Price U.S. $ Legend Color of Field Catalog Number (Standard) Price U.S. $ Catalog Number (Jumbo) Price U.S. $ 2-Position -- 3/16" High Lettering HT8LP90 HT8LP73 HT8LP74 HT8LP13 HT8LP75 HT8LP87 HT8LP94 HT8LP95 HT8LP15 HT8LP16 HT8LP17 HT8LP18 HT8LP19 HT8LP20 HT8LP21 HT8LP22 HT8LP23 HT8LP92 HT8LP81 HT8LP82 HT8LP24 HT8LP25 HT8LP26 HT8LP27 HT8LP80 HT8LP28 HT8LP86 HT8LP29 HT8LP30 HT8LP31 HT8LP85 HT8LP32 HT8LP88 HT8LP33 HT8LP34 HT8LP83 HT8LP93 HT8LP84 HT8LP91 HT8LP35 FOR. REV. Black HT8SP38 HT8LP38 HAND AUTO Black HT8SP39 HT8LP39 HIGH LOW Black HT8SP40 HT8LP40 JOG RUN Black HT8SP41 HT8LP41 MAN. AUTO Black HT8SP67 HT8LP67 OFF ON Black HT8SP42 HT8LP42 OPEN CLOSE Black HT8SP43 HT8LP43 RUN JOG Black HT8SP44 HT8LP44 SAFE RUN Black HT8SP45 HT8LP45 START JOG Black HT8SP46 HT8LP46 START STOP Black HT8SP47 HT8LP47 UP DOWN Black HT8SP48 HT8LP48 3-Position -- 3/16" High Lettering AUTO OFF HAND Black HT8SP49 HT8LP49 FOR. OFF REV. Black HT8SP50 HT8LP50 FOR. SAFE REV. Black HT8SP69 HT8LP69 HAND OFF AUTO Black HT8SP51 HT8LP51 MAN. OFF AUTO Black HT8SP68 HT8LP68 OPEN OFF CLOSE Black HT8SP53 HT8LP53 RUN SAFE JOG Black HT8SP70 HT8LP70 UP OFF DOWN Black HT8SP54 HT8LP54 ON STOP SAFE Black HT8SP71 HT8LP71 Table 47-338. For Push-Pull Units Legend Color of Field Catalog Price Number U.S. $ (Standard) Catalog Number (Jumbo) ON / OFF Black HT8PP5 HT8R5 OPEN / CLOSE Black HT8PP8 HT8R8 UP / DOWN Black HT8PP11 HT8R11 Price U.S. $ 3/32" high lettering. 1/8" high lettering. Table 47-339. Blank Plastic Legend Plates -- Square Legend Color of Field Catalog Number (Standard) Price U.S. $ Catalog Number (Jumbo) Black White/Silver HT8SP76 HT8LP76 White Red/ Black HT8SP77 HT8LP77 Price U.S. $ Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-213 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight 47-207 January 2010 HT800 Series, Legend Plates Legend Plates with Non-standard Markings When Ordering Specify Catalog Number of Blank Plate per Table 47-340. Insert the following into Order Notes: Legend, Letter Size per Table 47-341 and Locations per Figure 47-135. Ordering Example: Jumbo Size HT8LP Series Catalog No.: HT85P76STAMP Letter Size: 3/32 inch (2.4 mm) Pos. A -- POWER HOUSE Pos. B -- START PUMP 1 A B C D K Legend Characters Available ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX YZ/-.,1234567890 Standard Size HT8SP Series A B4 B G F AB AE AF C4 A4 A H D4 G I Figure 47-135. Legend Positions Table 47-340. Blank Plastic Legend Plates for Non-standard Markings -- Plastic Legend Black White Color of Field Standard White/Silver Red/Black HT8SP76STAMP HT8SP77STAMP Catalog Number Jumbo Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ HT8LP76STAMP HT8LP77STAMP Table 47-341. Maximum Characters per Legend Plate and Approximate Dimensions Top (Aluminum and Plastic) Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width Style Height Character Size 3/32" High Number of Lines 1/8" High Number of Characters Number of Lines 3/16" High Number of Characters Number of Lines Number of Characters Standard 1.75 (44.5) 1.75 (44.5) Square 2 18 2 13 1 9 Jumbo 2.19 (55.6) 2.19 (55.6) Square 5 23 3 18 2 12 Can be used on top row only of any enclosure. Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 47-208 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight January 2010 HT800 Series, Accessories Accessories Table 47-342. HT800 Accessories 47 Description Catalog Number Illuminated Pushbutton Guard HT8A15 Wrench Tool HT8WRENCH Lamp/Bulb Removal Tool HT8LAMPTOOL Thrust Washer (Anti-rotation) (Included with every operator) HT8X1 Trim Ring (Included with every operator) HT8X2 Sealing/Spacer Washer (Five included with every operator) HT8X3 Grounding Kit for Pushbuttons and Selector Switches (Included with every operator) HT8GR1 Grounding Kit for Indicating Lights (Included with indicating lights) HT8GR2 Price U.S. $ Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight 47-209 January 2010 HT800 Series, Accessories Table 47-343. Light Units Type Voltage Catalog Number Full Voltage 24V AC/DC 120V AC/DC HT8F3V3 HT8F7V8 Transformer 120V AC HT8L1T1 Price U.S. $ Table 47-344. Replacement Bulbs and LEDs Light Unit Voltage Color Catalog Number -- -- -- HT8BULBV1 HT8BULBV3 HT8BULBV7 Red Green Amber/Orange HT8LEDRF1 HT8LEDGF1 HT8LEDAF1 White/Clear Yellow Blue HT8LEDWF1 HT8LEDYF1 HT8LEDBF1 Red Green Amber/Orange HT8LEDRF3 HT8LEDGF3 HT8LEDAF3 White/Clear Yellow Blue HT8LEDWF3 HT8LEDYF3 HT8LEDBF3 Red Green Amber/Orange HT8LEDRF7 HT8LEDGF7 HT8LEDAF7 White/Clear Yellow Blue HT8LEDWF7 HT8LEDYF7 HT8LEDBF7 Price U.S. $ Incandescent 6V 24V 120V LED 6 - 12V (For use with transformers with 6V secondary winding) Incandescent Bulb LED Bulb 24V 120V Table 47-345. Replacement Lenses Color Indicating Lights Price U.S. $ PresTest Lights Illuminated Pushbuttons Amber Blue Clear Green HT8LA HT8LB HT8LC HT8LG HT8BA HT8BB HT8BC HT8BG Red White Yellow HT8LR HT8LW HT8LY HT8BR HT8BW HT8BY Price U.S. $ Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight 47-210 January 2010 HT800 Series, Dimensions Dimensions Stacking Screw Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. 4.60 (116.8) 3.70 (94.0) 2.90 (73.7) 2.00 (50.8) Panel 0.90 (22.9) Extended 1.40 (35.6) #6-32 Posi-drive Saddle Clamp Type 1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG Terminal Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. Copper Wire Only 0.75 (19.1) Flush 1.00 (25.4) Side View 2.00 (50.8) Back View Recommended maximum of 4 tandem stacks of contact blocks behind operator. At users' discretion, two additional tandem stacks may be added. Recommended 4 Stacks (8 Contact Blocks Total) Optional 2 Stacks Bottom View Back, Side and Bottom Views of Pushbutton Operator with Attached Contact Blocks Figure 47-136. Momentary Pushbuttons -- Non-illuminated -- Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Light Unit #6-32 Posi-drive Saddle Clamp Type 1x16 AWG to 2x14 AWG Terminal Torque: 7 in-lbs Max. Copper Wire Only 47 5.15 (130.8) 4.35 (110.5) 3.55 (90.2) 2.75 (69.9) Panel 1.50 (38.1) Stacking Screw Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. 1.40 (35.6) Contact Block #6-32 Posi-drive Saddle Clamp Type 1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG Terminal Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. Copper Wire Only 1.00 (25.4) 2.00 (50.8) Back View Side View Recommended maximum of 4 tandem stacks of contact blocks behind operator. At users' discretion, two additional tandem stacks may be added. Optional 2 Stacks Recommended 4 Stacks (8 Contact Blocks Total) Bottom View Back, Side and Bottom Views of Pushbutton Operator with Attached Contact Blocks Figure 47-137. Illuminated Pushbuttons -- Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight 47-211 January 2010 HT800 Series, Dimensions Stacking Screw Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. 4.60 (116.8) 3.70 (94.0) 2.90 (73.7) 2.00 (50.8) Panel 1.50 (38.1) 1.40 (35.6) #6-32 Posi-drive 1.00 Saddle Clamp Type (25.4) 1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG Terminal Torque: 2.00 (50.8) 12 in-lbs Max. Copper Wire Only Back View Recommended maximum of 4 tandem stacks of contact blocks behind operator. At users' discretion, two additional tandem stacks may be added. Side View Optional 2 Stacks Recommended 4 Stacks (8 Contact Blocks Total) Bottom View Back, Side and Bottom Views of Mushroom Head Operator with Attached Contact Blocks Figure 47-138. Mushroom Head Pushbuttons and Round Head MRH Push-Pull Operators -- Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Light Unit #6-32 Posi-drive Saddle Clamp Type 1x22 AWG to 2 x14 AWG Terminal Torque: 7 in-lbs Max. Copper Wire Only 5.15 (130.8) 4.35 (110.5) Panel 1.30 (33.0) 3.55 (90.2) 2.75 (69.9) 1.40 (35.6) Stacking Screw Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. Contact Block 1.00 #6-32 Posi-drive (25.4) Saddle Clamp Type 1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG 2.00 (50.8) Terminal Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. Copper Wire Only Back View Side View Recommended maximum of 4 tandem stacks of contact blocks behind operator. At users' discretion, two additional tandem stacks may be added. Contact blocks mount directly to operator adaptor in non-illuminated version. Optional 2 Stacks Recommended 4 Stacks (8 Contact Blocks Total) Bottom View Back, Side and Bottom Views of Push-Pull Operator with Attached Contact Blocks Figure 47-139. Illuminated and Non-illuminated Flat Head MRH Push-Pull Operators -- Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 47-212 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight January 2010 HT800 Series, Dimensions Panel #6-32 Posi-drive Saddle Clamp Type 1x22 AWG to 2 x14 AWG Terminal Torque: 7 in-lbs Max. Copper Wire Only 1.30 (33.0) Stacking Screw Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. 1.68 (42.7) Back View Side View Light Unit Assembly 1.67 (42.4) 1.26 (32.0) Bottom View Back, Side and Bottom Views of Indicating Light Operator with Attached Contact Blocks Figure 47-140. Indicating Lights -- Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Stacking Screw Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. Panel 2.90 (73.7) 2.00 (50.8) 1.20 (38.1) 47 1.40 (35.6) #6-32 Posi-drive Saddle Clamp Type 1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG Terminal Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. Copper Wire Only 1.00 (25.4) Side View 2.00 (50.8) Back View Recommended 2 Stacks (4 Contact Blocks Total) Bottom View Back, Side and Bottom Views of Selector Switch Operator with Attached Contact Blocks Figure 47-141. Selector Switches-- Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight 47-213 January 2010 HT800 Series, Dimensions 2.50 (63.5) 0.18 (4.6) 2.19 (55.6) 0.68 (17.3) 1.77 (45) 2.50 (63.5) 2.19 (55.6) 1.77 (45) Optional Notch Locations Standard Jumbo 1.20 (30.5) Diameter Figure 47-142. Mounting Matrix and Minimum Panel Spacing Requirements in Inches (mm) Figure 47-143. Legend Plates -- Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 47 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight 47-214 January 2010 HT800 Series, Catalog Number Structure Catalog Number Structure For deciphering Catalog Numbers. Not all combinations are suitable for ordering. Table 47-346. HT800 Catalog Numbering System for Pushbuttons, Push-Pulls and Indicating Lights HT8 GB R AB T1 Style Pushbuttons AA = Flush AB = Extended AE = Mushroomhead Illuminated Pushbuttons GB = Illuminated PB Push-Pull Operators CB = 2-Position, Maintained Indicating Lights HF = Full Voltage/Resistor Type HB = Transformer Type Push-to-Test Operators GT = All Types Light Unit Type/Voltage F3 = 24V FV, LED F7 = 120V FV, LED L1 = 120V Transformer, LED T1 = 120V Transformer, Incand. V3 = 24V FV, Incand. V7 = 120V Res., Incand. Button Color G = Green H = Black R = Red Contact Block Location (viewed from rear) Left Side Lens Color A = Amber/Orange B = Blue C = Clear G = Green R = Red W = White Y = Yellow A A2 B1 B2 C C2 D1 D2 E1 F1 F4 = = = = = = = = = = = Right Side NO 2NO NC 2NC NOEM 2 NOEM NCLB 2 NCLB NOEM-NCLB NO & NC 1NO-1NC A5 A6 B B6 C5 C6 D D6 E5 Q1 = = = = = = = = = = NO 2NO NC 2NC NOEM 2 NOEM NCLB 2 NCLB NOEM-NCLB NO & NC Maximum of (4) contact blocks per side or a total of (8) contact blocks recommended. Table 47-347. HT800 Selector Switch Catalog Numbering System HT8 JA H 3A F 1 Q 1 Style Selector Switches JA = 2-Pos., Knob, Maint. JB = 3-Pos., Knob, Maint. JC = 4-Pos., Knob, Maint. JD = 2-Pos., Lever, Maint. JE = 3-Pos., Lever, Maint. JF = 4-Pos., Lever, Maint. JK = 2-Pos., Knob, Spr. Rtn., Left JL = 2-Pos., Lever, Spr. Rtn., Left JN = 2-Pos., Knob, Spr. Rtn., Right JP = 2-Pos., Lever, Spr. Rtn., Right JR = 3-Pos., Knob, Spr. Rtn., Left JS = 3-Pos., Lever, Spr. Rtn., Left JU = 3-Pos., Knob, Spr. Rtn., Right JV = 3-Pos., Lever, Spr. Rtn., Right JX = 3-Pos., Knob, Spr. Rtn., Both JY = 3-Pos., Lever, Spr. Rtn., Both LN = 4-Pos., Knob, Spr. Rtn., Pos 1 to 2 LP = 4-Pos., Lever, Spr. Rtn., Pos 1 to 2 LR = 4-Pos., Knob, Spr. Rtn., Pos 4 to 3 LS = 4-Pos., Lever, Spr. Rtn., Pos 4 to 3 47 Contact Block Location (viewed from rear) Switch Color Left Side H = Black Cam Location/Type 1D - For all 3-Pos. 3A - For all 2-Pos. 8E - For all 4-Pos. A A2 B1 B2 C C2 D1 D2 E1 F1 F4 = = = = = = = = = = = NO 2NO NC 2NC NOEM 2 NOEM NCLB 2 NCLB NOEM-NCLB NO & NC 1NO-1NC Right Side A5 A6 B B6 C5 C6 D D6 E5 Q1 = = = = = = = = = = NO 2NO NC 2NC NOEM 2 NOEM NCLB 2 NCLB NOEM-NCLB NO & NC Maximum of (2) contact blocks per side or a total of (4) contacts blocks recommended. For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-215 January 2010 10250T Heavy-Duty Oiltight and E34 Corrosion Resistant Contents Description Page Description Page Product Description . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Momentary Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-illuminated Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicating Light Units . . . . Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights. . . . Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Push-Pulls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switch Units . . . . Selector Switch Selection . . Selector Switch Operators . Illuminated Selector Switch Operators. . . . . . . 47-215 47-216 47-216 Options Contact Block and Mounting Adapters . . . . . Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting and Assembly . . . . Catalog Number Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-239 47-240 47-241 47-216 47-217 47-242 Product Description 47-218 47-220 47-221 47-223 47-224 47-225 47-226 47-229 47-231 47-233 47-235 47-237 All the Industry-Proven Quality of Eaton's Cutler-Hammer(R) 10250T and E34 Series of Logic Devices, plus Class I Division 2 Certification The 10250T1H consists of a normally open-normally closed factory sealed contact block that is UL Listed for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C and D (NEC 500 - 503) -- Class I, Zone 2, IIB + H2 (NEC 505) hazardous locations and is rated for both NEMA A600 and NEMA Q300. 10250T and E34 illuminated components have also been UL Listed for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C and D (NEC 500 - 503) -- Class I, Zone 2, IIB + H2 (NEC 505). This, combined with the industryproven Cutler-Hammer 10250T 30.5 mm pushbutton line, offers a complete solution to Division 2 hazardous location requirements. Class I Division 2 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Single composite catalog numbers for complete assembled stations and operators for use in Division 2 hazardous locations are featured throughout this section. Operator The 30.5 mm 10250T pushbutton line features a zinc die cast construction with chrome-plated housing and mounting nut. Eaton's Cutler-Hammer E34 Series 30.5 mm pushbutton line features the same rugged die cast construction of our 10250T line with an additional twolayer 100% solid thermosetting cathodic epoxy coating. This coating provides a flat black smooth, consistent, corrosion resistant surface that has passed a demanding 600 hour salt spray test. (The industry standard for this 4X test requires only 200 hours.) Ultraviolet Light E34 epoxy coating is not recommended for use in applications where exposure to ultraviolet light exists -- use NEMA 4X 10250T operators. Ratings Our Class I Division 2 line of pushbuttons are UL Listed (NEMA type) 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13. Our Class I Division 2 E34 line meets IEC 947-1 IP66 standards and the cathodic coating meets FDA 3A sanitary chemical resistance requirements. For a complete listing of all applicable ratings see Page 47-217. 47 47-216 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations January 2010 10250T Heavy-Duty Oiltight and E34 Corrosion Resistant Liquid Drainage E34 Grounding Eaton's Cutler-Hammer pushbutton operators offer front of panel drainage via holes in the operator bushing. Hidden from view by the mounting nut, these holes prevent buildup of liquid inside the operator, which can prevent operation in freezing environments. The holes also provide a route for escaping liquid in high pressure washdowns, effectively relieving pressure from the internal diaphragm seal, ensuring reliable sealing in applications even beyond NEMA 4. E34 line of operators is equipped with a ground screw terminal as part of its die cast construction. This earthing terminal provides an easily accessible point for grounding operators when used in a painted or nonmetallic enclosure and eliminates the need for extra kits when daisy chain grounding is required. Standards and Certifications UL 508 -- File No. E131568 UL 1604 -- File No. E10323 CSA Certified C22.2 No.14 -- File No. LR 68551 CSA Certified C22.2 No. 213-M1987 -- File No. LR 20713 Ingress Protection Standard Indicating Lights UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13 IEC IP65 All Other Operators UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 IEC IP65 Nib Foam Neoprene Panel Sealing Gasket Drainage Hole Earth Terminal Flexible Diaphragm Features Colorfast Molded Button Drainage Hole Mounting Nut 47 E34 Grounding Nibs Stainless Steel Operating Spring Figure 47-144. Diaphragm Seal 10250T Grounding 10250T line operators have "grounding nibs" -- four metal points on the operator casting designed to bite through most paints and other coatings on metal panels to enhance the grounding connection when the operator is securely tightened. 10250T Grounding Nibs Factory sealed contact blocks Heavy-duty zinc die cast construction NEMA rated 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Front-of-panel drainage holes Grounding nibs on the operator casing Solid thermosetting cathodic epoxy coating on E34 Corrosion resistance in E34 Benefits Pushbutton for hazardous locations Drainage holes prevent buildup of liquid inside the operator which can prevent operation in freezing environments Grounding nibs bite through paint and other coatings to provide secure ground Suitable for corrosive environments (E34 only) Earth terminal provides additional grounding point and allows for daisy chain grounding (E34 line) For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-217 January 2010 10250T Heavy-Duty Oiltight and E34 Corrosion Resistant Technical Data and Specifications Electrical Ratings Table 47-348. Contact Block Meet or Exceed NEMA Contact Rating Designations A600 and Q300 Mechanical Ratings Frequency of Operation All pushbuttons: 6000 operations/hr. Key and lever selector switches: 3000 operations/hr. Life Pushbuttons: 10 x 106 operations Contact block: 10 x 106 operations Key and lever selector switches: 0.25 x 106 operations Shock Resistance Duration/force: 20 mS 5g Climatic Conditions Operating: 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) Storage: -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C) Altitude: 6,562 ft. (2,000m) Humidity: Max. 95% RH @ 60C Description A600 (AC) 240V 480V 600V 125V 250V 60 30 15 12 0.55 0.27 Make and Emergency Interrupting Capacity (Amps) Normal Load Break (Amps) 6 3 10 10 10 10 7200 720 7200 720 7200 720 7200 720 Thermal Current (Amps) Voltamperes Max. Make Max. Break Terminals All illuminated devices have operating temperatures below 100C except for the following Catalog Numbers with temperature codes per NEC table 500-5(d) and UL 1604: Terminals are saddle clamp type for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 sq. mm) to 2 x 14 AWG (4.0 sq. mm) conductors Torque = 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm) Degree of protection against direct electrical contact: IP2X with fingerproof shroud Contact Blocks Terminals are Stainless Steel saddle clamp type for 1 x 18 - 14 AWG (0.75 - 2.5 sq. mm) solid or stranded copper conductor Torque = 9 lb-in (1.0 Nm) with size 2 Phillips screwdriver Degree of protection against direct electrical contact: IP2X with fingerproof shroud 1.2 0.55 0.27 2.5 2.5 69 69 69 69 Bulbs -- Average Life Transformer type: 20,000 hrs. Resistor/direct voltage type: 2,500 hrs. min. @ rated voltage LED: 60,000 to 100,000 hrs. Note: For additional technical information, see Pub. TD.7.4.T.E.04. 1.5 Light Units Light Units Q300 (DC) 120V Table 47-349. Temperature Codes 10250T E34 Temp. Code 10250T201H E34RB120H T3C 10250T202H E34RB240H T3A 10250T471H E34SB120H TC3 10250T472H E34SB240H T3B 10250T80H -- T3C 10250T81H -- T3B 47 All Selector Switches w/120MB Lamp T3C All Illuminated Devices with Lamp 1835 T4A Mounting and Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-241 CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-218 January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices -- Momentary Pushbutton Units Product Selection Momentary Pushbutton Units Table 47-350. Non-illuminated Flush and Extended Pushbuttons -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D Contact Type Button Color Flush Button Extended Button 10250T Catalog Number E34 Price U.S. $ Catalog Number 10250T Price U.S. $ E34 Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Catalog Number 1NO-1NC Black Red Green 10250T706B 10250T706R 10250T706G E34EX706B E34EX706R E34EX706G 10250T708B 10250T708R 10250T708G E34EX708B E34EX708R E34EX708G 2NO-2NC Black Red Green 10250T707B 10250T707R 10250T707G E34EX707B E34EX707R E34EX707G 10250T709B 10250T709R 10250T709G E34EX709B E34EX709R E34EX709G Price U.S. $ To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in Catalog Number with appropriate Suffix Code from Color Selection Table below. Example: 10250T706Y Table 47-351. Non-illuminated Mushroom and Jumbo Mushroom Pushbuttons -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D Contact Type Button Color Mushroom Button Catalog Number 47 Jumbo Mushroom Button 10250T 10250T E34 Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ E34 Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Catalog Number 1NO-1NC Black Red Green 10250T710B 10250T710R 10250T710G E34EX710B E34EX710R E34EX710G 10250T712B 10250T712R 10250T712G E34EX712B E34EX712R E34EX712G 2NO-2NC Black Red Green 10250T711B 10250T711R 10250T711G E34EX711B E34EX711R E34EX711G 10250T713B 10250T713R 10250T713G E34EX713B E34EX713R E34EX713G Price U.S. $ To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in Catalog Number with appropriate Suffix Code from Color Selection Table below. Example: 10250T710Y Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet applications. Table 47-352. Color Selection Table Color Suffix Code Black Red Green Yellow White Blue Orange Red (EMERG. STOP) B R G Y W L N E Blue not available on Jumbo Mushroom Pushbutton. Orange is only available on Flush or Extended Pushbuttons. Red with EMERG. STOP engraved on button head for Jumbo Mushroom Pushbutton only. Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light. Accessories . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . Discount Symbol. . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-155 & 47-187 Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191 Page 47-240 Pages 47-151 & 47-184 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-219 January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices -- Momentary Pushbutton Units Momentary Pushbutton Units (Continued) Momentary Contact Non-illuminated Booted or Guarded Table 47-353. 10250T Pushbuttons Booted and Guarded -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D Contact Type Button Color Booted Flush Button Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Booted Extended Button Guarded Extended Button Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Price U.S. $ 1NO-1NC Black Red Green 10250T706BB 10250T706RB 10250T706GB 10250T708BB 10250T708RB 10250T708GB 10250T706BG 10250T706RG 10250T706GG 2NO-2NC Black Red Green 10250T707BB 10250T707RB 10250T707GB 10250T709BB 10250T709RB 10250T709GB 10250T707BG 10250T707RG 10250T707GG Red Booted Flush Pushbutton is not recommended for STOP function. To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in Catalog Number with appropriate Suffix Code from Color Selection Table below. Example: 10250T706YG Table 47-354. E34 Pushbuttons Booted and Guarded -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D Contact Type Button Color Booted Flush Button Booted Extended Button Guarded Extended Button 47 Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ 1NO-1NC Black Red Green E34EX706BB E34EX706RB E34EX706GB E34EX708BB E34EX708RB E34EX708GB E34EX706BG E34EX706RG E34EX706GG 2NO-2NC Black Red Green E34EX707BB E34EX707RB E34EX707GB E34EX709BB E34EX709RB E34EX709GB E34EX707BG E34EX707RG E34EX707GG Red Booted Flush Pushbutton is not recommended for STOP function. To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in Catalog Number with appropriate Suffix Code from Color Selection Table below. Example: 10250T706YG Table 47-355. Color Selection Table Color Suffix Code Black Red Green Yellow White Blue Orange B R G Y W L N Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light. Accessories . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . Discount Symbol . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-155 & 47-187 Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191 Page 47-240 Pages 47-151 & 47-184 1CD1C Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-220 January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Momentary Pushbutton Components Pushbuttons Table 47-356. Non-illuminated Pushbuttons, Momentary Contact -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Color Flush Button 10250T Catalog Number Black Red Green Yellow Gray White Blue Orange 10250T101 10250T102 10250T103 10250T104 10250T105 10250T106 10250T108 10250T109 Extended Button E34 Price Catalog U.S. $ Number 10250T Price Catalog U.S. $ Number E34PB1 E34PB2 E34PB3 E34PB4 E34PB5 E34PB6 E34PB7 E34PB8 Half Shrouded Button E34 10250T Price Catalog U.S. $ Number 10250T111 10250T112 10250T113 10250T120 -- 10250T116 10250T118 10250T119 Price Vertical U.S. $ Catalog Number E34EB1 E34EB2 E34EB3 E34EB4 E34EB5 E34EB6 E34EB7 E34EB8 10250T501 10250T502 10250T503 10250T504 10250T505 10250T506 10250T508 10250T509 E34 Horizontal Catalog Number Price Vertical U.S. $ Catalog Number 10250T511 10250T512 10250T513 10250T514 10250T515 10250T516 10250T518 10250T519 E34EVB1 E34EVB2 E34EVB3 E34EVB4 E34EVB5 E34EVB6 E34EVB7 E34EVB8 Horizontal Catalog Number Price U.S. $ E34EHB1 E34EHB2 E34EHB3 E34EHB4 E34EHB5 E34EHB6 E34EHB7 E34EHB8 To order operator with factory assembled Extended Retaining Nut, 10250TA12, for thick panel applications, add Suffix letter E to listed Catalog Number. Table 47-357. Mushroom Head Non-illuminated Pushbuttons, Momentary Contact -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Color Mushroom Button 10250T Catalog Number 47 Black Red Red (EMERG. STOP) Green Yellow Blue 10250T121 10250T122 -- 10250T123 10250T124 10250T129 Anodized Aluminum Jumbo Mushroom Button 10250T E34 Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ E34LB1 E34LB2 -- E34LB3 E34LB4 E34LB6 Catalog Number 10250T171 10250T172 10250T17213 10250T173 10250T174 -- E34 Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ E34JB1 E34JB2 E34JB2N8 E34JB3 E34JB4 -- Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications. Anodized aluminum head may not be suitable for some corrosive environments. Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light. Accessories . . . . . Contact Blocks . . . Dimensions . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . Discount Symbol. . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-155 & 47-187 Page 47-239 Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191 Page 47-240 Pages 47-151 & 47-184 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-221 January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices -- Illuminated Pushbutton Units Illuminated Pushbutton Units Momentary Contact Illuminated Plastic Lenses Table 47-358. Illuminated Pushbuttons -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D Lamp Type Voltage Color Contact 10250T E34 Catalog Number LED Incandescent Full Voltage Price U.S. $ LED/Lamp Number Catalog Number Bayonet Base E34EX828RD24 E34EX828GD24 E34EX828AD24 Price U.S. $ LED/Lamp Number Bayonet Base 24V AC/DC Red Green Amber 1NO-1NC 10250T828RD24 10250T828GD24 10250T828AD24 120V AC Red Green Amber 1NO-1NC 10250T828RD2A 10250T828GD2A 10250T828AD2A E34EX828RD2A E34EX828GD2A E34EX828AD2A Transformer 120V AC Red Green Amber 1NO-1NC 10250T802RD06 10250T802GD06 10250T802AD06 E34EX802RD06 E34EX802GD06 E34EX802AD06 Bayonet Base 6V AC Full Voltage 24V AC/DC Red Green Amber 1NO-1NC 10250T818RD 10250T818GD 10250T818AD #757 E34EX818RD E34EX818GD E34EX818AD #757 Resistor 120V AC/DC Red Green Amber 1NO-1NC 10250T824RD 10250T824GD 10250T824AD 120MB E34EX824RD E34EX824GD E34EX824AD 120MB Transformer 120V AC Red Green Amber 1NO-1NC 10250T802RD 10250T802GD 10250T802AD #755 E34EX802RD E34EX802GD E34EX802AD #755 6V AC To order different color lens, simply substitute the underlined character in the Catalog Number with appropriate Suffix Code from Lenses Selection Table below. Example: 10250T828YD24 Table 47-359. Lenses Selection Table 10250T Color Suffix Code Catalog Number Red Green Yellow Amber Blue Clear White R G Y A L C W 10250TC21 10250TC22 10250TC23 10250TC43 10250TC24 10250TC25 10250TC26 Price U.S. $ E34 Color Suffix Code Catalog Number Red Green Yellow Amber Blue Clear White R G Y A L C W E34V2 E34V3 E34V4 E34V9 E34V6 E34V0 E34V5 Price U.S. $ Additional Light Units . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-224 Dimensions. . . . . . . Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191 Enclosures . . . . . . . Page 47-240 Legend Plates . . . . Pages 47-151 & 47-184 Replacement Lamps/LEDs . . . . Page 47-157 Discount Symbol . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-222 January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices -- Illuminated Pushbutton Units Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units Momentary Contact Guarded Illuminated Plastic Lenses Table 47-360. Guarded Illuminated Pushbuttons -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D Lamp Type Voltage Color Contact 10250T E34 Catalog Number LED Incandescent 47 Full Voltage Price U.S. $ LED/Lamp Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Bayonet Base E34EX828RG24 E34EX828GG24 E34EX828AG24 LED/Lamp Number Bayonet Base 24V AC/DC Red Green Amber 1NO-1NC 10250T828RG24 10250T828GG24 10250T828AG24 120V AC Red Green Amber 1NO-1NC 10250T828RG2A 10250T828GG2A 10250T828AG2A E34EX828RG2A E34EX828GG2A E34EX828AG2A Transformer 120V AC Red Green Amber 1NO-1NC 10250T802RG06 10250T802GG06 10250T802AG06 E34EX802RG06 E34EX802GG06 E34EX802AG06 Full Voltage 24V AC/DC Red Green Amber 1NO-1NC 10250T818RG 10250T818GG 10250T818AG #757 E34EX818RG E34EX818GG E34EX818AG #757 Resistor 120V AC/DC Red Green Amber 1NO-1NC 10250T824RG 10250T824GG 10250T824AG 120MB E34EX824RG E34EX824GG E34EX824AG 120MB Transformer 120V AC Red Green Amber 1NO-1NC 10250T802RG 10250T802GG 10250T802AG #755 E34EX802RG E34EX802GG E34EX802AG #755 6V AC To order different color lens, simply substitute the underlined character in the Catalog Number with appropriate Suffix Code from Lenses Selection Table below. Example: 10250T828YG24 Table 47-361. Lenses Selection Table 10250T Color Suffix Code Catalog Number Red Green Yellow Amber Blue Clear White R G Y A L C W 10250TC21 10250TC22 10250TC23 10250TC43 10250TC24 10250TC25 10250TC26 Price U.S. $ E34 Color Suffix Code Catalog Number Red Green Yellow Amber Blue Clear White R G Y A L C W E34V2 E34V3 E34V4 E34V9 E34V6 E34V0 E34V5 Additional Light Units. . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . Replacement Lamps/LEDs . . . Discount Symbol. . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Price U.S. $ Page 47-224 Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191 Page 47-240 Pages 47-151 & 47-184 Page 47-157 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-223 January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices -- Indicating Light Units Indicating Light Units Standard Plastic Lens Table 47-362. Indicating Lights -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D Lamp Type Voltage Color 10250T E34 Price U.S. $ Catalog Number LED Catalog Number Price U.S. $ 24V AC/DC Red Green Amber 10250T197HLRP24 10250T197HLGP24 10250T197HLAP24 E34FB197HLRP24 E34FB197HLGP24 E34FB197HLAP24 120V AC Red Green Amber 10250T197HLRP2A 10250T197HLGP2A 10250T197HLAP2A E34FB197HLRP2A E34FB197HLGP2A E34FB197HLAP2A Transformer 120V AC Red Green Amber 10250T181HLRP06 10250T181HLGP06 10250T181HLAP06 E34TB120HLRP06 E34TB120HLGP06 E34TB120HLAP06 Full Voltage 24V AC/DC Red Green Amber 10250T206HRP 10250T206HGP 10250T206HAP E34FB24HRP E34FB24HGP E34FB24HAP #757 Resistor 120V AC/DC Red Green Amber 10250T201HRP 10250T201HGP 10250T201HAP E34RB120HRP E34RB120HGP E34RB120HAP 120MB Transformer 120V AC Red Green Amber 10250T181HRP 10250T181HGP 10250T181HAP E34HB120HRP E34HB120HGP E34HB120HAP #755 Full Voltage Incandescent LED/Lamp Number Bayonet Base To order different color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters in the Catalog Number with appropriate Suffix Code from the Lenses Selection Table below. Example: 10250T201HYP Table 47-363. Lenses Selection Table Color 10250T Plastic Plastic Glass Red Green Amber Yellow Blue Clear White 47 E34 Glass Suffix Code Catalog Number RP GP AP YP LP CP WP 10250TC1N 10250TC2N 10250TC19N 10250TC3N 10250TC4N 10250TC5N 10250TC6N Price Suffix U.S. $ Code RG GG AG -- LG CG WG Plastic Catalog Number 10250TC7N 10250TC8N 10250TC9N -- 10250TC10N 10250TC11N 10250TC12N Price U.S. $ Glass Suffix Code Catalog Number RP GP AP YP LP CP WP E34H2 E34H3 E34H9 E34H4 E34H6 E34H0 E34H5 Price Suffix U.S. $ Code RG GG AG YG LG CG WG Catalog Number Price U.S. $ E34G2 E34G3 E34G9 E34G4 E34G6 E34G0 E34G5 Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light. Additional Light Units . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . Replacement Lamps/LEDs . . . Discount Symbol . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-224 Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191 Page 47-240 Pages 47-151 & 47-184 Page 47-157 1CD1C Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-224 January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Illuminated Pushbutton and Indicating Light Components Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Table 47-364. Operators without Lens -- NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D Light Unit Type Type Voltage Illuminated Pushbutton 10250T Catalog Number Price U.S. $ 10250T Catalog Number Price U.S. $ LED/Lamp Number E34 Catalog Number Price Catalog U.S. $ Number Price U.S. $ LED (LEDs not included) Full Voltage -- 10250T397HL E34CB497HL 10250T197HL E34FB197HL Transformer AC Only 24 120 240 277 380 480 600 10250T416HL 10250T411HL 10250T412HL 10250T419HL 10250T413HL 10250T414HL 10250T415HL E34XB024HL E34XB120HL E34XB240HL E34XB277HL E34XB380HL E34XB480HL E34XB600HL -- 10250T181HL 10250T182HL 10250T198HL 10250T183HL 10250T184HL 10250T185HL -- E34TB120HL E34TB240HL E34TB277HL E34TB380HL E34TB480HL E34TB600HL Incandescent Full Voltage AC/DC 6 12 24 32 48 10250T473H 10250T474H 10250T476H 10250T477H 10250T478H E34CB06H E34CB12H E34CB24H E34CB32H E34CB48H 10250T203H 10250T204H 10250T206H 10250T207H 10250T208H E34FB06H E34FB12H E34FB24H E34FB32H E34FB48H #755 #756 #757 #1828 #1835 Resistor AC/DC 120 240 10250T471H 10250T472H E34SB120H E34SB240H 10250T201H 10250T202H E34RB120H E34RB240H 120MB 120MB Transformer AC Only 24 120 240 277 380 480 600 10250T416H 10250T411H 10250T412H 10250T419H 10250T413H 10250T414H 10250T415H E34XB024H E34XB120H E34XB240H E34XB277H E34XB380H E34XB480H E34XB600H -- 10250T181H 10250T182H 10250T198H 10250T183H 10250T184H 10250T185H -- E34TB120H E34TB240H E34TB277H E34TB380H E34TB480H E34TB600H #755 Neon AC/DC 120 240 -- -- -- -- 10250T226H 10250T227H E34NB120H E34NB240H NE51H-R-22 NE51H-4-68 47 Indicating Light E34 Bayonet Base These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color from the LED Selection Table on Page 47-230. Resister units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style. Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light. Table 47-365. Indicating Light Lens Plastic Color 10250T Catalog Number 10250T E34 Red Green Amber Yellow Blue Clear White E34 Price U.S. $ 10250TC1N 10250TC2N 10250TC19N 10250TC3N 10250TC4N 10250TC5N 10250TC6N Catalog Number Glass Color Price U.S. $ E34H2 E34H3 E34H9 E34H4 E34H6 E34H0 E34H5 10250T Catalog Number 10250T E34 Red Green Amber Yellow Blue Clear White 10250TC7N 10250TC8N 10250TC9N -- 10250TC10N 10250TC11N 10250TC12N E34 Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ E34G2 E34G3 E34G9 E34G4 E34G6 E34G0 E34G5 Table 47-366. Illuminated Pushbutton Lenses Color 10250T Catalog Number 10250T E34 Red Green Yellow Amber Blue Clear White 10250TC21 10250TC22 10250TC23 10250TC43 10250TC24 10250TC25 10250TC26 E34 Price Catalog U.S. $ Number Price U.S. $ E34V2 E34V3 E34V4 E34V9 E34V6 E34V0 E34V5 For more information visit: www.eaton.com Accessories . . . . . Contact Blocks . . . Dimensions . . . . . . Enclosures. . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . Replacement Lamps/LEDs . . . Discount Symbol. . Pages 47-155 & 47-187 Page 47-239 Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191 Page 47-240 Pages 47-151 & 47-184 Page 47-157 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-225 January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices -- Push-Pull Units Push-Pull Units Two- and Three-Position Non-illuminated Table 47-367. 2-Position Maintained Push, Maintained Pull -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D Operator Function (Position) Maintained Maintained (Pull) (Push) O X X O Red Standard Push-Pull 10250T E34 Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Contact Type Price U.S. $ E34EX714R 10250T714R Mounting Location 1 2 1NO 1NC O X 10250T715R E34EX715R X O 2NO O X 2NC X O Bolded circuit corresponds to "X-O" circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. To order different type or color buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Button and Color Selection Table below. Example: 10250T714G Table 47-368. 3-Position Maintained Push, Momentary Pull -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D Operator Function (Position) Momentary Maintained Maintained (Pull) (Intermediate) (Push) Red Standard Push-Pull 10250T E34 Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Contact Type Mounting Location 1 2 Price U.S. $ O X O O X O 10250T716R E34EX716R 1NO 1NC X X O X O O 10250T717R E34EX717R 1NC 1NC Bolded circuit corresponds to "X-O" circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. To order different type or color buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Button and Color Selection Table below. Example: 10250T716G Table 47-369. 3-Position Momentary Push, Momentary Pull -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D Operator Function (Position) Momentary Maintained Momentary (Pull) (Intermediate) (Push) Red Standard Push-Pull 10250T E34 Catalog Number Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Contact Type Mounting Location 1 2 Price U.S. $ O X O O X O 10250T718R E34EX718R 1NO 1NC X X O X O O 10250T721R E34EX721R 1NC 1NC Bolded circuit corresponds to "X-O" circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. To order different type or color buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Button and Color Selection Table below. Example: 10250T718G Table 47-370. Button and Color Selection Table Standard Color Red Red (EMER. STOP) Green Black Blue Suffix Catalog Number Code R E G B L 10250TB62 10250TB63 10250TB61 10250TB60 10250TB64 E34C2 E34C2N8 E34C3 E34C1 E34C6 Price Jumbo Mushroom Head Color U.S. $ (Anodized) Aluminum Suffix Catalog Number Code Red Red (EMER. STOP) Green Black Yellow RJ EJ GJ BJ YJ 10250TJ62 10250TJ63 10250TJ61 10250TJ60 10250TJ64 Price U.S. $ E34J2 E34J2N8 -- -- -- Accessories . . . . . . Pages 47-155 & 47-187 Dimensions. . . . . . . Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191 Enclosures . . . . . . . Page 47-240 Legend Plates . . . . Pages 47-151 & 47-184 Discount Symbol . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-226 January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices -- Illuminated Push-Pull Units Illuminated Push-Pull Units Two-Position Maintained Illuminated Table 47-371. 2-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D Operator Position Maintained Maintained -- Pull -- Push Lamp Type Voltage Red Standard Push-Pull 10250T E34 Catalog Number LED O X X O Full Voltage Transformer IncanFull Voltage descent Resistor O X 47 X O Transformer Contact Mounting Location Type 1 2 Price Catalog U.S. $ Number Price U.S. $ 24V AC/DC 10250T853RD24 E34EX853RD24 120V AC 10250T853RD2A E34EX853RD2A 24V AC 10250T843RD06 E34EX843RD06 120V AC 10250T844RD06 E34EX844RD06 24V AC/DC 10250T849RD E34EX849RD 120V AC/DC 10250T851RD E34EX851RD 24V AC 10250T843RD E34EX843RD 120V AC 10250T844RD E34EX844RD 1NO 1NC 1NO 1NC Bolded circuit corresponds to "X-O" circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. To order different type or color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the Lens and Color Selection Table below. Example: 10250T851GS Table 47-372. Lens and Color Selection Table Color 10250T E34 Suffix Catalog Code Number Color Price Suffix Catalog U.S. $ Code Number Standard Red Red (EMER. STOP) Green Blue Amber White Clear 10250T Price U.S. $ Suffix Code Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Side-Lighted (Anodized) Aluminum RD ED 10250TC47 10250TC53 RD ED E34M2 E34M2N8 GD LD AD WD CD 10250TC48 10250TC49 10250TC50 10250TC51 10250TC52 GD LD AD WD CD E34M3 E34M6 E34M9 E34M5 E34M0 Red Red (EMER. STOP) Green Blue Amber Yellow White Clear RS ES GS LS AS YS WS CS 10250TC57 10250TC63 10250TC58 10250TC59 10250TC64 10250TC60 10250TC61 10250TC62 RH GH AH 10250TC65 10250TC66 10250TC67 HD Alum. with Transparent Center Red Green Amber Standard Side-Lighted (Anodized) Aluminum HD Alum. with Transparent Center Accessories . . . . . . Additional Light Units. . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . Enclosures. . . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . . Replacement Lamps/LEDs . . . . Discount Symbol. . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-155 & 47-187 Page 47-224 Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191 Page 47-240 Pages 47-151 & 47-184 Page 47-157 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-227 January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices -- Illuminated Push-Pull Units Illuminated Push-Pull Units (Continued) Three-Position -- Maintained Push, Momentary Pull Illuminated Table 47-373. 3-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D Operator Position Lamp Momentary Maintained -- Maintained -- Pull Intermediate -- Push Type Voltage Red Standard Push-Pull 10250T E34 Catalog Number LED O X O O X O O X 10250T864RD24 E34EX864RD24 120V AC 10250T864RD2A E34EX864RD2A 24V AC 10250T854RD06 E34EX854RD06 120V AC 10250T855RD06 E34EX855RD06 24V AC/DC 10250T875RD24 E34EX875RD24 120V AC 10250T875RD2A E34EX875RD2A 24V AC 10250T865RD06 E34EX865RD06 120V AC 10250T866RD06 E34EX866RD06 Full Voltage 24V AC/DC 10250T860RD E34EX860RD Resistor 120V AC 10250T862RD E34EX862RD Transformer 24V AC 10250T854RD E34EX854RD 120V AC 10250T855RD E34EX855RD Full Voltage 24V AC/DC 10250T871RD E34EX871RD Resistor 120V AC 10250T873RD E34EX873RD Transformer 24V AC 10250T865RD E34EX865RD 120V AC 10250T866RD E34EX866RD Transformer O O Transformer Incandescent O X X X O O O X X O O O Price Catalog U.S. $ Number 24V AC/DC Full Voltage Full Voltage X X Contact Type Price U.S. $ Mounting Location 1 2 1NO 1NC 1NC 1NC 47 1NO 1NC 1NC 1NC Bolded circuit corresponds to "X-O" circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. To order different type or color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the Lens and Color Selection Table on the bottom of Page 47-226. Example: 10250T862AS Accessories . . . . . Additional Light Units . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . Replacement Lamps/LEDs . . . Discount Symbol . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-155 & 47-187 Page 47-224 Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191 Page 47-240 Pages 47-151 & 47-184 Page 47-157 1CD1C Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-228 January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices -- Illuminated Push-Pull Units Illuminated Push-Pull Units (Continued) Three-Position Momentary Illuminated Table 47-374. 3-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D Operator Position Lamp Type Voltage Momentary Maintained -- Maintained -- Pull Intermediate -- Push Red Standard Push-Pull 10250T Catalog Number LED O X O O X O O X 10250T886RD24 E34EX886RD24 120V AC 10250T886RD2A E34EX886RD2A 24V AC 10250T876RD06 E34EX876RD06 120V AC 10250T877RD06 E34EX877RD06 24V AC/DC 10250T897RD24 E34EX897RD24 120V AC 10250T897RD2A E34EX897RD2A 24V AC 10250T887RD06 E34EX887RD06 120V AC 10250T888RD06 E34EX888RD06 Full Voltage 24V AC/DC 10250T882RD E34EX882RD Resistor 120V AC 10250T884RD E34EX884RD Transformer 24V AC 10250T876RD E34EX876RD 120V AC 10250T877RD E34EX877RD Full Voltage 24V AC/DC 10250T893RD E34EX893RD Resistor 120V AC 10250T895RD E34EX895RD Transformer 24V AC 10250T887RD E34EX887RD 120V AC 10250T888RD E34EX888RD Transformer O O 47 Transformer Incandescent O X X X O O O X X O O O Price Catalog U.S. $ Number 24V AC/DC Full Voltage Full Voltage X X Contact Type E34 Price U.S. $ Mounting Location 1 2 1NO 1NC 1NC 1NC 1NO 1NC 1NC 1NC Bolded circuit corresponds to "X-O" circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. To order different type or color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the Lens and Color Selection Table on the bottom of Page 47-226. Example: 10250T884GD Accessories . . . . . Additional Light Units. . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . Replacement Lamps/LEDs . . . Discount Symbol. . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-155 & 47-187 Page 47-224 Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191 Page 47-240 Pages 47-151 & 47-184 Page 47-157 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-229 January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Push-Pull Components Push-Pull Operators An illuminated Push-Pull pushbutton unit, arranged for one-hole mounting, can replace two pushbuttons and a pilot light or the non-illuminated form can replace two pushbuttons. These units are available in three basic types: Maintained -- (Two-Position). Maintains in the pulled or pushed position until manually actuated to the opposite mode. Momentary -- (Three-Position). Spring returns to an intermediate position when pulled or pushed and released. Momentary Pull, Maintained Push -- (Three-Position). Spring returns to intermediate position when pulled. Maintains in pushed position until manually returned to intermediate (ready to reset) position. Maintained stop holds circuit open and will prevent other series connected operators from starting the system. Application Guide To assist in the selection of contact blocks, the sketch to the right shows pictorially by symbols 1 and 2 locations of contact circuits after assembly of contact blocks and adapter to the operator. The chart below shows the effect of the push and pull operations on either NO or NC contacts. (X = contact closed, O = contact open) 2-Position Maintained Push-Pull without Button on Lens Catalog Number E34GDB Locating Nib 1 2-Position Maintained Push-Pull without Button on Lens Catalog Number 10250T5 2 Figure 47-145. Locating Nibs The Operators, Buttons, Contact Blocks, etc., are offered as building block components that can be intermixed to satisfy many requirements. This minimizes the need for a varied and costly inventory. Table 47-375. Push-Pull Operator Components Type of Operator 10250T E34 Contact Block Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement Out -- Pull Intermediate In -- Push 47 Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Contact Block Mounting Location 1 2 1 2 1 2 2-Position Operator without Lens Maintained Push-Pull 10250T5 E34GDB 1NO 1NC O X 2NO 2NC O X or O X No Intermediate Position O X X X or O O X O X O 3-Position Operator without Lens Momentary Push-Pull 10250T4 E34GEB 1NO 1NC O X Maintained Push-Momentary Pull 10250T9 E34GFB 2NO 2NC O X Momentary Push-Pull 10250T10 E34GHB 1NO 1NC O X 2NO 2NC O X or or O X O O O X O O O X O O O X O O or or O X X or O O O O X X O O O X X or O O O O X O O O X O Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light. Button or Lens . . . . . . . . . . Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-230 Page 47-239 Pages 47-160 & 47-191 Page 47-240 Pages 47-151 & 47-184 1CD1C Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-230 January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Push-Pull Components Push-Pull Operators (Continued) Table 47-378. Buttons for Non-illuminated Push-Pull Devices (Continued) Push-Pull Light Units, Lens and Buttons Color 10250T Table 47-376. Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices -- NEC Class I Division 2 Groups B, C and D Light Unit Type Type Voltage Catalog Number LED (LEDs not included) Full Voltage -- 10250T97HL Transformer AC Only 50/60 Hz 24 120 208 240 277 380 480 600 10250T89HL 10250T63HL 10250T64HL 10250T65HL 10250T82HL 10250T66HL 10250T67HL 10250T68HL Incandescent Full Voltage AC or DC 6 12 24/28 32 Catalog Number Price LED/Lamp U.S. $ Number #755 #756 #757 #1828 120 240 10250T80H 10250T81H 120MB Transformer AC Only 50/60 Hz 24 120 208 240 277 380 480 600 10250T89H 10250T63H 10250T64H 10250T65H 10250T82H 10250T66H 10250T67H 10250T68H #755 Table 47-379. LED Selection Table Voltage Color Catalog Number 6V AC/DC Suitable for Use with Transformers Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED006RN E22LED006ON E22LED006YN E22LED006GN E22LED006BN E22LED006WN 12V AC/DC Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED012RN E22LED012ON E22LED012YN E22LED012GN E22LED012BN E22LED012WN 24V AC/DC Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED024RN E22LED024ON E22LED024YN E22LED024GN E22LED024BN E22LED024WN 48V AC/DC Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED048RN E22LED048ON E22LED048YN E22LED048GN E22LED048BN E22LED048WN 60V AC/DC Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED060RN E22LED060ON E22LED060YN E22LED060GN E22LED060BN E22LED060WN 120V AC Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED120RA E22LED120OA E22LED120YA E22LED120GA E22LED120BA E22LED120WA 120V DC Red Orange Yellow Green Blue White E22LED120RD E22LED120OD E22LED120YD E22LED120GD E22LED120BD E22LED120WD E34 Price Catalog U.S. $ Number Price U.S. $ Standard Red Red (EMER. STOP) Green Blue Amber White Clear 10250TC47 10250TC53 10250TC48 10250TC49 10250TC50 10250TC51 10250TC52 E34M2 E34M2N8 E34M3 E34M6 E34M9 E34M5 E34M0 Side-Lighted Anodized Aluminum Ring Red Red (EMER. STOP) Green Blue Amber Yellow White Clear 10250TC57 10250TC63 10250TC58 10250TC59 10250TC64 10250TC60 10250TC61 10250TC62 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Heavy-Duty Aluminum with Transparent Center Red Green Amber 10250TC65 10250TC66 10250TC67 -- -- -- Table 47-378. Buttons for Non-illuminated Push-Pull Devices Color 10250T Catalog Number 10250TB62 10250TB63 10250TB61 10250TB60 10250TB64 Price U.S. $ For a complete listing of all LEDs available, see Page 47-157. E34 Price Catalog U.S. $ Number Price U.S. $ Standard Red Red (EMER. STOP) Green Black Blue E34J2 E34J2N8 -- -- -- Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use with ultraviolet light applications. These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color from Table 47-379. 10250T 10250TJ62 10250TJ63 10250TJ61 10250TJ60 10250TJ64 Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light. Table 47-377. Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices 47 Red Red (EMER. STOP) Green Black Yellow 10250T69H 10250T70H 10250T79H 10250T83H Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Jumbo Mushroom Head (Anodized) Aluminum Bayonet Base Resistor AC or DC Color E34 Price Catalog U.S. $ Number E34C2 E34C2N8 E34C3 E34C1 E34C6 For more information visit: www.eaton.com Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 & 47-187 Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-239 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 & 47-191 Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-240 Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 & 47-184 Replacement Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-157 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-231 January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices -- Selector Switch Units Selector Switch Units Two- and Three-Position Non-illuminated Table 47-380. 2-Position Selector Switch -- Non-illuminated -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D Operator Position Operator Action Black Knob -- Selector Switch 10250T Catalog Number M X O X O X O M O X O X O X M S M M M S Contact Type E34 Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Mounting Location 1 2 E34EX722BK 10250T722BK 10250T724BK E34EX724BK 10250T723BK E34EX723BK 10250T725BK E34EX725BK Cam Code 1 1NC 1NO 1 1NC 1NO 1NC 1NO Bolded circuit corresponds to "X-O" circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). To order different type or color selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the table on Page 47-232. Example: 10250T722LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with T_ (cam)+_ (key removal position). Example: 10250T722T13 Table 47-381. 3-Position Selector Switch -- Non-illuminated -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D Operator Position Operator Action Black Knob -- Selector Switch 10250T Catalog Number M M O O O X S M M M M M 10250T730BK E34EX730BK 10250T732BK E34EX732BK 10250T727BK E34EX727BK 10250T729BK E34EX729BK 10250T731BK E34EX731BK 10250T733BK E34EX733BK S M E34EX728BK M S 10250T728BK 2 3 1NO 1NO 3 M S M E34EX726BK 1 S M O O X 10250T726BK Price U.S. $ Cam Code S M O X O Catalog Number M S X O O Price U.S. $ Mounting Location M M X O Contact Type E34 1NO 1NC-1NC (Series) 1NO S Bolded circuit corresponds to "X-O" circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). To order different type or color selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the Switch and Color Selection Table on Page 47-232. Example: 10250T726LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with T_ (cam)+_ (key removal position). Example: 10250T726T13 Accessories . . . . . Additional Circuit Arrangements . Dimensions. . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . Discount Symbol . CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-155 & 47-187 Pages 47-233 - 47-234 Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191 Page 47-240 Pages 47-151 & 47-184 1CD1C 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-232 January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices -- Selector Switch Units Selector Switch Units (Continued) Four-Position Maintained Non-illuminated Table 47-382. 4-Position Selector Switch -- Non-illuminated -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D Operator Position Operator Action Black Knob -- Selector Switch 10250T Catalog Number X O O O O X O O O O X O O O O X Price U.S. $ Catalog Number E34EX743BK 10250T743BK M M M M Contact Type E34 Price U.S. $ Mounting Location 1 Cam Code 2 1NC 1NO 1NO 1NC 7 Bolded circuit corresponds to "X-O" circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. M = Maintained. To order different type or color selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the Switch and Color Selection Table below. Example: 10250T743LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with T_ (cam) + _ (key removal position). Example: 10250T743T77 Table 47-383. Switch and Color Selection Table Color Knob Suffix Code 47 Black Red Green Yellow White Gray Blue Orange Adder U.S. $ BK RK GK YK WK AK LK NK Suffix Code Adder U.S. $ BL RL GL YL WL AL LL NL Suffix Code Coin Slot Adder U.S. $ BA RA GA YA WA AA LA NA Suffix Code Adder U.S. $ BC RC GC YC WC AC LC NC Designed for added ingress protection. For use in maintained operators only. 10250T only. Table 47-384. Key Operated Selection Table Number of Position Operator Action Suffix and Removal Positions 2 M M MS T1 + 1, 2, 3 T1 + 2 3 M M M SM M SMS M MS T3 + 1 - 7 T3 + 1, 4, 5 T3 + 4 T3 + 2, 4, 6 4 MMMM T7 + 7 Lever Lever Table 47-385. Key Removal Positions Code Suffix 1 2 3 4 Key Removal Positions Code Suffix Right Only Left Only Right & Left Center Only 5 6 7 Key Removal Positions C L R Right & Center Left & Center All Positions Figure 47-146. Key Removal Positions Note: Key removal in "spring return from" positions not recommended. M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). Accessories . . . . . Additional Circuit Arrangements . Dimensions . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . Legend Plates. . . . Discount Symbol. . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pages 47-155 & 47-187 Pages 47-233 - 47-234 Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191 Page 47-240 Pages 47-151 & 47-184 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-233 January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Selector Switch Selection Table 47-386. Example Selection Table Systematic Approach Application: HAND-OFF-AUTO Selector Switch. In this circuit, one incoming line is distributed to two other outgoing circuits by the switch. The two circuits can be looked at individually. 10250T E34 Step 1: Elementary Diagram. Construct on paper, or in your mind, a simple elementary diagram of the switching scheme as follows: Selector Switch Selection Cam and Contact Block Selection Selector switches in their varied forms (2-position, 3-position, and 4-position) are a big factor contributing to the great flexibility of control that a well rounded line of "pushbuttons" can achieve. Because of their flexibility, they tend to cause difficulty with product selection and application. The following systematic approach should simplify that task. Cam and contact block selection is better understood if you: HAND Incoming Line Outgoing Circuit Locating Nib CA08102001E 4 Cam Code #3 Contact Blocks & Mounting Location Contact Blocks & Mounting Location 1 2 1 NO NC NO 2 X O O O O X AUTO Outgoing Circuit Step 2: "X-O" Pattern. From the elementary diagram, you can construct an "X-O" diagram which describes when the contacts are to be closed (X) or open (O) in the various positions of the switch. The "X-O" for the HAND circuit looks like this: NO NO Wired in series. Now to make the cam selection, make a simple worksheet such as below. (1) or (2) = mounting location from chart above: XOO OOX Cam 2 (1)NO - (2)NC (2)NC Cam 3 (1)NO (2)NO HAND OFF AUTO Work with each incoming and outgoing wire/circuit separately. Recognize the terms NO and NC only identify the type of contact by its mode before mounting to the operator. The "X-O" table (Page 47234) shows how that contact will act after assembly to the operator with the selected cam shape. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. One NO-NC contact block may be mounted behind each plunger of the mounting adapter for a total of four circuits. Each cam has two separate lobes, each of which operates one of the two contact block plungers independently of each other. Those are identified as position 1 (locating nib side) and position 2 (opposite of locating nib). The position designations give direction in selecting and mounting of the contact blocks (see Figure 47-147). Figure 47-147. Contact Circuit Locations 1 Cam Code #2 OFF 1 No. Desired Circuit & Operator Position 2 X O O In this circuit, you want a contact closed on the left (HAND) but open in the center and right. For the AUTO circuit, the "X-O" diagram would look like this: HAND OFF AUTO O O X Putting them together, the complete "X-O" diagram is: XOO OOX Once the "X-O" diagram has been generated, the next step is to select the cam and contact block, or blocks, needed to perform the desired "X-O" functions. The selection table on the following page lists the various types (shapes) of cams by number to choose from and the type of contact and position to achieve the function outlined in your "X-O" diagram. Step 3: Cam Selection. The cam you select determines the operation of all contact blocks mounted to the operator. It is selected on the basis that it provides the simplest circuitry for the desired "X-O" diagram. The selection tables of the following page show all the "X-O" combinations. For the purpose of this example, the applicable portion of those tables is shown in Table 47-386. For more information visit: www.eaton.com It becomes obvious that cam 3 is the better choice because the series connection can be avoided, making it simpler to wire. Step 4: Contact Block Selection. Having selected the cam, contact block selection is simply a matter of determining if you require one NO-NC contact block (Cat. No 10250T1H) or two. Given the limitations of the factory sealed contact block and the desired "X-O" application, you may have circuits that will not be needed -- as seen here with the two additional NC circuits. (1) or (2) = mounting location from chart above. Qty 2 Catalog No. 10250TIH Cam 3 (1)NO (2)NC (1)NC (2)NO Step 5: Selector Switch Operator. Lastly, you have to choose from the many types of operators -- knob and lever in various colors or keyed. Also what combinations of maintained and spring return functions are required. Selection of these operators can be found on Page 47-235. For the above example you may want a 3-position maintained black knob, cam 3 -- Catalog Number 10250T1323 (or 34VHBK1). The Complete Switch: 10250T1323 (or 34VHBK1) with two 10250T1H or for one composite catalog number -- 10250T726BK (or E34EX726BK) found on Page 47-231. 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-234 January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Selector Switch Selection Selector Switch Selection (Continued) Circuits shown illustrate connections to obtain a selector circuit combination and are shown with their appropriate line diagrams in BOLD. Field wiring of jumper connections required as shown. Table 47-389. 4-Position Selector Switch Number Desired Circuit and Operator Position Cam Code #7 Contact Blocks and Mounting Location X = Closed Circuit, O = Open Circuit 1 2 Table 47-387. 2-Position Selector Switch Number Desired Circuit and Operator Position Cam Code #1 1 X O O O Contact Blocks and Mounting Location 1 1 X 2 or O NC 2 O X O O NO NC 2 O NC 3 or X NO Desired Circuit and Operator Position O X O NO NO Table 47-388. 3-Position Selector Switch No. O 4 Cam Code #2 Cam Code #3 Contact Blocks and Mounting Location Contact Blocks and Mounting Location 1 1 O O O X NC 2 2 5 X O O X NC (Parallel) NC 1 X O O NO (Series) NC 6 NO O X X O 47 NO (Parallel) NO 2 X X O NC NC 7 O O X X NO (Parallel) NC 3 X O X NO (Parallel) NO NO 8 X X O O NC (Parallel) NO 4 O O X NO NO 9 O X O X NO/NC (Parallel) 5 O X X NC (Parallel) NO NC 10 X O X O NO/NC (Parallel) 6 O X O NC NC (Series) NC For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-235 January 2010 10250T Series, Selector Switch Components Selector Switch Operators Table 47-392. Key Removal Positions 10250T Selector Switch Operators with Caps Code Suffix Key Removal Positions Code Suffix Key Removal Positions 1 2 3 4 Right Only Left Only Right & Left Center Only 5 6 7 Right & Center Left & Center All Positions Table 47-390. 10250T Selector Switch Operators with Caps -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Positions Operator Action Black Knob Selector Switch -- Vertical Mounting Black Lever Selector Switch -- Vertical Mounting Note: Key removal in "spring return from" positions not recommended. C 2-Position -- 60 Throw Cam Code Catalog Number 1 10250T1311 1 10250T3011 1 10250T1371 1 10250T3071 M 2 3 10250T1322 10250T1323 2 3 10250T3022 10250T3023 Replacement Keys or Dissimilar Locks for Above Key Operators M 2 3 10250T1332 10250T1333 2 3 10250T3032 10250T3033 S 2 3 10250T1342 10250T1343 2 3 10250T3042 10250T3043 Listed operators have identical locks and keys (Key Code H661) Catalog Number 10250ED824. S 2 3 10250T1352 10250T1353 2 3 10250T3052 10250T3053 7 10250T1367 7 10250T3067 M M M S M 3-Position -- 60 Throw M M S M S M M 4-Position -- 40 Throw M M Catalog Number Price U.S. $ L M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages 47-233 - 47-234. Field convertible to Horizontal Mounting or order operator only and separate operator cap. R Figure 47-148. Key Removal Positions Table 47-393. Replacement Keys Description Catalog Number Replacement Keys (Code H661) 10250ED824 M M Price Cam U.S. $ Code Price U.S. $ Table 47-391. 10250T Key Operators with Cam -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Positions 2-Position -- 60 Throw 3-Position -- 60 Throw Operator Action 10250T1511_ 10250T1611_ 1 2 10250T1571_ 10250T1581_ 2 3 1-7 M 10250T1522_ 10250T1523_ 10250T1622_ 10250T1623_ 2 3 1, 4, 5 M 10250T1532_ 10250T1533_ 10250T1632_ 10250T1633_ 2 3 4 S 10250T1542_ 10250T1543_ 10250T1642_ 10250T1643_ 2 3 2, 4, 6 S 10250T1652_ 10250T1653_ 10250T1662_ 10250T1663_ 7 7 10250T1677_ 10250T1687_ M S M M S M S M M 4-Position -- 40 Throw M M Catalog Number 1, 2, 3 M M Catalog Number 1 M M M M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages 47-233 - 47-234. Choose key removal position required for application from Table 47-392. Add key removal Code No. to listed Catalog Number. Example: 10250T15112. CA08102001E 47 Cam Optional Vertical Mounting Horizontal Mounting Price Code Key Removal U.S. $ Positions For more information visit: www.eaton.com Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . Page 47-239 Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Page 47-240 Pages 47-151 - 47-152 1CD1C Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-236 January 2010 E34 Series, Selector Switch Components Selector Switch Operators (Continued) Table 47-395. E34 Key Operators with Cam and Cap -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Table 47-394. E34 Selector Switch Operators with Knob Assembled -- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Positions Operator Action Black Knob Selector Switch -- Vertical Mounting Cam Code 2-Position -- 60 Throw M M M M M M M M 47 E34KFHB_ 1 2 E34KEB_ E34KEHB_ 2 3 1-7 M E34KGB_ E34KHB_ E34KGHB_ E34KHHB_ 2 3 1, 4, 5 M E34KJB_ E34KKB_ E34KJHB_ E34KKHB_ 2 3 4 S E34KLB_ E34KLHB_ E34KMB_ E34KMHB_ 2 3 2, 4, 6 S E34KNB_ E34KPB_ E34KNHB_ E34KPHB_ 7 7 E34KTB_ E34KTHB_ S M E34VEBK1 S 2 3 E34VGBK1 E34VHBK1 S M M M 2 3 M M E34VJBK1 E34VKBK1 S 2 3 E34VNBK1 E34VPBK1 7 E34VTBK1 M E34KFB_ M 1 2 3 M M 3-Position -- 60 Throw 4-Position -- 40 Throw E34VLBK1 E34VMBK1 M M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages 47-233 - 47-234. Field convertible to Horizontal Mounting. For other colors of either knob or lever, replace the underlined characters of the Catalog Number with the appropriate Suffix Code from Alternate Knob and Lever Table below. Example: E34VFBL2 M Catalog Number 1, 2, 3 M E34VFBK1 Catalog Number 1 M 1 S M S 2-Position -- 60 Throw S S 4-Position -- 40 Throw Price U.S. $ M M 3-Position -- 60 Throw Catalog Number Positions Operator Cam Key Vertical Horizontal Action Code Removal Mounting Mounting Positions M Price U.S. $ M M M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages 47-233 - 47-234. Choose key removal position required for application from Table 47-396. Add key removal Code No. to listed Catalog Number. Example: E34KFB2 Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Page 47-235. Table 47-396. Key Removal Positions Code Suffix Key Removal Positions Code Suffix Key Removal Positions 1 2 3 4 Right Only Left Only Right & Left Center Only 5 6 7 Right & Center Left & Center All Positions Note: Key removal in "spring return from" positions not recommended. C L R Figure 47-149. Key Removal Positions Table 47-397. Alternate Knobs and Levers for Operators Above Color Knob Suffix Code Lever Catalog Number Black K1 E34K1 Red K2 E34K2 Green K3 E34K3 Yellow K4 E34K4 White K5 E34K5 Blue K6 E34K6 Gray K7 E34K7 Orange K8 E34K8 For use on maintained operators only. Price U.S. $ Lever Designed for Added Ingress Protection Suffix Code Catalog Number L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 E34L1 E34L2 E34L3 E34L4 E34L5 E34L6 E34L7 E34L8 Price U.S. $ Suffix Code Catalog Number A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 E34A1 E34A2 E34A3 E34A4 E34A5 E34A6 E34A7 E34A8 Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Price U.S. $ Page 47-239 Page 47-191 Page 47-240 Page 47-184 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-237 January 2010 10250T Series, Selector Switch Components Illuminated Selector Switch Operators 2-Position Maintained 120V AC Transformer Selector Switch, Cam Code 1 Catalog Number 10250T5971 Table 47-398. 10250T Illuminated Selector Switch Operator Only without Knob or Lever Operator Action Positions 2-Position - 60 Throw M M 3-Position - 60 Throw M M M M M S M S M M S S 4-Position - 40 Throw M M M M Transformer Type -- 50/60 Hz Full Voltage Type -- AC or DC 6 Volt #755 Lamp Lamps: 6V -- #755, 12V -- #756, 24V -- #757, 48V -- #1835, 120/240V -- 120MB Voltage Cam Code Catalog and Code Number 24 120 208 240 380 480 600 1 24 120 208 240 380 480 600 Price U.S. $ Voltage Cam Code Catalog and Code Number 10250T5961H 10250T5971H 10250T6511H 10250T5981H 10250T5991H 10250T6001H 10250T6011H 6 12 24 48 120 240 1 10250T6201H 10250T6211H 10250T6221H 10250T6231H 10250T6361H 10250T6371H + 2 or 3 10250T602_H 10250T603_H 10250T652_H 10250T604_H 10250T605_H 10250T606_H 10250T607_H 6 12 24 48 120 240 + 2 or 3 10250T624_H 10250T625_H 10250T626_H 10250T627_H 10250T638_H 10250T639_H 120 240 + 2 or 3 10250T620_H 10250T656_H 120 + 2 or 3 10250T622_H 120 240 + 2 or 3 10250T621_H 10250T662_H 120 + 2 or 3 10250T623_H 24 120 208 240 380 480 600 + 2 or 3 10250T614_H 10250T615_H 10250T653_H 10250T616_H 10250T617_H 10250T618_H 10250T619_H 6 12 24 48 120 240 + 2 or 3 10250T628_H 10250T629_H 10250T630_H 10250T631_H 10250T640_H 10250T641_H 24 120 208 240 380 480 600 7 10250T6087H 10250T6097H 10250T6547H 10250T6107H 10250T6117H 10250T6127H 10250T6137H 6 12 24 48 120 240 7 10250T6327H 10250T6337H 10250T6347H 10250T6357H 10250T6427H 10250T6437H Price U.S. $ M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (). Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws. For selection of the proper cam and contact block, to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection table on Page 47-234. Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page 47-157. Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density. Table 47-399. Knobs, Levers Color Catalog and Code Number Red Green Yellow Blue Clear White Amber Knob Lever 10250TER 10250TEG 10250TEA 10250TEL 10250TEC 10250TEW 10250TEM 10250TFR 10250TFG 10250TFA 10250TFL 10250TFC 10250TFW 10250TFM Price U.S. $ Amber, Clear and White lenses have a black arrow (pointer), Red, Green and Blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer). CA08102001E Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-239 Pages 47-160 - 47-162 Page 47-240 Pages 47-151 - 47-152 1CD1C 47 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-238 January 2010 E34 Series, Selector Switch Components Illuminated Selector Switch Operators (Continued) 2-Position Maintained 120V AC Transformer Selector Switch, Cam 1 Catalog Number E34VFB120 Table 47-400. E34 Illuminated Selector Switch Operator Only without Knob or Lever Positions Operator Action Transformer Type -- 50/60 Hz Full Voltage Type -- AC or DC 6 Volt #755 Lamp Lamps -- #755, #757, #1835, 120MB Catalog Number 2-Position -- 60 Throw M 3-Position -- 60 Throw M M M M M M S S 47 Cam Code 1 E34VFB_H E34SFB_H Cam Code 2 Cam Code 3 Cam Code 2 Cam Code 3 E34VGB_H E34VHB_H E34SGB_H E34SHB_H E34VNB_H E34VPB_H E34SNB_H E34SPB_H E34VJB_H E34VKB_H E34SJB_H E34SKB_H E34VLB_H E34VMB_H E34SLB_H E34SMB_H E34VRB_H -- E34SRB_H -- S M M Cam Code 1 Price U.S. $ M M Catalog Number S M 4-Position -- 40 Throw Price U.S. $ M M Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws. For selection of the proper cam and contact block required to obtain a specific circuit sequence, see selection table on Page 47-234. Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page 47-157. 120MB lamps are used on both 120V and 240V operators. Replace underscore with proper voltage Suffix Code from Light Unit Voltage Suffix Table below. Example: 3-position maintained with 120V transformer type light unit: E34VGB120H 120 and 240V transformer only. 120 full voltage only. Table 47-401. Light Unit Voltage Suffix -- Add to operator Catalog Number listed in table above. Table 47-402. Knobs, Levers Color Type of Light Unit Transformer Type 50/60 Hz Full Voltage Type AC or DC Voltage Suffix Code Voltage Suffix Code 24 120 208 240 380 024 120 208 240 380 6 12 24 48 120 06 12 24 48 120 480 600 480 600 240 240 Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page 47-157. Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density. Red Green Yellow Blue Clear White Amber Catalog Number and Code Number Price U.S. $ Knob Lever 10250TER 10250TEG 10250TEA 10250TEL 10250TEC 10250TEW 10250TEM 10250TFR 10250TFG 10250TFA 10250TFL 10250TFC 10250TFW 10250TFM Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (pointer). Red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer). Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Page 47-237. Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For more information visit: www.eaton.com Page 47-239 Page 47-191 Page 47-240 Page 47-184 1CD1C CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-239 January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Contact Blocks and Mounting Adapters Contact Block Catalog Number 10250T1H Mounting Adapter Catalog Number 10250TD2 Options Contact Blocks and Mounting Adapters Table 47-403. Contact Block -- NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D Units Description Catalog Number 1NO-1NC Class I Div. 2 Factory Sealed Contact Block 10250T1H Description Catalog Number Mounting Adapter for Pushbuttons 10250TD2 Mounting Adapter for Selector Switches 10250TD3 Price U.S. $ Table 47-404. Mounting Adapter Units Price U.S. $ Table 47-405. Mounting Adapters with Contact Block(s) -- Overpacked -- NEC Class I Division 2 Groups B, C and D Units Description Catalog Number Pushbutton Adapter with 1NO-1NC 10250TD21H Pushbutton Adapter with 2 (1NO-1NC) 10250TD21H1H Selector Switch Adapter with 1NO-1NC 10250TD31H Selector Switch Adapter with 2 (1NO-1NC) 10250TD31H1H Price U.S. $ 47 Approximate Dimensions Dimensions in Inches (mm). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. 1.88 (47.8) 1.85 (47.0) 1.70 (43.2) 1.43 (36.3) 1.86 (47.2) 1.02 (25.9) 0.25 (6.4) 2.57 (65.3) 1.72 (43.7) 0.84 (21.3) Figure 47-150. Contact Block 0.44 (11.2) 1.23 (31.2) Figure 47-151. Mounting Adapter Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-217 Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-240 January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Enclosures Enclosures Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures Table 47-406. Enclosures (Case and Cover) -- Surface Mounting Number of Elements 10250T E34 Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Catalog Number Price U.S. $ Cast Enclosure -- Deep Cover -- In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13 Die Cast Enclosure Catalog Number 10250TN11 1 2 3 4 10250TN11 10250TN12 10250TN13 10250TN14 E34N11 E34N12 E34N13 E34N14 Polyester -- In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12 Polyester Enclosure Catalog Number E34N52 1 2 3 4 -- -- -- -- E34N51 E34N52 E34N53 E34N54 Stainless Steel -- In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12 Stainless Steel Enclosure Catalog Number 10250TN35 1 2 3 4 -- -- -- -- 10250TN33 10250TN34 10250TN35 10250TN36 For spacing increments, see Page 47-154. 14 gauge, type 304. Table 47-407. Approximate Dimensions Number of Elements Element Arrangement Surface Mounting Conduit Entrance Dimensions in Inches (mm) Wide A High B Deep C Mounting D E Cast 47 1 2 3 4 Approximate Dimensions In-Line In-Line In-Line In-Line 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 3.88 (98.6) 4.0 (101.6) 5.88 (149.4) 7.75 (196.9) 9.63 (244.6) 3.0 (76.3) 3.0 (76.3) 3.0 (76.3) 3.0 (76.3) 2.69 (68.3) 2.69 (68.3) 2.69 (68.3) 2.69 (68.3) 3.25 (82.6) 5.13 (130.3) 7.0 (177.8) 8.88 (225.6) 3/4 3/4 1 1 In-Line In-Line In-Line In-Line 3.81 (96.8) 3.81 (96.8) 3.81 (96.8) 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 6.63 (168.4) 8.88 (225.6) 11.13 (282.7) 3.38 (85.9) 3.38 (85.9) 3.38 (85.9) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 2.94 (74.7) 2.94 (74.7) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0) 4.88 (124.0) 7.13 (181.1) 9.38 (238.3) 3.00 (76.2) 3.50 (88.9) 3.50 (88.9) 3.50 (88.9) 3.50 (88.9) 6.75 (171.5) 9.00 (228.6) 11.25 (285.8) 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 4.25 (108.0) 7.50 (190.5) 9.00 (228.6) 12.00 (304.8) 4 Mtg. Holes -- 10-32 Screw Size for 1 - 4 Element Die Cast/ Stainless Steel Enclosure 7/32 Screw Size for Polyester Polyester 1 2 3 4 E B Stainless Steel 1 2 3 4 In-Line In-Line In-Line In-Line D A C Surface No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required. Application Notes: 2. Polyester enclosures must be used when mounting illuminated operators. Top - For Vertical Mounting 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 Top - For Horizontal Mounting 1. Operators need to be mounted in their horizontal orientation for all enclosures. For die cast enclosures remove locating nib on operators and use thrust washer (Catalog Number 10250TK3). Figure 47-152. Enclosure Layouts Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 47-241 January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Mounting Options Mounting and Assembly Panel Thickness Table 47-408. Mounting Matrix Minimum: 0.06 inch (1.6 mm) Maximum: 0.25 inch (8 mm) including legend plate Maximum can be increased to 0.375" (15.9 mm) using optional retaining nut Indicating Light: 10250TA30/E34TA30 Pushbutton/Selector Switch: 10250TA31/E34TA31 Notch for Locating Nib Legend Plate Dimensions in Inches (mm) A B C D Small 2.87 (72.6) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.87 (72.6) Jumbo 2.87 (72.6) 2.32 (58.6) 2.32 (58.6) 2.87 (72.6) Extra Large 2.87 (72.6) 2.56 (65.2) 2.52 (64.1) 2.87 (72.6) Terminals for Light Unit "B" Min. o.14 (o3.4) Terminals for Light Unit "D" Min. .19 (5.0) .60 (15.2) "C" Min. "A" Min. .67 (17.0) Notch for Locating Nib o1.2 (o30.5) o1.2 (o30.5) NOTE: Suitable for Use in This Alternate Mounting Hole. Drilling for One Hole Mounting and Dimensions for Minimum Spacing in Horizontal Rows. Drilling for One Hole Mounting and Dimensions for Minimum Spacing in Vertical Rows. Figure 47-153. Panel Spacing and Drilling Drawings Illuminated Pushbutton Lens Washer 47 Nameplate Thrust Washer (Optional) Operator Operator Gasket E34 Earth Terminal Contact Block Mounting Adapter RATINGS ARE STAMPED ON LIGHT UNIT AND CONTACT BLOCK Lamp Indicator Light Push/Pull Retaining Nut 5 lb-ft (6.8 Nm) Panel 0.06" - 0.25" (1.6 - 8 mm) with Optional Retaining Nut Up to 0.375" (15.9 mm) Light Unit Terminal Clamp: One or Two Copper Conductors 22 - 12 AWG (0.34 - 4.0 mm2) 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm) Figure 47-154. Operator Assembly CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com Contact Block Terminal Clamp: Single Copper Conductor 18 - 14 AWG (0.75 - 2.5 mm2) 9 lb-in (1.0 Nm) 47-242 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations January 2010 10250T/E34 Series, Catalog Number Structure Catalog Number Structure 2 1 Gasket Operator Legend Plate Mounting Nut Contact Blocks Locating Nib Adapter 10250T/E34 Series Table 47-409. Non-illuminated Assembled Operators -- Class I Division 2 Catalog Numbering System 10250T 718 E J Operator Type ACC/SS Type 10250T = Heavy-Duty Oiltight E34EX = Corrosion Resistant Oiltight Blank = J= B= G= K= L= A= C= Operator and Contact Block 47 706 = 707 = 708 = 709 = 710 = 711 = 712 = 713 = 714 = 715 = 716 = 717 = 718 = 721 = 722 = 723 = 724 = 725 = 726 = 727 = 728 = 729 = 730 = 731 = 732 = 733 = 743 = Flush 1NO-1NC Flush 2NO-2NC Extended 1NO-1NC Extended 2NO-2NC Mushroom 1NO-1NC Mushroom 2NO-2NC JMB Mushroom 1NO-1NC JMB Mushroom 2NO-2NC 2P MT Push-Pull 1NO-1NC 2P MT Push-Pull 2NO-2NC 3P MT Push-Mom Pull 1NO-1NC 3P MT Push-Mom Pull 2NO-2NC 3P Mom Push-Pull 1NO-1NC 3P Mom Push-Pull 2NO-2NC 2P SS MT XO,OX-CAM1 2P SS MT XO,OX,XO,OX-CAM1 2P SS SPR-R XO,OX-CAM1 2P SS SPR-R XO,OX,XO,OX-CAM1 3P SS MT XOO,OOX-CAM3 3P SS MT XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3 3P SS SPR-L XOO,OOX-CAM3 3P SS SPR-L XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3 3P SS SPR-L&R XOO,OOX-CAM3 3P SS SPR-L&R XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3 3P SS SPR-R XOO,OOX-CAM3 3P SS SPR-R XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3 4P SS MT XOOO,OXOO,OOXO,OOOX-CAM7 __ __ None JMB Push-Pull Booted-FL/EXT Guarded-FL Knob-SS Lever-SS Lever W/IP-SS Coin-SS Keyed-SS Cam 1 2 3 7 Key Removal 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= RT Only LT Only RT & LT CT Only RT & CT LT & CT All Button Color B= R= G= Y= W= L= N= E= T= For more information visit: www.eaton.com Black Red Green Yellow White Blue Orange Red EMERG STOP Keyed-SS CA08102001E Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Ratings 47-243 January 2010 NEC 500 - 505, Class I Division 2 Summary of NEC Article 500 The NEC Article 500 explains in great detail the requirements for the installation of wiring and electrical equipment in hazardous locations. The purpose of this summary is for general reference only, the National Electric Code along with other applicable authorities having jurisdiction over the site should be the installer's guidelines when wiring or installing electrical equipment in any hazardous or potentially hazardous location. Summary of Classifications -- NEC 500 - 503 Class Division I. 1. Hazard may exist -- A. Acetylene May exist in atmosphere B. Hydrogen and manufactured gases containing under normal operating 30% hydrogen by volume (e.g. butadiene, conditions ethylene oxide, propylene oxide) Gas C. Petrochemicals (e.g. carbon monoxide, ether, ethylene, hydrogen sulfide, morpholine, cyclopropane) D. Petrochemicals (e.g. gasoline, benzene, butane, propane, acetone, ammonia, vinyl chloride) 2. Potential hazard -- A. Acetylene May be present in B. Hydrogen and manufactured gases containing atmosphere only under 30% hydrogen by volume (e.g. butadiene, abnormal circumstances ethylene oxide, propylene oxide) OR location adjacent C. Petrochemicals (e.g. carbon monoxide, ether, to Class I, Division 1 ethylene, hydrogen sulfide, morpholine, location cyclopropane) Class I, Division 2 Definition Class I, Division 2 covers hazardous locations where flammable gases, vapors or volatile liquids are handled either in a closed system, or confined within suitable enclosures, or where hazardous concentrations are normally prevented by positive mechanical ventilation. Areas adjacent to Division 1 locations, into which gases might occasionally flow, would also belong to Division 2 (NEC (500-5[b])). D. Petrochemicals (e.g. gasoline, benzene, butane, propane, acetone, ammonia, vinyl chloride) II. Dust Summary of NEC Article 505 The NEC also classifies hazardous locations for flammable gases and vapors into zones under NEC 505. This system is more in line with the European Standards, CENELEC and IEC, with the major difference being that NEC 505 only classifies gases and vapors while CENELEC and IEC also include dusts. 1. Hazard may exist -- E. Conductive and combustible dust (resistivity May exist in atmosphere <105 ohm/cm) (metal dusts) under normal operating F. Carbonaceous dusts (resistivity >102 ohms/cm conditions but 108 ohms/cm) (e.g. carbon black, coke dust, coal) G. Non-conductive combustible dust (resistivity 105 ohms/cm) (e.g. grain dust, flour, starch, sugar, plastics) 2. Potential hazard -- F. May be present in atmosphere only under abnormal circumstances G. Hazardous Location Any area where there is the possibility of explosion and fire resulting from the presence of flammable vapors, liquids or gas, or combustible dust or fibers. III. Fibers Carbonaceous dusts (resistivity >102 ohms/cm but 108 ohms/cm) (e.g. carbon black, coke dust, coal) Non-conductive combustible dust (resistivity 105 ohms/cm) (e.g. grain dust, flour, starch, sugar, plastics) 1. Production areas Easily ignitable fibers or flyings 2. Handling and storage areas Easily ignitable fibers or flyings Note: For additional information on grouping of compounds, see NFPA 497M-1991 and NFPA 325-1994. Summary of Classifications -- NEC 505 Class Zone I. 0. Continuously present or IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard present for long periods IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard of time IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline, methane, propane or equivalent hazard Gas Group 1. Likely to exist under IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard normal operating or IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard maintenance conditions IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline, or adjacent to Zone 0 methane, propane or equivalent hazard 2. Not likely to occur in normal operation and if they do occur will only exist for short period or adjacent to Zone 1 CA08102001E Group For more information visit: www.eaton.com IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline, methane, propane or equivalent hazard 47 47-244 Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights Ratings January 2010 Class I Division 2 Summary of Basic Methods Available for Class I, Division 2 Locations Method Features Configuration Advantages Factory Sealed Contact Block Closed-ended labyrinth contact block with an incendive circuit incapable of external ignition * Higher continuous carrying amperages -- * May not be suitable for logic level up to 10A circuits * Direct drive contacts -- contacts can be forced open * Suitable for use in all enclosures * Best suited for motor control applications Hermetically Sealed Block Reed switch sealed against an external atmosphere * Suitable for low energy level circuits * Suitable for use in all enclosures Explosion Proof Enclosures (Class I, Division 1 and 2) Enclosures capable of with* Higher level of protection than required standing an internal explosion for Class I Division 2 while preventing external ignition. Enclosures designed for Class I, Div. 1 can safely be used in Class I, Div. 2 Internal Ignition Disadvantages Cooled Escaping Gas * Lower continuous carrying amperages are not suitable for motor control applications (typically 3A to 5A rated) * Contacts cannot be forced open * Permanent magnet attracts metallic dust and filings that can reduce the electrical creepage distance between live terminals * Higher material and installation costs * Conduit sealing is still required * Time consuming maintenance Hermetically sealed reed does not allow external atmosphere to enter switching chamber. 47 Depression of plunger rotates magnet and either opens/closes contacts. Contacts can not be forced apart if subject to arch/fault current, because no mechanical connection exists. Direct Drive Contacts * Contacts can be mechanically forced apart if subject to an arch/fault current. Figure 47-155. Factory Sealed Contact Blocks Figure 47-156. Hermetically Sealed Reed Contact Block Threaded Joint Cooled Escaping Gas Flat Joint Internal Ignition Internal Ignition Cooled Escaping Gas Figure 47-157. Explosion Proof Enclosure For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E